Configuring RFC 2544 - CISCO

Cisco ME 1200 Series Carrier Ethernet Access Devices Controller
Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS 15.6(1)SN and Later Releases

First Published: April 01, 2014
Last Modified: February 05, 2016
Americas Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 527-0883
2016
Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
CONTENTS
Preface
Preface xix
Audience xix
Document Conventions xix
Related Documentation xxi
CHAPTER 1
Configuration Management 1
Prerequisites for Managing Configurations 1
Restrictions for Managing Configurations 1
Information About Configuration Management 1
Getting Started 3
Step 1Adding the Cisco ME 1200 NID to the Controller 3
Step 2Verifying the Cisco ME 1200 NID Addition onto the Controller 4
Step 3Creating VLAN on the Controller 5
Step 4Creating Layer 2 VLANs on the NID 6
Step 5Creating Layer 2 VLANs on the Controller 7
Step 6Modifying Switchport Mode as Trunk 8
(Optional Step) Configuring Native VLAN 9
Step 7Creating Layer 3 VLANs on the NID 11
Step 8Creating Layer 3 VLANs on the Controller 13
Step 9Configuring IP Route 13
Step 10Creating Startup-config.xml File 15
How to Manage Configurations 17
Listing Configurations 17
Verifying Configuration Version 18
Copying Configuration 20
Deleting Configuration 22
Reloading the System 23
Cisco ME 1200 Series Carrier Ethernet Access Devices Controller Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS 15.6(1)SN and
Later Releases
iii
Contents
Upgrading Configuration 25
CHAPTER 2
Administering the Cisco ME 1200 NID 27

Prerequisites for Administering the NID 27
How to Administer the Cisco ME 1200 NID 27
Configuring the System Clock 27
Viewing the System Clock 31
Verifying System Clock Settings 32
Clearing IP ARP Entries 33
Verifying IP ARP Entries 34
Configuring IP Route Global Configuration 36
Configuring IP Route 37
Viewing IP Route 38
Removing IP Route 40
Configuring IP DNS Proxy Request 41
Removing IP DNS Proxy Request Configuration 42
Configuring the Name Server 44
Verifying the Name Server 45
Removing the Name Server 46
CHAPTER 3
Configuring Notifications 49
Prerequisites for Configuring Notifications 49
Restrictions for Configuring Notifications 49
Information About Notifications 50
Types of Notifications 50
How to Configure Notifications 51
Setting Password on the Controller 51
Viewing Notifications 51
Configuring Notifications 53
Registering for HeartBeat Notification 55
Registering for Config Change Trap Notification 57
Registering for Asynchronous Failure Notification 59
Listing Notifications 61
Deleting Notifications 62
Cisco ME 1200 Series Carrier Ethernet Access Devices Controller Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS 15.6(1)SN
and Later Releases
iv
Contents
CHAPTER 4
Zero Touch Provisioning 65

Restrictions for ZTP 66
ZTP Activation 66
Step 1Start ZTP 68
Step 2Reload Defaults 68
Step 3Get Management VLAN Configuration 68
ZTP for Cisco ME 1200 NIDs in Linear Topology 70
ZTP for Cisco ME 1200 NIDs in a Ring Topology 71
Step 4Start the DHCP Client on the VLAN Interface 71
Step 5Download and Apply the Initial Configuration 72
Step 6Reverse DNS Lookup to Obtain Hostname 73
Step 7Download and Apply Specific Configuration 73
Step 8Copy Running Configuration to Startup Configuration 74
CHAPTER 5
Configuring Synchronous Ethernet 75

Prerequisites for Configuring SyncE 75
Restrictions for Configuring SyncE 75
Information About Synchronous Ethernet 76
Understanding SyncE Protocols 77
Understanding SyncE Clocks 77
How to Configure SyncE 78
Configuring SyncE Global Defaults 78
Viewing SyncE Global Defaults 79
Configuring SyncE Clock Defaults 81
Viewing SyncE Clock Defaults 82
82
Configuring the Clock Source 84

Configuring Clock Source 84
Viewing Clock Configurations 85
Overwriting the Quality Level (QL) 87
Understanding Clock Redundancy 89
Configuring Clock Redundancy 89
Understanding SyncE Timers 92
Configuring SyncE Timers 93
Later Releases
v
Contents
Viewing SyncE Timers 96

Understanding ANEG Mode 97
Configuring ANEG mode 97
Verifying SyncE Status 99
CHAPTER 6
Configuring Ethernet Virtual Connections 101

How to Configure Ethernet Virtual Circuit 101
Configuring Ethernet Virtual Circuit 101
Creating a Policer 103
104
EVC Control Entry (ECE) Configuration 104

Configuring ECE Sample Rule 1 105
Configuring the ECE Sample Rule 2 108
Ethernet Private Line or E-LAN 110
Configuring ECE for E-LAN Between Two UNI and NNI Ports 111
Configuring EVC for E-LAN 112
Ethernet Virtual Private Line 113
Configuring ECE For EVPL Service 113
Configuring EVC For EVPL Service 113
Other Commands For EVC Configuration 114
CHAPTER 7
Configuring Switch Ports 119

How To Configure Switch Ports 119
Creating Layer 2 VLANs 119
Verifying Layer 2 VLAN Configuration 120
Deleting Layer 2 VLANs 121
Creating Layer 3 VLANs 122
Creating Layer 3 VLANs With Dynamic IP Address 124
Verifying Layer 3 VLANs With Dynamic IP Address 125
Deleting Layer 3 VLANs 125
Creating a VLAN Translation Group 127
Deleting VLAN Translation Groups 128
and Later Releases
vi
Contents
Verifying VLAN Translation Group 129

Creating VLAN Mapping 130
Deleting VLAN Mapping 132
Modifying Switch Ports 133
Deleting Switch Ports 136
Verifying Switch Port Details 137
CHAPTER 8
Configuring Spanning-Tree Protocol 139

Prerequisites for Configuring Spanning-Tree Protocol 139
Information About Spanning-Tree Protocol 139
Understanding Spanning-Tree Modes and Protocols 142
Understanding MSTP Configuration 142
Understanding RSTP 144
Understanding BPDU Guard and BPDU Filtering 144
How to Configure Spanning-Tree Protocol 145
Configuring Spanning-tree Aggregation Port Configurations 145
Viewing Spanning-Tree Aggregation Port Configurations 148
Configuring Spanning-Tree Global Configurations 149
Viewing Spanning-Tree Global Configurations 152
Configuring Spanning-Tree Port Configurations 153
Viewing Spanning-Tree Protocol Port Configurations 156
Verifying Spanning-Tree Status 158
Verifying Spanning-Tree Summary 159
Clearing Spanning-Tree Statistics 161
Clearing Spanning-Tree Detected Protocols 162
CHAPTER 9
Configuring Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) 165

Information About LACP 165
IEEE 802.3ad Link Bundling 165
How to Configure LACP 167
Provisioning the Controller to Configure LACP 167
Configuring LACP Globally on the Controller 168
Configuring LACP Defaults Globally on the Controller 170
Configuring LACP at Port level on the Controller 171
Configuring Default LACP Configuration at Port level on the Controller 173
Later Releases
vii
Contents
Clearing LACP Statistics on the Controller 174

Negating LACP Configuration and Restoring Defaults 176
Viewing the Global LACP Configuration on the controller 176
Viewing the Default LACP Configuration on the controller 178
Viewing the LACP Configuration at Port Level on the Controller 179
Viewing the Default LACP Configuration at Port Level on the controller 180
Verifying LACP 181
Viewing the LACP System ID Information on the controller 181
Viewing the LACP Load Balance Information on the controller 183
Viewing the LACP Internal State Information on the controller 184
Viewing the LACP Neighbors Status Information on the controller 186
Viewing the LACP Statistics on the controller 187
CHAPTER 10
Provisioning Link Layer Discovery Protocol 191

How To Configure LLDP 192
Setting LLDP Global Configuration 192
Setting LLDP Configuration to Default 194
Setting LLDP Port Configuration 195
Setting LLDP Port Configuration to Default 197
Other Commands For LLDP Configuration 198
CHAPTER 11
Configuring SNMP 201

Prerequisites for Configuring SNMP 201
Information About SNMP 201
How to Provision SNMP 202
Configuring and Retrieving Default SNMP Configurations 202
Configuring SNMPv2c Community Parameters 203
Configuring SNMPv3 Community 206
Configuring Trap Destination 208
Configuring an Entry in SNMP View List 210
Creating an SNMPv3 User 212
Creating an SNMP User 214
CHAPTER 12
Configuring PTP 217

Prerequisites for Configuring PTP 217
and Later Releases
viii
Contents
Information About PTP 217

How to Provision PTP 217
Configuring Slave IPv4 217
Enabling PTP on a Port 220
Enabling or Disabling Microsemi APR 223
Verifying PTP 226
Additional References 228
CHAPTER 13
Configuring ACLs 229

Prerequisites for Configuring ACLs 229
Restrictions for Configuring ACLs 229
How to Configure ACLs 230
Configuring ACL Rules on the NID using the Controller 230
Creating ACL Global Configurations 232
Applying ACL Configuration to the Ports 233
Viewing ACL Global Configurations 234
Removing ACL Global Configurations 236
Removing ACL Port Configurations 237
Verifying ACL Configurations 239
CHAPTER 14
Configuring Quality of Service (QoS) 241

How to Configure QoS 242
Provisioning the Controller to Configure QoS 242
Configuring QoS Input Policy Features Globally on the Controller 243
Configuring QoS Input Policy Features at Port level on the Controller 247
Configuring QoS Output Policy Features Globally on the Controller 250
Configuring QoS Output Policy Features at Port level on the Controller 254
Configuring QoS Control Entry (QCE) on the Controller 257
Configuring QoS Control Entry (QCE) Control Actions on the Controller 258
Configuring QCE Match Ingress Parameters on the Controller 260
Configuring QCE Control Ingress Match Frame Type Parameter on the Controller 261
Configuring QCE Control Ingress Inner Tag Match Parameter on the Controller 265
Configuring QCE Control Ingress MAC Params Parameter on the Controller 267
Configuring QCE Control Ingress Outer Tag Match Parameter on the Controller 269
Configuring QCE Control Ingress Ports Parameter on the Controller 271
Later Releases
ix
Contents
Configuring System QoS on the Controller 273

Configuring Hierarchical QoS on the Controller 275
Configuring EVC Hierarchical QoS Policy on the Controller 277
Reordering QoS Control Entry (QCE) on the Controller 278
Deleting QoS Control Entry (QCE) on the Controller 280
Deleting HQoS ID on the Controller 281
Negating QoS and Restoring Defaults 282
Viewing QoS Input Policy Global Features on the Controller 283
Viewing QoS Input Policy Features at Port level on the Controller 285
Viewing QoS Output Policy Global Features on the Controller 286
Viewing QoS Output Policy Features at Port level on the Controller 287
Viewing QoS Control Entry (QCE) Configuration on the Controller 289
Viewing System QoS Settings on the Controller 290
Viewing HQoS ID on the Controller 292
Viewing EVC HQoS ID on the Controller 293
Displaying the QCE List on the Controller 294
Displaying QoS Queue Statistics on the Controller 295
Displaying the Hierarchical QoS ID List on the Controller 296
CHAPTER 15
Configuring Ethernet OAM, Link OAM, and CFM 299

Understanding the Ethernet OAM Protocol 299
OAM Features 300
Setting the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) 300
Setting Delay Measurement 301
Updating Delay Measurement 303
Setting Loss Measurement 304
Setting Lock Signal 305
Setting Link Trace 306
Setting Loopback 307
Setting Test Signal 309
Updating Test Signal 310
Understanding Link OAM 311
Setting OAM Port Operations 311
Setting Link OAM Event Configuration 313
Setting Remote Loopback Start And Stop 314
and Later Releases
x
Contents
Understanding Connectivity Fault Management 315

CFM Domain 315
Maintenance Associations and Maintenance Points 316
Adding Continuity Check and Automatic Protection Switching 317
Adding Peer MEP IDs 318
Adding Client Configuration 319
Creating MEP Configuration 320
Updating MEP Configuration 322
Configuration Example: Loopback 323
Configuration Example: Loss MeasurementSingle Ended 325
Configuration Example: Loss MeasurementDual Ended 329
CHAPTER 16
Configuring Performance Monitoring 335

Restrictions for Configuring Performance Monitoring 335
ITU-T Y.1731 Performance Monitoring in a Service Provider Network 335
Frame Delay and Frame-Delay Variation 336
How to Configure Performance Monitoring 337
Provisioning the Controller to Configure Performance Monitoring 337
Configuring Performance Monitoring with Default Configuration 339
Configuring Alarm Information Signal (AIS) on the Controller 340
Configuring Delay Measurement (DM) on the Controller 342
Configuring Loss Measurement (LM) on the Controller 345
Configuring Lock Signal on the Controller 347
Configuring LoopBack on the Controller 349
Configuring Link Trace on the Controller 351
Configuring Test Signal on the Controller 353
Viewing Alarm Information Signal (AIS) on the Controller 355
Viewing Delay Measurement (DM) Statistics on the Controller 356
Viewing Loss Measurement (LM) Statistics on theController 359
Viewing Lock Signal on the Controller 360
Viewing Loopback State on the Controller 361
Viewing Link Trace State on the Controller 363
Viewing Test Signal Statistics on the Controller 365
Updating Delay Measurement (DM) on the Controller 367
Updating Test Signal Parameters on the Controller 369
Later Releases
xi
Contents
Clearing MEP Statistics on the Controller 370

Negating Performance Monitoring Configuration and Restoring Defaults 372
Verifying Performance Monitoring 372
CHAPTER 17
Configuring EPS 375

Prerequisites for Configuring EPS 375
Information About EPS 375
How to Provision EPS 376
Creating MEP on NID-1 376
Creating MEP on NID-2 381
Configuring Bidirectional EPS on NID-2 386
Configuring Unidirectional EPS on NID-2 392
Displaying EPS 398
Clearing EPS Wait-To-Restore Timer 400
Updating EPS 401
Deleting EPS 402
Deleting EPS Command 404
Deleting EPS Hold Off Timer 405
Deleting EPS Revertive Timer 407
Verifying EPS 408
CHAPTER 18
Configuring ERPS 411

Prerequisites for Configuring ERPS 411
Restrictions for Configuring ERPS 411
Information About ERPS 411
How to Provision ERPS 412
Creating VLAN on NID-1 412
Creating MEP on Port 1 of NID-1 414
Configuring ERPS on NID-1 420
Creating VLAN on NID-2 422
and Later Releases
xii
Contents
Configuring ERPS on NID-2 430

Configuring ERPS on the UPE NID Controller 433
Verifying ERPS 436
CHAPTER 19
Configuring L2CP 439

Prerequisites for Configuring L2CP 439
Restrictions for Configuring L2CP 439
Information About L2CP 440
Configuring L2CP Using a UPE NID Controller 440
CHAPTER 20
Configuring MAC Security 453

Prerequisites for Configuring MAC Security 453
Information About MAC Security 453
How to Provision MAC Security 454
Configuring Port Security 454
Configuring MAC Security 456
Clearing MAC Address Table 458
Verifying MAC Security 459
CHAPTER 21
Configuring NTP 471

Prerequisites for Configuring NTP 471
Restrictions for Configuring NTP 471
Information About NTP 471
Network Time Protocol 471
How to Configure NTP 473
Provisioning the Controller to Configure NTP 473
Configuring NTP on the Controller 474
Configuring NTP with Default Configuration 475
Viewing the NTP Configuration 476
Deleting the NTP Configuration 477
Verifying NTP 478
CHAPTER 22
Configuring Storm Control 479

Restrictions for Configuring Strorm Control 479
Information on Storm Control 479
Later Releases
xiii
Contents
How to Configure Storm Control 480

Provisioning the Controller to Configure Storm Control 480
Configuring Storm Control on the Controller 481
Retrieving the Storm Control Configuration 483
Displaying the Storm Control Configuration 484
Negating Storm Control Configuration and Restoring Defaults 486
Deleting the NTP Configuration 487
CHAPTER 23
Configuring Syslog 489

Prerequisites for Configuring Syslog 489
Information About Syslog 489
Enabling Syslog 490
Clearing Syslog 491
Verifying Syslog 493
CHAPTER 24
Configuring Dedicated Debug Shell 495

Prerequisites for Directly Accessing Cisco ME 1200 NID 495
Information About Dedicated Debug Shell 495
How to Provision Dedicated Debug Shell 496
Configuring the UPE NID Controller to Directly Access a Cisco ME 1200 NID 496
Directly Accessing the Cisco ME 1200 NID Using a Dedicated Debug Shell 496
CHAPTER 25
Configuring SPAN 499

Prerequisites for Configuring SPAN 499
Restrictions for Configuring SPAN 499
Information About SPAN 500
How to Provision SPAN 500
Enabling SPAN Globally to Start a Monitoring Session 500
Configuring SPAN Source Interface 501
Configuring SPAN Source CPU 503
503
Configuring SPAN Source VLAN 505

505
Configuring SPAN Destination 506

Deleting SPAN Source Configuration 507
and Later Releases
xiv
Contents
Deleting SPAN Destination Configuration 508

Verifying Diagnostics POST 509
CHAPTER 26
Configuring RSPAN 513

Prerequisites for Configuring RSPAN 513
Restrictions for Configuring RSPAN 513
Information About RSPAN 514
How to Provision RSPAN 514
Enabling SPAN Globally to Start a Monitoring Session 514
Configuring SPAN Source Interface on NID-1 515
Configuring Destination VLAN on NID-1 516
Configuring Source VLAN on NID-2 517
Configuring Destination Interface on NID-2 519
Deleting RSPAN Source Configuration on NID-2 520
Deleting RSPAN Destination Configuration on NID-1 521
Verifying RSPAN 521
CHAPTER 27
Configuring RFC 2544 525

Prerequisites for Configuring RFC 2544 525
Restrictions for Configuring RFC 2544 525
Information About RFC 2544 526
How to Provision RFC 2544 528
Disabling LLDP Port on NID-1 528
Creating Layer 2 VLANs on NID-1 530
Assigning VLANs to Ports on NID-1 531
Disabling Spanning-Tree Protocol on NID-1 532
Disabling LLDP Port on NID-2 535
Creating Layer 2 VLANs on NID-2 536
Assigning VLANs to Ports on NID-2 537
Disabling Spanning-Tree Protocol on NID-2 539
Creating Port MEP Profile on NID-1 541
Creating Traffic Test Loop on Destination Port on NID-2 543
Disabling Loop Protection on Destination Port on NID-2 545
Later Releases
xv
Contents
Setting RFC 2544 Reporting Parameters on NID-1 546

Displaying RFC 2544 Profile and Report on NID-1 548
Creating VLAN Profile on NID-1 550
Getting RFC 2544 Profile for VLAN on NID-1 552
Setting RFC 2544 Reporting Parameters for VLAN on NID-1 554
Displaying RFC 2544 Report for VLAN on NID-1 556
Deleting RFC 2544 Profile on NID-1 558
Modifying RFC 2544 with Frameloss and Backtoback 559
Getting RFC 2544 Profile after Modifying Frameloss and Backtoback 563
Verifying RFC 2544 565
CHAPTER 28
Configuring sFlow 567

Prerequisites for Configuring sFlow 567
Restrictions for Configuring sFlow 567
Information About sFlow 567
How to Provision sFlow 568
Enabling sFlow Globally 568
Enabling sFlow on a Port 570
Getting Current Global sFlow Values 573
Getting Current Port Specific sFlow Values 575
Clearing sFlow Statistics 577
Verifying sFlow 578
CHAPTER 29
Configuring UDLD 583

Prerequisites for Configuring UDLD 583
Restrictions for Configuring UDLD 583
Information About UDLD 583
How to Provision UDLD 584
Enabling UDLD Mode Globally 584
Disabling UDLD Mode Globally 586
Enabling UDLD Mode on a Port 587
Disabling UDLD Mode on a Port 589
Getting Current Global UDLD Values 591
and Later Releases
xvi
Contents
Getting Current Port Specific UDLD Values 592

Verifying UDLD 595
CHAPTER 30
Configuring Flex Links 599

Prerequisites for Configuring Flex Links 599
Restrictions for Configuring Flex Links 599
Information about Flex Links 600
MAC Address Table Move Update 600
How to Configure Flex Links 601
Configuring Flexlink Ports 601
Provisioning Flex Link Ports 602
Viewing Flex Link Configuration at Port Level on the NID 603
Viewing Flexlink Active Port Configuration 604
Enabling macMoveupdate on Active Port 606
Viewing macMoveUpdate Active Port Configuration 607
CHAPTER 31
Configuring Y.1564 609

Prerequisites for Configuring Y.1564 609
Information About Y.1564 609
Configuring New Y.1564 Profile 610
Getting the Profile Configuration using Profile Name 612
Viewing Profile Names 614
Managing Y.1564 Profile Names 615
Configuring Y.1564 Test Parameters 616
Viewing Y.1564 Test Parameters 617
Saving Y.1564 Test Report 618
Deleting Y.1564 Test Report 619
CHAPTER 32
Configuring LST 621

Prerequisites for Configuring LST 621
Understanding How Link State Tracking Works 621
Configuring mepTLV 622
Checking ccmTLV Configuration 623
Configuring LST 624
Later Releases
xvii
Contents
Checking LST Configuration 625

Viewing LST Configuration 626
and Later Releases
xviii
Preface
This preface contains information about the Cisco ME 1200 Series Carrier Ethernet Access Device.
Audience, page xix
Document Conventions, page xix
Related Documentation, page xxi
Audience
This guide is for the person configuring the Cisco ME 1200 Series Carrier Ethernet Access Devices, hereafter
known as Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Document Conventions
This document uses the following conventions:
Convention
Description
^ or Ctrl
Both the ^ symbol and Ctrl represent the Control (Ctrl) key on a keyboard.
For example, the key combination ^D or Ctrl-D means that you hold
down the Control key while you press the D key. (Keys are indicated in
capital letters but are not case sensitive.)
bold font
Commands and keywords and user-entered text appear in bold font.
Italic font
Document titles, new or emphasized terms, and arguments for which you
supply values are in italic font.
Courier font
Terminal sessions and information the system displays appear in courier

font.
Bold Courier font
Bold Courier font indicates text that the user must enter.
[x]
Elements in square brackets are optional.
Later Releases
xix
Preface
Document Conventions
Convention
Description
...
An ellipsis (three consecutive nonbolded periods without spaces) after

a syntax element indicates that the element can be repeated.
A vertical line, called a pipe, indicates a choice within a set of keywords

or arguments.
[x | y]
Optional alternative keywords are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars.
{x | y}
Required alternative keywords are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars.
[x {y | z}]
Nested set of square brackets or braces indicate optional or required

choices within optional or required elements. Braces and a vertical bar
within square brackets indicate a required choice within an optional
element.
string
A nonquoted set of characters. Do not use quotation marks around the

string or the string will include the quotation marks.
<>
Nonprinting characters such as passwords are in angle brackets.
[]
Default responses to system prompts are in square brackets.
!, #
An exclamation point (!) or a pound sign (#) at the beginning of a line

of code indicates a comment line.
Reader Alert Conventions

This document uses the following conventions for reader alerts:
Note
Tip
Warning
Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the
manual.
Means the following information will help you solve a problem.
Means reader be warned. In this situation, you might perform an action that could result in bodily
injury.
and Later Releases
xx
Preface
Related Documentation
These documents provide information about the switches and are available from this Cisco.com site:
http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/switches/me-1200-series-carrier-ethernet-access-devices/
tsd-products-support-general-information.html
Release Notes for the Cisco ME 1200 Series Carrier Ethernet Access Devices
Note
Before installing, configuring, or upgrading the switch, see the release notes on Cisco.com
for the latest information.
Cisco ME 3800x and ME 3600x Switches Software Configuration Guide

Cisco Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco ME 1200 Series Carrier Ethernet Access
Devices
For information on supported MIBs, see ftp://ftp.cisco.com/pub/mibs/ME1200-MIBS/.
Later Releases
xxi
Preface
and Later Releases
xxii
CHAPTER
Configuration Management
This chapter helps you to get started and describes how to configure the initial switch configuration for the
Cisco ME 1200 NID. This chapter also describes how to manage Cisco ME 1200 NID configurations.
Prerequisites for Managing Configurations, page 1
Restrictions for Managing Configurations, page 1
Information About Configuration Management, page 1
Getting Started, page 3
How to Manage Configurations, page 17
Prerequisites for Managing Configurations

You must know the default IP address of the Cisco ME 1200 NID device. It is 192.0.2.1.
NID must be added to the controller.
NID must be accessible from the controller.
Restrictions for Managing Configurations

The option show run command is not supported.
Information About Configuration Management

Configuration management stores the configurations. For more information, see Assigning the Switch IP
Address and Default Gateway.
Understanding the Boot Process
The Cisco ME 1200 NID device is not connected to any network soon after it is unpacked. To start your Cisco
ME 1200 NID, you need to follow the procedures in the hardware installation guide about installing and
Later Releases
1
Information About Configuration Management
powering on the switch. This document describes login and setting up the initial configuration (IP address,
subnet mask, default gateway, secret and Telnet passwords, and so forth) of the Cisco ME 1200 NID.
The boot loader provides access to the flash file system before the operating system is loaded. Normally, the
boot loader is used only to load, uncompress, and launch the operating system. After the boot loader gives
the operating system control of the CPU, the boot loader is not active until the next system reset or power-on.
Before you can assign switch information, make sure you have connected a PC or terminal to the console
port, and configured the PC or terminal-emulation software baud rate and character format to match these of
the switch console port:
Baud rate default is 115200.
Data bits default is 8.
Stop bits default is 1.
Parity settings default is none.
Table 1: Default Boot Configuration
Feature
Default Setting
Operating system
software image
The device attempts to automatically boot the system using information in the BOOT
environment variable. If the variable is not set, the Cisco ME 1200 NID attempts to
load and execute the first executable image it can by performing a recursive, depth-first
search throughout the flash file system.
The Cisco IOS image is stored in a directory that has the same name as the image file
(excluding the .bin extension).
In a depth-first search of a directory, each encountered subdirectory is completely
searched before continuing the search in the original directory.
Configuration file
Configured devices use the startup-config.xml file stored on the system board in flash
memory.
A new switch has no configuration file.
Initial Configuration
The initial configuration for the Cisco ME 1200 NID uses interface vlan 1 command and 192.0.2.1 as the IP
address. It also uses spanning-tree protocol for loop avoidance.
Getting the Cisco ME 1200 NID Connected to the Controller
To get the Cisco ME 1200 NID connected to the controller, see Step 1Adding the Cisco ME 1200 NID to
the Controller
Specifying the Filename to Read and Write the System Configuration
By default, the Cisco IOS software uses the file startup-config.xml file to read and write a nonvolatile copy
of the system configuration. To copy the running configurations to the startup-config, see Step 10Creating
Startup-config.xml File.
and Later Releases
2
Getting Started
Getting Started
Perform the following tasks to get started with Cisco ME 1200 NID:
1 Add the Cisco ME 1200 NID using the platform nid-controller command on the controller.
2 Verify if the NID is added on the controller using the show platform nid-controller command on the
controller.
3 Create VLAN on the controller.
4 Create Layer 2 VLANs on the NID.
5 Create Layer 2 VLANs on the controller (to access the NID on a different VLAN other than VLAN 1).
Note
Steps 1 through 5 are performed to access Cisco ME 1200 NID through the Controller with the default
factory IP address 192.0.2.1. The steps 1 to 5 are mandatory and are sufficient to establish the initial
connectivity between the controller and the Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Perform the following steps to configure a switchport as Trunk and to establish connectivity on a different
switch virtual interface (SVI). You can also configure default IP route to reach various servers.
Note
Prerequisite for configuring Steps 6 through 10

1. The controller should be configured with a different VLAN other than VLAN 1.
2. The configuration tasks are explained assuming the controller interface 0/1 is connected to Cisco ME
1200 NID 1/1. Change the interface configurations as applicable.
6
7
8
9
10
Modify switchport mode as Trunk on the NID.

Create Layer 3 VLANs on the NID.
Create Layer 3 VLANs on the controller.
Configure Default IP Route .
Create Startup-config.xml file.
Step 1Adding the Cisco ME 1200 NID to the Controller

Note
Effective Cisco IOS Release 15.4(2)SN, Cisco ME3600 switch will act as controller for the Cisco ME
1200 NID.
Effective Cisco IOS Release 15.5(1)SN, the Cisco ASR 920 Series Routers can also act as controller for
the Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Later Releases
3
Step 2Verifying the Cisco ME 1200 NID Addition onto the Controller
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Enters global configuration mode.
Example:
Switch# configure terminal
Step 2
platform nid-controller add 192.0.2.1

Example:
Switch(config)# platform nid-controller add
192.0.2.1
Step 3
Adds the Cisco ME 1200 NID using the platform

nid-controller command on the controller. The Cisco ME
1200 NID is shipped with the factory default IP address
192.0.2.1.
Exits to the Privileged EXEC mode.
end
Example:
Switch(config)# end
Configuration Example
Switch(config)# platform nid-controller add 192.0.2.1
Switch(config)# end
Step 2Verifying the Cisco ME 1200 NID Addition onto the Controller
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
show platform nid-controller nids
Displays the Cisco ME 1200 NID IP addresses that

are added to the controller.
Example:
Switch(config)# show platform nid-controller nids
Step 3
end
Example:
Switch(config)# end
and Later Releases
4
Step 3Creating VLAN on the Controller
Switch# show platform nid-controller nids
NID_ID
MAC Address IP Address
Lease
1
2
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
7.25.16.63
7.25.17.223
Physical Port
VLAN/BD
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
TFTP Server
n/a
n/a
Type
static
static
Switch(config)# end
Step 3Creating VLAN on the Controller

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
interface vlan vlan _id
Creates VLAN 1.
Example:
Switch(config)# interface vlan 1
Step 3
ip address ip_address subnet-mask
Adds the IP address 192.0.2.2 and the subnet mask to the

VLAN 1.
Example:
ip_addressEnter the IP address 192.0.2.2.
Switch(config-if)# ip address 192.0.2.2

255.255.255.0
Step 4
subnet-maskEnter the IP subnet mask.

Exits the configure terminal mode.
end
Example:
Switch(config-if)# end
Switch(config-if)# ip address 192.0.2.2 255.255.255.0
What to Do Next
Ping the IP address 192.0.2.1 to check for reachability.
Later Releases
5
Step 4Creating Layer 2 VLANs on the NID

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Enters the global configuration mode.
Example:
Step 2
controller nid slot/port
Enters the controller configuration mode.
Example:
Switch(config)# controller nid 1/1
Step 3
ProvisionPortVlanPortType
Enters the ProvisionPortVlanPortType

mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionPortVlanPortType
Step 4
createVlanCommand createVlanReq vlan_list vlan_list
Creates the VLAN list. The valid values are

from 1 to 4095.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)#
createVlanCommand createVlanReq vlan_list 100-105
Step 5
createVlanCommand review
Displays the configuration.
Example:
Step 6
createVlanCommand commit
Sends the configuration to the NID.
Example:
Step 7
ProvisionPortVlanPortTypeshow
Displays the Vlan lists.
Example:
showVlans showVlanRequest vlan-id 1
showVlans review
Step 8
exit
Exits to the config-controller mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# exit
and Later Releases
6
Step 5Creating Layer 2 VLANs on the Controller
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# createVlanCommand createVlanReq vlan_list
100-105
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# createVlanCommand review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# createVlanCommand commit
Vlan Creation Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
vlan vlan_id
Creates a different VLAN other than VLAN 1 to access

the NID.
Example:
Switch(config)# vlan 10
Step 3
end
Example:
Switch(config-vlan)# end
Switch(config)# vlan 10
Switch(config-vlan)# exit
Later Releases
7
Step 6Modifying Switchport Mode as Trunk

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
controller nid 1/NID_ID
Example:
Step 3
Enters the ProvisionPortVlanPortType mode.
Example:
Step 4
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig interface interface_id Configure the switchport configuration on the

defined interface.
Example:
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig interaface 4
Step 5
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode trunk {allowed Sets the mode to TRUNK.

vlan {add {all | vlan_list vlan_list } | remove {all | vlan_list
allowedSets the allowed VLAN
vlan_list }} | {native vlan vlan_list }
characteristics when interface is in trunk mode.
Example:
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode trunk allowed
vlan add vlan_list 100-105
addAdds either all VLANs or specified

VLANs to the current list.
removeRremoves either all VLANs or
specified VLANs from the current list.
vlan_idThe VLAN ID. The valid values are
from 0 to 4095.
Step 6
modifySwPort review
Example:
modifySwPort review
Step 7
modifySwPort commit
Example:
modifySwPort commit
and Later Releases
8
Step 8
Command or Action
Purpose
ProvisionPortVlanPortTypeshow
Displays the commit, flush or review commands in

queue for switchport configurtion.
Example:
showswPort showSwPortReq all
Switch(ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# showswPort review
Step 9
exit
Example:
exit
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig
interaface 4
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode
trunk allowed vlan add vlan_list 100-105
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# modifySwPort review
Commands in queue:
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode trunk allowed vlan add vlan_list 100-105
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# modifySwPort commit
ModifySwPort_Output.modifySwPortConfigResp = 0
Modify SwitchPort Commit Success!!!
(Optional Step) Configuring Native VLAN

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Later Releases
9
Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Switch (config-controller)# ProvisionPortVlanPortType

Step 4
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode trunk {allowed Assigns a native VLAN.

Changing native VLAN is not always necessary. The
| native vlan vlan_id}
device may lose connectivity if you change the native
VLAN. You cannot access the NID by any way, if
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# you change the native VLAN unless the native VLAN
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode trunk native is same on both, the NID and the controller.
vlan 110
Step 5
modifySwPort review
Example:
modifySwPort review
Step 6
modifySwPort commit
Example:
modifySwPort commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
Example
trunk native vlan 110
Commands in queue:
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode trunk native vlan 110
and Later Releases
10

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3

mode.
Example:
Switch (config-controller)# ProvisionPortVlanPortType

Step 4
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq vlan_id vlan_id
Creates the layer 3 VLAN.
Example:
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq vlan_id 22
Step 5
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq {address {ipv4 {dhcp | ipv4_address} Creates the interface VLAN on the
specified IPv4 or IPv6 address, or VLAN
| ipv6 ipv6_address ipv6_address} | vlan-id vlan_id}
ID.
Example:
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq address ipv4 ipv4_address
address 22.22.22.3
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq address ipv4 ipv4_address mask
255.255.255.0
2001:4::1/64
Step 6
createIntVlan review
Example:
Step 7
createIntVlan commit
Example:
Later Releases
11
Step 8
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
Example 1: IPv4
22
ipv4 ipv4_address address 22.22.22.3
ipv4 ipv4_address mask 255.255.255.0
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq vlan_Id

createIntVlan createIntVlanReq address
Commands in queue:
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq address ipv4 ipv4_address address 22.22.22.3
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq address ipv4 ipv4_address mask 255.255.255.0
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# createIntVlan commit
CreateIntVlan_Output.createIntVlanResp = 0
Create Interface Vlan Commit Success!!!
Example 2: IPv6
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# createIntVlan createIntVlanReq vlan_Id
22
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# createIntVlan createIntVlanReq address
ipv6 ipv6_address 2001:4::1/64
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# createIntVlan review
Commands in queue:
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq address ipv6 ipv6_address 2001:4::1/64
and Later Releases
12

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
interface vlan vlan_interface_number
Creates the VLAN interface.
Example:
Step 3
ip address IP address IP subnet mask
Assigns the IP address to the interface VLAN.
Example:
Step 4
no shutdown
Performs a no shutdown operation.
Example:
Switch(config-if)# no shutdown
Step 5
end
Example:
Switch(config-if)# no shutdown
Step 9Configuring IP Route

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Later Releases
13
Step 9Configuring IP Route
Step 2
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
setiproute setIpRouteReq {gateway_ip WORD | ipv4_address Configures the IP Route.

WORD | ipv4_mask WORD}
gateway_ipSpecifies the gateway IPv4
address.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)#
setIpRoute setIpRouteReq ipv4_address 10.0.144.0
setIpRoute setIpRouteReq ipv4_mask 255.255.255.0
setIpRoute setIpRouteReq gateway_ip 10.0.0.1
WORDIPv4 address.
ipv4_addressSpecifies the IPv4
Network/Address.
WORDIPv4 Network/Address.
ipv4_maskSpecifies the IPv4 mask.
WORDIPv4 mask.
Step 5
setiproute review
Example:
setiproute review
Step 6
getiproute commit
Example:
setiproute commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# exit
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionNIDMgmtType
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setIpRoute setIpRouteReq ipv4_address
10.0.144.0
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setIpRoute setIpRouteReq ipv4_mask
255.255.255.0
and Later Releases
14
Step 10Creating Startup-config.xml File
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setIpRoute setIpRouteReq gateway_ip 10.0.0.1

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setiproute review
Commands in Queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setiproute commit
Setiproute Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
copyConfig copyConfigRequest {src {default-config | flash Copies the configuration.

WORD | running-config | startup-config | tftp WORD} | dst
srcSpecifies the source location.
{flash WORD | running-config | startup-config | tftp WORD}}
defaultCopies to the default-config file.
Example:
flashCopies onto the flash.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)#
copyConfig copyConfigRequest src running-config
copyConfig copyConfigRequest dst startup-config
WORDFilename. The format is

flash:<filename>. For example,
flash:ToTest.
running-configCopies to the
running-config file.
startup-configCopies to the
startup-config file.
tftpCopies to the TFTP server.
WORDTFTP filename. The format
is tftp://server/path-and-filename. For
example, tftp://10.0.0.221/ToTest.
Later Releases
15
Command or Action
Purpose
dstSpecifies the destination location.
flash:ToTest.
Step 5
copyConfig review
Example:
copyConfig review
Step 6
copyConfig commit
Example:
copyConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# copyConfig copyConfigRequest src
running-config
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# copyConfig copyConfigRequest dst
startup-config
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# copyConfig review
Commands in Queue:
and Later Releases
16
How to Manage Configurations
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# copyConfig commit

CopyConfig Commit Success!!!
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# exit
How to Manage Configurations

Listing Configurations
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
listConfigs listConfigsReq
Lists the configuration.
Example:
Step 5
listConfigs review
Example:
listConfigs review
Step 6
listConfigs commit
Fetches listing of flash configuration on the

NID.
Example:
listConfigs commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
Later Releases
17
Verifying Configuration Version
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# listConfigs listConfigsReq
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# listConfigs review
Commands in Queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# listConfigs commit
ListConfigs_Output.configFiles.files[0].fileName = 'default-config'
ListConfigs_Output.configFiles.files[0].fileSize = '
1100'
ListConfigs_Output.configFiles.files[0].timeStamp = '1970-01-01 00:00:00'
ListConfigs_Output.configFiles.files[0].permissions = 'r-'
ListConfigs_Output.configFiles.files[1].fileName = 'startup-config'
ListConfigs_Output.configFiles.files[1].fileSize = '
1552'
ListConfigs_Output.configFiles.files[1].permissions = 'rw'
ListConfigs_Output.configFiles.files[2].fileName = 'startup-config.xml'
ListConfigs_Output.configFiles.files[2].fileSize = ' 149016'
ListConfigs_Output.configFiles.files[3].fileName = 'Totest'
ListConfigs_Output.configFiles.files[3].fileSize = ' 149016'
ListConfigs Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionConfigMGMPortType
Enters the ProvisionConfigMGMPortType

mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionConfigMGMPortType
Step 4
showVersion showVersionReq
Displays the version.
Example:
and Later Releases
18
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
showVersion review
Example:
showVersion review
Step 6
showVersion commit
Example:
showVersion commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
Note
The Active.Image is the current image and Alternative.Image is the backup image. While upgrading the
image, you can choose to swap Active.Image with Alternate.Image.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# showVersion showVersionReq
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# showVersion review
Commands in Queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# showVersion commit
ShowVersion_Output.showVersionResp.Active.Image = 'me1200-universal-mz.154-2.SN.dat'
ShowVersion_Output.showVersionResp.Active.Version = 'ME1200 OS Software Build 15.4-2.SN'
ShowVersion_Output.showVersionResp.Active.Date = 'Fri Mar 21 10:08:34 PDT 2014'
ShowVersion_Output.showVersionResp.Alternative.Image = 'me1200-universal-mz.dat'
ShowVersion_Output.showVersionResp.Alternative.Version = 'ME1200 OS Software Build
15.4-2.SN'
ShowVersion_Output.showVersionResp.Alternative.Date = 'Fri Mar 21 05:56:50 PDT 2014'
ShowVersion Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
19
Copying Configuration
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Enters the ProvisionConfigMGMPortType mode.
Example:
Step 4
copyConfig copyConfigRequest {src {default-config | flash Copies the configuration.

WORD | running-config | startup-config | tftp WORD} | dst
srcSpecifies the source location.
{flash WORD | running-config | startup-config | tftp WORD}}
defaultCopies to the default-config file.
Example:
In this example, the Source is the running-config, and the

Destination is the startup-config. When you use these commands
for the first time on the Cisco ME 1200 NID, the NID creates the
startup-config.xml file in the flash, which is used during the
device boot-up. When the device reloads for the first time, it uses
the startup-config.xml file.

flash:ToTest.
dstSpecifies the destination location.
flash:ToTest.
and Later Releases
20
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 5
copyConfig review
Example:
copyConfig review
Step 6
copyConfig commit
Example:
copyConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# copyConfig copyConfigRequest src
running-config
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# copyConfig copyConfigRequest dst
startup-config
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# copyConfig review
Commands in Queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# copyConfig commit
CopyConfig Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
21
Deleting Configuration
Note
When the running-config file is copied to the TFTP server, by default, it stores the file in the XML format.
You need not mention the XML extension explicitly. This hold good vice versa as well.
Note
When the Source is TFTP and the Destination is running-config, the TFTP file appends to the existing
running-config, and does not overwrite the running-config file.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
deleteConfFile configName {configFileWORD}

Example:
deleteConfFile configName configFile flash:ToTest
Step 5
deleteConfFile review
Deletes the configuration.

configFileSpecifies the configuration file
to be deleted.
WORDFile name. The format is
flash:filename.
Example:
deleteConfFile review
Step 6
deleteConfFile commit
Example:
deleteConfFile commit
and Later Releases
22
Reloading the System
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
exit
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# deleteConfFile configName configFile
flash:ToTest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# deleteConfFile review
Commands in Queue:
deleteConfFile configName configFile flash:ToTest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# deleteConfFile commit
DeleteConfFile Commit Success!!!
What to Do Next
Use the listConfigs listConfigsReq command to verify the delete action.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# listConfigs listConfigsReq
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# listConfigs review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# listConfigs commit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Later Releases
23
Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose
reloadSystem reloadSystemReq {last_saved}
Reloads the configuration.
Example:
reloadSystem reloadSystemReq last_saved
Step 5
reloadSystem review
last_savedReloads from the last saved

configuration.
Example:
reloadSystem review
Step 6
reloadSystem commit
Example:
reloadSystem commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# reloadSystem reloadSystemReq last_saved
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# reloadSystem review
Commands in Queue:
reloadSystem reloadSystemReq last_saved
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# reloadSystem commit
ReloadSystem Commit Success!!!
Note
To reboot the system with the last saved changes, copy the configurations from running-config (source)
to startup-config.xml (destination) file before you reload the system. This ensures the system boots-up
with the latest configuration.
and Later Releases
24
Upgrading Configuration
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
upgradeImage upgradeImageRequest {swap | upgrade {tftp Upgrades the configuration.

WORD}}
swapSwaps the configuration between Active
and Alternate firmware images.
Example:
Note
When the Cisco ME1200 NID is
upgraded, the previous image is stored
upgradeImage upgradeImageRequest upgrade tftp
tftp://<TFTP Server address>/<Path and file name>
as a Backup image in the flash. Use the
upgradeImage upgradeImageRequest
swap command to load the system with
the old image. To view the Active and
Alternative (backup) firmware images,
see the Verifying Configuration
Version.
upgradeUpgrades the image.
tftpSpecifies the TFTP location.
WORDTFTP details. Enter the
tftp://server/path-and-filename.
Step 5
upgradeImage review
Example:
upgradeImage review
Step 6
upgradeImage commit
Example:
upgradeImage commit
Later Releases
25
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
exit
Example 1: Upgrade
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# upgradeImage upgradeImageRequest
upgrade tftp tftp://<TFTP Server address>/<Path and file name>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# upgradeImage review
Commands in Queue:
upgradeImage upgradeImageRequest upgrade tftp tftp://<TFTP Server add>/<Path and file
name>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# upgradeImage commit
UpgradeImage Commit Success!!!
Example 2: Swap
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# upgradeImage upgradeImageRequest
swap
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# upgradeImage review
Commands in Queue:
upgradeImage upgradeImageRequest swap
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionConfigMGMTPortType)# upgradeImage commit
UpgradeSwap commit success !!!!
and Later Releases
26
CHAPTER
Administering the Cisco ME 1200 NID

This chapter describes how to perform one-time operations to administer the Cisco ME 1200 NID.
For more information, see Administering the Switch.
Prerequisites for Administering the NID, page 27
How to Administer the Cisco ME 1200 NID, page 27
Prerequisites for Administering the NID

How to Administer the Cisco ME 1200 NID

Configuring the System Clock
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
controller nid1/NID_ID
Example:
Later Releases
27

Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
ProvisionNIDMgmtType
Enters the ProvisionNIDMgmtType mode.
Example:
Step 4
setclockConfig clockConfig {summerTime {endDate Configures the Cisco ME 1200 NID clock.
WORD | mode {disabled | nonRecurring | recurring}
summerTimeConfigures the summer (daylight savings)
| name WORD | offSet Offset | startDate WORD} |
time.
timeZone {acronym WORD | hrOffSet hours |
minOffSet mins}}
endDateSpecifies the end date format.
Example:
setClockConfig clockConfig summerTime endDate
3-31-2016-23-59
setClockConfig clockConfig summerTime mode
nonRecurring
setClockConfig clockConfig summerTime name
MyClock
WORDend date depends on the mode.

For recurring mode, the format is
week-day-month-hrs:min.Where,
week ranges from 1 to 5.
day ranges from 1 to 7.
month ranges from 1 to 12.
hrs ranges from 0-23.
min ranges from 0-59.
setClockConfig clockConfig summerTime offSet
3
setClockConfig clockConfig summerTime startDate
3-31-2014-23-59
For nonrecurring mode, the format is

month-day-year-hrs:min.
setClockConfig clockConfig timeZone acronym
IST
setClockConfig clockConfig timeZone hrOffSet
5
setClockConfig clockConfig timeZone minOffSet
30
year ranges from 2000-2097.

modeSpecifies the day light saving time mode.
disabledDisables the day light saving time.
nonRecurringSpecifies the standard mode.
recurringSpecifies the recurring mode.
nameSpecifies the name of time zone in summer.
WORDClock name.
offSetSpecifies the Offset to add in minutes.
Offsetoffset time. The range is from 1 to 1440
minutes.
and Later Releases
28

Command or Action
Purpose
startDateSpecifies the start date format.
WORDstart date depends on the mode.
For recurring mode, the format is
week-day-month-hrs:min.Where,
week ranges from 1 to 5.
For nonrecurring mode, the format is
month-day-year-hrs:min. Where,
year ranges from 2000-2097.
timeZoneConfigures the time zone.

acronymSpecifies the name of time zone.
WORDtime zone name.
hrOffSetSpecifies the off set hours from Universal
Time Coordinated (UTC).
hoursoff set hour from UTC. The range is from
minus(-) 23 to 23.
minOffSetSpecifies the offset minutes from UTC.
minsoff set minutes from UTC. The range is
from 0-59.
Step 5
setclockConfig review
Example:
setclockConfig review
Later Releases
29

Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
setclockConfig commit
Example:
setclockConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setClockConfig clockConfig summerTime endDate
3-31-2016-23-59
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setClockConfig clockConfig summerTime mode
nonRecurring
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setClockConfig clockConfig summerTime name
MyClock
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setClockConfig clockConfig summerTime offSet
3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setClockConfig clockConfig summerTime
startDate 3-31-2014-23-59
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setClockConfig clockConfig timeZone acronym
IST
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setClockConfig clockConfig timeZone hrOffSet
5
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setClockConfig clockConfig timeZone minOffSet
30
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setclockConfig review
Commands in queue:
setClockConfig clockConfig summerTime endDate 3-31-2016-23-59
setClockConfig clockConfig summerTime mode nonRecurring
setClockConfig clockConfig summerTime name MyClock
setClockConfig clockConfig summerTime offSet 3
setClockConfig clockConfig summerTime startDate 3-31-2014-23-59
setClockConfig clockConfig timeZone acronym IST
setClockConfig clockConfig timeZone hrOffSet 5
setClockConfig clockConfig timeZone minOffSet 30
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setclockConfig commit
SetClockConfig Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
30

Viewing the System Clock
Viewing the System Clock

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
getClockConfig detailClock
Displays the clock details.
Example:
Step 5
getClockConfig review
Example:
getClockConfig review
Step 6
getClockConfig commit
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# getClockConfig detailClock
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# getClockConfig review
Commands in queue:
Later Releases
31

Verifying System Clock Settings
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# getClockConfig commit

GetClockConfig_Output.clockConfig.timeZone.hrOffSet = 5
GetClockConfig_Output.clockConfig.timeZone.minOffSet = 30
GetClockConfig_Output.clockConfig.timeZone.acronym = 'IST'
GetClockConfig_Output.clockConfig.summerTime.name = ''
GetClockConfig_Output.clockConfig.summerTime.mode.t = 1
GetClockConfig_Output.clockConfig.summerTime.mode.u.disabled = ''
GetClockConfig_Output.clockConfig.summerTime.startDate = ''
GetClockConfig_Output.clockConfig.summerTime.endDate = ''
GetClockConfig_Output.clockConfig.summerTime.offSet = 1
GetClockConfig Commit Success!!!
Verifying System Clock Settings

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
showclock showClockReq {show_clock}
Displays the clock details.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# showclock
showClockReq show_clock
Step 5
showclock review
Example:
review
Step 6
showclock commit
Example:
commit
and Later Releases
32

Clearing IP ARP Entries
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# showclock showClockReq show_clock
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# showclock review
Commands in queue:
showClock showClockReq show_clock
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# showclock commit
ShowClock_Output.showClockResp.clock_info = 'System Time
: 1970-01-02T19:17:07+05:30'
ShowClock Commit Success!!!
Clearing IP ARP Entries

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
clearIpArpEntries clearIpArpEntriesReq {all}
Clears the IP ARP entries.
Example:
clearIpArpEntries clearIpArpEntriesReq all
Later Releases
33

Verifying IP ARP Entries
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
clearIpArpEntries review
Example:
clearIpArpEntries review
Step 6
clearIpArpEntries commit
Example:
clearIpArpEntries commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# clearIpArpEntries clearIpArpEntriesReq all
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# clearIpArpEntries review
Commands in queue:
clearIpArpEntries clearIpArpEntriesReq all
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# clearIpArpEntries commit
ClearIpArpEntries_Output.clearIpArpEntriesResp = 0
ClearIpArpEntries Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
and Later Releases
34

Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 4
showIpArp showIpArpEntriesReq {all}
Displays the IP ARP details.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# showIpArp
showIpArpEntriesReq all
Step 5
showIpArp review
Example:
review
Step 6
showIpArp commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# showIpArp showIpArpEntriesReq all
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# showIpArp review
Commands in queue:
showIpArpEntriesReq all
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# showIpArp commit
ShowIpArp_Output.showIpArpEntriesResp.arp_entry[0] = '10.0.0.1 via
VLAN10:00-00-0c-07-ac-03'
ShowIpArp_Output.showIpArpEntriesResp.arp_entry[1] = '10.0.10.21 via
VLAN10:e9-ed-f3-78-27-c0'
ShowIpArp Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
35

Configuring IP Route Global Configuration
Configuring IP Route Global Configuration

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
ipRoutingGlobalConfig ipRoutingGlobalConfigReq {disable Configures the IP routing global configuration.

| enable}
disableDisables the IP Routing.
Example:
enableEnables the IP Routing.
ipRoutingGlobalConfig ipRoutingGlobalConfigReq enable
Step 5
ipRoutingGlobalConfig review
Example:
ipRoutingGlobalConfig review
Step 6
ipRoutingGlobalConfig commit
Example:
ipRoutingGlobalConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# ipRoutingGlobalConfig ipRoutingGlobalConfigReq
enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# ipRoutingGlobalConfig review
and Later Releases
36

Configuring IP Route
Commands in queue:
ipRoutingGlobalConfig ipRoutingGlobalConfigReq enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# ipRoutingGlobalConfig commit
IpRoutingGlobalConfig Commit Success!!!
Configuring IP Route
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
setiproute setIpRouteReq {gateway_ip WORD | ipv4_address Configures the IP Route.

WORD | ipv4_mask WORD}
address.
Example:
WORDIPv4 address.
Network/Address.
WORDIPv4 mask.
Step 5
setiproute review
Example:
setiproute review
Later Releases
37

Viewing IP Route
Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
setiproute commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setIpRoute setIpRouteReq ipv4_address
10.0.144.0
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setIpRoute setIpRouteReq ipv4_mask
255.255.255.0
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setIpRoute setIpRouteReq gateway_ip 10.0.0.1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setiproute review
Commands in Queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setiproute commit
Setiproute Commit Success!!!
Viewing IP Route
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
and Later Releases
38

Viewing IP Route
Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 4
showiproute showIpRouteReq {all}
Displays the IP route details.

allSpecifies the IP route entries.
Example:
showiproute showIpRouteReq all
Step 5
showiproute review
Example:
showiproute review
Step 6
showiproute commit
Example:
showiproute commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# showiproute showIpRouteReq all
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# showiproute review
Commands in queue:
showIpRoute showIpRouteReq all
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# showiproute commit
ShowIpRoute_Output.showIpRouteResp.ip_route_entry[0] = '0.0.0.0/0 via 10.25.0.1 [UP
GATEWAY HW_RT]'
ShowIpRoute_Output.showIpRouteResp.ip_route_entry[1] = '10.25.0.0/16 via [UP HW_RT]'
HOST]'
GATEWAY HW_RT]'
ShowIpRoute_Output.showIpRouteResp.ip_route_entry[4] = '224.0.0.0/4 via 127.0.0.1 [UP]'
ShowIpRoute Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
39

Removing IP Route
Removing IP Route
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
removeiproute removeIpRouteReq {gateway_ip WORD |

ipv4_address WORD | ipv4_mask WORD}
Example:
removeiproute removeIpRouteReq ipv4_address 10.0.144.0
removeiproute removeIpRouteReq ipv4_mask 255.255.255.0
removeiproute removeIpRouteReq gateway_ip 10.0.0.1
Removes the IP Route.

address.
WORDIPv4 address.
Network/Address.
WORDIPv4 mask.
Step 5
removeIpRoute review
Example:
removeIpRoute review
Step 6
removeIpRoute commit
Example:
removeIpRoute commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
and Later Releases
40

Configuring IP DNS Proxy Request
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# removeiproute removeIpRouteReq ipv4_address
10.0.144.0
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# removeiproute removeIpRouteReq ipv4_mask
255.255.255.0
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# removeiproute removeIpRouteReq gateway_ip
10.0.0.1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)#removeIpRoute review
Commands in queue:
removeiproute removeIpRouteReq ipv4_address 10.0.144.0
removeiproute removeIpRouteReq ipv4_mask 255.255.255.0
removeiproute removeIpRouteReq gateway_ip 10.0.0.1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# removeIpRoute commit
Removeiproute Commit Success!!!
Configuring IP DNS Proxy Request

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
setipdnsProxyConfig setIpDNSProxyConfigReq {dns_proxy} Configures the IP DNS proxy request.

Example:
setipdnsProxyConfig setIpDNSProxyConfigReq dns_proxy
dns_proxyConfigures the DNS proxy

service.
Later Releases
41

Removing IP DNS Proxy Request Configuration
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
setipdnsProxyConfig review
Example:
setipdnsProxyConfig review
Step 6
setipdnsProxyConfig commit
Example:
setipdnsProxyConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setipdnsProxyConfig setIpDNSProxyConfigReq
dns_proxy
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setipdnsProxyConfig review
Commands in queue:
setIpDnsProxyConfig setIpDNSProxyConfigReq dns_proxy
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setipdnsProxyConfig commit
SetIpDnsProxyConfig Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
and Later Releases
42

Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 4
removeipdnsProxyConfig removeIpDnsProxyConfigReq
{dns_proxy}
Removes the IP DNS proxy configuration.
Example:
removeipdnsProxyConfig removeIpDnsProxyConfigReq dns_proxy
Step 5
removeipdnsProxyConfig review
Example:
removeipdnsProxyConfig review
Step 6
removeipdnsProxyConfig commit
Example:
removeipdnsProxyConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# removeipdnsProxyConfig
removeIpDnsProxyConfigReq dns_proxy
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# removeipdnsProxyConfig review
Commands in queue:
removeIpDnsProxyConfig removeIpDnsProxyConfigReq dns_proxy
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# removeipdnsProxyConfig commit
RemoveIpDnsProxyConfig Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
43

Configuring the Name Server
Configuring the Name Server

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
setnameServerConfig setNameServerConfigReq {dhcp

{vlan_interface vlan_id} | ipv4_address WORD}
Example:
setNameServerConfig setNameServerConfigReq
ipv4_address 10.0.0.5
Configures the name server.

dhcpSpecifies the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol.
vlan_interfaceSelect an VLAN
interface to configure.
vlan_idVlan ID. The range is from
1 to 4093.
ipv4_addressSpecifies IPv4 unicast address.
WORD IPv4 unicast address.
Step 5
setnameServerConfig review
Example:
setnameServerConfig review
Step 6
setnameServerConfig commit
Example:
setnameServerConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
and Later Releases
44

Verifying the Name Server
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setNameServerConfig setNameServerConfigReq
ipv4_address 10.0.0.5
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setNameServerConfig review
Commands in queue:
setNameServerConfig setNameServerConfigReq ipv4_address 10.0.0.5
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# setNameServerConfig commit
nid_create_SetNameServerConfig_req_file 7421
SetNameServerConfig Commit Success!!!
Verifying the Name Server

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
shownameServerConfig showNameSeverConfigReq {config}

Example:
shownameServerConfig showNameSeverConfigReq config
Step 5
shownameServerConfig review
Displays the name server details.

configDisplays the name server
configuration.
Example:
shownameServerConfig review
Later Releases
45

Removing the Name Server
Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
shownameServerConfig commit
Example:
shownameServerConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# shownameServerConfig showNameSeverConfigReq
config
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# shownameServerConfig review
Commands in queue:
shownameServerConfig showNameSeverConfigReq config
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# shownameServerConfig commit
ShowNameServerConfig_Output.showNameServerConfigResp.name_server_config = 'Current DNS
server is 7.0.0.3 set by STATIC.'
ShowNameServerConfig Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
and Later Releases
46

Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose
removenameServerConfig removeNameServerConfigReq
{name_server}
Removes the name server.
Example:
name_serverSpecifies the domain

name system removal.
removenameServerConfig removeNameServerConfigReq
name_server
Step 5
removenameServerConfig review
Example:
removenameServerConfig review
Step 6
Example:
removenameServerConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# removenameServerConfig
removeNameServerConfigReq name_server
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# removenameServerConfig review
Commands in queue:
removenameServerConfig removeNameServerConfigReq name_server
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNIDMgmtType)# removenameServerConfig commit
RemoveNameServerConfig Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
47

and Later Releases
48
CHAPTER
Configuring Notifications
This chapter describes how to configure notifications on Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Prerequisites for Configuring Notifications, page 49
Restrictions for Configuring Notifications, page 49
Information About Notifications, page 50
Types of Notifications, page 50
How to Configure Notifications, page 51
Prerequisites for Configuring Notifications

Configuring username and enabling password on the controller is a must for HTTP authentication.
Restrictions for Configuring Notifications

Only the first three notification lists are supported. They are:
Notifications_list 1 for HeartBeat notifications.
Notifications_list 2 for Config Change Trap notifications.
Notifications_list 3 for Asynchronous failure notifications.
Note
In case, the other notification lists are configured, the configuration does not get applied.
Later Releases
49
Information About Notifications
Information About Notifications

Notifications are asynchronous messages generated by NID based on the events. The notifications are
transported over HTTP POST request. The NID acts as an HTTP client and the controller (ME3600 or any
other HTTP server) acts as a server.
Types of Notifications
The Cisco ME 1200 NID supports three types of notifications:
HeartBeat Notifications
Config Change Trap Notifications
Asynchronous Failure Notifications
HeartBeat Notifications
Heartbeat notifications are used to check the liveliness of the NID. This corresponds to the module_id = 1,
and the notification_id = 1. You can use the setNotificationReceiver setNotificationReceiver_req heartbeat
30 command to configure the HeartBeat to 30 seconds. If the controller does not receive the heartbeat
notification within 30 seconds, the controller waits for an additional 60 seconds before announcing Cisco ME
1200 NID as DOWN. For more information, see Registering for HeartBeat Notification.
Config Change Trap Notifications
The registered server receives configuration change notifications when any other controller does prime changes
or accesses the NID through XML. This corresponds to the module_id = 2, and the notification_id = 1. For
more information, see Registering for Config Change Trap Notification.
Asynchronous Failure Notifications (ICLI failures)
The controller receives asynchronous failure notifications, when there are ICLI failures. Every commit action
(SOAP action) on the controller is translated into multiple ICLI commands on NID, and if there are failures
during the ICLI command execution, an asynchronous failure notification is sent to the controller that has
registered to receive the asynchronous failure notification. This corresponds to the module_id = 3 , and the
notification_id = 1. For more information, see Registering for Asynchronous Failure Notification.
and Later Releases
50
How to Configure Notifications
How to Configure Notifications

Setting Password on the Controller
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
username user_name
Configures the username.

user_nameusername.
Example:
Switch(config)# username guest123
Step 3
enable password password
Configures the password.

passwordpassword.
Example:
Switch(config)# enable password lab123
Step 4
Exits to the privileged EXEC mode.
exit
Example:
Switch(config)# exit
Switch(config)# username guest123
Switch(config)# enable password lab123
Viewing Notifications
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Later Releases
51
Viewing Notifications
Step 2
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionNotifications
Enters the Notifications mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionNotifications
Step 4
getNotificationList listAllNotifications_req
Displays the supported notifications list for

that module.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)#
Step 5
getNotificationList review
Example:
getNotificationList review
Step 6
getNotificationList commit
Example:
getNotificationList commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# exit
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# getNotificationList
listAllNotifications_req
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# getNotificationList review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# getNotificationList commit
GetNotificationList_Output.listAllNotifications_resp.notification[0].module_id = 1
GetNotificationList_Output.listAllNotifications_resp.notification[0].module_description
= 'HeartBeat'
GetNotificationList_Output.listAllNotifications_resp.notification[0].notification_id =
1
GetNotificationList_Output.listAllNotifications_resp.notification[0].notification_description
= 'Heartbeat Notifications'
and Later Releases
52
= 'ConfigChangeTrap'
1
= 'Config Change Notifications'
= 'AsyncNotification'
1
= 'ICLI command failure'
GetNotificationList Commit Success!!!
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
setNotificationReceiver setNotificationReceiver_req {heartbeat Configures the values for receiving the notifications.
heartbeat | http_BA_password WORD | http_BA_user WORD
heartbeatSpecifies the rate at which
| http_file_path WORD | http_server_address WORD}
keepalive packets are expected (in seconds).
Example:
setNotificationReceiver
setNotificationReceiver_req heartbeat 30
setNotificationReceiver setNotificationReceiver_req
http_BA_password lab123
heartbeatHeartbeat rate. The range is from 1

to 65535.
http_BA_passwordSpecifies the HTTP basic
authentication password.
WORDPassword.
setNotificationReceiver setNotificationReceiver_req
http_BA_user guest123
http_BA_userSpecifies the HTTP basic

authentication user.
WORDuser.
Later Releases
53
Command or Action
Purpose
setNotificationReceiver_req http_file_path
myfiles/nid_notification
setNotificationReceiver_req http_server_address
10.20.30.40
http_file_pathSpecifies the name of a

document/resource. For example:
/nid_notification.
WORDname of a document.
http_server_addressSpecifies the HTTP
server IP address.
WORDHTTP Server IP address.
Step 5
setNotificationReceiver review
Example:
setNotificationReceiver review
Step 6
setNotificationReceiver commit
Example:
setNotificationReceiver commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# setNotificationReceiver
setNotificationReceiver_req heartbeat 30
setNotificationReceiver_req http_BA_password lab123
setNotificationReceiver_req http_BA_user guest123
setNotificationReceiver_req
http_file_path myfiles/nid_notification
http_server_address 10.20.30.40
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# setNotificationReceiver review
Commands in queue:
myfiles/nid_notification
heartbeat 30
http_BA_password lab123
http_BA_user guest123
http_file_path
setNotificationReceiver_req http_server_address 10.20.30.40
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# setNotificationReceiver commit

SetNotificationReceiver_Output.setNotificationReceiver_resp.registerOK = true
and Later Releases
54
Registering for HeartBeat Notification
SetNotificationReceiver_Output.setNotificationReceiver_resp.cookie = 5120
SetNotificationReceiver Commit Success!!!!
Use this procedure to generate multiple cookies. In the above mentioned example, 5120 is the cookie
value.
Note

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
registerForNotification regForNotification_req {cookie cookie Lists all the registered notifications under the generated
value | notifications_list List of notifications {enable {enable | cookie.
disable} | module_id Module ID | notification_id Notification
cookieSpecifies the notification cookie with
ID }}
unique cookie value.
Example:
registerForNotification regForNotification_req cookie
5120
registerForNotification regForNotification_req
notifications_list 1
enable enable
module_id 1
notification_id 1
Note
For the Heartbeat notification, the notification_list is 1,

the module_id is 1, and the notification_id is 1.
cookie valuecookie value. The range is from 1

to 65535.
notifications_listSpecifies the list of
notifications.
List of notificationslist of notification ranges
from 1 to 10, where, the supported lists are from
1 to 3.
enableEnables or disables the notification.
module_idSpecifies the module ID from which
notifications are desired.
Module IDModule ID. The range is from 1 to
65536.
Later Releases
55
Command or Action
Purpose
notification_idSpecifies the notification ID.
Notification IDlist of notification ranges from
1 to 10, wherein the supported lists are from 1 to
3.
Step 5
registerForNotification review
Example:
Step 6
registerForNotification commit
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
regForNotification_req cookie 5120
regForNotification_req
notifications_list 1 enable enable
notifications_list 1 module_id 1
notifications_list 1 notification_id 1
Commands in queue:
registerForNotification
cookie 5120
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# registerForNotification commit

RegisterForNotification_Output.regForNotification_resp = 0
RegisterForNotification Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
56
Registering for Config Change Trap Notification

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
Lists all the registered notifications under the

registerForNotification regForNotification_req {cookie cookie
generated cookie.
value | notifications_list List of notifications {enable {enable |
disable} | module_id Module ID | notification_id Notification ID }}
cookieSpecifies the notification cookie
with unique cookie value.
Example:
registerForNotification regForNotification_req cookie 5120
registerForNotification regForNotification_req notifications_list 2
enable enable Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)#
module_id 2 Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)#
notification_id 1
regForNotification_req notifications_list 2 enable enable
regForNotification_req notifications_list 2 module_id 2
regForNotification_req notifications_list 2 notification_id
1
Note
For the ConfigChangeTrap notification, the notification_list

is 2, the module_id is 2, and the notification_id is 1.
cookie valuecookie value. The range is

from 1 to 65535.
notifications.
List of notificationslist of notification
ranges from 1 to 10, where, the supported
lists are from 1 to 3.
module_idSpecifies the module ID from
which notifications are desired.
Module IDModule ID. The range is from
1 to 65536.
notification_idSpecifies the notification
ID.
Notification IDlist of notification ranges
from 1 to 10, wherein the supported lists are
from 1 to 3.
Later Releases
57
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 6
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# registerForNotification
regForNotification_req notifications_list 2 notification_id 1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# registerForNotification review
Commands in queue:
cookie 5120

and Later Releases
58
Registering for Asynchronous Failure Notification

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
registerForNotification regForNotification_req {cookie cookie Lists all the registered notifications under the generated
value | notifications_list List of notifications {enable {enable | cookie.
disable} | module_id Module ID | notification_id Notification
cookieSpecifies the notification cookie with
ID }}
unique cookie value.
Example:
registerForNotification regForNotification_req cookie
5120
regForNotification_req notifications_list 3 enable
enable
regForNotification_req notifications_list 3 module_id
3
regForNotification_req notifications_list 3
notification_id 1
Note
For the Asynchronous failure notification, the

notification_list is 3, the module_id is 3, and the
notification_id is 1.
cookie valuecookie value. The range is from

1 to 65535.
notifications.
List of notificationslist of notification ranges
from 1 to 10, where, the supported lists are from
1 to 3.
module_idSpecifies the module ID from which
notifications are desired.
Module IDModule ID. The range is from 1 to
65536.
notification_idSpecifies the notification ID.
Notification IDlist of notification ranges from
1 to 10, wherein the supported lists are from 1 to
3.
Later Releases
59
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 6
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
regForNotification_req notifications_list 3 notification_id 1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# registerForNotification review
Commands in queue:
cookie 5120

and Later Releases
60
Listing Notifications
Listing Notifications
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
listRegisteredNotification listNotificationsRegistered {cookie Lists all the registered notifications under the
generated cookie.
cookie value}
Example:
listRegisteredNotification
listNotificationsRegistered cookie 5120
Step 5
listRegisteredNotification review

cookie valuecookie value. The range is
from 1 to 65535.
Example:
listRegisteredNotification review
Step 6
listRegisteredNotification commit
Example:
listRegisteredNotification commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# listRegisteredNotification
Later Releases
61
Deleting Notifications
listNotificationsRegistered cookie 5120

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# listRegisteredNotification review
Commands in queue:
listRegisteredNotification listNotificationsRegistered cookie 5120
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# listRegisteredNotification commit
ListRegisteredNotification_Output.regForNotification_req.notifications_list[0].module_id
= 1
ListRegisteredNotification_Output.regForNotification_req.notifications_list[0].notification_id
= 1
ListRegisteredNotification_Output.regForNotification_req.notifications_list[0].enable
= true
= 2
= 1
= true
= 3
= 1
= true
ListRegisteredNotification_Output.regForNotification_req.cookie = 5120
ListRegisteredNotification Commit Success!!!
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
delNotificationReceiver delNotifReceiver_req {cookie cookie Deletes the notifications under the cookie.
value}
and Later Releases
62
Command or Action
Purpose
cookie valuecookie value.
Example:
delNotificationReceiver delNotifReceiver_req cookie
5120
Step 5
delNotificationReceiver review
Example:
delNotificationReceiver review
Step 6
delNotificationReceiver commit
Example:
delNotificationReceiver commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# delNotificationReceiver delNotifReceiver_req
cookie 5120
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# delNotificationReceiver review
Commands in queue:
delNotificationReceiver delNotifReceiver_req cookie 5120
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# delNotificationReceiver commit
DelNotificationReceiver_Output.delNotifReceiver_resp = false
DelNotificationReceiver Commit Success!!!
What to Do Next
After deleting the notification, use the listRegisteredNotification listNotificationsRegistered {cookie cookie
value} command to verify if the delete operation is successful.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# listRegisteredNotification
listNotificationsRegistered cookie cookie value
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# listRegisteredNotification review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionNotifications)# listRegisteredNotification commit
Later Releases
63
and Later Releases
64
CHAPTER
Zero Touch Provisioning

Zero Touch Provisioning (ZTP) automates configuration of Cisco ME 1200 Series Carrier Ethernet Access
Device (hereafter known as Cisco ME 1200 NID) when it is deployed either in standalone operating mode
or through a directly connected upstream user premise equipment (UPE) controller such as Cisco
ME3600/ME3800 or Cisco ASR920. When connected through a UPE-based controller, provisioning of CE
Services can be done from the remote controller mode. Otherwise, CLI on Cisco ME1200 NID can be
accessed using SSH to provision CE Services once ZTP process is completed .
The ZTP process is activated by pressing the ZTP pinhole reset button found on the front of the Cisco ME
1200 NID. This minimizes manual operator intervention and helps reduce customers initial deployment
costs.
Note
The only interface for the ZTP is the ZTP button and the status LED, both found on the front of the Cisco
ME 1200 NID.
Figure 1: Cisco ME 1200 Topology-Typical Deployment
Restrictions for ZTP, page 66

ZTP Activation, page 66
Later Releases
65

Restrictions for ZTP
Restrictions for ZTP

ZTP inherits the security levels of the protocols it uses. Therefore, ZTP must be used in a trusted
environment, where all security concerns are handled by protocols or technologies it uses.
ZTP is not supported over IPv6.
ZTP Activation
Pressing the ZTP reset button triggers a series of steps that result in provisioning the Cisco ME 1200 NID
with a complete, operational configuration.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Note
Start ZTP.
Restore to factory defaults.
Get management VLAN Configuration from LLDP-MED.
Start the DHCP client on VLAN interface.
Download and apply the initial configuration file from a location provided by the DHCP client.
Use reverse DNS to obtain the host name of the device.
Download and apply a specific configuration file.
Ensure that initial and specific configuration files are present on the TFTP server before starting the ZTP
process.
8 Copy the running configuration to startup configuration.
and Later Releases
66

ZTP Activation
The following figure depicts the process pictorially:

Figure 2: ZTP Activation Process
This process is explained in detail in the following sections.

UPE Controller Configuration
On the UPE NID Controller, such as Cisco ME 3600X Series Ethernet Access Switch, following DHCP server,
management VLAN configuration is required:
Configure the DHCP pool and add the TFTP and DNS configurations through DHCP options. The
following is a sample DHCP pool:
ip dhcp excluded-address 7.6.0.1 7.6.19.51
ip dhcp excluded-address 7.6.19.64 7.6.255.255
ip dhcp pool ztp-test
network 7.6.0.0 255.255.255.0
default-router 7.6.0.10
-> Adding local SVI IP as default gateway
for Cisco ME 1200 NID
option 60 ascii ME1200-00-3A-99-FD-45-34
-> Adding Cisco ME 1200 NID MAC
option 43 ip 7.0.0.221
-> Adding TFTP server
option 67 ascii "ME1200_CFG"
-> Adding initial configuration-file
dns-server 7.0.0.217
Enable LLDP-MED network Policy TLV on the UPE NID Controller.

Switch(config)# interface gigabit 0/1
-> Physical port on UPE connected to
Later Releases
67

Step 1Start ZTP
Cisco ME 1200 NID

Switch(config)# lldp med-tlv-select network-policy
Switch(config)# lldp transmit
Switch(config)# lldp receive
Run LLDP.
Switch(config)# lldp run
Configure an interface connecting to the 7.6.x.x switch and allowing VLAN (e.g. VLAN 10) to be used
as management VLAN to ensure reachability to network gateway, or DHCP, TFTP, and DNS servers.
Configure the interface connecting to Cisco ME 1200 NID as trunk.
Assign management VLAN with the interface connecting to Cisco ME 1200 NID using the following
command in global config mode
Switch(config)# platform nid-controller assign vlan 10 gigabitEthernet 1/1
Step 1Start ZTP

The ZTP activation is started by pressing the ZTP reset button for five seconds or more.
Note
If the ZTP reset button is pressed for less than five seconds, a cold reload is issued.
Note
When one instance of the ZTP activation is active, another instance cannot be started. Wait for the ZTP
activation to complete (check ZTP status using LED to determine if it was successful or moved to error
state) before starting the process again.
Step 2Reload Defaults

When ZTP activation is triggered, it causes the Cisco ME 1200 NID to reload with a default configuration
that includes LLDP MED endpoint connectivity mode on all ports.
The Cisco ME 1200 NID may have links on several ports when the ZTP activation is started. All such ports
are candidates for being used for the ZTP activation, and must be ready to receive the LLDP-MED TLV,
where a packet is sent on a point-to-point link with a well-known multicast destination MAC.
The LLDP-MED information is sent every 30 seconds. To ensure that all ports receive the LLDP-MED TLV,
a 60-second timer starts the count down for LLDP initialization on all ports.
Step 3Get Management VLAN Configuration

VLAN Discovery using remote UPE-based controller
The first step after ZTP reload is the discovery of a management VLAN between the User-Facing Premise
Equipment (UPE) NID Controller, such as the Cisco ME 3600X Series Ethernet Access Switch, and one or
more Cisco ME 1200 NIDs. In this step, the LLDP-MED is used to acquire the management VLAN
configuration.
and Later Releases
68

The Cisco ME 1200 NID can be configured to act either as an end-point or a connectivity link. The default
configuration type is an end-point, where all ports are scanned for received LLDP-MED broadcast. However,
only those ports that have received a network policy with voice application type are considered. These ports
are configured accordingly, and a VLAN interface is created on the defined VLAN.
If If none of the ports received LLDP-MED TLVs after 60 seconds, or interface on UPE NID controller is
not configured to allow a specific management VLAN, ZTP process tries to configure a fallback VLAN as
described below. Hence it is better to check configurations and ensure there is no network connectivity issue
while in this step.
VLAN Discovery in standalone operating mode
If Cisco ME1200 NID is deployed without UPE NID controller or directly connected switch upstream, which
does not support LLDP-MED Network Policy TLV, a fallback mechanism is used to complete VLAN discovery.
This assumes that an external DHCP server is present on the network, which can support DHCP Option 60
and 43, and allocate IP address to ME1200 (Note: Option 60 unique identifier string will be of the form
"ME1200-00-3A-99-FD-45-34", where 00:3a:99:fd:45:34 is a sample MAC address of the Cisco ME1200.
The fallback VLAN discovery can be described as follows:
1 When ZTP is triggered using the push button on Cisco ME 1200 NID, a special, default configuration is
loaded , which includes the following commands:
ztp fallback vlan 1-4095 frame-type tagged interface Gi 1/1-6
ztp fallback vlan 1 frame-type untagged interface Gi 1/1-6
This causes DHCP replies coming from an external DHCP server to be processed by Cisco ME1200 NID.
2 If a DHCP OFFER containing a VLAN tag in the range of 1-4095, or DHCP OFFER on VLAN 1 (untagged)
is received on any one of the ports 1-6, it is used to determine management VLAN.
3 To avoid a flood of DHCP messages from being intercepted by ME1200, only DHCP replies containing
DHCP Option 60 & 43 are intercepted.
The VLAN that is determined from this fallback mechanism is used in subsequent steps of the ZTP process.
Note
The default fallback VLAN configuration can also be modified by user and the modified configuration
allowed to persist across reloads. From the DHCP pool network range and deployment, user may know
a priori of the VLAN or range of VLANs from which OFFERs are sent by DHCP server. Hence it is
recommended to modify fallback VLAN configuration from default to a reasonable VLAN range.
Example 1:
If DHCP server is on VLAN 400 and it's connecting port type is tagged, following configuration change
during initial Cisco ME1200 NID configuration will cause DHCP OFFERs on VLAN 400 to be processed
when ZTP is triggered in standalone mode.
ztp fallback vlan 400 frame-type tagged interface Gi 1/1-6
If DHCP server is directly connected to one of the interfaces (say, interface 5), this configuration can be
modified further as:
ztp fallback vlan 400 frame-type tagged interface Gi 1/5
Example 2:
If DHCP server is on VLAN 100 and it's connecting port type is untagged, following configuration change
during initial Cisco ME1200 NID configuration causes DHCP OFFERs on VLAN 100 to be processed when
ZTP is triggered in standalone mode.
ztp fallback vlan 100 frame-type untagged interface Gi 1/1-6
Note
Only a single VLAN can be configured if port-type is untagged.
Later Releases
69

If user wishes to disable fallback VLAN configuration, following command can be configured.
no ztp fallback vlan
Once configuration is modified for above steps, user can copy running-config to startup-config prior to ZTP
reset. This will cause modified fallback configuration to be present when ZTP process is restarted.
ZTP for Cisco ME 1200 NIDs in Linear Topology

If the network topology involves one or more Cisco ME 1200 NID downstream from the Cisco ME 1200 NID
connected to UPE, the following steps are required to ensure ZTP works as expected. In this case, each Cisco
ME 1200 NID is connected to the upstream Cisco ME 1200 NID through a point-to-point link.
For ZTP to work in this topology, you must trigger ZTP reset on the downstream Cisco ME 1200 NID after
ZTP has successfully completed on the upstream Cisco ME 1200 NID.
In addition, before ZTP button is pressed on the downstream Cisco ME 1200 NID, the upstream Cisco ME
1200 NID which has just completed ZTP successfully requires a change in LLDP-MED device typefrom
endpoint to network connectivity. This single manual step is required to further propagate LLDP towards the
downstream Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Consider the following topology:
Figure 3: Cisco ME 1200 NID in a Linear Topology
Configuration on Cisco ME 1200 NID1 Before Starting the ZTP Process on Cisco ME 1200 NID2:
First, on Cisco ME 1200 NID2, configure a LLDP MED media VLAN policy for voice application-type, with
frame-type and VLAN set to the same value as the upstream Cisco ME 1200 NID on which ZTP has completed.
For example,
Switch(config)# lldp med media-vlan-policy 1 voice tagged 10 l2-priority 0 dscp 0
Second, on the upstream ME1200 NID1, modify the interface connected to Cisco ME 1200 NID2, in this case
GigabitEthernet 1/4, to LLDP MED connectivity type. Also, associate this interface to the same media VLAN
policy configured on Cisco ME 1200 NID2. A sample configuration is provided below.
interface GigabitEthernet 1/4
switchport mode trunk
lldp med media-vlan policy-list 1
lldp med type connectivity
no spanning-tree
lldp transmit
lldp receive
-> Assigning media VLAN policy

-> Configuring NID1 as network device
-> LLDP transmission is enabled
-> LLDP reception is enabled
and Later Releases
70

Step 4Start the DHCP Client on the VLAN Interface
Tip
The above configuration can be included in the Cisco ME 1200 NID1 final configuration file to avoid
manual configuration after ZTP on Cisco ME 1200 NID1.
Next Steps
1 Start ZTP on Cisco ME 1200 NID1.
2 When ZTP is finished on Cisco ME 1200 NID-1, start ZTP on Cisco ME 1200 NID2.
ZTP for Cisco ME 1200 NIDs in a Ring Topology

Figure 4: LLDP-MED in a G.8032 Ring Topology
In this deployment, while Cisco ME 1200 NID-1 receives VLAN through LLDP-MED Network Policy TLV
and initiates DHCP Discovery, the Cisco ME 1200 NIDs that are downstream to Cisco ME 1200 NID-1 do
not receive LLDP-MED TLVs. This is because LLDP-MED TLVs are sent only between endpoint devices
and are not propagated beyond Cisco ME 1200 NID-1.
To allow LLDP-MED TLVs to be propagated to all downstream Cisco ME 1200 NIDs once Cisco ME 1200
NID-1 completes VLAN discovery, modify the port configuration in the same manner as the linear chain
topology deployment.
Step 4Start the DHCP Client on the VLAN Interface

A DHCP client is started on all the VLAN interfaces created in the previous step. To identify itself as a device
undergoing ZTP, the DHCP client on Cisco ME 1200 NID adds DHCP Option 60 to the
DHCPDISCOVER/DHCPREQUEST messages on the newly-discovered management VLAN, that it sends
to the DHCP server.
The Option 60 Vendor Class Identifier in DHCPDISCOVER/DHCPREQUEST message is encoded as a
unique ASCII string formed by concatenating the string "ME1200" with the complete Cisco ME 1200 NID
Later Releases
71

Step 5Download and Apply the Initial Configuration
MAC address in the form similar to ME1200-XX- XX-XX-XX-XX-XX, for example,

ME1200-00-01-C1-00-00-00. In addition, as part of the parameters list sent in DHCPREQUEST, Cisco ME
1200 NID also requests the DHCP server to send following options:
Option 43This option is used by client to accept the DHCP ACK only from DHCP server or the UPE
NID Controller specifically configured for it. The Vendor Specific Information in Option 43 is the IP
address of the TFTP server that contains the configuration file.
Option 67This is the startup configuration filename.
Option 3Default gateway
Option 6DNS Server
Note
Options 60, 43, and 67 are not used when the DHCP client is used in a non-ZTP mode.
Wait for the DHCP Client(s) to Enter the Bound State

When multiple DHCP clients have been started, the first client to reach bound state with requested DHCP
options is used further in the ZTP activation process.
Note
If no DHCP client reaches bound state with the requested options within 120 seconds, ZTP activation
process enters error state.
Once the connectivity is established between the Cisco ME 1200 NID and the UPE NID Controller , the Cisco
ME 1200 NID can be remotely managed from the UPE NID Controller .
A database of NID instances, MAC addresses, IP addresses, TFTP server, attached physical ports is maintained
on the UPE NID Controller . This information can be used for management of selected Cisco ME 1200 NIDs.
The association between the Cisco ME 1200 NID and UPE NID Controller is maintained by sending and
receiving periodic IP-based heartbeat messages.
Step 5Download and Apply the Initial Configuration

When the DHCP client on the Cisco ME 1200 NID receives the DHCPACK, it uses the information from
Option 43 and Option 67 from the DHCP client to download the initial configuration file. This configuration
file is intended as a pre-staging configuration, containing basic reachability information such as the gateway,
TFTP, DNS server, or the default VLAN configuration so that one or more NIDs can be added to network
prior to ZTP auto-configuration. But if there is no requirement, this can be an empty configuration file. The
intention of this step is to ensure that ME1200 NID can be reachable to gateway, TFTP, DNS servers. The
filename should be specified as an ASCII string using Option 67 in DHCP pool configuration on UPE.
If the download operation fails or if the configuration could not be applied, the ZTP process enters the error
state.
Note
The value of the Option 67 field will be taken as the configuration filename, including any file extension.
and Later Releases
72

Step 6Reverse DNS Lookup to Obtain Hostname
Step 6Reverse DNS Lookup to Obtain Hostname

Using the IP address of the DHCP client and the DNS server provided by the DHCP client the Cisco ME 1200
NID performs a reverse DNS query to derive its host name. When the host name is derived, it is added to the
current running configuration.
In case of failure, the reverse DNS process is retried five times. After five retries, the host name is configured
with the MAC address of the device encoded in the format as: 00_01_C1_00_00_00 (hex string values in
uppercase), where 00:01:C1:00:00:00 is a sample ME1200 NID MAC address. This allows ZTP process to
continue.
Step 7Download and Apply Specific Configuration

To perform Reverse DNS lookup, the DNS server must include the definition for a forward zone and a reverse
zone. Specifically, the forward zone must include definitions for:
Authoritative name server (NS record) containing fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) to be used for
response.
Address (A) record with hostname-IP address mapping.
The reverse zone must include the PTR record with IP address-name mapping.
Note
FQDN is set as hostname at the end of this step.

The following is a sample DNS configuration:
NS
nid1.example.com
A
192.168.2.100
nid1
IN
A 192.168.2.100
nid2
IN
A 192.168.2.101
nid3
IN
A 192.168.2.102
nid4
IN
A 192.168.2.103
...
2.168.192.in-addr.arpa.
PTR
server.example.com.
101
IN
PTR
nid2.example.com.
102
IN
PTR
nid3.example.com.
103
IN
PTR
nid4.example.com.
The specific configuration of the device is downloaded from the same TFTP server as the initial configuration.
If reverse DNS lookup fails to retrieve a hostname, then ZTP activation process looks for a filename with the
following format on TFTP server:
NID_MAC_ADDR_CFG.xml
For example, 00_3B_99_FE_5E_00_CFG.xml(hex string values in uppercase)

If there is no file stored in .xml format, then ZTP process enters the error state. In the error state, status LED
is set to blinking red.
Note
It is recommended that user makes 2 file copies of the saved, intended configuration - one named as per
the FQDN, such as nid2.example.com.xml, and the other based on the MAC address, such as
00_3B_99_FE_5E_00_CFG.xml.
Later Releases
73

Step 8Copy Running Configuration to Startup Configuration
Step 8Copy Running Configuration to Startup Configuration

The first time ZTP is performed, you must store a default xml configuration in the fqdn.xml derived from
rDNS and in NID_MAC_ADDR_CFG.xml. The following is the content of this default xml file:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<SOAP-ENV:Envelope xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
xmlns:ns0="http://new.webservice.namespace" xmlns:SOAP-ENV="http
://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/envelope/">
<SOAP-ENV:Body>
<run_cfg_resp>
</run_cfg_resp>
</SOAP-ENV:Body>
</SOAP-ENV:Envelope>
Only after this configuration is applied on Cisco ME 1200 NID, Step 8 will generate a complete XML
configuration and store the file as flash:startup-config.xml. This file can be used to replace the default
configuration in fqdn.xml and NID_MAC_ADDR_CFG.xml as required.
As a last step in ZTP activation, the running configuration (which was the result of Cisco ME 1200 NID-specific
configuration applied after reverse DNS and TFTP download) is copied to startup configuration
(flash:startup-config.xml). This ensures that running configuration is persistent.
If there is an error in copying the configuration, the ZTP process enters the error state.
The ZTP process has completed, the status LED is set to solid green.
and Later Releases
74
CHAPTER
Configuring Synchronous Ethernet

The Cisco ME 1200 NID support Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE), which is the PHY-layer
frequency-synchronization solution for IEEE 802.3 links. It is an evolution of the conventional Ethernet and
Ethernet + SDH and SONET-based synchronization. SyncE is used to synchronize and send clock information
to remote sites on the network. Each network element along the synchronization path must support SyncE.
SyncE provides only frequency synchronization, not related to time or space.
Prerequisites for Configuring SyncE, page 75
Restrictions for Configuring SyncE, page 75
Information About Synchronous Ethernet, page 76
How to Configure SyncE, page 78
Understanding Clock Redundancy, page 89
Understanding SyncE Timers, page 92
Understanding ANEG Mode, page 97
Verifying SyncE Status, page 99
Prerequisites for Configuring SyncE

Restrictions for Configuring SyncE

The port number three (3) cannot be nominated to source number one (1).
Later Releases
75

Information About Synchronous Ethernet
Information About Synchronous Ethernet

This chapter describes the Synchronous Ethernet features, standards, and limitations in the Cisco ME 1200
Series Carrier Ethernet Access Device. This chapter also describes procedures to configure Synchronous
Ethernet.
Synchronous Ethernet Overview
A separate external time-division multiplexing (TDM) circuit is required to provide synchronized timing to
multiple remote network elements (NEs) for packet transport networks like Cisco Carrier Packet Transport
system. The Synchronous Ethernet (SycnE) feature addresses this requirement by providing effective timing
to the remote NEs through a packet network without using an external circuit for timing.
With Ethernet equipment gradually replacing existing Synchronous Optical Networking (SONET) and
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipment in service-provider networks, frequency synchronization
is required to provide high-quality clock synchronization over Ethernet ports. The SyncE feature provides the
required synchronization at the physical level. Operation messages maintain SyncE links and ensure that a
node always derives timing from the most reliable source. SyncE uses the Ethernet Synchronization Message
Channel (ESMC) to enable traceability of the best clock source to correctly define the timing source and
prevent a timing loop.
The Cisco ME 1200 Series Carrier Ethernet Access Device supports Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE), which
is the physical layer frequency-synchronization solution for IEEE 802.3 links. SyncE is defined by the ITU-T
standards such as G.8261, G.8262, G.8264, and G.781. It is an evolution of the conventional Ethernet and
Ethernet + SDH and SONET-based synchronization. SyncE is used to synchronize and send clock information
to remote sites on the network. For SyncE to work, each network element along the synchronization path must
support SyncE. SyncE provides only frequency synchronization, not related to time or space.
Understanding SyncE
SyncE provides the Ethernet physical layer network (PHY) level frequency distribution of known common
precision frequency references. Clocks for use in SyncE are compatible with the clocks used in the SONET/SDH
synchronization network. To achieve network synchronization, synchronization information is transmitted
through the network via synchronous network connections with performance of egress clock. In SONET/SDH
the communication channel for conveying clock information is SSM, and in SyncE it is the ESMC.
SyncE is a standard for distribution of frequency over Ethernet links. Other standards (IEEE Std. 1588 Precision
Time Protocol [PTP], IETF Network Time Protocol [NTP], and so on) have been and are being developed or
enhanced for high-quality time distribution and Adaptive Clock Recovery (ACR) requirements.
To maintain the timing chain in SONET/SDH, operators often use SSM. Information provided by SSM Quality
Levels (SSM-QL) helps a node derive timing from the most reliable source and prevent timing loops. The
SONET/SDH header has a QL information present in the S1 bytes of its header. Hence, the SONET/SDH
does not require any specific channel for QL information exchange. As the Ethernet does not have the QL
information in its header, it requires ESMC for QL information. Because Ethernet networks are not required
to be synchronous on all links or in all locations, a specific channel, the ESMC channel defined in G.8264,
provides this service. ESMC is composed of the standard Ethernet header for an organization-specific slow
protocol, the ITU-T OUI; a specific ITU-T subtype; an ESMC-specific header; a flag field; and a type, length,
value (TLV) structure: the use of flags and TLVs aimed at improving the management of Synchronous Ethernet
links and the associated timing change.
For more information, see Configuring Synchronous Ethernet.
SyncE Standards
ITU-T G.8261: Timing and synchronization aspects in packet network
and Later Releases
76

Understanding SyncE Protocols
ITU-T G.8262: Timing characteristics of Synchronous Ethernet equipment slave clock

ITU-T G.8264: Distribution of timing through packet networks
ITU-T G.781: Synchronization layer functions
Understanding SyncE Protocols

Network clocking uses the Synchronization Status Messages (SSM) mechanism to exchange the Quality Level
(QL) of the clock between the network elements. In Ethernet, Ethernet Synchronization Message Channel
(ESMC) is used for SSM exchange.
The two important protocols used for SyncE are:
Synchronization Status Messages (SSM)
Ethernet Synchronization Messaging Channel (ESMC)
Synchronization Status Messages (SSM)
Network elements use Synchronization Status Messages (SSM) to inform the neighboring elements about the
Quality Level (QL) of the clock. The non-ethernet interfaces such as optical interfaces and SONET/T1/E1
SPA framers uses SSM. The key benefits of the SSM functionality:
Prevents timing loops.
Provides fast recovery when a part of the network fails.
Ensures that a node derives timing from the most reliable clock source.
Ethernet Synchronization Messaging Channel (ESMC)
To maintain a logical communication channel in synchronous network connections, ethernet relies on a channel
called Ethernet synchronization Messaging Channel (ESMC). This is based on IEEE 802.3 Organization
Specific Slow Protocol standards. ESMC relays the SSM code that represents the Quality Level (QL) of the
Ethernet Equipment Clock (EEC) in a physical layer.
The ESMC packets are received only for those ports configured as clock sources and transmitted on all the
SyncE interfaces in the system. These packets are then processed by the Clock selection algorithm and are
used to select the best clock. The Tx frame is generated based on the QL value of the selected clock source
and sent to all the enabled SyncE ports.
Understanding SyncE Clocks

Clock Selection Algorithm
The clock selection algorithm selects the best available synchronization source from the nominated sources.
This algorithm exhibits nonrevertive behavior among the clock sources with the same QL value, and always
selects the signal with the best QL value. For clock option SDH, the default is revertive, and for clock option
SONET, the default is nonrevertive.
The following parameters contribute to the selection process:
Quality level (QL)
Signal fail through QL-FAILED
Later Releases
77

How to Configure SyncE
Priority
External commands (Manual, Auto-revertive and so on)
Clock Selection Modes
A clock selection is said to be the best, when the clock source is configured with the highest QL and with the
highest priority (for the ones with equal QL).
The following are different clock selection modes:
Manualthe clock selector is manually set to the chosen clock source. If the manually selected clock
source fails, then, the clock selector goes to the holdover state.
Selectedthe clock selector selects the clock manually, however, the highest priority selected clock
source becomes the Source.
NonRevertivethe clock selector selects the best clock source only done when the selected clock fails.
Revertivethe selection of the best clock source is constantly searched for.
Holdoverthe clock selector is forced to the holdover state.
Freerunthe clock selector is forced to the free run state.
Manual mode is used to force selection of a specific source. It is also used to switch back to the primary source
if auto-nonrevertive mode is selected and the failure is cleared. Selected mode is used to freeze the current
clock source, in case of a failure on switchover.
How to Configure SyncE

Configuring SyncE Global Defaults
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
syncE
Enters the SyncE mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# SyncE
and Later Releases
78

Viewing SyncE Global Defaults
Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose
setSyncEglobalDefaultConfig set_global_default_config
Sets the global configuration to defaults. This

means that the SyncE feature is not configured
on the device.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)#
Step 5
setSyncEglobalDefaultConfig review
Example:
setSyncEglobalDefaultConfig review
Step 6
setSyncEglobalDefaultConfig commit
Example:
setSyncEglobalDefaultConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# exit
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEglobalDefaultConfig set_global_default_config
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEglobalDefaultConfig review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEglobalDefaultConfig commit
SetSyncEglobalDefaultConfig Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Later Releases
79

Step 2
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 3
syncE
Example:
Step 4
getSyncEglobalconfig get_global_config
Displays the SyncE global configuration details.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# getSyncEglobalconfig
get_global_config
Step 5
getSyncEglobalconfig review
Displays the configuration that are in queue.
Example:
review
Step 6
getSyncEglobalconfig commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# getSyncEglobalconfig get_global_config
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# getSyncEglobalconfig review
Commands in queue:
getSyncEglobalConfig get_global_config
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# getSyncEglobalconfig commit
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.clock_select_config.t = 5
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.clock_select_config.u.revertive = ''
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.wait_to_restore = 5
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.SSM_QL_for_holdover.t = 1
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.SSM_QL_for_holdover.u.QL_NONE = ''
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.SSM_QL_for_freerun.t = 1
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.SSM_QL_for_freerun.u.QL_NONE = ''
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.EEC_Option.t = 1
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.EEC_Option.u.EEC1 = ''
GetSyncEglobalConfig Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
80

Configuring SyncE Clock Defaults
Configuring SyncE Clock Defaults

This task configures the SyncE configurations to defaults.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
syncE
Example:
Step 4
setSyncEclockDefaultConfig set_synce_clock_config_defaults_req Set SyncE default Clock configurations.

Example:
setSyncEclockDefaultConfig
set_synce_clock_config_defaults_req
Step 5
setSyncEclockDefaultConfig review
Example:
setSyncEclockDefaultConfig review
Step 6
setSyncEclockDefaultConfig commit
Example:
setSyncEclockDefaultConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Later Releases
81

Viewing SyncE Clock Defaults
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEclockDefaultConfig
set_synce_clock_config_defaults_req
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEclockDefaultConfig review
Commands in queue:
setSyncEclockDefaultConfig set_synce_clock_config_defaults_req
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEclockDefaultConfig commit
SetSyncEclockDefaultConfig Commit Success!!!
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
syncE
Example:
Step 4
getSyncEclockdefaultConfig
get_synce_clock_config_defaults_req
Displays the SyncE default Clock

configurations.
Example:
getSyncEclockdefaultConfig
Step 5
getSyncEclockdefaultConfig review
Example:
getSyncEclockdefaultConfig review
Step 6
getSyncEclockdefaultConfig commit
Example:
getSyncEclockdefaultConfig commit
and Later Releases
82

Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# getSyncEclockdefaultConfig
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# getSyncEclockdefaultConfig review
Commands in queue:
getSyncEclockDefaultConfig get_synce_clock_config_defaults_req
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# getSyncEclockdefaultConfig commit
GetSyncEclockDefaultConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].state = false
GetSyncEclockDefaultConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].port = 1
GetSyncEclockDefaultConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].priority = 0
GetSyncEclockDefaultConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].SSM_overwrite.t = 1
GetSyncEclockDefaultConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].SSM_overwrite.u.QL_NONE
= ''
GetSyncEclockDefaultConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].hold_off.t = 1
GetSyncEclockDefaultConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].hold_off.u.disabled
= ''
GetSyncEclockDefaultConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].aneg_mode.t = 1
GetSyncEclockDefaultConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].aneg_mode.u.none =
''
= ''
= ''
''
= ''
= ''
''
GetSyncEclockDefaultConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.ssm_enable_ports.GigabitEthernet_1_UNI
= false
= false
= false
= false
Later Releases
83

Configuring the Clock Source
= false
= false
GetSyncEclockDefaultConfig Commit Success!!!
Configuring the Clock Source

Configuring Clock Source
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
syncE
Example:
Step 4
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config {source_configs

source_configs port Physical port }
Example:
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config source_configs
0 port 2
Configures the clock source on the port.

source_configsSpecifies the source
configurations.
Physical portPhysical port. The range is
from 1 to 6.
portSpecifies the physical port.
source_configsnominate a port number
to be the clock source. The range is from 1
to 2.
Step 5
setSyncEclockConfig review
Example:
and Later Releases
84

Viewing Clock Configurations
Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
setSyncEclockConfig commit
Example:
Step 7
Exits the SyncE mode.
exit
Example:
Switch((config-controller-)syncE)# exit
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config source_configs 0 port
2
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEclockConfig review
Commands in queue:
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config source_configs 0 port 2
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEclockConfig commit
SetSyncEclockConfig Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
syncE
Example:
Later Releases
85

Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose
getSyncEclockConfig get_clock_config
Displays clock configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# getSyncEclockConfig
get_clock_config
Step 5
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEclockConfig
review
Step 6
getSyncEclockConfig commit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# getSyncEclockConfig
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config)#controller nid 1/1
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# getSyncEclockConfig get_clock_config
Commands in queue:
getSyncEclockConfig get_clock_config
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# getSyncEclockConfig commit
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].state = true
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].port = 4
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].priority = 1
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].SSM_overwrite.t = 2
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].SSM_overwrite.u.QL_PRC =
'0'
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].hold_off.t = 2
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].hold_off.u.value = 800
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].aneg_mode.t = 1
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[0].aneg_mode.u.none = ''
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[1].state = true
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[1].SSM_overwrite.u.QL_PRC =
'0'
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[1].hold_off.u.value = 1000
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[2].state = false
and Later Releases
86

Overwriting the Quality Level (QL)
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[2].SSM_overwrite.u.QL_NONE =
''
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.source_configs[2].hold_off.u.disabled = ''
GetSyncEClockConfig_Output.clock_sel_config.ssm_enable_ports.GigabitEthernet_1_UNI =
false
false
true
true
false
false
GetSyncEClockConfig Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Enters the syncE mode.
syncE
Example:
Step 4
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config {source_configs |

ssm_enable_ports {GigabitEthernet_1_UNI |
GigabitEthernet_2_UNI | GigabitEthernet_3_UNI |
GigabitEthernet_6_UNI} {disable | enable}}}
Enters the SyncE clock configuration to select the UNI

ports. Here selecting the physical port 4:
GigabitEthernet_1_UNIPhysical port 1.
Example:
clock_sel_config ssm_enable_ports
GigabitEthernet_4_UNI enable
Later Releases
87

Command or Action
Purpose
disableDisables the SSM on the configured
port.
enableEnables the SSM on the configured port.
Step 5

source_configs port Physical port }
Example:
clock_sel_config source_configs 1 port 4
Step 6
Configures the clock source on the port:

source_configsNominates a clock source, either
1 or 2.
Physical portPhysical port. The range is from
1 to 6.

Selects QL value to overwrite any received QL in an
SSM message
source_configs SSM_overwrite {QL_DNU | QL_EEC1 |
QL_EEC2 | QL_INV | QL_NONE | QL_PRC | QL_SSUA
source_configsNominate a port number to be
QL_SSUB}}
the clock source. The range is from 1 to 2.
Example:
clock_sel_config source_configs 1 SSM_overwrite
QL_PRC
Step 7
Example:
review
Step 8
Example:
commit
Step 9
exit
Example:
4
SSM_overwrite QL_PRC
clock_sel_config ssm_enable_ports
clock_sel_config source_configs 1 port
clock_sel_config source_configs 1
review
Commands in queue:
and Later Releases
88

Understanding Clock Redundancy
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config ssm_enable_ports GigabitEthernet_4_UNI enable

setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config source_configs 0 SSM_overwrite QL_PRC
Understanding Clock Redundancy

On the Cisco ME 1200 NID, it is possible to configure up to two clock sources. Any Ethernet port can act as
a clock source. For the Cisco ME 1200 NID, external clock input does not exit. Based on the priority and
Quality level (QL) of the clock sources, the best source is selected.
To select the best source, nominate the clock sources, and then set priorities for each of them. Enable SSM
on ports used for synchronization. Note that QL overwrites the priority. That means, if port 2 receives QL-PRC
and port 1 receives only QL-EEC1, and even though port 1 has higher priority than port 2, the port 2 is selected
as QL overwrites.
Configuring Clock Redundancy

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
syncE
Example:
Step 4
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config {source_configs Enters the SyncE clock configuration to select the UNI ports.
Here selecting the physical port 5.
| ssm_enable_ports {GigabitEthernet_1_UNI |
GigabitEthernet_6_UNI}{enable | disable}}}
Example:
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config
ssm_enable_ports GigabitEthernet_5_UNI enable
Later Releases
89

Command or Action
Purpose
disableDisables the SSM on the configured port.
Step 5
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config {source_configs Enters the SyncE clock configuration to select the UNI ports.
Here selecting the physical port 6.
| ssm_enable_ports {GigabitEthernet_1_UNI |
GigabitEthernet_6_UNI}{enable | disable}}}
Example:
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config
ssm_enable_ports GigabitEthernet_6_UNI enable
disableDisables the SSM on the configured port.
Step 6
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config {source_configs Configures the clock source on the port. Here the
configuration is done on port 5, and the source_config is set
source_configs port Physical port}
to 1.
Example:
1 port 5
source_configsNominate a port number to be the

clock source. The range is from 1 to 2.
Physical portPhysical port. The range is from 1 to
6.
Step 7
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config {source_configs Sets the clock priority. Here the clock priority is set to 0.
{priority priority}}
priorityClock priority value. Either 0 or 1.
Example:
1 priority 0
Step 8
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config {source_configs Enables or Disables the clock source.

source_configs state {enable | disable}}
source_configsnominate a port number to be the
Example:
1 state enable
Step 9
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config {source_configs Sets the Hold-off timer value. Active loss of clock source
source_configs hold_off {disabled | | value {300 msec to is delayed by the selected amount of time. The clock selector
changes the clock source if the loss of clock condition is
1800 msec}}}
cleared within this time.
and Later Releases
90

Command or Action
Purpose
source_configsnominate a port number to be the
Example:
1 hold_off value 1000
Step 10
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config {source_configs Configures the clock source on the port. Here the
configuration is done on port 6, and the source_config is set
to 0.
Example:
0 port 5

Physical portPhysical port. The range is from 1 to
6.
Step 11
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config {source_configs Sets the clock priority. Here the clock priority is set to 1.
{priority priority }}
priorityClock priority value. Either 0 or 1.
Example:
0 priority 1
Step 12
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config {source_configs Enables or Disables the clock source.

source_configs state {enable | disable}}
Example:
0 state enable
Step 13
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config {source_configs Sets the Hold-off timer value. Active loss of clock source
source_configshold_off {disabled | value {300 msec to is delayed by the selected amount of time. The clock selector
changes the clock source if the loss of clock condition is
1800 msec}}}
cleared within this time.
Example:
0 hold_off value 800
Step 14

Example:
Step 15
Example:
Later Releases
91

Understanding SyncE Timers
Step 16
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config ssm_enable_ports
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config ssm_enable_ports
5
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config source_configs 1
priority 0
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config source_configs 1 state
enable
hold_off value 1000
6
priority 1
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config source_configs 0 state
enable
hold_off value 800
Commands in queue:
setSyncEclockConfig
setSyncEclockConfig
setSyncEclockConfig
setSyncEclockConfig
setSyncEclockConfig
setSyncEclockConfig
setSyncEclockConfig
setSyncEclockConfig
setSyncEclockConfig
setSyncEclockConfig
clock_sel_config
clock_sel_config
clock_sel_config
clock_sel_config
clock_sel_config
clock_sel_config
clock_sel_config
clock_sel_config
clock_sel_config
clock_sel_config
ssm_enable_ports
ssm_enable_ports
source_configs 1
source_configs 1
source_configs 1
source_configs 1
source_configs 0
source_configs 0
source_configs 0
source_configs 0
port 5
priority 0
state enable
hold_off value 1000
port 6
priority 1
state enable
hold_off value 800

Understanding SyncE Timers

You can manage syncE timers by changing the priority of the clock sources. You can also influence selection
by modifying the following timers:
WTR (Wait to restore) Timer
Hold-off Timer
and Later Releases
92

Configuring SyncE Timers
WTR Timer
The WTR time is activated on the falling edge of a clock source failure (in Revertive mode). This means that
the clock source is first available for clock selection after WTR Time (can be cleared).
Hold-off Timer
In the Hold-off timer, the active loss of clock source is delayed by the selected amount of time. The clock
selector does not change the clock source if the loss of clock condition is cleared within this time.

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
syncE
Example:
Step 4
setSyncEglobalConfig synce_global_conf
{EEC_Option | SSM_QL_for_freerun |
SSM_QL_for_holdover | clock_select_config |
wait_to_restore}
Enters the SyncE global configuration.

EEC_OptionSelects PLL EEC option.
SSM_QL_for_freerunTransmits SSM QL value when
clock selector is in Free Run Mode.
SSM_QL_for_holdoverTransmits SSM QL value when
clock selector is in Hold Over State.
clock_select_configSelection mode of nominated clock
sources.
wait_to_restoreSelect the wait to restore time.
Step 5
wait_to_restore wait to restore time
Example:
Enters the wait to restore time.

wait to restore timeRestore time. The range is from 0
to 12 minutes; enter the value zero to disable.
wait_to_restore 1
Later Releases
93

Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
clock_select_config {freerun | holdover | manual
manually set | nonrevertive | revertive | selected}
Enters the selection mode of nominated clock sources.

freerunSelector is forced in free run.
holdoverSelector is forced in holdover.
Example:
clock_select_config revertive
manualSelector is manually set to chosen clock source.

manually setClock source.The range is from 1 to
2.
nonrevertiveAutomatic clock selection, selecting best
clock source nonrevertively.
revertiveAutomatic clock selection, selecting best clock
source revertively.
selectedManual clock selection, selecting pt selected
clock source.
Step 7
SSM_QL_for_holdover {QL_DNU | QL_EEC1 |
QL_EEC2 | QL_INV | QL_NONE | QL_PRC |
QL_SSUA QL_SSUB}
Transmits SSM QL value when clock selector is in Hold Over

State.
QL_DNUSSM QL value is QL_DNU.
QL_EEC1SSM QL value is QL_EEC1.
Example:
SSM_QL_for_holdover QL_EEC1
QL_EEC2 SSM QL value is QL_EEC2.

QL_INVSSM QL value is QL_INV.
QL_NONESSM QL value is QL_NONE.
QL_PRCSSM QL value is QL_PRC.
QL_SSUASSM QL value is QL_SSUA.
QL_SSUBSSM QL value is QL_SSUB.
Step 8
SSM_QL_for_freerun {QL_DNU | QL_EEC1 |
QL_EEC2 | QL_INV | QL_NONE | QL_PRC |
QL_SSUA QL_SSUB}
Transmits SSM QL value when clock selector is in Free Run

Mode.
QL_DNUSSM QL value is QL_DNU.
QL_EEC1SSM QL value is QL_EEC1.
Example:
SSM_QL_for_freerun QL_EEC2
QL_EEC2 SSM QL value is QL_EEC2.

QL_INVSSM QL value is QL_INV.
QL_NONESSM QL value is QL_NONE.
QL_PRCSSM QL value is QL_PRC.
QL_SSUASSM QL value is QL_SSUA.
QL_SSUBSSM QL value is QL_SSUB.
and Later Releases
94

Step 9
Command or Action
Purpose
EEC_Option{EEC1 | EEC2}
Selects PLL EEC option.

EEC1DPLL bandwidth is 3.5 Hz.
EEC2DPLL bandwidth is 0.1 Hz.
Example:
EEC_Option EEC2
Step 10
setSyncEglobalConfig review
Example:
setSyncEglobalConfig review
Step 11
setSyncEglobalConfig commit
Example:
setSyncEglobalConfig commit
Step 12
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEglobalConfig synce_global_conf wait_to_restore 1
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEglobalConfig synce_global_conf clock_select_config
revertive
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEglobalConfig synce_global_conf SSM_QL_for_holdover
QL_EEC1
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEglobalConfig synce_global_conf SSM_QL_for_freerun
QL_EEC2
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEglobalConfig synce_global_conf EEC_Option EEC2
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEglobalConfig review
Commands in queue:
setSyncEglobalConfig
synce_global_conf
synce_global_conf
synce_global_conf
synce_global_conf
synce_global_conf
wait_to_restore 1
clock_select_config revertive
SSM_QL_for_holdover QL_EEC1
SSM_QL_for_freerun QL_EEC2
EEC_Option EEC2
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# setSyncEglobalConfig commit

SetSyncEglobalConfig Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
95

Viewing SyncE Timers
Viewing SyncE Timers

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
syncE
Example:
Step 4
Displays the SyncE global configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# getSyncEglobalConfig
get_global_config
Step 5
getSyncEglobalConfig review
Example:
review
Step 6
getSyncEglobalConfig commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# getSyncEglobalConfig get_global_config
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# getSyncEglobalConfig review
Commands in queue:
and Later Releases
96

Understanding ANEG Mode
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# getSyncEglobalConfig commit

GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.clock_select_config.u.revertive = '0'
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.wait_to_restore = 1
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.SSM_QL_for_holdover.t = 6
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.SSM_QL_for_holdover.u.QL_EEC1 = '0'
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.SSM_QL_for_freerun.t = 1
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.SSM_QL_for_freerun.u.QL_NONE = ''
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.EEC_Option.t = 1
GetSyncEglobalConfig_Output.synce_global_conf.EEC_Option.u.EEC1 = ''
GetSyncEglobalConfig Commit Success!!!
Understanding ANEG Mode

The Auto-negotiation (ANEG) mode is relevant for 1000BaseT ports only. To recover the clock from a port,
the clock must be negotiated to the Slave mode. To distribute the clock, the port must be negotiated to the
Master mode.
Following are the different ANEG modes that can be activated on a clock source port:
Prefer Slavethe port negotiates to the Slave mode.
Prefer Masterthe port negotiates to the Master mode.
Forced Slavethe port is forced to the Master mode.
Note
The port in the Locked state always remains negotiated to the Slave.
Configuring ANEG mode

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
syncE
Example:
Switch (config-controller)# SyncE
Later Releases
97

Configuring ANEG mode
Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose

Configures the clock source on the port.
Example:
clock_sel_config source_configs 1 port 2
Step 5
source_configsNominate a port number

to be the clock source. The range is from 1
to 2.
Physical portPhysical port. The range is
from 1 to 6.

Configures the ANEG mode that is relevant to
source_configs aneg_mode {forced_slave | none | prefer_master ports1 and 2, which are 1000 base T.
| prefer_slave}}
Example:
clock_sel_config source_configs 0 aneg_mode
prefer_master
Step 6
Example:
review
Step 7
Example:
commit
Step 8
exit
Example:
2
aneg_mode prefer_master
Commands in queue:
setSyncEclockConfig clock_sel_config source_configs 0 aneg_mode prefer_master
and Later Releases
98

Verifying SyncE Status

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
syncE
Example:
Step 4
showNetworkClock show_synce_status
Displays the SyncE status.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# showNetworkClock
show_synce_status
Step 5
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SyncE)# showNetworkClock show_synce_status
ShowNetworkClock_Output.show_network_clock.selector_state.t = 2
ShowNetworkClock_Output.show_network_clock.selector_state.u.holdover =
ShowNetworkClock_Output.show_network_clock.alarm_state[0].clock_source
ShowNetworkClock_Output.show_network_clock.alarm_state[0].LOCS = false
ShowNetworkClock_Output.show_network_clock.alarm_state[0].SSM = false
ShowNetworkClock_Output.show_network_clock.alarm_state[0].WTR = false
ShowNetworkClock_Output.show_network_clock.alarm_state[1].LOCS = true
ShowNetworkClock_Output.show_network_clock.alarm_state[2].LOCS = true
''
= 1
= 2
= 3
ShowNetworkClock Commit Success!!!

Later Releases
99

and Later Releases
100
CHAPTER
Configuring Ethernet Virtual Connections

Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC) as an association between two or more user network interfaces that
identifies a point-to-point or multipoint-to-multipoint path within the service provider network. An EVC is
a conceptual service pipe within the service provider network. A bridge domain is a local broadcast domain
that is VLAN-ID-agnostic. An ethernet flow point (EFP) service instance is a logical interface that connects
a bridge domain to a physical port or to an EtherChannel group in a router.
The Cisco ME 1200 NID supports the application software control modules and interfaces related to EVC.
How to Configure Ethernet Virtual Circuit, page 101
Configuring Ethernet Virtual Circuit, page 101
Creating a Policer, page 103
EVC Control Entry (ECE) Configuration, page 104
Ethernet Private Line or E-LAN, page 110
Ethernet Virtual Private Line, page 113
Other Commands For EVC Configuration, page 114
How to Configure Ethernet Virtual Circuit

Configuring Ethernet Virtual Circuit
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Later Releases
101

Configuring Ethernet Virtual Circuit
Step 2
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 3
Enters the ProvisionEVC mode.
ProvisionEVC
Example:
Switch (config-controller)# ProvisionEVC
Step 4
Adds the EVE configuration.

addEVC evcConfiguration {instance evc_instance_id | learning
{enable | disable} | nni_ports | nni_vid nni_vid_outer_tag | policer_id
policer_id}
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addEVC
evcConfiguration nni_vid 101
evcConfiguration learning enable
evcConfiguration nni_ports GigabitEthernet_6_NNI enable
evcConfiguration policer_id 1
Step 5
Reviews the addEVC configuration.
addEVC review
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addEVC review
Step 6
Sends the addEVC configuration to the

Cisco ME 1200 NID.
addEVC commit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addEVC commit
Step 7
Exits to the controller configuration mode.
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# exit
Switch(config-controller)#
Example
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionEVC
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)#
GigabitEthernet_6_NNI enable
addEVC
addEVC
addEVC
addEVC
evcConfiguration
evcConfiguration
evcConfiguration
evcConfiguration
addEVC evcConfiguration policer_id 1

addEVC review
addEVC commit
and Later Releases
102
instance 7
nni_vid 101
learning enable
nni_ports

Creating a Policer
AddEVC Commit Success!!!
Creating a Policer
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionEVC
Example:
Switch (config-controller)# ProvisionEVC
Step 4
Adds the EVC Policer.

addPolicerEVC evc_policer {cbs cbs_id | cir
committed_information_rate | ebs excess_burst_size | eir
cbsSpecifies the committed burst size in bytes.
excess_information_rate | policer_id policer_id | policer mode
{color_aware | coupled} | policer_type {mef | single} |
cirSpecifies the committed information rate.
rate_type {data | line} | state {enabled | disabled}}
Multiply by 1000 to get rate in BPS.
ebsSpecifies the excess burst size in bytes.
Example:
evc_policer cir 20000
evc_policer ebs 30000
evc_policer eir 40000
evc_policer policer_id 1
evc_policer state enabled
addPolicerEVC
addPolicerEVC
eirSpecifies the excess information rate.

policer_idSpecifies the Policer ID. The valid
values are from 1 to 1022.
addPolicerEVC
addPolicerEVC
addPolicerEVC
policer_modeSpecifies the Policer

modewhether color-aware or coupled.
policer_typeSpecifies the Policer
modewhether mef or single.
rate_typeSpecifies the rate type
policingwhether data or line.
stateSpecifies the policer statewhether
enabled or disabled.
Step 5
addPolicerEVC review
Displays the addPolicerEVC configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addPolicerEVC
review
Later Releases
103
Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
addPolicerEVC commit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addPolicerEVC
commit
AddPolicerEVC Commit Success!!!
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# exit
Number of policers allowed are 1022. Use the following scale numbers for the ECE or EVC configuration
with or without configuring QoS with tag pop 0, 1, or 2:
Maximum 510 ECEs can be configured with or without configuring QoS (0-7 COS) with one NNI port
to one UNI port.
Maximum of 340 ECEs can be configured with or without configuring QoS (0-7 COS) with two NNI
ports to one UNI or one NNI port to two UNI ports.
Maximum of 255 ECEs can be configured with or without configuring QoS (0-7 COS) with three NNI
ports to one UNI port or one NNI port to three UNI ports.
Maximum of 170 ECEs can be configured with or without configuring QoS (0-7 COS) with four NNI
ports to one UNI port or one NNI port to four UNI ports.
Maximum of 128 ECEs can be configured with or without configuring QoS (0-7 COS) with five NNI
ports to one UNI port or one NNI port to five UNI ports.
If OAM, HQoS, or EFP is configured on the Cisco ME 1200 NID, you can configure the following maximum
service instances on every UNI interface:
64 ECE or EVC with eight COS classes.
104 ECE or EVC with four COS classes.
104 ECE or EVC with two COS classes.
EVC Control Entry (ECE) Configuration

ECE rules are used to divide the UNI traffic into two service classes.
This division of UNI traffic is achieved through:
Simple NNI: All EVCs on the NNI port use the same QoS mapping and statistics.
and Later Releases
104

Configuring ECE Sample Rule 1
Note
This method requires fewer resources.
Advanced NNI: Each EVC on the NNI port has separate QoS mapping and statistics.
In the following example, multiple ECE rules are created:

For rule 1, frames received on the UNI port with PCP 4-7 values are mapped to class 4 and sent with PCP 4
in the outer tag on the NNI port.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionEVC
Example:
Switch (config-controller )# ProvisionEVC

Step 4
addECE ece_configuration ece_id ece_id
Adds ECE configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addECE
ece_configuration ece_id 2
Step 5
addECE ece_configuration control actions {class {disabled | Adds the ECE control action configuration.
specific specific_id} | direction {bothnni_to_uni |uni_to_nni} |
classSpecifies the ECE class.
drop_precedence {disabled | one | zero} | evc_id {none | specific
specific_eve_id} | policer_id {discard | evc | none | specific
directionSpecifies the direction of flow of
specific_id} | policy_id acl_policy_id | tag_pop_count
traffic.
tag_pop_count}
drop_precedenceSpecifies the drop precedence
(higher value means more dropping).
Example:
ece_configuration control actions evc_id specific 7
ece_configuration control actions tag_pop_count 1
ece_configuration control actions policer_id specific
1
evc_idSpecifies the EVC ID. The valid specific

policer_idSpecifies the policer ID. The valid
specific values are from 1 to 1022.
Later Releases
105

Command or Action
ece_configuration control actions class specific 4
Purpose
policy_idSpecifies the ACL policy ID. The
valid values are from 0 to 63.
tag_pop_countSpecifies the tagged VLAN
count to be removed (either one or two outermost
tags).
Step 6
addECE ece_configuration control egress-inner-tagaddECE Adds the ECE control egress inner tag rewrite
ece_configuration control egress_inner_tag {dei-modedei_mode configuration.
{classified | drop_prec | fixed} | dei_value dei | pcp_mode
dei_modeSpecifies the DEI modewhether
{classified | fixed | mapped} | pcp_value pcp_value | type type |
classified, drop precedence, or fixed.
vlan_id vlan_id}
dei_valueSpecifies the DEI value. The valid
values are 0 and 1.
Example:
ece_configuration control egress_inner_tag dei_mode
classified
ece_configuration control egress_inner_tag type none
ece_configuration control egress_inner_tag vlan_id 3
pcp_modeSpecifies the PCP modewhether

classified, fixed, or mapped.
pcp_valueSpecifies the PCP value. The valid
typeSpecifies the typewhether c-tagged,
none, s-custom, or s-tagged.
vlan_idSpecifies the VLAN ID. The valid
Step 7
addECE ece_configuration control egress_outer_tag {dei_mode Adds the ECE control egress outer tag rewrite
configuration.
{classified | drop_prec | fixed} | dei_value dei_value | mode
{enabled | disabled} | pcp_mode {classified | fixed | mapped}
dei_modeSpecifies the DEI modewhether
| pcp_value pcp_value | vlan_id vlan_id
classified, drop precedence, or fixed.
Example:
ece_configuration control egress_outer_tag pcp_mode
fixed
ece_configuration control egress_outer_tag pcp_value 4
dei_valueSpecifies the DEI value. The valid

values are 0 and 1.
modeSpecifies the modewhether enabled or
disabled.
pcp_modeSpecifies the PCP modewhether
classified, fixed, or mapped.
pcp_valueSpecifies the PCP value. The valid
vlan_idSpecifies the VLAN ID. The valid
Step 8
addECE ece_configuration control ingress_match {frame_type Adds the ECE control ingress inner tag rewrite
configuration.
{any | ipv4 {dest_ip_filter | source_ip_filter} | ipv6
{dest_ip_filter | source_ip_filter}} | inner_tag_match
frame_typeSpecifies the type of frame relay.
{match_fields | match_type} | mac_params {dmac_filer |
and Later Releases
106

Command or Action
Purpose
smac_filter} | outer_tag_match {match_fields | match_type} |

uni_ports {GigabitEthernet_1_UNI | GigabitEthernet_2_UNI
| GigabitEthernet_3_UNI | GigabitEthernet_4_UNI |
GigabitEthernet_5_UNI | GigabitEthernet_6_UNI}}
inner_tag_matchSpecifies the inner tag match

value.
Example:
outer_tag_matchSpecifies the outer tag match

value.
ece_configuration control ingress_match uni_ports
ece_configuration control ingress_match outer_tag_match
match_type c_tagged
match_fields vlan_id_filter specific 100
match_fields inner_pcp val_4-7
Step 9
mac_paramsSpecifies the DMAC and SMAC

default values.
uni_portsSpecifies the GigabitEthernet UNI

ports.
Reviews the addECE configuration.
addECE review
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addECE review
Step 10
addECE commit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addECE commit
Step 11
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVE)# exit
Example
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addECE ece_configuration ece_id 1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addECE ece_configuration control actions evc_id
specific 777
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addECE ece_configuration control actions tag_pop_count
1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addECE ece_configuration control actions policer_id
none
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addECE ece_configuration control ingress_match
uni_ports GigabitEthernet_2_UNI enable
outer_tag_match match_type c_tagged
Later Releases
107

Configuring the ECE Sample Rule 2
outer_tag_match match_fields vlan_id_filter specific 100

outer_tag_match match_fields inner_dei any
outer_tag_match match_fields inner_pcp val_any
Commands in queue:
addECE ece_configuration ece_id 1
addECE ece_configuration control actions evc_id specific 777
addECE ece_configuration control actions tag_pop_count 1
addECE ece_configuration control actions policer_id none
addECE ece_configuration control ingress_match uni_ports GigabitEthernet_2_UNI enable
addECE ece_configuration control ingress_match outer_tag_match match_type c_tagged
addECE ece_configuration control ingress_match outer_tag_match match_fields vlan_id_filter
specific 100
addECE ece_configuration control ingress_match outer_tag_match match_fields inner_dei any
addECE ece_configuration control ingress_match outer_tag_match match_fields inner_pcp
val_any
Clearing Socket 4 Clearing Socket 4
AddECE Commit Success!!!
Configuring the ECE Sample Rule 2

For rule 2, other frames received on the UNI port are mapped to class 0 and sent with PCP 0 in the outer tag
on the NNI port.
Note
The configuration steps are similar to the ones mentioned in the Configuring ECE Sample Rule 1section.
Example
specific 7
1
specific 1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addECE ece_configuration control actions class
specific 0
outer_tag_match match_fields inner_pcp val_0-3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addECE ece_configuration control egress_outer_tag
pcp_mode fixed
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addECE ece_configuration control egress_outer_tag
pcp_value 0
and Later Releases
108


For rule 3, frames received on the NNI port 6 with S-tag 101 and C-tag 100 with any PCP values can be
mapped to class 4 and sent with PCP 4 on the UNI port.
Note
The configuration steps are similar to the ones mentioned in the Configuring ECE Sample Rule 1 section.
Example
specific 7
specific 4
pcp_mode fixed
pcp_value 4

addECE ece_configuration control actions evc_id
addECE ece_configuration control actions class
addECE ece_configuration control ingress_match
addECE ece_configuration control egress_inner_tag
addECE ece_configuration control egress_inner_tag
addECE commit

For rule 4, insert a new c-tag in frames forwarding to the NNI port.
Note
Example
specific 7
1
specific 1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addECE ece_configuration control egress_inner_tag
type c_tagged
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# addECE ece_configuration control egress_inner_tag
vlan_id 77
Later Releases
109


For rule 5, insert a new tag in frames forwarding to the UNI port, the outer tag for NNI - UNI direction for
the ECE.
Note
Example
nni_to_uni
to pass
specific 7
to an EVC configured above.
enabled
vlan_id 78

addECE ece_configuration control actions direction
---> This field is mandatory
addECE ece_configuration control actions evc_id
---> Map this ECE rule
addECE ece_configuration control ingress_match
addECE ece_configuration control egress_outer_tag
addECE ece_configuration control egress_outer_tag
addECE commit
Ethernet Private Line or E-LAN

Ethernet Private Line (EPL) or E-LAN and Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL) are Carrier Ethernet data
services defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum. E-LAN provides a point-to-point Ethernet virtual connection
(EVC) between a pair of dedicated usernetwork interfaces (UNIs), with a high degree of transparency.
The following diagrams show a Provider Network offering various types of E-LAN between two UNIs.
Figure 5: An Unprotected Ethernet-LAN
and Later Releases
110

Configuring ECE for E-LAN Between Two UNI and NNI Ports
The following diagram shows an ethernet private (EP) line with 1-to-1 port protection on the network-network
interface (NNI) side. This setup requires more resources compared to the unprotected EP-Line, because rules
must be added for both NNI ports.
Figure 6: Port Protected E-LAN
The following diagram shows an ethernet LAN with ring protection on the network-network interface (NNI)
side. The resource consumption is similar to the port protection scenario, because rules are added for each
NNI port.
Figure 7: Ring-Protected E-LAN
The following sections describe how to configure the Edge Bridges.
Configuring ECE for E-LAN Between Two UNI and NNI Ports
For more information on configuring ECE, see the EVC Control Entry (ECE) Configuration section.
ECE Rule 1 on UNI Interface 3
1
specific 9
specific 1
Later Releases
111

Configuring EVC for E-LAN

ECE Rule 1 on UNI Interface 2

1
specific 9
specific 1
Note
Tag POP count is 1 for E-LAN service, that is, all frames are passed to the EVC popping one tag in the
direction from UNI to NNI and pushing one tag in the other direction.
Configuring EVC for E-LAN

For more information on configuring EVC, see the Configuring Ethernet Virtual Circuitsection.
Example
addEVC
addEVC
addEVC
addEVC
addEVC
evcConfiguration
evcConfiguration
evcConfiguration
evcConfiguration
evcConfiguration

addEVC review
addEVC commit
and Later Releases
112
instance 9
internal_vid 400
nni_vid 400
learning enable
nni_ports

Ethernet Virtual Private Line
Ethernet Virtual Private Line

The following diagram shows an unprotected ethernet virtual private line (EVP-Line) forwarding frames with
C-VID = 17 between the user-network interface (UNI) ports.
Figure 8: Unprotected EVP-Line
Thie following section describes the configuration of the EVPL service between the UNI and NNI ports.
Configuring ECE For EVPL Service

For more information on configuring ECE, see the EVC Control Entry (ECE) Configuration section.
Example
specific 8
specific 1
outer_tag_match match_fields vlan_id_filter range 300-350
Note
The above ECE rule allows all VLANs ranging from 300 to 350. However, if you need to filter specific
VLANs then you must create individual ECE rules. For more information, see Configuring ECE Sample
Rule 1.
Configuring EVC For EVPL Service

For more information on configuring EVC, see the Configuring Ethernet Virtual Circuit section.
Later Releases
113

Other Commands For EVC Configuration
Example
addEVC
addEVC
addEVC
addEVC
addEVC
evcConfiguration
evcConfiguration
evcConfiguration
evcConfiguration
evcConfiguration
instance 8
internal_vid 200
nni_vid 200
learning enable
nni_ports

addEVC review
addEVC commit

Clearing EVC Statistics
clearEVCStatistics clear_evc_stats {all | ece | evc_id | physical_port}
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# clearEVCStatistics clear_evc_stats all
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# clearEVCStatistics clear_evc_stats ece ece_id
<1-1024>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# clearEVCStatistics clear_evc_stats ece physical_port
<1-6>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# clearEVCStatistics clear_evc_stats evc_id <1-1024>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# clearEVCStatistics clear_evc_stats physical_port
<1-6>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# clearEVCStatistics review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# clearEVCStatistics commit
Using the Default Configuration

default
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# default
Note
This command resets all configuration to default values.

Use this command to delete the ECE configuration.
deleteECE delete_ece_request ece_id
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# deleteECE delete_ece_request <1-1024>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# deleteECE review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# deleteECE commit
Use this command to delete the EVC configuration.

deleteEVC deleteEVCrequest evc_id
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# deleteEVC deleteEVCrequest <1-1024>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# deleteEVC review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# deleteEVC commit
Use this command to delete the EVC Policer request.
and Later Releases
114

deletePolicerEVC evc_policer_id evc_policer_id

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# deletePolicerEVC evc_policer_id <1-1024>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# deletePolicerEVC review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# deletePolicerEVC commit
Editing Configuration
Use this command to edit the ECE configuration.
editECEConfiguration ece_update_configuration {ece_id ece_id | update {class | direction |
drop_precedence | evc_id | policer_id | rule_type | tag_pop_count | tx_lookup}}
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# editECEConfiguration ece_update_configuration
<1-1024>
class disabled
class specific <0-7>
direction both
direction nni_to_uni
direction uni_to_nni
drop_precedence disabled
drop_precedence one
drop_precedence zero
evc_id none
evc_id specific <1-1024>
policer_id discard
policer_id evc
policer_id none
policer_id specific
policy_id <0-63>
rule_type both
rule_type rx
rule_type tx
tag_pop_count <0-2>
tx_lookup isdx
tx_lookup vid_only
tx_lookup vid_pcp
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# editECEConfiguration review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# editECEConfiguration commit
ece_id
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
update
Use this command to edit the EVC configuration.

editEVCConfiguration evcupdateConfiguration {instance instance_id | update {internal_vid | learning
| nni_ports | nni_vid | policer_id}}
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# editEVCConfiguration evcupdateConfiguration instance
<1-1024>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# editEVCConfiguration evcupdateConfiguration update
Later Releases
115

internal_vid <1-4095>
learning
nni_ports
nni_vid
policer_id
editEVCConfiguration evcupdateConfiguration update

editEVCConfiguration review
editEVCConfiguration commit
Enabling/Disabling/Modifying EVC Policer

Use this command to enable the EVC Policer.
enableEVCpolicer evc_policer_enable policer_id
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# enableEVCpolicer evc_policer_enable <1-1024>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# enableEVCpolicer review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# enableEVCpolicer commit
Use this command to disable the EVC Policer.

disableEVCpolicer evc_policer_enable policer_id
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# disableEVCpolicer evc_policer_enable <1-1024>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# disableEVCpolicer review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# disableEVCpolicer commit
Use this command to modify the EVC Policer.

modifyEVCpolicer evc_policer_enable policer_id
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# modifyEVCpolicer evc_policer_modify modify cbs
<0-100000>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# modifyEVCpolicer evc_policer_modify modify cir
<0-10000000>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# modifyEVCpolicer evc_policer_modify modify ebs
<0-100000>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# modifyEVCpolicer evc_policer_modify modify eir
<0-10000000>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# modifyEVCpolicer evc_policer_modify modify
policer_mode colour_aware
policer_mode coupled
policer_type mef
policer_type single
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# modifyEVCpolicer evc_policer_modify modify rate_type
data
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# modifyEVCpolicer evc_policer_modify modify rate_type
line
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# modifyEVCpolicer evc_policer_modify modify state
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# modifyEVCpolicer evc_policer_modify policer_id
<1-1022>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# modifyEVCpolicer review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# modifyEVCpolicer commit
Fetching EVC and ECE Configuration

Use the following commands to fetch the ECE configuration:
getECEBlankForm getECEForm
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getECEBlankForm getECEForm
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getECEBlankForm review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getECEBlankForm commit
and Later Releases
116

getECECounters ece_statistics_req ece_statistics_request

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getECECounters ece_statistics_req <1-1024>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getECECounters review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getECECounters commit
getECEConfiguration getECEconfig ece_configuration

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getECEConfiguration getECEconfig <1-1024>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getECEConfiguration review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getECEConfiguration commit
Use the following commands to fetch the EVC configuration:

getEVCBlankForm getEVCForm
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getEVCBlankForm getEVCForm
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getEVCBlankForm review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getEVCBlankForm commit
getEVC_Counters evc_statistics_req evc_statistics_request

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getEVCCounters evc_statistics_req <1-1024>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getEVCCounters review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getEVCCounters commit
getEVCConfiguration getEVCconfig evc_configuration

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getEVCConfiguration getEVCconfig <1-1024>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getEVCConfiguration review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionEVC)# getEVCConfiguration commit
Later Releases
117

and Later Releases
118
CHAPTER
Configuring Switch Ports

This document describes various virtual LAN (VLAN) configuration you can perform on the switch ports,
such as creating layer 2 and layer 3 VLANs, creating VLAN mapping, VLAN translation groups, and
modifying software ports.
How To Configure Switch Ports, page 119
How To Configure Switch Ports

Creating Layer 2 VLANs
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
Creates the VLAN list. The valid values are from

1 to 4095.
Example:
Later Releases
119

Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
Displays the createVlanCommand configuration.
Example:
Step 6
Sends the createVlanCommand configuration

to the Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
Example
100-4095
Commands in queue:
Vlan Creation Commit Success!!!
Verifying Layer 2 VLAN Configuration

The following is a sample output of the command that displays in brief the configured layer 2 VLAN list:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# showVlans showVlanRequest brief
Commands in queue:
showVlans showVlanRequest brief
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# showVlans commit
Configured Vlan List:

1
Show Vlans Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
120

Deleting Layer 2 VLANs

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
deleteVlanCommand deleteVlanReq vlan_list vlan_list
Deletes the VLAN list.
Example:
deleteVlanCommand deleteVlanReq vlan_list 100-4095
Step 5
deleteVlanCommand review
Displays the deleteVlanCommand

configuration.
Example:
deleteVlanCommand review
Step 6
deleteVlanCommand commit
Sends the deleteVlanCommand configuration

Example:
deleteVlanCommand commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Example
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteVlanCommand deleteVlanReq vlan_list
100-4095
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteVlanCommand review
Commands in queue:
deleteVlanCommand deleteVlanReq vlan_list 100-4095
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteVlanCommand commit
Later Releases
121

DeleteVlanCommand_Output.deleteVlanResp = 0
Vlan Deletion Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3

mode.
Example:
Step 4
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq vlan_id vlan_id
Creates the interface VLAN list.
Example:
Step 5
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq {address {ipv4 {dhcp |

ipv4_address} | ipv6 ipv6_address } | vlan_id
Creates the interface VLAN on the specified

IPv4 or IPv6 address, or VLAN ID.
Example:
address 22.22.22.3
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq address ipv4 ipv4_address mask
255.255.255.0
2001:4::1/64
Step 6
Displays the createIntVlan configuration.
Example:
Step 7
Sends the createIntVlan configuration to

Example:
and Later Releases
122

Step 8
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller)
Example
22
ipv4 ipv4_address address 22.22.22.3
ipv4 ipv4_address mask 255.255.255.0
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq vlan_Id

Commands in queue:
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq address ipv4 ipv4_address address 22.22.22.3
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq address ipv4 ipv4_address mask 255.255.255.0
22
ipv6 ipv6_address 2001:4::1/64
Commands in queue:
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq address ipv6 ipv6_address 2001:4::1/64
Later Releases
123

Creating Layer 3 VLANs With Dynamic IP Address

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq deleteVlanReq vlan_list

vlan_list

VLAN.
Example:
Step 5
createIntVlan createIntVlanReq address ipv4 dhcp

address.
Example:
Step 6
Displays the createIntVlan configuration.
Example:
Step 7
Sends the createIntVlan configuration to the

Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Example:
Step 8
exit
Example:
and Later Releases
124

Example
23
ipv4 dhcp
Commands in queue:
Verifying Layer 3 VLANs With Dynamic IP Address

The following is a sample output to display the layer 3 VLANs configured with a dynamic IP address:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# showIntVlan showIntVlanReq vlan_list
23
Commands in queue:
showIntVlan showIntVlanReq vlan_list 23
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# showIntVlan commit
ShowIntVlan_Output.showIntVlanResp.vlan_list[0].vlan_id = 23
ShowIntVlan_Output.showIntVlanResp.vlan_list[0].Link = 'LINK:
00-3a-99-fd-4d-05 Mtu:1500'
ShowIntVlan_Output.showIntVlanResp.vlan_list[0].dhcp = 'DHCP'
ShowIntVlan_Output.showIntVlanResp.vlan_list[0].ipv6_address = 'IPv6
Address not configured'
Show Interface Vlan Commit Success!!!
Deleting Layer 3 VLANs

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Later Releases
125

Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 4
deleteIntVlan deleteIntVlanReq vlan_list vlan_list
Deletes the VLAN list on the interface.
Example:
deleteIntVlan deleteIntVlanReq vlan_list 23
Step 5
deleteIntVlan review
Displays the deleteIntVlan configuration.
Example:
deleteIntVlan review
Step 6
deleteIntVlan commit
Sends the deleteIntVlan configuration to the

Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Example:
deleteIntVlan commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
Example
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteIntVlan deleteIntVlanReq vlan_list
23
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteIntVlan review
Commands in queue:
deleteIntVlan deleteIntVlanReq vlan_list 23
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteIntVlan commit
DeleteIntVlan_Output.deleteIntVlanResp = 0
Delete Interface Vlan Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
126

Creating a VLAN Translation Group

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
createVlanTranslationGroup createVlanTranslationGroupReq Creates the VLAN Translation group ID.

group_id group_id
Example:
createVlanTranslationGroup createVlanTranslationGroupReq
group_Id 3
Step 5
createVlanTranslationGroup createVlanTranslationGroupReq Creates the VLAN translation

{vlan_idvlan_id | vlan_list vlan_list}
vlan_idSets the VLAN ID on which
translation occurs.
Example:
createVlanTranslationGroup createVlanTranslationGroupReq
vlan_id 22
Step 6
createVlanTranslationGroup review
vlan_listSets the VLAN list that needs

to be translated.
Displays the createVlanTranslationGroup
configuration.
Example:
Step 7
createVlanTranslationGroup commit
Sends the createVlanTranslationGroup

configuration to the Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Example:
createVlanTranslationGroup commit
Step 8
exit
Example:
Later Releases
127

Example
createVlanTranslationGroupReq group_Id 3
createVlanTranslationGroupReq vlan_id 22
createVlanTranslationGroupReq vlan_list 100,101,102
createVlanTranslationGroup
Commands in queue:
createVlanTranslationGroup createVlanTranslationGroupReq group_Id 3
createVlanTranslationGroup createVlanTranslationGroupReq vlan_id 22
createVlanTranslationGroup createVlanTranslationGroupReq vlan_list 100,101,102
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# createVlanTranslationGroup commit
CreateVlanTranslationGroup_Output.createVlanTranslationGroupResp = 0
Create VlanTranslation Commit Success!!!
Deleting VLAN Translation Groups

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
deleteVlanTranslation deleteVlanTranslationGroupReq
group_idgroup_id
Deletes the specified VLAN Translation group

id.
Example:
group_id 3
and Later Releases
128

Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
deleteVlanReq vlan_list vlan_list
Deletes the specified VLAN Translation

VLAN list.
Example:
vlan_list 2,3
Step 6
deleteVlanTranslation review
Displays the deleteVlanTranslation

configuration.
Example:
deleteVlanTranslation review
Step 7
deleteVlanTranslation commit
Sends the deleteVlanTranslation configuration

Example:
deleteVlanTranslation commit
Step 8
exit
Example:
Example
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteVlanTranslation
deleteVlanTranslationGroupReq group_id 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteVlanTranslation
deleteVlanTranslationGroupReq vlan_list 100,101,102
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteVlanTranslation review
Commands in queue:
deleteVlanTranslation deleteVlanTranslationGroupReq group_id 3
deleteVlanTranslation deleteVlanTranslationGroupReq vlan_list 100,101,102
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteVlanTranslation commit
DeleteVlanTranslation_Output.deleteVlanTranslationGroupResp = 0
Delete VlanTranslation Commit Success!!!
Verifying VLAN Translation Group

The following is a sample output of the command to verify the VLAN translation group configuration:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# showVlanTranslation
showVlanTranslationGroupReq
all
Later Releases
129

Creating VLAN Mapping
Commands in queue:
showVlanTranslation showVlanTranslationGroupReq all
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# showVlanTranslation commit
ShowVlanTranslation_Output.showVlanTranslationGroupResp[0].group_id = 3
ShowVlanTranslation_Output.showVlanTranslationGroupResp[0].vlan_list =
100
ShowVlanTranslation_Output.showVlanTranslationGroupResp[0].transvlan_id
= 22
101
= 22
102
= 22
Show VlanTranslation Commit Success!!!

Before You Begin
VLAN Mapping should be created for the VLAN translation group, and the mapping interface should be
bound to that translation group.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
and Later Releases
130

Command or Action
Step 4
Purpose
createVlanMapping createVlanMappingReq group_id group_id Creates the VLAN mapping group ID.
Example:
createVlanMapping createVlanMappingReq group_id 3
Step 5
createVlanMapping createVlanMappingReq interface interface_id Creates the VLAN mapping on the specified
interface.
Example:
createVlanMapping createVlanMappingReq interface 5
Step 6
createVlanMapping review
Displays the createVlanMapping

configuration.
Example:
createVlanMapping review
Step 7
createVlanMapping commit
Sends the createVlanMapping configuration

Example:
createVlanMapping commit
Step 8
exit
Example:
Example
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# createVlanMapping createVlanMappingReq
group_id 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# createVlanMapping createVlanMappingReq
interface 5
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# createVlanMapping review
Commands in queue:
createVlanMapping createVlanMappingReq group_id 3
createVlanMapping createVlanMappingReq interface 5
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# createVlanMapping commit
CreateVlanMapping_Output.createVlanMappingResp = 0
Create VlanMapping Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
131

Deleting VLAN Mapping

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
deleteVlanMapping deleteVlanMappingReq interface

interface_id
Deleted VLAN mapping for the specified

interface.
Example:
deleteVlanMapping deleteVlanMappingReq interface 5
Step 5
deleteVlanMapping review
Displays the deleteVlanMapping configuration.
Example:
deleteVlanMapping review
Step 6
deleteVlanMapping commit
Sends the deleteVlanMapping configuration to

Example:
deleteVlanMapping commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
Example
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteVlanMapping deleteVlanMappingReq
interface 5
and Later Releases
132

Modifying Switch Ports
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteVlanMapping review

Commands in queue:
deleteVlanMapping deleteVlanMappingReq interface 5
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteVlanMapping commit
DeleteVlanMapping_Output.deleteVlanMappingResp = 0
Delete Vlan Mapping Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig interface interface_id
Modifies the switchport configuration on the defined

interface.
Example:
Step 5
modifySwPort modifySWConfig { interface | intf-description

| mode}
interfaceSelects the interface to be

configured.
Example:
intf-descriptionSpecifies the description

of the interface.
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig interface 4
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig intf-description
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode
Step 6
modeDisplays the mode of operation.
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode access vlan vlan_id Sets the mode to ACCESS, and assigns a VLAN.
Example:
trunk native vlan 2
Later Releases
133

Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode trunk {allowed

Sets the mode to TRUNK.
Example:

removeRemoves either all VLANs or
vlan_idThe VLAN ID. The valid values are
from 0 to 4095.
Step 8
modifySwPort review
Displays the modifySwPort configuration.
Example:
modifySwPort review
Step 9
modifySwPort commit
Sends the modifySwPort configuration to the Cisco

ME 1200 NID.
Example:
modifySwPort commit
Step 10
exit
Example:
exit
Example
interaface 4
trunk native vlan 2
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig
modifySwPort review
Commands in queue:
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode trunk allowed vlan add vlan_list 200-225
and Later Releases
134

Note
To configure the Switch Port mode as hybrid and the Port description, use modifySwPort_v2. In addition
to the available parameters for modifySwPort, the following are the new parameters available:
hybrid - Sets mode to HYBRID unconditionally.
intf_description description - Configures interface description.
Example
The following example shows how to configure Switch Port mode as hybrid using modifySwPort_v2.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# modifySwPort_v2 modifySWConfig interaface
1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# modifySwPort_v2 modifySWConfig mode
hybrid allowed vlan remove vlan_list 1-100
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# modifySwPort-v2 modifySWConfig mode
hybrid port_type c_port
hybrid ingress_filtering enable
hybrid ingress_acceptance tagged
hybrid egress_tag all
hybrid native vlan 10
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# modifySwPort_v2 review
Commands in queue:
modifySwPort_v2
modifySwPort_v2
modifySwPort_v2
modifySwPort_v2
modifySwPort_v2
modifySwPort_v2
modifySwPort_v2
modifySWConfig
modifySWConfig
modifySWConfig
modifySWConfig
modifySWConfig
modifySWConfig
modifySWConfig
interaface 1
mode hybrid allowed vlan remove vlan_list 1-100
mode hybrid port_type c_port
mode hybrid ingress_filtering enable
mode hybrid ingress_acceptance tagged
mode hybrid egress_tag all
mode hybrid native vlan 10
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# modifySwPort_v2 commit
Example
The following example shows how to configure interface description using modifySwPort_v2.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# modifySwPort_v2 modifySWConfig interaface
1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# modifySwPort_v2 modifySWConfig
intf_description description connected_to_r1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# modifySwPort_v2 review
Commands in queue:
modifySwPort_v2 modifySWConfig interaface 1
modifySwPort_v2 modifySWConfig intf_description description connected_to_r1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# modifySwPort_v2 commit
Later Releases
135

Deleting Switch Ports

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
deleteSwPort deleteSwPortReq interface interface_id
Deletes the switchport on the specified

interface.
Example:
deleteSwPort deleteSwPortReq interaface 5
Step 5
deleteSwPort deleteSwPortReq mode {access | trunk}
Deletes the switchport on the specified mode.
Example:
deleteSwPort deleteSwPortReq mode access
Step 6
deleteSwPort review
Displays the deleteSwPort configuration.
Example:
deleteSwPort review
Step 7
deleteSwPort commit
Sends the deleteSwPort configuration to the

Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Example:
deleteSwPort commit
Step 8
exit
Example:
Example
and Later Releases
136


Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteSwPort deleteSwPortReq interaface
5
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteSwPort deleteSwPortReq mode
access
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteSwPort review
Commands in queue:
deleteSwPort deleteSwPortReq interaface 5
deleteSwPort deleteSwPortReq mode access
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# deleteSwPort commit
DeleteSwPort_Output.deleteSwPortResp = 0
Delete SwitchPort Commit Success!!!
Verifying Switch Port Details

The following is a sample output to verify all details of the switch ports:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# showSwPort showSwPortReq all all
Commands in queue:
showSwPort showSwPortReq all all
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# showSwPort commit
ShowSwPort_Output.showSwPortResp.interface_list[0].name = 'GigabitEthernet
1/1'
ShowSwPort_Output.showSwPortResp.interface_list[0].admin_mode = 'trunk'
ShowSwPort_Output.showSwPortResp.interface_list[0].access_mode = 1
ShowSwPort_Output.showSwPortResp.interface_list[0].trunk_mode = 1
ShowSwPort_Output.showSwPortResp.interface_list[0].trunk_members = '1-4095'
1/2'
1/3'
1/4'
1/5'
ShowSwPort_Output.showSwPortResp.interface_list[4].admin_mode = 'access'
Later Releases
137

1/6'
ShowSwPort_Output.showSwPortResp.interface_list[5].admin_mode = 'access'
Show SwitchPort Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
138
CHAPTER
Configuring Spanning-Tree Protocol

The Cisco ME 1200 Series Carrier Ethernet Access Device supports Spanning-Tree Protocol (STP), and this
chapter describes how to configure the STP on port-based VLANs. On the Cisco ME 1200 NID, the STP is
enabled by default on physical interfaces.
Prerequisites for Configuring Spanning-Tree Protocol, page 139
Information About Spanning-Tree Protocol, page 139
Understanding Spanning-Tree Modes and Protocols, page 142
Understanding MSTP Configuration, page 142
How to Configure Spanning-Tree Protocol, page 145
Verifying Spanning-Tree Status, page 158
Verifying Spanning-Tree Summary, page 159
Prerequisites for Configuring Spanning-Tree Protocol

Information About Spanning-Tree Protocol

STP is a Layer 2 link management protocol that provides path redundancy while preventing loops in the
network.
For a Layer 2 Ethernet network to function properly, only one active path can exist between any two stations.
Multiple active paths among end stations cause loops in the network. If a loop exists in the network, end
stations might receive duplicate messages. Devices might also learn end-station MAC addresses on multiple
Layer 2 interfaces. These conditions result in an unstable network. Spanning-tree operation is transparent to
end stations, which cannot detect whether they are connected to a single LAN segment or a switched LAN
of multiple segments.
Later Releases
139

The STP uses a spanning-tree algorithm to select one switch of a redundantly connected network as the root
of the spanning tree. The algorithm calculates the best loop-free path through a switched Layer 2 network by
assigning a role to each port based on the role of the port in the active topology:
RootA forwarding port elected for the spanning-tree topology
DesignatedA forwarding port elected for every switched LAN segment
AlternateA blocked port providing an alternate path to the root bridge in the spanning tree
BackupA blocked port in a loopback configuration
The switch that has all of its ports as the designated role or the backup role is the root switch. The switch that
has at least one of its ports in the designated role is called the designated switch.
Spanning tree forces redundant data paths into a standby (blocked) state. If a network segment in the spanning
tree fails and a redundant path exists, the spanning-tree algorithm recalculates the spanning-tree topology and
activates the standby path. Switches send and receive spanning-tree frames, called bridge protocol data units
(BPDUs), at regular intervals. The switches do not forward these frames but use them to construct a loop-free
path. BPDUs contain information about the sending switch and its ports, including switch and MAC addresses,
switch priority, port priority, and path cost. Spanning tree uses this information to elect the root switch and
root port for the switched network and the root port and designated port for each switched segment.
When two ports on a switch are part of a loop, the spanning-tree port priority and path cost settings control
which port is put in the forwarding state and which is put in the blocking state. The spanning-tree port priority
value represents the location of a port in the network topology and how well it is located to pass traffic. The
path cost value represents the media speed.
Note
The switch sends keepalive messages (to ensure the connection is up) only on interfaces that do not have
small form-factor pluggable (SFP) modules.
Spanning-Tree Topology and BPDUs
The stable, active spanning-tree topology of a switched network is controlled by these elements:
The unique bridge ID (switch priority and MAC address) associated with each VLAN on each switch.
The spanning-tree path cost to the root switch.
The port identifier (port priority and MAC address) associated with each Layer 2 STP-enabled interface.
When the switches in a network are powered up, each functions as the root switch. Each switch sends a
configuration BPDU through all of its ports, or on the Cisco ME device, only through the STP-enabled ports.
The BPDUs communicate and compute the spanning-tree topology. Each configuration BPDU contains this
information:
The unique bridge ID of the switch that the sending switch identifies as the root switch
The spanning-tree path cost to the root
The bridge ID of the sending switch
Message age
The identifier of the sending interface
Values for the hello, forward delay, and max-age protocol timers
and Later Releases
140

When a switch receives a configuration BPDU that contains superior information (lower bridge ID, lower
path cost, and so forth), it stores the information for that port. If this BPDU is received on the root port of the
switch, the switch also forwards it with an updated message to all attached LANs for which it is the designated
switch.
If a switch receives a configuration BPDU that contains inferior information to that currently stored for that
port, it discards the BPDU. If the switch is a designated switch for the LAN from which the inferior BPDU
was received, it sends that LAN a BPDU containing the up-to-date information stored for that port. In this
way, inferior information is discarded, and superior information is propagated on the network
For more information on BPDUs, see Configuring Optional Spanning-Tree features.
Spanning-Tree Interface States
Propagation delays can occur when protocol information passes through a switched LAN. As a result, topology
changes can take place at different times and at different places in a switched network. When an STP port
transitions directly from nonparticipation in the spanning-tree topology to the forwarding state, it can create
temporary data loops. Interfaces must wait for new topology information to propagate through the switched
LAN before starting to forward frames. They must allow the frame lifetime to expire for forwarded frames
that have used the old topology.
Each Layer 2 interface on a switch using spanning tree exists in one of these states:
BlockingThe interface does not participate in frame forwarding.
ListeningThe first transitional state after the blocking state when the spanning tree determines that
the interface should participate in frame forwarding.
LearningThe interface prepares to participate in frame forwarding.
ForwardingThe interface forwards frames.
DisabledThe interface is not participating in spanning tree because of a shutdown port, no link on the
port, or no spanning-tree instance running on the port.
Configuring Port Priority
If a loop occurs, spanning tree uses the port priority when selecting a spanning-tree port to put into the
forwarding state. You can assign higher priority values (lower numerical values) to ports that you want selected
first and lower priority values (higher numerical values) to ones that you want selected last. If all spanning-tree
ports have the same priority value, spanning tree puts the port with the lowest interface number in the forwarding
state and blocks the other interfaces.
Configuring Path Cost
The spanning-tree path cost default value is derived from the media speed of an interface (port running spanning
tree or port channel of multiple ports running spanning tree). If a loop occurs, spanning tree uses cost when
selecting an interface to put in the forwarding state. You can assign lower cost values to interfaces that you
want selected first and higher cost values that you want selected last. If all NNIs (or port channels) have the
same cost value, spanning tree puts the interface with the lowest interface number in the forwarding state and
blocks the other interfaces.
Configuring the Switch Priority of a VLAN
You can configure the switch priority and make it more likely that the switch is chosen as the root switch.
Admin Edge and Auto Edge
Later Releases
141

Understanding Spanning-Tree Modes and Protocols
These two values control how a port is declared to be an edge port or not. An edge port, is a port which is not
connected to a bridge. If auto edge is enabled, then the port determine whether a port is an edge port by
registering for BPDUs, and if BPDUs are received on that port.
The admin edge determines what the port should start as being edge or not.
Restricted Role and Restricted TCN
If restricted role is enabled, it causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the Common and Internal
Spanning Tree (CIST) or any Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI), even if it has the best spanning tree
priority vector. Such a port is selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected. If set, it can
cause lack of spanning tree connectivity. It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external
to a core region of the network influence the spanning tree active topology, possibly because those bridges
are not under the full control of the administrator. This feature is also known as Root Guard.
If restricted TCN is enabled, it causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and
topology changes to other ports. If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning
tree's active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information. It is set by a
network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network, causing address flushing
in that region, possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical
link state of the attached LANs transits frequently.
Understanding Spanning-Tree Modes and Protocols

The switch ports support the following spanning-tree modes and protocols:
MSTPThis spanning-tree mode is based on the IEEE 802.1s standard. You can map multiple VLANs
to the same spanning-tree instance, which reduces the number of spanning-tree instances required to
support a large number of VLANs. The MSTP runs on top of the RSTP (based on IEEE802.1w), which
provides for rapid convergence of the spanning tree by eliminating the forward delay and by quickly
transitioning root ports and designated ports to the forwarding state. You cannot run MSTP without
RSTP.
The most common initial deployment of MSTP is in the backbone and distribution layers of a Layer 2
switched network. For more information, see Configuring MSTP.
Understanding MSTP Configuration

This section describes how to configure the Cisco implementation of the IEEE 802.1s Multiple STP (MSTP)
on the Cisco ME 1200 NID. STP is enabled by default on switch ports.
Note
The multiple spanning-tree (MST) implementation is a pre-standard implementation. It is based on the

draft version of the IEEE standard.
The MSTP enables multiple VLANs to be mapped to the same spanning-tree instance, thereby reducing the
number of spanning-tree instances needed to support a large number of VLANs. The MSTP provides for
multiple forwarding paths for data traffic and enables load balancing. It improves the fault tolerance of the
network because a failure in one instance (forwarding path) does not affect other instances (forwarding paths).
The most common initial deployment of MSTP is in the backbone and distribution layers of a Layer 2 switched
network. This deployment provides the highly available network required in a service-provider environment.
and Later Releases
142

Understanding MSTP Configuration
Both MSTP and RSTP improve the spanning-tree operation and maintain backward compatibility with
equipment that is based on the (original) 802.1D spanning tree, with existing Cisco-proprietary Multiple
Instance STP (MISTP).
Understanding MSTP
MSTP, which uses RSTP for rapid convergence, enables VLANs to be grouped into a spanning-tree instance,
with each instance having a spanning-tree topology independent of other spanning-tree instances. This
architecture provides multiple forwarding paths for data traffic, enables load balancing, and reduces the number
of spanning-tree instances required to support a large number of VLANs.
Multiple Spanning-Tree Regions
For the NID to participate in multiple spanning-tree (MST) instances, you must consistently configure the
switches with the same MST configuration information. A collection of interconnected NIDs that have the
same MST configuration comprises an MST region. The MST configuration controls to which MST region
each switch belongs. The configuration includes the name of the region, the revision number, and the MST
VLAN-to-instance assignment map. You configure the NID for a region by using the global configuration
command, after which the NID enters the MST configuration mode. From this mode, you can map VLANs
to an MST instance by using the instance MST configuration command, specify the region name by using the
name MST configuration command, and set the revision number by using the revision MST configuration
command. A region can have one member or multiple members with the same MST configuration; each
member must be capable of processing RSTP bridge protocol data units (BPDUs). There is no limit to the
number of MST regions in a network, but each region can support up to 65 spanning-tree instances. You can
assign a VLAN to only one spanning-tree instance at a time.
IST, CIST, and CST
The MSTP establishes and maintains two types of spanning trees, IST and CIST:
An internal spanning tree (IST), which is the spanning tree that runs in an MST region. Within each
MST region, the MSTP maintains multiple spanning-tree instances. Instance 0 is a special instance for
a region, known as the internal spanning tree (IST). All other MST instances are numbered from 1 to
4094.The IST is the only spanning-tree instance that sends and receives BPDUs; all of the other
spanning-tree instance information is contained in M-records, which are encapsulated within MSTP
BPDUs. Because the MSTP BPDU carries information for all instances, the number of BPDUs that need
to be processed by a switch to support multiple spanning-tree instances is significantly reduced.
All MST instances within the same region share the same protocol timers, but each MST instance has
its own topology parameters, such as root switch ID, root path cost, and so forth. By default, all VLANs
are assigned to the IST. An MST instance is local to the region; for example, MST instance 1 in region
A is independent of MST instance 1 in region B, even if regions A and B are interconnected.
A common and internal spanning tree (CIST), which is a collection of the ISTs in each MST region,
and the common spanning tree (CST) that interconnects the MST regions and single spanning trees. The
spanning tree computed in a region appears as a subtree in the CST that encompasses the entire switched
domain. The CIST is formed as a result of the spanning-tree algorithm running between switches that
support the IEEE 802.1w, IEEE 802.1s, and IEEE 802.1D protocols. The CIST inside an MST region
is the same as the CST outside a region.
For information regarding Operations Within an MST Region, Operations Between MST Regions, IEEE 802.1s
Terminology, see Configuring MSTP.
Hop Count
The IST and MST instances do not use the message-age and maximum-age information in the configuration
BPDU to compute the spanning-tree topology. Instead, they use the path cost to the root and a hop-count
mechanism similar to the IP time-to-live (TTL) mechanism.
Later Releases
143

Understanding RSTP
By using the global configuration command, you can configure the maximum hops inside the region and
apply it to the IST and all MST instances in that region. The hopcount achieves the same result as the
message-age information (trigger a reconfiguration). The root switch of the instance always sends a BPDU
(or M-record) with a cost of 0 and the hop count set to the maximum value. When a switch receives this
BPDU, it decrements the received remaining hop count by one and propagates this value as the remaining
hop count in the BPDUs it generates. When the count reaches zero, the switch discards the BPDU and ages
the information held for the port. The message-age and maximum-age information in the RSTP portion of
the BPDU remain the same throughout the region, and the same values are propagated by the regions designated
ports at the boundary.
Understanding RSTP
The RSTP takes advantage of point-to-point wiring and provides rapid convergence of the spanning tree.
Reconfiguration of the spanning tree can occur in less than 1 second (in contrast to 50 seconds with the default
settings in the IEEE 802.1D spanning tree), which is critical for networks carrying delay-sensitive traffic such
as voice and video.
Understanding BPDU Guard and BPDU Filtering

BPDU Guard
The BPDU guard feature can be globally enabled on the switch or can be enabled per interface, but the feature
operates with some differences.
At the global level, you enable BPDU guard on Port Fast-enabled STP ports by using the default global
configuration command. Spanning tree shuts down STP ports that are in a Port Fast-operational state if any
BPDU is received on those ports. In a valid configuration, Port Fast-enabled STP ports do not receive BPDUs.
Receiving a BPDU on a Port Fast-enabled port signals an invalid configuration, such as the connection of an
unauthorized device, and the BPDU guard feature puts the interface in the error-disabled state.
At the interface level, you enable BPDU guard on any STP port by using the interface configuration command
without also enabling the Port Fast feature. When the STP port receives a BPDU, it is put in the error-disabled
state. The BPDU guard feature provides a secure response to invalid configurations because you must manually
put the interface back in service. Use the BPDU guard feature in a service-provider network to prevent an
access port from participating in the spanning tree. You can enable the BPDU guard feature for the entire
switch or for an interface.
BPDU Filtering
The BPDU filtering feature can be globally enabled on the switch or can be enabled per interface, but the
feature operates with some differences.
At the global level, you can enable BPDU filtering on Port Fast-enabled STP ports by using the default global
configuration command. This command prevents interfaces that are in a Port Fast-operational state from
sending or receiving BPDUs. The interfaces still send a few BPDUs at link-up before the switch begins to
filter outbound BPDUs. You should globally enable BPDU filtering on a switch so that hosts connected to
these ports do not receive BPDUs. If a BPDU is received on a Port Fast-enabled STP port, the interface loses
its Port Fast-operational status, and BPDU filtering is disabled.
At the interface level, you can enable BPDU filtering on any STP port by using the interface configuration
command without also enabling the Port Fast feature. This command prevents the interface from sending or
receiving BPDUs.
and Later Releases
144

How to Configure Spanning-Tree Protocol
Note
Enabling BPDU filtering on an STP port is the same as disabling spanning tree on it and can result in
spanning-tree loops.
You can enable the BPDU filtering feature for the entire NID or for an STP port.
For more information on BPDUs, see Understanding BPDUs.
How to Configure Spanning-Tree Protocol

Configuring Spanning-tree Aggregation Port Configurations
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionStpPortType
Enters the ProvisionStpPortType mode.
Example:
Switch (config-controller)# ProvisionStpPortType
Step 4
setStpaggConfig stpAggrConfig {auto-edge {enable |

Configures the spanning-tree port configuration:
disable} | bpdu-guardbpdu-guard {enable | disable} | edge
stpPortConfigSets the spanning-tree port
{enable | disable} | link-type {auto | point-to | shared}
configuration.
{enable | disable} | mst instance instance-id {active {enable
| disable} | cost {auto | cost-range cost_range} |
auto-edgeDetects the auto-edge status.
port-priority port_priority } |restricted-role {enable |
enableEnables the auto-edge
disable} | restricted-tcn {enable | disable}}
disableDisables the auto-edge
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)#
setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig auto-edge enable
setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig bpdu-guard disable
setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig edge disable
setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig link-type auto enable
bpdu-guardConfigures the BPDU guard.

enableEnables the bpdu-guard
disableDisables the bpdu-guard
edgeConfigures the edge port.
enableEnables the edge.
Later Releases
145

Command or Action
setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig link-type point-to
disable
Purpose
disableDisables the edge.
link-typeConfigures the port link-type.
setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig link-type shared
disable
setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig mst instance 0 active
enable
setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig mst instance 0 cost
auto
setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig mst instance 0 cost
cost-range 1
setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig mst instance 0
port-priority 1
setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig restricted-role enable
setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig restricted-tcn disable
autoConfigures the link-type as auto.

enableEnables the link-type as auto.
disableDisables the link-type as auto.
point-toForces the link-type as point-to-point.
enableEnables the link-type as point-to.
disableDisables the link-type as point-to.
sharedForces the link-type as shared.
enableEnables the link-type as shared.
disableDisables the link-type as shared.
mstConfigures the STP bridge instance.
instanceInstance. The range is from 0 to 7 where
CIST=0, MST2=1 and so on.
activeAdds or removes an instance.
enableEnables the mst instance as active.
disableDisables the mst instance as active.
costConfigures the STP cost for the port.
autoUses auto cost.
cost-rangeCost. The range is from
1-200000000.
port-prioritySTP priority of the port. The range
is from 0 to 240.
restricted-roleConfigures the port role. It is restricted
(and never a root port).
enableEnables the port as having restricted role.
disableDisables the port as having restricted
role.
and Later Releases
146

Command or Action
Purpose
restricted-tcnRestricts the topology change
notifications.
enableEnables the restricted TCN.
disableDisables the restricted TCN.
Step 5
setStpAggConfig review
Example:
setStpAggConfig review
Step 6
setstpPortConfig commit
Example:
setStpAggConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionStpPortType
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig auto-edge
enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig bpdu-guard
disable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig edge disable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig link-type
auto enable
point-to disable
shared disable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig mst instance
0 active enable
0 cost auto
0 cost cost-range 1
0 port-priority 1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig restricted-role
enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig restricted-tcn
disable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpAggConfig review
Commands in queue:
setStpAggConfig stpAggrConfig auto-edge enable
Later Releases
147

Viewing Spanning-Tree Aggregation Port Configurations
setStpAggConfig
setStpAggConfig
setStpAggConfig
setStpAggConfig
setStpAggConfig
setStpAggConfig
setStpAggConfig
setStpAggConfig
setStpAggConfig
setStpAggConfig
setStpAggConfig
stpAggrConfig
stpAggrConfig
stpAggrConfig
stpAggrConfig
stpAggrConfig
stpAggrConfig
stpAggrConfig
stpAggrConfig
stpAggrConfig
stpAggrConfig
stpAggrConfig
bpdu-guard disable
edge disable
link-type auto enable
link-type point-to disable
link-type shared disable
mst instance 0 active enable
mst instance 0 cost auto
mst instance 0 cost cost-range 1
mst instance 0 port-priority 1
restricted-role enable
restricted-tcn disable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpAggConfig commit

SetStpAggConfig Commit Success!!!
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# exit
Viewing Spanning-Tree Aggregation Port Configurations

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
getstpaggConfig getStpAggConfigRequest
Example:
getstpaggConfig getStpAggConfigRequest
Step 5
getstpaggConfig commit
Example:
setStpAggConfig commit
Step 6
exit
Example:
and Later Releases
148

Configuring Spanning-Tree Global Configurations

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# getstpaggConfig getStpAggConfigRequest
stpAggrConfig.auto_edge = false
stpAggrConfig.bpdu_guard = true
stpAggrConfig.edge = false
stpAggrConfig.link_type.t = 1
stpAggrConfig.link_type.u.auto_ = false
stpAggrConfig.mst.instance[0].active = true
stpAggrConfig.mst.instance[0].cost.t = 1
stpAggrConfig.mst.instance[0].cost.u.cost_range = 1
stpAggrConfig.mst.instance[0].port_priority = 1
stpAggrConfig.restricted_role = false
stpAggrConfig.restricted_tcn = true
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# getstpaggConfig commit
GetstpaggConfig Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
setStpglobalConfig stpGlobalConfig {edge {bpdu-filter |

Configures the spanning-tree global configuration.
bpdu-guard} {enable | disable} | mode {mstp | rstp | stp}
stpGlobalConfigSets the spanning-tree global
{enable | disable} | mst {forward-time Fwdtime | instance
configuration.
instance {active {enable | disable} | priority Prio | vlan
WORD} | max-age Maxage | max-hops Maxhops | name Name
edgeConfigures the edge ports.
| revision Revision } | port-number Port number {enable |
bpdu-filterEnables or disables the BPDU
disable} | recovery Interval | transmit hold-count }
filter (stop BPDU tx/rx).
Example:
bpdu-guardEnables or disables the BPDU

guard.
Later Releases
149

Command or Action
setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig edge bpdu-guard
enable
Purpose
modeConfigures the STP protocol mode.
setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig mode mstp enable
mstpEnables or disables the Multiple

Spanning Tree (802.1s).
setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig mst forward-time
4
rstpEnables or disables the Rapid Spanning

Tree (802.1w)
setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig mst instance 0
active enable
setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig mst instance 0
priority 0
setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig mst instance 0 vlan
1
setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig mst max-age 30
setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig mst max-hops 30
stpEnables or disables the Spanning Tree

(802.1D).
FwdtimeForward time. The range is from 4
to 30 seconds.
instanceInstance. The range is from 0 to 7
where CIST=0, MST2=1 and so on.
activeEnables or disables the instance.
setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig mst name
ciscoNID123
Prio Specifies the priority. The range

is from 0 to 61440 seconds. The range
should be given in the sets of (0, 4096,
8192...) and so on.
setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig mst revision 1111
WORDVLAN range.
setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig port-number 1
enable
MaxageMaximum age. The range is from 6

to 40 seconds.
setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig recovery interval
3000
MaxhopsMaximum hops. The range is from

6 to 40 hop counts.
setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig transmit hold-count
10
Note
If the spanning-tree mode is STP or RSTP, and if the

priority for the software needs to be changed, you can
change using mst instance 0 and priority.
NameName of the bridge. You can use 32

characters to define.
RevisionRevision. The range is from 0-65535
revisions.
port-numberConfigures the port number in the
range from 1 to 6.
Port numberPort number. The range is from
1 to 6.
disableDisables the port-number.
enableEnables the port-number.
recoveryConfigures the error recovery timeout.
IntervalInterval. The range is from 30-86400
seconds.
and Later Releases
150

Command or Action
Purpose
transmitConfigures the BPDUs to transmit.
hold-countMaximum number of transmit
BPDUs per second. The range is from 1 to 10
seconds.
Step 5
setStpGlobalConfig review
Example:
Step 6
setStpGlobalConfig commit
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig edge
bpdu-guard enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig mode
mstp enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig mst
forward-time 4
instance 0 active enable
instance 0 priority 0
instance 0 vlan 1
max-age 30
max-hops 30
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig mst name
myNID123
revision 1111
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig port-number
1 enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig recovery
interval 3000
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig transmit
hold-count 10
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpGlobalConfig review
Commands in queue:
Later Releases
151

Viewing Spanning-Tree Global Configurations
setStpGlobalConfig
setStpGlobalConfig
setStpGlobalConfig
setStpGlobalConfig
setStpGlobalConfig
setStpGlobalConfig
setStpGlobalConfig
setStpGlobalConfig
setStpGlobalConfig
setStpGlobalConfig
setStpGlobalConfig
setStpGlobalConfig
setStpGlobalConfig
stpGlobalConfig
stpGlobalConfig
stpGlobalConfig
stpGlobalConfig
stpGlobalConfig
stpGlobalConfig
stpGlobalConfig
stpGlobalConfig
stpGlobalConfig
stpGlobalConfig
stpGlobalConfig
stpGlobalConfig
stpGlobalConfig
edge bpdu-guard enable

mode mstp enable
mst forward-time 4
mst instance 0 priority 0
mst instance 0 vlan 1
mst max-age 30
mst max-hops 30
mst name myNID123
mst revision 1111
port-number 1 enable
recovery interval 3000
transmit hold-count 10
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setStpGlobalConfig commit

SetStpGlobalConfig Commit Success!!!
Viewing Spanning-Tree Global Configurations

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
getStpglobalConfig getStpGlobalConfigRequest
Example:
getStpglobalConfig getStpGlobalConfigRequest
Step 5
getStpglobalConfig commit
Example:
getStpglobalConfig commit
Step 6
exit
Example:
and Later Releases
152

Configuring Spanning-Tree Port Configurations

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# getStpglobalConfig getStpGlobalConfigRequest
stpGlobalConfig.edge.bpdu_filter = false
stpGlobalConfig.edge.bpdu_guard = true
stpGlobalConfig.mode.t = 1
stpGlobalConfig.mode.u.mstp = false
stpGlobalConfig.mst.instance[0].active = true
stpGlobalConfig.mst.instance[0].priority = 0
stpGlobalConfig.mst.instance[0].vlan = '1'
stpGlobalConfig.mst.forward_time = 4
stpGlobalConfig.mst.max_age = 30
stpGlobalConfig.mst.max_hops = 30
stpGlobalConfig.mst.name = 'sandino123'
stpGlobalConfig.mst.revision = 1111
stpGlobalConfig.recovery.interval = 3000
stpGlobalConfig.transmit.hold_count = 10
stpGlobalConfig.port_number[0] = true
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# getStpglobalConfig commit
GetStpglobalConfig Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
setStpportConfig stpPortConfig {auto-edge {enable |

Configures the spanning-tree port configuration.
disable} |bpdu-guard {enable | disable} | edge {enable |
stpPortConfigSets the spanning-tree port
disable} | link-type {auto |point-to | shared} {enable |
configuration.
Later Releases
153

Command or Action
disable} | mst instance instance-id {active {enable |
disable} | cost {auto | cost-range cost_range} |
port-priority port_priority} | port-number Port -number
|restricted-role {enable | disable} | restricted-tcn {enable
| disable}}
Purpose
auto-edgeDetects the auto-edge status.
enableEnables the auto-edge
disableDisables the auto-edge
bpdu-guardConfigures the BPDU guard.
Example:
setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig auto-edge enable
setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig bpdu-guard disable
setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig edge disable
setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig link-type auto
enable
setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig link-type point-to
disable
setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig link-type shared
disable
setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig mst instance 0
active enable
setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig mst instance 0 cost
auto
setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig mst instance 0 cost
cost-range 1
setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig mst instance 0
port-priority 1
setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig restricted-role
enable
setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig restricted-tcn
disable
enableEnables the bpdu-guard

disableDisables the bpdu-guard
edgeConfigures the edge port.
enableEnables the edge.
disableDisables the edge.
link-typeConfigures the port link-type.
autoConfigures the link-type as auto.
enableEnables the link-type as auto.
disableDisables the link-type as auto.
point-toForces the link-type as point-to-point.
enableEnables the link-type as point-to.
disableDisables the link-type as point-to.
sharedForces the link-type as shared.
enableEnables the link-type as shared.
disableDisables the link-type as shared.
activeAdds or removes an instance.
enableEnables the mst instance as active.
disableDisables the mst instance as active.
costConfigures the STP cost for the port.
autoUses auto cost.
and Later Releases
154

Command or Action
Purpose
cost-rangeCost range. The range is from
1-200000000.
port-prioritySTP priority of the port. The range
is from 0 to 240.
port_numberConfigures the port number.
Port numberPort number. The range is from 1
to 6.
restricted-roleConfigures the port role. It is restricted
(and never a root port).
enableEnables the port as having restricted role.
disableDisables the port as having restricted
role.
restricted-tcnRestricts the topology change
notifications.
enableEnables the restricted TCN.
disableDisables the restricted TCN.
Step 5
setstpPortConfig review
Example:
setstpPortConfig review
Step 6
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig auto-edge
enable
Later Releases
155

Viewing Spanning-Tree Protocol Port Configurations
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig bpdu-guard

disable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig edge disable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig link-type
auto enable
point-to disable
shared disable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig mst instance
0 active enable
0 cost auto
0 cost cost-range 1
0 port-priority 1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig restricted-role
enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setstpPortConfig stpPortConfig restricted-tcn
disable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setstpPortConfig review
Commands in queue:
setstpPortConfig
setstpPortConfig
setstpPortConfig
setstpPortConfig
setstpPortConfig
setstpPortConfig
setstpPortConfig
setstpPortConfig
setstpPortConfig
setstpPortConfig
setstpPortConfig
setstpPortConfig
stpPortConfig
stpPortConfig
stpPortConfig
stpPortConfig
stpPortConfig
stpPortConfig
stpPortConfig
stpPortConfig
stpPortConfig
stpPortConfig
stpPortConfig
stpPortConfig
auto-edge enable
bpdu-guard disable
edge disable
link-type auto enable
link-type point-to disable
link-type shared disable
mst instance 0 cost auto
mst instance 0 cost cost-range 1
mst instance 0 port-priority 1
restricted-role enable
restricted-tcn disable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# setstpPortConfig commit

SetStpAggConfig Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
and Later Releases
156

Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 4
getStpportConfig getstpPortConfigRequest {port_number

port_number}

port_numberPort number. The range is
from 1 to 6.
Example:
getStpportConfig getstpPortConfigRequest port_number 1
Step 5
getStpportConfig commit
Example:
getStpportConfig commit
Step 6
exit
Example:

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# getStpportConfig getstpPortConfigRequest
port_number 1
stpPortConfig.port_number = 1
stpPortConfig.auto_edge = false
stpPortConfig.bpdu_guard = false
stpPortConfig.edge = false
stpPortConfig.link_type.t = 1
stpPortConfig.link_type.u.auto_ = false
stpPortConfig.restricted_role = false
stpPortConfig.restricted_tcn = false
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# getStpportConfig commit
GetStpPortConfig Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
157

Verifying Spanning-Tree Status
Verifying Spanning-Tree Status

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
showStpdetail showStpDetailRequest
Displays the STP status.
Example:
showStpdetail showStpDetailRequest
Step 5
showStpdetail commit
Example:
Step 6
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# showStpdetail showStpDetailRequest
stpinfo.instance[0].instance_id = 0
stpinfo.instance[0].name = 'CIST'
stpinfo.instance[0].bridgeId = '32768.00-3A-99-FD-4B-1C'
stpinfo.instance[0].designatedRoot = '8192.00-14-1B-EC-1A-BF'
stpinfo.instance[0].rootport = '1'
stpinfo.instance[0].rootPathCost = 200022
stpinfo.instance[0].RegionalRoot = '32768.00-3A-99-FD-4B-1C'
stpinfo.instance[0].InternalPathCost = 0
stpinfo.instance[0].maxHops = 20
stpinfo.instance[0].topologyChange = 'Steady'
stpinfo.instance[0].topologyChangeCount = 31
and Later Releases
158

Verifying Spanning-Tree Summary
stpinfo.instance[0].timeSinceTopologyChange = ' 0d 00:04:49'

stpinfo.instance[0].port_status[0].active = true
stpinfo.instance[0].port_status[0].name = 'CIST'
stpinfo.instance[0].port_status[0].port = '1'
stpinfo.instance[0].port_status[0].port_role = 'RootPort'
stpinfo.instance[0].port_status[0].state = 'Forwarding'
stpinfo.instance[0].port_status[0].priority = 128
stpinfo.instance[0].port_status[0].pathcost = 3392
stpinfo.instance[0].port_status[0].edge = false
stpinfo.instance[0].port_status[0].ptp = true
stpinfo.instance[0].port_status[0].uptime = ' 0d 00:05:10'
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# showStpdetail commit
ShowStpDetail Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
showStpsummary showstpSummaryRequest
Displays the STP summary.
Example:
showStpsummary showstpSummaryRequest
Step 5
Example:
showStpsummary commit
Step 6
exit
Example:
Later Releases
159

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# showStpdetail showStpDetailRequest
StpSummaryinfo.Protocol = 'MSTP'
StpSummaryinfo.MaxAge = 20
StpSummaryinfo.ForwardDelay = 15
StpSummaryinfo.txHoldCount = 6
StpSummaryinfo.MaxHops = 20
StpSummaryinfo.bpduFiltering = false
StpSummaryinfo.bpduGuard = false
StpSummaryinfo.errRecoveryDelay = 0
StpSummaryinfo.mstp_bridge[0].instance_id = 0
StpSummaryinfo.mstp_bridge[0].name = 'CIST'
StpSummaryinfo.mstp_bridge[0].status = true
StpSummaryinfo.mstp_bridge[1].name = 'MSTI1'
StpSummaryinfo.mstp_bridge[1].status = false
StpSummaryinfo.portcounters[0].port_number = 0
StpSummaryinfo.portcounters[0].rxMstp = 0
StpSummaryinfo.portcounters[0].txMstp = 4
StpSummaryinfo.portcounters[0].rxRstp = 0
StpSummaryinfo.portcounters[0].txRstp = 0
StpSummaryinfo.portcounters[0].rxstp = 144
StpSummaryinfo.portcounters[0].txstp = 122790
StpSummaryinfo.portcounters[0].rxtcn = 29
StpSummaryinfo.portcounters[0].txtcn = 2
StpSummaryinfo.portcounters[0].rxIllegalFrames = 0
StpSummaryinfo.portcounters[0].unknownFrames = 0
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# showStpsummary commit
ShowStpSummary Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
160

Clearing Spanning-Tree Statistics
Clearing Spanning-Tree Statistics

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
clearStpstatistics stpPortSelect {all | port {port-number}} Clears the spanning-tree statistics.

allClears the statistics from all the ports.
Example:
clearStpstatistics stpPortSelect port-number 1
portClears the statistics from a specified

port number.
port-numberPort number. The range
is from 1 to 6.
Step 5
ClearStpStatistics review
Example:
ClearStpStatistics review
Step 6
ClearStpStatistics Commit
Example:
ClearStpStatistics Commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config)# controller nid
1/1
Later Releases
161

Clearing Spanning-Tree Detected Protocols
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# clearStpstatistics stpPortSelect port-number
1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# ClearStpStatistics Review
Commands in queue:
clearStpstatistics stpPortSelect port-number 1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# ClearStpStatistics Commit
ClearStpStatistics Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
clearStpdetected stpPortSelect {all | port {port-number}}

Example:
clearStpdetected stpPortSelect port-number 1
Clear spanning-tree detected-protocols.

allClears from all the ports.
portClears from a specified port number.
port-numberPort number. The range
is from 1 to 6.
Step 5
clearStpdetected review
Example:
clearStpdetected review
Step 6
clearStpdetected commit
Example:
clearStpdetected commit
and Later Releases
162

Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# clearStpdetected stpPortSelect port-number
1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# clearStpdetected review
Commands in queue:
clearStpdetected stpPortSelect port-number 1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStpPortType)# clearStpdetected commit
clearStpdetected Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
163

and Later Releases
164
CHAPTER
Configuring Link Aggregation Control Protocol

(LACP)
LACP is defined in IEEE 802.3ad standard and enables Cisco switches to manage Ethernet channels between
switches that conform to the standard. LACP facilitates the automatic creation of EtherChannels by exchanging
LACP packets between Ethernet ports.
By using LACP, the switch learns the identity of partners capable of supporting LACP and the capabilities
of each port. It then dynamically groups similarly configured port s into a single logical link (channel or
aggregate port). Similarly configured ports are grouped based on key value. For example, LACP groups the
ports with the same speed, duplex mode, native VLAN, VLAN range, and trunking status and type.
Information About LACP, page 165
How to Configure LACP, page 167
Verifying LACP, page 181
Information About LACP

IEEE 802.3ad Link Bundling
The IEEE 802.3ad Link Bundling feature provides a method for aggregating multiple Ethernet links into a
single logical channel based on the IEEE 802.3ad standard. This feature helps improve the cost effectiveness
of a device by increasing cumulative bandwidth without necessarily requiring hardware upgrades. In addition,
IEEE 802.3ad link bundling provides a capability to dynamically provision, manage, and monitor various
aggregated links and enables interoperability between various Cisco devices and devices of third-party vendors.
LACP supports the automatic creation of EtherChannels by exchanging LACP packets between LAN ports.
LACP packets are exchanged only between ports in passive and active modes. The protocol learns the
capabilities of LAN port groups dynamically and informs the other LAN ports. After LACP identifies correctly
matched Ethernet links, it facilitates grouping the links into an EtherChannel. Then the EtherChannel is added
to the spanning tree as a single bridge port.
Both the passive and active modes allow LACP to negotiate between LAN ports to determine if they can form
an EtherChannel, based on criteria such as port speed and trunking state. (Layer 2 EtherChannels also use
Later Releases
165
Configuring Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

IEEE 802.3ad Link Bundling
VLAN numbers.) LAN ports can form an EtherChannel when they are in compatible LACP modes, as in the
following examples:
A LAN port in active mode can form an EtherChannel with another LAN port that is in active mode.
A LAN port in active mode can form an EtherChannel with another LAN port that is in passive mode.
A LAN port in passive mode cannot form an EtherChannel with another LAN port that is also in passive
mode because neither port will initiate negotiation.
LACP uses the following parameters:
LACP system priorityYou must configure an LACP system priority on each device running LACP.
The system priority can be configured automatically or through the command-line interface (CLI). LACP
uses the system priority with the device MAC address to form the system ID and also during negotiation
with other systems.
LACP port priorityYou must configure an LACP port priority on each port configured to use LACP.
The port priority can be configured automatically or through the CLI. LACP uses the port priority to
decide which ports should be put in standby mode when there is a hardware limitation that prevents all
compatible ports from aggregating. LACP also uses the port priority with the port number to form the
port identifier.
LACP administrative keyLACP automatically configures an administrative key value on each port
configured to use LACP. The administrative key defines the ability of a port to aggregate with other
ports. A ports ability to aggregate with other ports is determined by the following:
Port physical characteristics such as data rate, duplex capability, and point-to-point or shared
medium
Configuration restrictions that you establish
LACP, on ports configured to use it, tries to configure the maximum number of compatible ports in an
EtherChannel, up to the maximum allowed by the hardware. To use the hot standby feature in the event a
channel port fails, both ends of the LACP bundle must support the lacp max-bundle command.
As a control protocol, LACP uses the Slow Protocol multicast address of 01-80-C2-00-00-02 to transmit
LACP protocol data units (PDUs). Operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) packets also use the
Slow Protocol link type. Subsequently, a subtype field is defined per the IEEE 802.3ad standard (Annex 43B,
section 4) differentiating LACP PDUs from OAM PDUs.
and Later Releases
166

How to Configure LACP
How to Configure LACP

Provisioning the Controller to Configure LACP
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Enters global configuration

mode.
Example:
Step 2
Enters the controller

configuration mode.
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionLacpPortType
Enters LACP provisioning

mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionLacpPortType
Step 4
ProvisionLacpPortType {clearLacpStats | default | exit | getLacpConfig |

Displays the supported
getLacpDefaults | getLacpPortConfig | getLacpPortDefaults | no | setLacpConfig configurations for LACP.
| setLacpDefaults | setLacpPortConfig | setLacpPortDefaults | showLacpAggLB |
showLacpInternal | showLacpNeighbors | showLacpStats | showLacpSysId}
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# ?
ProvisionLacpPortType sub-mode commands:
clearLacpStats
Clear LACP statistics request
default
Set a command to its defaults
exit
Exit from ProvisionLacpPortType sub configuration
mode
getLacpConfig
Get LACP configuration request
getLacpDefaults
Get LACP default configuration request
getLacpPortConfig
Get LACP port configuration request
getLacpPortDefaults Get LACP port default configuration request
no
Negate a command or set its defaults
setLacpConfig
Set LACP configuration request
setLacpDefaults
Set LACP default configuration request
setLacpPortConfig
Set LACP port configuration request
setLacpPortDefaults Set LACP port default configuration request
showLacpAggLB
Show LACP load balance request
showLacpInternal
Show LACP internal request
showLacpNeighbors
Show LACP neighbor status request
showLacpStats
Show LACP statistics request
showLacpSysId
Show LACP system-id request
Step 5
Exits the LACP provisioning

mode.
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# exit
Later Releases
167

Configuring LACP Globally on the Controller
The following example shows the supported LACP configuration:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# ?
ProvisionLacpPortType sub-mode commands:
clearLacpStats
default
exit
Exit from ProvisionLacpPortType sub configuration mode
getLacpConfig
getLacpDefaults
getLacpPortConfig
no
setLacpConfig
setLacpDefaults
setLacpPortConfig
showLacpAggLB
showLacpInternal
showLacpNeighbors
showLacpStats
showLacpSysId

Before You Begin
Perform the steps to provision LACP on the controller. See Provisioning the Controller to Configure
LACP, on page 167.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
setLacpConfig {commit | flush | lacpGlobalConfiguration |

review}
Configures global LACP.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)#
setLacpConfig ?
commit
commit setLacpConfig
flush
flush all setLacpConfig
commands from queue
lacpGlobalConfiguration Set LACP configuration
request
review
review setLacpConfig commands
Step 2
setLacpConfig lacpGlobalConfiguration {lacpGlobalState

{enable} | systemPriopriority_value}
commitSends the LACP configuration to NID.

flushFlushes all LACP configuration from the
queue.
lacpGlobalConfigurationSets LACP
configuration globally on the controller .
reviewDisplays the configuration on the
controller .
Sets global LACP configuration.
lacpGlobalStateEnables the LACP
Note
LACP is always enabled globally.
Disable is not supported.
and Later Releases
168

Command or Action
Purpose
enableEnables global LACP configuration.
Example:
setLacpConfig lacpGlobalConfiguration lacpGlobalState
enable
setLacpConfig lacpGlobalConfiguration systemPrio 2
Step 3
setLacpConfig review
systemPrio priority_valueSets priority value.

The valid range is from 1 to 65535.
Displays the LACP configuration on the controller .
Example:
setLacpConfig review
Commands in queue:
setLacpConfig lacpGlobalConfiguration
lacpGlobalState enable
setLacpConfig lacpGlobalConfiguration
systemPrio 2
Step 4
setLacpConfig commit
Sends the LACP configuration to the NID.
Example:
setLacpConfig commit
Step 5
Exits the LACP provisioning mode.
exit
Example:
The example shows global LACP configuration on the controller :
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# setLacpConfig lacpGlobalConfiguration
lacpGlobalState enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# setLacpConfig lacpGlobalConfiguration
systemPrio 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# setLacpConfig review
Commands in queue:
setLacpConfig lacpGlobalConfiguration lacpGlobalState enable
setLacpConfig lacpGlobalConfiguration systemPrio 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# setLacpConfig commit
SetLacpConfig Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
169

Configuring LACP Defaults Globally on the Controller
Configuring LACP Defaults Globally on the Controller

Before You Begin
Perform the steps to provision LACP on the controller . See Provisioning the Controller to Configure
LACP, on page 167.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
setLacpDefaults {commit | flush | setLacpDefaultsRequest |

review}
Configures default LACP globally.
Example:
setLacpDefaults ?
commit
commit setLacpDefaults
flush
flush all setLacpDefaults
commands from queue
review
review setLacpDefaults commands
setLacpDefaultsRequest Set LACP default configuration
request
setLacpDefaults setLacpDefaultsRequest
Step 2
setLacpDefaults review
Example:
commitSends the LACP configuration to

NID.
flushFlushes all LACP configuration from
the queue.
setLacpDefaultsRequestSets LACP default
controller .
Displays the default LACP configuration on the

controller.
Note
The default system priority value is set to
32768.
setLacpDefaults review
Commands in queue:
Step 3
setLacpDefaults commit
Example:
setLacpDefaults commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example how to configure default LACP configuration on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# setLacpDefaults setLacpDefaultsRequest
and Later Releases
170

Configuring LACP at Port level on the Controller
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# setLacpDefaults review

Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# setLacpDefaults commit
SetLacpConfig Commit Success!!!

Before You Begin
Perform the steps to provision LACP on the Controller. See Provisioning the Controller to Configure
LACP, on page 167.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
setLacpPortConfig {commit | flush | lacpPortConfiguration |

review}
Configures LACP at port level.
Example:
setLacpPortConfig ?
commit
commit setLacpPortConfig
flush
flush all setLacpPortConfig
commands from queue
lacpPortConfiguration Set LACP port configuration request
review
Step 2
review setLacpPortConfig commands
commitSends the LACP configuration to the

NID.
the queue.
lacpPortConfigurationSets LACP
configuration at port level on the Controller.
reviewDisplays the configuration on the NID.
Configures LACP port configuration.

setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration {key key_group |
lacpEnable {enable | disable} | portNumber port-num | portPriority
key key_groupSpecifies the key or channel
priority-value | role {active | passive} {enable | disable} | timeout
group for LACP aggregation. The valid range
{fast | slow} {enable | disable}}
is 0 to 65535.
Example:
lacpEnable Enables LACP on the interface.
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration key 1
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration lacpEnable enable
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration portNumber 2
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration role active enable
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration portPriority 23
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration timeout fast enable
enableEnables LACP configuration.

disableDisables LACP configuration.
portNumber port-numSpecifies the targeted
port. The valid range is from 1 to 6.
portPriority priority-valueSpecifies the
LACP priority. The valid range is from 1 to
65535.
roleSets the activity mode.
activeTransmits the LACP BPDUs actively.
passiveWaits for the neighbor before
transmitting.
Later Releases
171

Command or Action
Purpose
timeoutSets period between BPDU
transmissions.
fastTransmits BPDUs every second.
slowTransmits BPDUs every 30th second.
Step 3
setLacpPortConfig review
Displays the LACP configuration on the Controller.
Example:
setLacpPortConfig review
Commands in queue:
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration lacpEnable
enable
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration portNumber
2
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration
portPriority 2
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration role active
enable
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration timeout
fast enable
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration lacpEnable
enable
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration portNumber
2
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration role active
enable
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration timeout
fast enable
Step 4
setLacpPortConfigcommit
Example:
setLacpPortConfig commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows LACP port configuration on the Controller:
key 1
lacpEnable enable
portNumber 2
and Later Releases
172

Configuring Default LACP Configuration at Port level on the Controller
role active enable

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration
portPriority 23
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration
timeout fast enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# setLacpPortConfig review
Commands in queue:
setLacpPortConfig lacpPortConfiguration portPriority 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# setLacpPortConfig commit
SetLacpPortConfig Commit Success!!!
Configuring Default LACP Configuration at Port level on the Controller

The default values for LACP port parameters are:
lacpEnable: false
portPriority 32768
role: active
timeout: fast
There is no default value for key. Configure a valid value to identify the LACP channel aggregation group.
If no value is set, key value is displayed as 0.
Before You Begin

Perform the steps to provision LACP on thecontroller . See Provisioning the Controller to Configure
LACP, on page 167.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
setLacpPortDefaults {commit | flush | lacpPhysicalPort

port_num| review}
Configures default LACP at port level.
Example:
setLacpPortDefaults ?
commit
commit setLacpPortDefaults
flush
flush all setLacpPortDefaults commands
from queue
lacpPhysicalPort Set LACP port default configuration
request
review
review setLacpPortDefaults commands

NID.
the queue.
lacpPhysicalPort port_numSets LACP
default configuration at port level on the
controller . The valid ports are 1 to 6.
Later Releases
173

Clearing LACP Statistics on the Controller
Command or Action
setLacpPortDefaults lacpPhysicalPort 2
Step 2
setLacpPortDefaults review
Purpose
controller .
Example:
setLacpPortDefaults review
Commands in queue:
Step 3
setLacpPortDefaults commit
Example:
setLacpPortDefaults commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example shows default LACP port configuration on the controller :
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# setLacpPortDefaults lacpPhysicalPort 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# setLacpPortDefaults review
Commands in queue:
witch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# setLacpPortDefaults commit
SetLacpPortDefaults Commit Success!!!

Before You Begin
LACP, on page 167.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
Purpose
clearLacpStats {commit | flush | lacpPhysicalPort port_num| Clears LACP statistics.

review}
and Later Releases
174

Command or Action

NID.
Example:
clearLacpStats ?
commit
commit clearLacpStats
flush
flush all clearLacpStats commands
from queue
lacpPhysicalPort Clear LACP statistics request
review
review clearLacpStats commands
clearLacpStats lacpPhysicalPort 3
Step 2
Purpose
clearLacpStats review

the queue.
lacpPhysicalPort port_numClears the LACP
statistics on a specified port on the Controller.
The valid values are 1 to 6.
Controller.
Example:
clearLacpStats review
Commands in queue:
Step 3
clearLacpStats commit
Example:
clearLacpStats commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example clears the LACP statistics on port 3 on the Controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# clearLacpStats lacpPhysicalPort 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# clearLacpStats review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# clearLacpStats commit
ClearLacpStats_Output.clearLacpStatsResponse = 0
ClearLacpStats Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
175

Negating LACP Configuration and Restoring Defaults
Negating LACP Configuration and Restoring Defaults

Before You Begin
LACP, on page 167.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
no ?
Negates the commands and sets

the default configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# no ?
clearLacpStats
exit
Exit from ProvisionLacpPortType sub configuration mode
getLacpConfig
getLacpDefaults
getLacpPortConfig
setLacpConfig
setLacpDefaults
setLacpPortConfig
showLacpAggLB
showLacpInternal
showLacpNeighbors
showLacpStats
showLacpSysId
Step 2
Exits the LACP provisioning

mode.
exit
Example:
Viewing the Global LACP Configuration on the controller

Before You Begin
LACP, on page 167.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
Purpose
getLacpConfig {commit | flush | getLacpConfigRequest | review} Retrieve the global LACP configuration.
and Later Releases
176

Viewing the Global LACP Configuration on the controller
Command or Action

NID.
Example:
getLacpConfig ?
commit
commit getLacpConfig
flush
flush all getLacpConfig commands
from queue
getLacpConfigRequest Get LACP configuration request
review
review getLacpConfig commands
commit
commit getLacpConfig
getLacpConfig getLacpConfigRequest
Step 2
Purpose
getLacpConfig review

the queue.
getLacpConfigRequestRetrieves the
configured global LACP configuration on the
controller .
controller .
Displays the LACP configuration on the controller
.
Example:
getLacpConfig review
Commands in queue:
Step 3
getLacpConfig commit
Example:
getLacpConfig commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example retrieves the global LACP configuration on the controller :
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# getLacpConfig getLacpConfigRequest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# getLacpConfig review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# getLacpConfig commit
GetLacpConfig_Output.lacpGlobalConfiguration.systemPrio = 32768
GetLacpConfig_Output.lacpGlobalConfiguration.lacpGlobalState = true
GetLacpConfig Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
177

Viewing the Default LACP Configuration on the controller
Viewing the Default LACP Configuration on the controller

Before You Begin
LACP, on page 167.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
getLacpDefaults {commit | flush | getLacpDefaultsRequest |

review}
Retrieves the default LACP configuration.
Example:
getLacpDefaults ?
commit
commit getLacpDefaults
flush
flush all getLacpDefaults
commands from queue
getLacpDefaultsRequest Get LACP default configuration
request
review
review getLacpDefaults commands
getLacpDefaults getLacpDefaultsRequest
Step 2
getLacpDefaults review

NID.
the queue.
getLacpDefaultsRequestRetrieves the
default LACP configuration on the controller
.
controller .
.
Example:
getLacpDefaults review
Commands in queue:
Step 3
getLacpDefaults commit
Example:
getLacpDefaults commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example retrieves the default LACP configuration on the controller :
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# getLacpDefaults getLacpDefaultsRequest
and Later Releases
178

Viewing the LACP Configuration at Port Level on the Controller
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# getLacpDefaults review

Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# getLacpDefaults commit
GetLacpDefaults_Output.lacpGlobalConfiguration.systemPrio = 32768
GetLacpDefaults_Output.lacpGlobalConfiguration.lacpGlobalState = true
GetLacpDefaults Commit Success!!!
Viewing the LACP Configuration at Port Level on the Controller

Before You Begin
LACP, on page 167.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
Purpose
getLacpPortConfig {commit | flush | lacpPhysicalPort port_num Retrieves the LACP configuration at port.
| review}
NID.
Example:
getLacpPortConfig ?
commit
commit getLacpPortConfig
flush
flush all getLacpPortConfig commands
from queue
lacpPhysicalPort Get LACP port configuration request
review
review getLacpPortConfig commands
getLacpPortConfig lacpPhysicalPort 1
Step 2
getLacpPortConfig review

the queue.
lacpPhysicalPort port_numRetrieves the
LACP configuration for specified port on the
Controller. The valid values are 1 to 6.
Controller.
Example:
getLacpPortConfig review
Commands in queue:
Step 3
getLacpPortConfig commit
Example:
getLacpPortConfig commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
Later Releases
179

Viewing the Default LACP Configuration at Port Level on the controller
The example retrieves the LACP configuration for port 1 on the Controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# getLacpPortConfig lacpPhysicalPort 1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# getLacpPortConfig review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# getLacpPortConfig commit
GetLacpPortConfig_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.portNumber = 1
GetLacpPortConfig_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.lacpEnable = false
GetLacpPortConfig_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.key = 1
GetLacpPortConfig_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.role.t = 1
GetLacpPortConfig_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.role.u.active = true
GetLacpPortConfig_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.portPriority = 32768
GetLacpPortConfig_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.timeout.t = 1
GetLacpPortConfig_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.timeout.u.fast = true
GetLacpPortConfig Commit Success!!!
Viewing the Default LACP Configuration at Port Level on the controller

Before You Begin
LACP, on page 167.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
getLacpPortDefaults {commit | flush | lacpPhysicalPort

port_num | review}
Retrieve the LACP configuration at port.
Example:
getLacpPortDefaults ?
commit
commit getLacpPortDefaults
flush
flush all getLacpPortDefaults
commands from queue
lacpPhysicalPort Get LACP port default configuration
request
review
review getLacpPortDefaults commands
getLacpPortDefaults lacpPhysicalPort 1
Step 2
getLacpPortDefaults review

NID.
the queue.
lacpPhysicalPort port_numRetrieves the
default LACP configuration for specified port
on the controller . The valid values are 1 to 6.
controller .
Example:
getLacpPortDefaults review
and Later Releases
180

Verifying LACP
Command or Action
Purpose
Commands in queue:
Step 3
getLacpPortDefaults commit
Example:
getLacpPortDefaults commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example retrieves the default LACP configuration for port 1 on the controller :
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# getLacpPortDefaults lacpPhysicalPort 1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# getLacpPortDefaults review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# getLacpPortDefaults commit
GetLacpPortDefaults_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.portNumber = 1
GetLacpPortDefaults_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.lacpEnable = false
GetLacpPortDefaults_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.key = 0
GetLacpPortDefaults_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.role.t = 1
GetLacpPortDefaults_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.role.u.active = true
GetLacpPortDefaults_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.portPriority = 32768
GetLacpPortDefaults_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.timeout.t = 1
GetLacpPortDefaults_Output.lacpPortConfiguration.timeout.u.fast = true
GetLacpPortDefaults Commit Success!!!
Note
NOTE: You must explicitly configure a key value. The default value for key retrieved is 0 until it is set
to a value using the setLacpPortConfig operation.
Verifying LACP
Viewing the LACP System ID Information on the controller
Before You Begin
LACP, on page 167.
Later Releases
181

Viewing the LACP System ID Information on the controller
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
showLacpSysId {commit | flush | showLacpSysIdRequest |

review}
Displays the LACP system ID information.
Example:
showLacpSysId ?
commit
commit showLacpSysId
flush
flush all showLacpSysId commands
from queue
review
review showLacpSysId commands
showLacpSysIdRequest Show LACP system-id request
showLacpSysId showLacpSysIdRequest
Step 2
showLacpSysId review

NID.
the queue.
showLacpSysIdRequestDisplays the LACP
system ID information on the controller .
controller .
.
Example:
showLacpSysId review
Commands in queue:
Step 3
showLacpSysId commit
Example:
showLacpAggLB commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example displays the LACP system ID information on the controller :
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# showLacpSysId showLacpSysIdRequest
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# showLacpSysId commit
ShowLacpSysId_Output.showLacpSysIdResponse.systemId = 'b8-38-61-68-7b-bc'
ShowLacpSysId_Output.showLacpSysIdResponse.systemPriority = 32768
ShowLacpSysId Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
182

Viewing the LACP Load Balance Information on the controller
Viewing the LACP Load Balance Information on the controller

Before You Begin
LACP, on page 167.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
Purpose
showLacpAggLB {commit | flush | showLacpAggLBRequest Displays LACP load balance information.

| review}
NID.
Example:
showLacpAggLB ?
commit
commit showLacpAggLB
flush
flush all showLacpAggLB commands
from queue
review
review showLacpAggLB commands
showLacpAggLBRequest Show LACP load balance request
showLacpAggLB showLacpAggLBRequest
Step 2
showLacpAggLB review

the queue.
showLacpAggLBRequestDisplays the
LACP load balance information on the
controller .
controller .
Example:
showLacpAggLB review
Commands in queue:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example displays the LACP load balance information on the controller :
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# showLacpAggLB showLacpAggLBRequest
Later Releases
183

Viewing the LACP Internal State Information on the controller
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# showLacpAggLB review

Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# showLacpAggLB commit
ShowLacpAggLB_Output.lacpAggLBMode.smac_enable = true
ShowLacpAggLB_Output.lacpAggLBMode.dmac_enable = false
ShowLacpAggLB_Output.lacpAggLBMode.ip_enable = true
ShowLacpAggLB_Output.lacpAggLBMode.port_enable = true
ShowLacpAggLB Commit Success!!!

Before You Begin
LACP, on page 167.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
Purpose
showLacpInternal {commit | flush | lacpPhysicalPort port_num Displays LACP internal state information.
| review}
NID.
Example:
showLacpInternal ?
commit
commit showLacpInternal
flush
flush all showLacpInternal commands
from queue
lacpPhysicalPort Show LACP internal request
review
review showLacpInternal commands
showLacpInternal lacpPhysicalPort 2
Step 2
showLacpInternal review

the queue.
lacpPhysicalPortport_numDisplays the
LACP internal state information for specified
port on the controller .
controller .
.
Example:
showLacpInternal review
Commands in queue:
showLacpNeighbors lacpPhysicalPort 1
Step 3
showLacpInternal commit
Example:
showLacpInternal commit
and Later Releases
184

Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
The example displays the LACP internal state information on the controller :
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# showLacpInternal lacpPhysicalPort 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# showLacpInternal review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# showLacpInternal commit
ShowLacpInternal_Output.lacpPortInternals.lacpPortInternalslist[0].portNumber =1
ShowLacpInternal_Output.lacpPortInternals.lacpPortInternalslist[0].mode = false
ShowLacpInternal_Output.lacpPortInternals.lacpPortInternalslist[0].key = 0
ShowLacpInternal_Output.lacpPortInternals.lacpPortInternalslist[0].role = true
ShowLacpInternal_Output.lacpPortInternals.lacpPortInternalslist[0].timeout = 1
ShowLacpInternal_Output.lacpPortInternals.lacpPortInternalslist[0].portPriority= 32768
ShowLacpInternal_Output.lacpPortInternals.lacpPortInternalslist[0].adminKey = 0
ShowLacpInternal_Output.lacpPortInternals.lacpPortInternalslist[0].operKey = 3
ShowLacpInternal_Output.lacpPortInternals.lacpPortInternalslist[0].collectorMaxDelay =
Later Releases
185

Viewing the LACP Neighbors Status Information on the controller
ShowLacpInternal_Output.lacpPortInternals.lacpPortInternalslist[5].collectorMaxDelay = 0
ShowLacpInternal Commit Success!!!
Viewing the LACP Neighbors Status Information on the controller

Before You Begin
LACP, on page 167.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
showLacpNeighbors {commit | flush | lacpPhysicalPort

port_num | review}
Displays LACP neighbor state information.
Example:
showLacpNeighbors ?
commit
commit showLacpNeighbors
flush
flush all showLacpNeighbors commands
from queue
lacpPhysicalPort Show LACP neighbor status request
review
review showLacpNeighbors commands
Step 2
showLacpNeighbors review

NID.
the queue.
LACP neighbors information for specified port
on the controller .
controller .
Example:
showLacpNeighbors review
Commands in queue:
Step 3
showLacpNeighbors commit
Example:
showLacpNeighbors commit
and Later Releases
186

Viewing the LACP Statistics on the controller
Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
The example displays the LACP neighbors status information on the controller :
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# showLacpNeighbors lacpPhysicalPort 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# showLacpNeighbors review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# showLacpNeighbors commit
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[0].aggrID = 1
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[0].partnerSysId =
'00-3a-99-fd-4a-44'
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[0].partnerPort = 3
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[0].partnerPortPriority
= 32768
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[0].partnerSysPriority =
32768
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[0].partnerOperKey = 3
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[0].aggrProtocolType =
'LACP'
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[0].bandwidth = 0
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[0].aggrMacAddr =
'00-3a-99-fd-4a-3b'
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[1].aggrID = 1
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[1].partnerSysId =
'00-3a-99-fd-4a-44'
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[1].partnerPort = 6
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[1].partnerPortPriority
= 32768
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[1].partnerSysPriority =
32768
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[1].partnerOperKey = 3
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[1].aggrProtocolType =
'LACP'
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[1].bandwidth = 0
ShowLacpNeighbors_Output.lacpNeighborStatus.lacpNeighborStatusList[1].aggrMacAddr =
'00-3a-99-fd-4a-3e'
ShowLacpNeighbors Commit Success!!!

Before You Begin
LACP, on page 167.
Later Releases
187

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
showLacpStats {commit | flush | lacpPhysicalPort port_num |

review}
Displays the LACP statistics.

commitSends the LACP configuration.
the queue.
Example:
showLacpStats ?
commit
commit showLacpStats
flush
flush all showLacpStats commands from
queue
lacpPhysicalPort Show LACP statistics request
review
review showLacpStats commands
showLacpStats lacpPhysicalPort 2
Step 2
showLacpStats review
LACP statistics for specified port on the
controller .
controller .
.
Example:
showLacpStats review
Commands in queue:
Step 3
showLacpStats commit
Example:
showLacpStats commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example displays the LACP statistics on the controller :
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# showLacpStats lacpPhysicalPort 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# showLacpStats review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLacpPortType)# showLacpStats commit
ShowLacpStats_Output.lacpPortStatistics.lacpPortStatsList[0].rxUnknown = 0
ShowLacpStats_Output.lacpPortStatistics.lacpPortStatsList[0].port = 3
ShowLacpStats_Output.lacpPortStatistics.lacpPortStatsList[0].rxFrames = 17866
ShowLacpStats_Output.lacpPortStatistics.lacpPortStatsList[0].txFrames = 12527
ShowLacpStats_Output.lacpPortStatistics.lacpPortStatsList[0].rxIllegal = 0
ShowLacpStats_Output.lacpPortStatistics.lacpPortStatsList[1].rxUnknown = 0
ShowLacpStats_Output.lacpPortStatistics.lacpPortStatsList[1].port = 6
and Later Releases
188

ShowLacpStats_Output.lacpPortStatistics.lacpPortStatsList[1].rxFrames = 17244
ShowLacpStats_Output.lacpPortStatistics.lacpPortStatsList[1].txFrames = 12132
ShowLacpStats_Output.lacpPortStatistics.lacpPortStatsList[1].rxIllegal = 0
ShowLacpStats Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
189

and Later Releases
190
CHAPTER
10
Provisioning Link Layer Discovery Protocol

The Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) is a device discovery protocol that runs over Layer 2 (the data link
layer) on all Cisco-manufactured devices (routers, bridges, access servers, and switches). CDP allows network
management applications to automatically discover and learn about other Cisco devices connected to the
network.
To support non-Cisco devices and to allow for interoperability between other devices, the switch supports
the IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP). LLDP is a neighbor discovery protocol that is
used for network devices to advertise information about themselves to other devices on the network. This
protocol runs over the data link layer, which allows two systems running different network layer protocols
to learn about each other.
LLDP supports a set of attributes that it uses to discover neighbor devices. These attributes contain type,
length, and value descriptions and are referred to as TLVs. LLDP supported devices can use TLVs to receive
and send information to their neighbors. Details such as configuration information, device capabilities, and
device identity can be advertised using this protocol.
By default, LLDP is disabled globally and on interfaces.
The switch supports these basic management TLVs. These are mandatory LLDP TLVs.
Port description TLV
System name TLV
System description
System capabilities TLV
Management address TLV
These organizationally-specific LLDP TLVs are also advertised to support LLDP-MED.
Port VLAN ID TLV (IEEE 802.1 organizationally specific TLVs)
MAC/PHY configuration/status TLV (IEEE 802.3 organizationally specific TLVs)
How To Configure LLDP, page 192
Other Commands For LLDP Configuration, page 198
Later Releases
191

How To Configure LLDP
How To Configure LLDP

Setting LLDP Global Configuration
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionLldpPortType
Enters the ProvisionLldpPortType mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionLldpPortType
Step 4
setLldpConfig lldpGlobalConfiguration {global_state {enable | Sets the LLDP global configuration.

disable} | hold_time lldp_hold_time | lldp_transmission_delay value
global_stateLLDP global state. This state
| reinit_delay tx_reinit_value timer tx_value | tlv_select
is either enabled or disabled.
{mgmt_address | port_description | system_capabilities |
system_description | system_name}
hold_timeLLDP hold time before
discarding the configuration. The valid values
are from 2 to 10 seconds. The default value
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)#
is 4 seconds.
setLldpConfig lldpGlobalConfiguration global_state enable
setLldpConfig lldpGlobalConfiguration hold_time 5
setLldpConfig lldpGlobalConfiguration
lldp_transmission_delay 10
setLldpConfig lldpGlobalConfiguration timer 10
setLldpConfig lldpGlobalConfiguration reinit_delay 10
setLldpConfig lldpGlobalConfiguration tlv_select
system_description enable
port_description enable
management_address enable
system_capabilities enable
system_name enable
lldp_transmission_delayLLD
Transmission delay value. The valid values
are from 1 to 8192. The default value is 2
seconds.
reinit_delayLLDP transmission
re-initialization delay. The valid values are
from 1 to 10 seconds. The default value is 2
seconds.
timerTime between each LLDP frame
transmitted in seconds. The valid values are
from 5 to 32768. The default value is 30
seconds.
tlv_selectTransmission TLV.
and Later Releases
192

Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
setLldpConfig review
Reviews the setLldpConfig.
Example:
setLldpConfig review
Step 6
setLldpConfig commit
Sends the setLldpConfig configuration to the Cisco

ME 1200 NID.
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# exit
What to Do Next
After the configuration is sent to the Cisco ME 1200 NID, use the following get command to view the
setLldpConfig configuration.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# getLldpConfig getLldpConfigRequest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# getLldpConfig review
Commands in queue:
getLldpConfig getLldpConfigRequest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# getLldpConfig commit
GetLldpConfig_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.global_state = true
GetLldpConfig_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.hold_time = 5
GetLldpConfig_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.timer = 10
GetLldpConfig_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.tlv_select.system_name =
true
GetLldpConfig_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.tlv_select.system_description
= true
GetLldpConfig_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.tlv_select.port_description
= true
GetLldpConfig_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.tlv_select.management_address
= true
GetLldpConfig_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.tlv_select.system_capabilities
= true
GetLldpConfig_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.reinit_delay = 10
GetLldpConfig_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.lldp_transmission_delay =
10
GetLldpConfig Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
193

Setting LLDP Configuration to Default

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
setLldpDefaults setLldpDefaultsRequest
Sets the LLDP configuration to default values.
Example:
setLldpDefaults setLldpDefaultsRequest
Step 5
setLldpDefaults commit
Sends the setLldpDefaults configuration to the

Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Example:
setLldpDefaults commit
Step 6
exit
Example:
What to Do Next
setLldpDefaults configuration.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# getLldpDefaults getLldpDefaultsRequest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# getLldpDefaults review
Commands in queue:
getLldpDefaults getLldpDefaultsRequest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# getLldpDefaults commit
and Later Releases
194

Setting LLDP Port Configuration
GetLldpDefaults_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.global_state = true
GetLldpDefaults_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.hold_time = 5
GetLldpDefaults_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.timer = 30
GetLldpDefaults_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.tlv_select.system_name =
true
GetLldpDefaults_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.tlv_select.system_description
= true
GetLldpDefaults_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.tlv_select.port_description
= true
GetLldpDefaults_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.tlv_select.management_address
= true
GetLldpDefaults_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.tlv_select.system_capabilities
= true
GetLldpDefaults_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.reinit_delay = 2
GetLldpDefaults_Output.lldpGlobalConfiguration.lldp_transmission_delay =
10
GetLldpDefaults Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
setLldpportconfig lldpPortConfiguration {lldp_receive_enable Sets the LLDP port configuration.

{disable | enable} | lldp_transmit_enable {disable | enable} |
lldp_receive_enableWhether LLDP
port_number port_number}
receive is enabled or disabled.
Example:
setLldpPortConfig lldpPortConfiguration port_number 3
setLldpPortConfig lldpPortConfiguration
lldp_receive_enable disable
lldp_transmit_enable disable
lldp_transmit_enableWhether LLDP
transmit is enabled or disabled.
port_numberThe target interface number.
The valid values are from 1 to 6.
Later Releases
195

Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
setLldpPortConfig review
Reviews the setLldpPortConfig.
Example:
Step 6
setLldpPortConfig commit
Sends the setLldpConfig configuration to the

Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
What to Do Next
setLldpPortConfig configuration.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# getLldpportConfig physicalPortNum 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# getLldpportConfig review
Commands in queue:
getLldpConfig physicalPortNum 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# getLldpportConfig commit
GetLldpPortConfig_Output.lldpPortConfiguration.port_number = 3
GetLldpPortConfig_Output.lldpPortConfiguration.lldp_transmit_enable =
false
GetLldpPortConfig_Output.lldpPortConfiguration.lldp_receive_enable = false
GetLldpPortConfig Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
196

Setting LLDP Port Configuration to Default

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
setlldpportdefaults physicalPortNum port_number

Example:
setlldpportdefaults physicalPortNum 3
Step 5
setlldpportdefaults commit
Sets the LLDP port configuration to default values.

physicalPortNumPort number for which the
LLDP configuration is set to default. The valid
Sends the setlldpportdefaults configuration to the
Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Example:
setlldpportdefaults commit
Step 6
exit
Example:
exit
What to Do Next
setlldpportdefaults configuration.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# getLldpportdefaults physicalPortNum 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# getLldpportdefaults review
Commands in queue:
getLldpportdefaults physicalPortNum 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# getLldpportdefaults commit
Later Releases
197

Other Commands For LLDP Configuration
GetLldpPortDefaults_Output.lldpPortConfiguration.port_number = 3
GetLldpPortDefaults_Output.lldpPortConfiguration.lldp_transmit_enable =
true
GetLldpPortDefaults_Output.lldpPortConfiguration.lldp_receive_enable =
true
GetLldpPortDefaults Commit Success!!!

Clearing LLDP Counters
clearLldpCounters
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# clearLldpCounters physicalPortNum 3
Displaying LLDP Neighbors

showlldpneighbors physicalPortNum physical_port_number
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# showlldpneighbors physicalPortNum 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# showlldpneighbors commit
ShowLldpNeighbors_Output.lldpNeighborInformation.local_port_id = 3
ShowLldpNeighbors_Output.lldpNeighborInformation.chassis_id =
'18-9C-5D-A7-F4-1C'
ShowLldpNeighbors_Output.lldpNeighborInformation.remote_port_id = 'Gi0/3'
ShowLldpNeighbors_Output.lldpNeighborInformation.remote_port_description
= 'GigabitEthernet0/3'
ShowLldpNeighbors_Output.lldpNeighborInformation.remote_system_name =
'IRF-Whales-1'
ShowLldpNeighbors_Output.lldpNeighborInformation.remote_system_capabilities
= 'Bridge(+), Router(+)'
ShowLldpNeighbors_Output.lldpNeighborInformation.remote_system_description
= 'Cisco IOS Software, ME360x Software (ME360x-UNIVERSAL-M), Version
15.4(2)SN, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)
Technical Support: http://www.cisco.com/techsupport
Copyright (c) 1986-2014 by Cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Fri 21-Mar-14 09:12 by prod_rel_team'
ShowLldpNeighbors_Output.lldpNeighborInformation.remote_management_IP =
'7.3.9.13 (IPv4)'
ShowLldpNeighbors_Output.lldpNeighborInformation.remote_management_IPv6
= ''
ShowLldpNeighbors Commit Success!!!
Displaying LLDP Statistics
showlldpstatistics physicalPortNum physical_port_number
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# showlldpstatistics physicalPortNum 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionLldpPortType)# showlldpstatistics commit
ShowLldpStatistics_Output.lldpPortStatistics.global_counters.total_neighbor_entries_added
= 1
ShowLldpStatistics_Output.lldpPortStatistics.local_counters.Tx_Frames =
17
ShowLldpStatistics_Output.lldpPortStatistics.local_counters.Rx_Frames =
0
and Later Releases
198

ShowLldpStatistics_Output.lldpPortStatistics.local_counters.Rx_Errors =
0
ShowLldpStatistics_Output.lldpPortStatistics.local_counters.Rx_Frames_Discarded
= 0
ShowLldpStatistics_Output.lldpPortStatistics.local_counters.TLVs_Discarded
= 0
ShowLldpStatistics_Output.lldpPortStatistics.local_counters.TLVs_Unrecognized
= 0
ShowLldpStatistics_Output.lldpPortStatistics.local_counters.Org_Discarded
= 0
ShowLldpStatistics_Output.lldpPortStatistics.local_counters.Age_Outs = 0
ShowLldpStatistics Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
199

and Later Releases
200
CHAPTER
11
Configuring SNMP
This document describes the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) feature and configuration steps
to implement network management using SNMP.
Prerequisites for Configuring SNMP, page 201
Information About SNMP, page 201
How to Provision SNMP, page 202
Prerequisites for Configuring SNMP

Information About SNMP

SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information among network
devices, such as nodes and routers. It comprises part of the TCP/IP suite. System administrators can remotely
manage network performance, find and solve network problems, and plan for network growth by using SNMP.
Later Releases
201
Configuring SNMP
How to Provision SNMP
How to Provision SNMP

Configuring and Retrieving Default SNMP Configurations
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionSnmpConf
Enters the ProvisionSnmpConf mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionSnmpConf
Step 4
setSnmpDefaultConf setSnmpDefaultConfigRequest
request_id
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#
setSnmpDefaultConf setSnmpDefaultConfigRequest 1
Step 5
getSnmpDefaultConf getSnmpDefaultConfRequest
Example:
Step 6
getSnmpDefaultConf review
Configures SNMP default configuration status.

setSnmpDefaultConfigRequestSpecifies
SNMP default configuration.
request_idRequest ID. The default value is
1.
Retrieves SNMP default configuration status.
getSnmpDefaultConfRequestRetrieves
SNMP default configuration.
Example:
getSnmpDefaultConf review
Step 7
getSnmpDefaultConf commit
Sends the configuration to NID.
Example:
getSnmpDefaultConf commit
and Later Releases
202
Configuring SNMP
Configuring SNMPv2c Community Parameters
Step 8
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# exit
The example shows how to configure and retrieve Default SNMP Configurations:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpDefaultConf setSnmpDefaultConfigRequest
1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# getSnmpDefaultConf getSnmpDefaultConfRequest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# getSnmpDefaultConf review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# getSnmpDefaultConf commit
The following is a sample output on the NID.

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#getSnmpDefaultConf
getSnmpDefaultConfRequest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#getSnmpDefaultConf review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#getSnmpDefaultConf commit
GetSnmpDefaultConf_Output.getSnmpDefaultResponse.trap = false
GetSnmpDefaultConf_Output.getSnmpDefaultResponse.version = 'v2c'
GetSnmpDefaultConf_Output.getSnmpDefaultResponse.snmp_server = 'disable'
GetSnmpDefaultConf Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Later Releases
203
Configuring SNMP
Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
ProvisionSnmpConf
Example:
Step 4
setSnmpServerConf snmsnp_server_conf { trap {true | false} Configures SNMP server.

| version {v1 | v2c | v3} | snmp_server {enable | disable} |
trapSpecifies SNMP traps.
community_v2c {comm_name comm_name | mode {ro | rw}}}
trueEnables SNMP trap.
Example:
setSnmpServerConf snmp_server_conf snmp_server enable
setSnmpServerConf snmp_server_conf version v2c
setSnmpServerConf snmp_server_conf trap true
setSnmpServerConf snmp_server_conf community_v2c
comm_name Public
setSnmpServerConf snmp_server_conf community_v2c mode
ro
falseDisables SNMP trap.

versionSpecifies SNMP host version.
v1Specifies SNMP version v1.
v2cSpecifies SNMP version v2c.
snmp_serverSpecifies the SNMP server.
EnableEnables the SNMP server.
DisableDisables the SNMP server.
community_v2cSpecifies the v2c
community.
comm_nameSpecifies the v2c community
name.
comm_namev2c community name.
modeSpecifies read or write mode.
roRead mode.
rwWrite mode.
Step 5
setSnmpServerConf review
Example:
setSnmpServerConf review
Step 6
setSnmpServerConf commit
Example:
setSnmpServerConf commit
and Later Releases
204
Configuring SNMP
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
getSnmpServerConf getSnmpServerConfigRequest
Retrieves SNMP server configuration.
Example:
Step 8
getSnmpServerConf review
Example:
Step 9
getSnmpServerConf commit
Example:
Step 10
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure and retrieve SNMPv2c community parameters:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpServerConf snmp_server_conf snmp_server
enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpServerConf snmp_server_conf version
v2c
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpServerConf snmp_server_conf trap true
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpServerConf snmp_server_conf community_v2c
comm_name Public
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpServerConf snmp_server_conf community_v2c
mode ro
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpServerConf review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpServerConf commit
exit

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#getSnmpServerConf commit
GetSnmpServerConf_Output.snmp_server_conf.trap = true
GetSnmpServerConf_Output.snmp_server_conf.version.t = 2
GetSnmpServerConf_Output.snmp_server_conf.version.u.v2c = 'v2c'
GetSnmpServerConf_Output.snmp_server_conf.snmp_server.t = 1
GetSnmpServerConf_Output.snmp_server_conf.snmp_server.u.enable = 'enabled
GetSnmpServerConf_Output.snmp_server_conf.community_v2c.comm_name =
'Public'
GetSnmpServerConf_Output.snmp_server_conf.community_v2c.mode.t = 1
GetSnmpServerConf_Output.snmp_server_conf.community_v2c.mode.u.ro = 'RO'
Later Releases
205
Configuring SNMP
Configuring SNMPv3 Community
GetSnmpServerConf Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionSnmpConf
Example:
Step 4
setSnmpCommunity snmp_community_conf
{community-namecommunity_name name | community_ip
ip_address | community_mask mask}
Example:
setSnmpCommunity snmp_community_conf community_ip
10.10.10.1
setSnmpCommunity snmp_community_conf community_mask
255.255.255.0
setSnmpCommunity snmp_community_conf community_name
user12

community_nameConfigures SNMP
community string.
nameName of the community.
community_ipSpecifies community IP.
ip_addressIP address.
community_maskSpecifies community
mask.
maskMask address.
Step 5
getSnmpCommunity getSnmpCommunityConfRequest
Example:
Step 6
getSnmpCommunity review

getSnmpCommunityConfRequestRetrieves
SNMP configuration information.
Example:
getSnmpCommunity review
and Later Releases
206
Configuring SNMP
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
getSnmpCommunity commit
Example:
getSnmpCommunity commit
Step 8
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure and retrieve SNMPv3 Community:
community_ip 10.10.10.1
community_mask 255.255.255.0
community_name user12
setSnmpCommunity
snmp_community_conf
setSnmpCommunity
snmp_community_conf
setSnmpCommunity
snmp_community_conf
getSnmpCommunity
getSnmpCommunityConfReques
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# getSnmpCommunity review

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# getSnmpCommunity commit

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#$SnmpCommunityConfReques
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#getSnmpCommunity review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#getSnmpCommunity com
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#getSnmpCommunity commit
GetSnmpCommunity_Output.getSnmpCommunityResponse[0].community_name =
'public'
GetSnmpCommunity_Output.getSnmpCommunityResponse[0].community_ip =
'0.0.0.0'
GetSnmpCommunity_Output.getSnmpCommunityResponse[0].community_mask =
'0.0.0.0'
'private'
'0.0.0.0'
'0.0.0.0'
'user12'
'10.10.10.1'
Later Releases
207
Configuring SNMP
Configuring Trap Destination
'255.255.255.0'
GetSnmpCommunity Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionSnmpConf
Example:
Step 4
setSnmpHost snmp_host_config {host_id host_id | set_trap Configures SNMP host.

{enable | disable} | version {v1 | v2c | v3} udp_port_no
host_idSpecifies the host name.
udp_port_no | address {ipv4 ipv4_address | ipv6 ipv6_address}
| inform_mode {enable | disable} | inf_retries retry_instances
host_idHost name.
| timeout_inform timeout_inform_value}
set_trapSpecifies the trap.
Example:
setSnmpHost snmp_host_config address ipv4
10.106.212.248
setSnmpHost snmp_host_config host_id trap-config
setSnmpHost snmp_host_config inf_retries 255
setSnmpHost snmp_host_config inform_mode enable
setSnmpHost snmp_host_config set_trap enable
setSnmpHost snmp_host_config timeout_inform 2147
setSnmpHost snmp_host_config udp_port_no 162
setSnmpHost snmp_host_config version v2c
enableEnables the trap.

disableDisables the trap.
versionSpecifies SNMP host version.
v2cSpecifies SNMP version v2c.
udp_port_noSpecifies the host port number.
udp_port_noHost port number.
addressSpecifies the IP address.
ipv4Specifies IPv4 address.
ipv4_address IPv4 address.
ipv6_addressIPv6 address.
and Later Releases
208
Configuring SNMP
Command or Action
Purpose
inform_modeSpecifies inform mode.
enableEnables inform mode.
disableDisables inform mode.
inf_retriesSpecifies inform retries.
retry_instancesInform retry number.
timeout_informSpecifies timeout inform.
timeout_inform_valueTimeout inform value.
Step 5
setSnmpHost review
Example:
setSnmpHost review
Step 6
setSnmpHost commit
Example:
setSnmpHost commit
Step 7
getSnmpHost getSnmpHostRequest
Retrieves SNMP host configuration information.
Example:
Step 8
getSnmpHost review
Example:
getSnmpHost review
Step 9
getSnmpHost commit
Example:
getSnmpHost commit
Step 10
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure and retrieve trap destination:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpHost snmp_host_config address ipv4
10.106.212.248
Later Releases
209
Configuring SNMP
Configuring an Entry in SNMP View List
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpHost snmp_host_config host_id trap-config

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpHost snmp_host_config inf_retries 255
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpHost snmp_host_config inform_mode enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpHost snmp_host_config set_trap enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpHost snmp_host_config timeout_inform
2147
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpHost snmp_host_config udp_port_no 162
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpHost snmp_host_config version v2c
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpHost review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpHost commit
getSnmpHost review
getSnmpHost commit
exit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionSnmpConf
Example:
Step 4
setSnmpView setSnmpViewRequest {view-nameview_name | Configures SNMP view.

view_oid oid_value | view_type {included | excluded}}
view_nameSpecifies view name.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpView
setSnmpViewRequest view_type included
setSnmpViewRequest view_oid .1.3.6.1.2.1.31
setSnmpViewRequest view_name ifMIB
view_oidSpecifies object identifier.

oid_valueObject identifier value.
view_typeSpecifies view type.
includedIncludes view type.
excludedExcludes view type.
Step 5
setSnmpView review
Example:
review
and Later Releases
210
Configuring SNMP
Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
setSnmpView commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
Retrieves SNMP default configuration status.
getSnmpView getSnmpViewRequest
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# getSnmpView
getSnmpViewRequest
Step 8
getSnmpViewRequestRetrieves SNMP
default configuration.
getSnmpView review
Example:
review
Step 9
getSnmpView commit
Example:
commit
Step 10
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure and retrieve an entry in SNMP view list:
included
.1.3.6.1.2.1.31
ifMIB
setSnmpView
setSnmpViewRequest
view_type
setSnmpView
setSnmpViewRequest
view_oid
setSnmpView
setSnmpViewRequest
view_name
setSnmpView
setSnmpView
review
commit
getSnmpView
getSnmpView
getSnmpView
exit
getSnmpViewRequest
review
commit

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#getSnmpView getSnmpViewRequest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#getSnmpView review
Commands in queue:
getSnmpView getSnmpViewRequest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#getSnmpView commit
GetSnmpView_Output.getSnmpViewResponse[0].view_name = 'ifMIB'
Later Releases
211
Configuring SNMP
Creating an SNMPv3 User
GetSnmpView_Output.getSnmpViewResponse[0].view_oid = '.1.3.6.1.2.1.31'
GetSnmpView_Output.getSnmpViewResponse[0].view_type = 'included'
GetSnmpView_Output.getSnmpViewResponse[1].view_name = 'default_view'
GetSnmpView_Output.getSnmpViewResponse[1].view_oid = '.1'
GetSnmpView_Output.getSnmpViewResponse[1].view_type = 'included'

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionSnmpConf
Example:
Step 4
setSnmpUserConf setSnmpUsersRequest {user_name

Configures an SNMP user.
user_name | user_engine_id user_engine_id | protocolauth {md5
user_nameSpecifies user name.
| sha} | protocol_passwd protocol_passwd | priviledgeauth {aes
| des} | priv_passwd priv_passwd}
user_nameUser name.
Example:
setSnmpUserConf setSnmpUsersRequest priv_passwd
12345678
setSnmpUserConf setSnmpUsersRequest priviledgeauth aes
setSnmpUserConf setSnmpUsersRequest protocol_passwd
12345678
setSnmpUserConf setSnmpUsersRequest protocolauth md5
setSnmpUserConf setSnmpUsersRequest user_engine_id
800007e5017f000001
setSnmpUserConf setSnmpUsersRequest user_name user1
user_engine_idSpecifies user engine ID.

user_engine_idUser engine ID.
protocolauthSpecifies authentication
protocol.
md5Specifies MD5 authentication protocol.
shaSpecifies SHA authentication protocol.
protocol_passwdSpecifies protocol
password.
protocol_passwdProtocol password.
priviledgeauthSpecifies privilege
authentication type.
aesSpecifies AES authentication.
desSpecifies DES authentication.
priv_passwdSpecifies privacy password.
and Later Releases
212
Configuring SNMP
Command or Action
Purpose
priv_passwdPrivacy password.
Step 5
setSnmpUserConf review
Example:
setSnmpUserConf review
Step 6
setSnmpUserConf commit
Example:
setSnmpUserConf commit
Step 7
getSnmpUserConf getSnmpUserConfRequest
Retrieves SNMP user configuration.
Example:
Step 8
getSnmpUserConf review
Example:
Step 9
getSnmpUserConf commit
Example:
Step 10
exit
Example:
The example shows how to create and retrieve an SNMPv3 user:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpUserConf setSnmpUsersRequest priv_passwd
12345678
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpUserConf setSnmpUsersRequest
priviledgeauth aes
protocol_passwd 12345678
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpUserConf setSnmpUsersRequest protocolauth
md5
user_engine_id 800007e5017f000001
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpUserConf setSnmpUsersRequest user_name
user1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpUserConf review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpUserConf commit
Later Releases
213
Configuring SNMP
Creating an SNMP User
exit

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#$
getSnmpUserConfRequest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#getSnmpUserConf review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#getSnmpUserConf commit
GetSnmpUserConf_Output.getSnmpUserConfResponse[0].user_name = 'user1'
GetSnmpUserConf_Output.getSnmpUserConfResponse[0].engine_id =
'800007e5017f000001'
GetSnmpUserConf_Output.getSnmpUserConfResponse[0].protocol = 'MD5'
GetSnmpUserConf_Output.getSnmpUserConfResponse[0].priv = 'DES'
GetSnmpUserConf_Output.getSnmpUserConfResponse[1].user_name =
'default_user'
GetSnmpUserConf_Output.getSnmpUserConfResponse[1].engine_id =
'800007e5017f000001'
GetSnmpUserConf_Output.getSnmpUserConfResponse[1].protocol = 'None'
GetSnmpUserConf_Output.getSnmpUserConfResponse[1].priv = 'None'
GetSnmpUserConf Commit Success!!!

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionSnmpConf
Example:
Step 4
setSnmpConfig snmp_config {location location_name | contact Configures an SNMP user.

contact_name | engine_id engine_id }
locationSpecifies SNMP location.
Example:
setSnmpConfig snmp_config engine_id 800007e5017f000001
setSnmpConfig snmp_config contact user2
location_nameSNMP location name.

contactSpecifies SNMP contact.
contact_nameSNMP contact name.
and Later Releases
214
Configuring SNMP
Command or Action
Purpose
engine_idSpecifies engine ID.
setSnmpConfig snmp_config location Bangalore
engine_idEngine ID.
Step 5
setSnmpConfig review
Example:
setSnmpConfig review
Step 6
setSnmpConfig commit
Example:
setSnmpConfig commit
Step 7
getSnmpConfig getSnmpConfigRequest
Retrieves SNMP user configuration.
Example:
Step 8
getSnmpConfig review
Example:
Step 9
getSnmpConfig commit
Example:
Step 10
exit
Example:
The example shows how to create and retrieve an SNMP user:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpUserConf setSnmpUsersRequest priv_passwd
12345678
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpConfig snmp_config engine_id
800007e5017f000001
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpConfig snmp_config contact user2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpConfig snmp_config location Bangalore
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpConfig review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# setSnmpConfig commit
exit
Later Releases
215
Configuring SNMP

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)#$getSnmpConfigRequest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionSnmpConf)# getSnmpConfig commit
GetSnmpConfig_Output.getSnmpConfigResponse.location = 'Bangalore'
GetSnmpConfig_Output.getSnmpConfigResponse.contact = 'user2'
GetSnmpConfig_Output.getSnmpConfigResponse.engine_id = '800007e5017f000001'
and Later Releases
216
CHAPTER
12
Configuring PTP
This document describes the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) feature and configuration steps to implement
PTP.
Prerequisites for Configuring PTP, page 217
Information About PTP, page 217
How to Provision PTP, page 217
Verifying PTP, page 226
Additional References, page 228
Prerequisites for Configuring PTP

Information About PTP

PTP, as defined in the IEEE 1588 standard, synchronizes with nanosecond accuracy the real-time clocks of
the devices in a network. The clocks are organized into a master-member hierarchy. PTP identifies the switch
port that is connected to a device with the most precise clock. This clock is referred to as the master clock.
All the other devices on the network synchronize their clocks with the master and are referred to as members.
Constantly exchanged timing messages ensure continued synchronization.
How to Provision PTP

Configuring Slave IPv4
To configure slave IPv4, unicast, one step on VLAN 7 with domain number 0, perform the following steps:
Later Releases
217
Configuring PTP
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
PTPPortType
Enters the PTPPortType mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# PTPPortType
Step 4
setPTPclockInstance_v3 ptpClkConfig
Configures slave IPV4, unicast, one step on VLAN 7 with domain
number 0.
{clk_inst_domain | clk_slave | clock_enable |
clock_instance clock_instance_number |dscp | mode
clk_inst_domainHW based or SW based Clock domain.
{boundary | e2etransparent | master | p2ptransparent
| slave} | two_step_flag | one_way | protocol {disable
clk_slaveSet PTP slave clock options.
ethernet | unicast_ipv4 | multicast_ipv4} |servo |
clock_enableEnables or disables clock.
slave-cfg | vlan {disable | vlan_id vlan_id_number} | pcp
{disable | pcp_value} | enabled_ports {port1 | port2 |
clock_instance Specifies PTP clock instance.
port3 | port4 | port5 | port6} | filter | ho | identifier |
clock_instance_number Clock instance number.
localpriority | priority1 | priority2 { profile | disable |
g8265dot1 | g8275dot1 | ieee1588} |clock_domain
dscp Dscp value.
clock_domain_number}
modeSpecifies clock mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)#
setPTPclockInstance_v3 ptp_clock_config
clock_instance 1
clock_domain 0
clock_enable enable
setPTPclockInstance_v3 ptp_clock_config mode
slave
setPTPclockInstance_v3 ptp_clock_config one_way
disable
setPTPclockInstance_v3 ptp_clock_config protocol
unicast_ipv4
two_step_flag disable
setPTPclockInstance_v3 ptp_clock_config vlan
vlan_id 7
boundarySpecifies ordinary boundary clock.

e2etransparent Specifies end to end transparent clock.
masterSpecifies master only clock.
p2ptransparentSpecifies peer to peer transparent clock.
slave Specifies slave only clock.
two_step_flagSpecifies two step flag.
one_waySpecifies one way.
protocol Specifies the protocol.
servo Set servo parameters.
slave_cfg Specifies Unicast Slave configuration Entry.
disableDisables protocol.
ethernetSpecifies EPS Ethernet protocol.
unicast_ipv4Specifies unicast protocol.
and Later Releases
218
Configuring PTP
Command or Action
Purpose
multicast_ipv4 Specifies multicast protocol.
vlanSpecifies the VLAN ID.
disableDisables VLAN tag.
vlan_id Specifies the VLAN tag.
vlan_id_number VLAN tag number.
pcpSpecifies VLAN PCP.
disableDisables VLAN PCP.
pcp_valueSpecifies the PCP value.
enabled_portsSpecifies UNI ports.
port1 Specifies physical port 1.
port2Specifies physical port 2.
port4 Specifies physical port 4.
filterSpecifies filter parameters.
ho Set PTP Servo holdover parameters.
identifier Defines PTP clock instance identifier.
localpriority Set Local priority for the port.
priority1Specifies clock priority 1 for PTP BMC
algorithm, 0 is highest priority.
priority2Specifies clock priority 2 for PTP BMC
algorithm.
profile Specifies Clock's associated profile.
clock_domainSpecifies PTP domain.
clock_domain_numberPTP domain number.
Step 5
setPTPclockInstance_v3 review
Example:
setPTPclockInstance_v3 review
Later Releases
219
Configuring PTP
Enabling PTP on a Port
Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
setPTPclockInstance_v3 commit
Example:
setPTPclockInstance_v3 commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# exit
The example shows how to configure slave IPv4, unicast, one step on VLAN 7 with domain number 0:
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPclockInstance_v3 ptp_clock_config clock_instance
1
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPclockInstance_v3 ptp_clock_config clock_domain
0
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPclockInstance_v3 ptp_clock_config clock_enable
enable
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPclockInstance_v3 ptp_clock_config mode slave
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPclockInstance_v3 ptp_clock_config one_way
disable
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPclockInstance_v3 ptp_clock_config protocol
unicast_ipv4
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPclockInstance_v3 ptp_clock_config two_step_flag
disable
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPclockInstance_v3 ptp_clock_config vlan vlan_id
7
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPclockInstance_v3 review
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPclockInstance_v3 commit

To enable PTP on port 1/4 with PTP instance 1, perform the following steps:
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
and Later Releases
220
Configuring PTP
Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
PTPPortType
Example:
Step 4
setPTPportProperties ptp_port_conf {ptp_run |

Enables PTP on port 1/4, instance: 1.
clock_inst clock_inst_number | port_id port_id_number
ptp_runEnables PTP on the specified port.
| announce_interval {disable | value} |
announce_timeout {disable | value} |
clock_inst Specifies the PTP clock number.
delay_asymmetry {disable | value} |
clock_inst_number PTP clock number.
delay_mechanism {disable | e2e | p2p} | delay_req
{disable | interval interval_value } | egress_latency
port_idSpecifies the physical port number.
{disable | value} | ingress_latency {disable | value} |
port_id_numberPhysical port number.
internal | sync_interval {disable | value value}}
Example:
setPTPportProperties ptp_port_conf port_id 4
setPTPportProperties ptp_port_conf clock_inst
1
setPTPportProperties ptp_port_conf
sync_interval value -4
setPTPportProperties ptp_port_conf delay_req
interval -6
setPTPportProperties ptp_port_conf ptp_run
enable
announce_intervalSpecifies the time interval for sending

announce messages.
disable Disables announce interval.
valueSpecifies announce interval value.
announce_timeoutSets announce timeout.
disable Disables announce timeout.
valueSpecifies announce timeout value.
delay_asymmetrySets path delay asymmetry.
disable Disables delay asymmetry.
valueSpecifies delay asymmetry in nano seconds.
delay_mechanismSets delay mechanism.
disable Disables delay mechanism.
e2eSpecifies end to end delay mechanism.
p2pSpecifies peer to peer delay mechanism.
delay_reqSets delay request interval.
disable Disables delay request mechanism.
intervalSpecifies peer to peer delay mechanism.
interval_valuePeer to peer delay value.
egress_latencySets port egress latency.
value Specifies egress latency in nano seconds.
ingress_latencySets port ingress latency.
Later Releases
221
Configuring PTP
Command or Action
Purpose
value Specifies ingress latency in nano seconds.
internal Enables as an internal interface.
sync_intervalSets sync interval.
disable Disables sync interval.
value Specifies sync interval value.
valueSync interval value.
Step 5
setPTPportProperties review
Example:
setPTPportProperties review
Step 6
setPTPportProperties commit
Example:
setPTPportProperties commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
The following example shows how to enable PTP on a port.
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties ptp_port_conf port_id 4
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties ptp_port_conf clock_inst 1
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties ptp_port_conf sync_interval
value -4
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties ptp_port_conf delay_req interval
-6
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties ptp_port_conf ptp_run enable
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties review
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties commit
and Later Releases
222
Configuring PTP
Enabling or Disabling Microsemi APR
Note
For G.8275.1 profile, there are a few additional parameters that have been added under
setPTPportProperties_v2. In addition to the available parameters for setPTPportProperties, the following
are the new parameters available:
localpriority - Sets Local priority for the port.
mcast_dest - Sets multicast destination address type for the port for G.8275.1 profile.
not_slave - Sets not_slave attribute for the port for G8275.1 BMC algorithm.
The following example shows how to enable PTP on a port using setPTPportProperties_v2.
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config ptp_run
enable
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config clock_inst
1
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config port_id 2
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config localpriority
value 12
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config not_slave
enable
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config mcast_dest
default
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config sync_interval
value -4
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config delay_req
interval -6
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties_v2 review
Commands in queue:
setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config ptp_run enable
setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config clock_inst 1
setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config port_id 2
setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config localpriority value 12
setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config not_slave enable
setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config mcast_dest default
setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config sync_interval value -4
setPTPportProperties_v2 ptp_port_config delay_req interval -6
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPportProperties_v2 commit

To enable or disable Microsemi APR, perform the following steps:
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Later Releases
223
Configuring PTP
Step 2
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 3
PTPPortType
Example:
Step 4
setPTPexternalProperties ptp_external_conf
{clock_output_freq | one_pps_output | one_pps_input |
vcxo_freq_control | algorithm {enable | one_hertz |
min_phase}}
Enables Microsemi APR.

clock_output_freqSpecifies external clock output
frequency in Hz.
one_pps_output Enables 1PPS output.
Example:
setPTPexternalProperties ptp_external_conf algorithm
enable enable
one_hertz enable
one_pps_input Enables 1PPS input.

vcxo_freq_controlSpecifies APR settings.
enableEnables or disables the APR.
one_hertz Enables or disables 1 Hz.
min_phaseSpecifies phase correction begin
threshold.
Step 5
setPTPexternalProperties ptp_external_conf
{clock_output_freq | one_pps_output | one_pps_input |
vcxo_freq_control | algorithm {enable | one_hertz |
min_phase}}
Disables Microsemi APR and returns to default VTSS

APR.
clock_output_freqSpecifies external clock output
frequency in Hz.
Example:
one_pps_output Enables 1PPS output.
enable disable
one_pps_input Enables 1PPS input.

vcxo_freq_controlSpecifies APR settings.
enableEnables or disables the APR.
one_hertz Enables or disables 1 Hz.
min_phaseSpecifies phase correction begin
threshold.
Step 6
setPTPexternalProperties review
Example:
setPTPexternalProperties review
and Later Releases
224
Configuring PTP
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
setPTPclockInstance commit
Example:
setPTPexternalProperties commit
Step 8
exit
Example:
The following example shows how to enable Microsemi APR.
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPexternalProperties ptp_external_conf algorithm
enable enable
one_hertz enable
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPexternalProperties review
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPexternalProperties commit
The following example shows how to disable Microsemi APR and return to default VTSS APR.
enable disable
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPexternalProperties review
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPexternalProperties commit
Note
For G.8275.1 profile, there are a few additional parameters that have been added under
setPTPexternalProperties_v2. In addition to the available parameters for setPTPexternalProperties,
the following are the new parameters available:
ho_spec - Holdover specification for G.8275 PTP clocks.
adjustment_method - Adjustment method.
The following example shows how to set holdover specification and adjustment method for G.8275.1 profile.
ho_spec enable enable
ho_spec cat1_value 11
one_pps_mode one_pps_input enable
adjustment_method ltc_phase enable
setPTPexternalProperties_v2 ptp_external_config
Later Releases
225
Configuring PTP
Verifying PTP
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPexternalProperties_v2 review

Commands in queue:
setPTPexternalProperties_v2
ptp_external_config
ptp_external_config
ptp_external_config
ptp_external_config
ptp_external_config
ptp_external_config
ho_spec enable enable

one_pps_mode one_pps_input enable
adjustment_method ltc_phase enable
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# setPTPexternalProperties_v2 commit

Verifying PTP
Use the following commands to verify the PTP status on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# showPTPall ptp_show_req 1
Switch(config-controller-PTPPortType)# showPTPall commit
This command displays the PTP configuration status on the NID.
Note
To view the values of the parameters that have been added as part of G.8275.1 profile, use the
showPTPall_v2 command.
The following is a sample output from the showPTPall command:
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].local_current_time.ptp_time =
'local time not implemented for clk_inst = 1 '
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].local_current_time.clock_adjustment_method.t
= 4
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].local_current_time.clock_adjustment_method.u.software
= ''
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.clock_id =
1
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.mode.t = 5
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.mode.u.slave
= ''
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.two_step_flag
= false
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.ports = '255'
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.clock_identity
= '4348018d07000075'
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.clock_quality
= 'Cl:255 Ac:128 Va:00004'
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.properties.priority1
= 0
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.properties.priority2
= 0
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.properties.clock_domain
= 127
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.protocol.t
= 1
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.protocol.u.ethernet
= ''
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.one_way =
and Later Releases
226
Configuring PTP
Verifying PTP
true
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.vlan.t = 1
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.vlan.u.disable
= ''
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.pcp.t = 1
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_default_dataset.pcp.u.disable
= ''
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].time_property.UTC_offset.t = 2
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].time_property.UTC_offset.u.value
= 34
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].time_property.frequency_traceable
= true
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].time_property.leap59 = true
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].time_property.leap61 = true
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].time_property.timing_traceable =
true
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].time_property.ptp_timescale = true
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].time_property.ptp_timesource = 0
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_parent_dataset =
'ParentPortIdentity port Pstat Var ChangeRate d0c282fffe17dfbf 1 0
65170-8207664
GrandmasterIdentity GrandmasterClockQuality Pri1 Pri2fe17dfbf68fe70cd
Cl:128 Ac:128 Va:33914 92 145
'
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_current_dataset.stpRm = 1
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_current_dataset.offset_from_master
= ' 0.000.000.003'
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_current_dataset.mean_path_delay
= ' 0.000.000.067'
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_current_dataset.slave_port
= 4
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_current_dataset.slave_state.t
= 4
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_current_dataset.slave_state.u.LOCKED
= ''
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].clock_current_dataset.holdover =
'TRUE -368.3
'
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].slave_cfg[0].index_ = 0
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].slave_cfg[0].duration = 100
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].slave_cfg[0].peer_ip_addr =
'7.7.7.7'
'0.0.0.0'
'0.0.0.0'
'0.0.0.0'
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].slave_cfg4.index_ = 4
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].slave_cfg4.duration = 100
ShowPTPall_Output.ptp_show_response[0].slave_cfg4.peer_ip_addr = '0.0.0.0'
Later Releases
227
Configuring PTP
Additional References
ShowPTPall Commit Success!!!
Related Documents
Related Topic
Document Title
Cisco ME 3800x and ME 3600x Switches Software http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/switches/metro/

Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.4(1)S
me3600x_3800x/software/release/15-4_1_S/
configuration/guide/3800x3600xscg.html
MIBs
MIB
MIBs Link
MIBs Supporting Cisco IOS
To locate and download MIBs for selected platforms, Cisco IOS releases,
and feature sets, use Cisco MIB Locator found at the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/go/mibs
Technical Assistance
Description
Link
The Cisco Support website provides extensive online http://www.cisco.com/support

resources, including documentation and tools for
troubleshooting and resolving technical issues with
Cisco products and technologies.
To receive security and technical information about
your products, you can subscribe to various services,
such as the Product Alert Tool (accessed from Field
Notices), the Cisco Technical Services Newsletter,
and Really Simple Syndication (RSS) Feeds.
Access to most tools on the Cisco Support website
requires a Cisco.com user ID and password.
and Later Releases
228
CHAPTER
13
Configuring ACLs
This chapter describes how to configure network security on the Cisco ME 1200 NID using access control
lists (ACLs), which are also referred as access lists. Information in this chapter about ACLs is specific to IP
Version 4 (IPv4). The other supported ACLs for Cisco IOS 15.4 (2)SN release are UDP, Ethernet, TCP, and
ICMP.
For more information on ACLs, see Configuring Network Security with ACLs.
Prerequisites for Configuring ACLs, page 229
Restrictions for Configuring ACLs, page 229
How to Configure ACLs, page 230
Prerequisites for Configuring ACLs

Restrictions for Configuring ACLs

The Policy 0 is applied on all interfaces, but is not displayed on any interface configuration. This means,
you cannot view the policy 0 details when you use the show running-config command.
Logging of the packet frames are not supported.
The ACLs that are common to both IOS CLI and that of Cisco ME 1200 NID CLIs are only supported.
Modifying ACL parameter that is applied on Cisco ME 1200 NID is not supported. To modify, remove
the parameter using the removeAclConfig and removeAclFromPort commands, and apply it to a port
afresh.
A maximum of 512 ACL entries can be programmed.
ACLs can be configured with policy IDs ranging from 0 to 63.
Later Releases
229
Configuring ACLs
How to Configure ACLs
Tip
To add more number of ACLs when the maximum entries are achieved, remove unwanted
ACLs to configure more ACLs.
How to Configure ACLs

Configuring ACL Rules on the NID using the Controller
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionACL
Enters the ProvisionACL mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionACL
Step 4
mac access-list {extended WORD}

Example:
Switch(config)# mac access-list extended
nid_acl_50000
Configures the extended ACL rules.

access-listSpecifies the named access-list.
extendedSpecifies that the access-list is of the type
extended.
WORDaccess-list name.
Step 5
deny {H.H.H |any |host H.H.H} {H.H.H |any |host Configures the ACL rule.
H.H.H} OR permit {H.H.H | any |host H.H.H }
denySpecifies the packets to be reject.
{H.H.H |any |host H.H.H }
icmpInternet Control Message Protocol.
Example:
Switch(config-ext-macl)# deny host
0000.0000.0001 host 5555.6666.7777
Switch(config-ext-macl)# permit host
4444.aaaa.cccc host 4444.cccc.aaaa
ipAny Internet Protocol.

tcpTransmission Control Protocol.
udpUser Datagram Protocol.
permitSpecifies the packets to be forward.
and Later Releases
230
Configuring ACLs
Configuring ACL Rules on the NID using the Controller
Command or Action
Purpose
icmpInternet Control Message Protocol.
ipAny Internet Protocol.
tcpTransmission Control Protocol.
udpUser Datagram Protocol.
H.H.HSpecifies the 48-bit source or destination MAC
address.
anySpecifies any source or destination MAC address.
hostSpecifies a single source or destination host.
H.H.H48-bit source or destination MAC address.
Step 6
exit
Example:
Switch(config-ext-macl)# exit
Note
The following two configuration examples use IOS ACL commands.

Example 1: MAC
Switch(config)# mac access-list extended nid_acl_50000
Switch(config-ext-macl)# deny host 0000.0000.0001 host 5555.6666.7777
Switch(config)# mac access-list extended nid_acl_1002
Switch(config-ext-macl)# permit host 4444.aaaa.cccc host 4444.cccc.aaaa
Switch(config-ext-macl)# permit any any etype-6000
Example 2: IP
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended nid_acl_1001
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# deny ip host 15.15.1.2 host 15.15.1.3
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# deny tcp host 10.10.1.5 eq 101 host 10.10.1.6 eq 100
Later Releases
231
Configuring ACLs
Creating ACL Global Configurations
Creating ACL Global Configurations

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionACL
Example:
Step 4
createAclConfigcreateAclConfigRequest {acl_name WORD} Configures the ACL global configuration.

Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# createAclConfig
createAclConfigRequest acl_name nid_acl_50000
Step 5
createAclConfig review
acl_nameSpecifies the extended ACL.

WORDACL name.
Example:
review
Step 6
createAclConfig commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# exit
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# createAclConfig createAclConfigRequest acl_name
acl_nid_50000
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# createAclConfig review
Commands in queue:
and Later Releases
232
Configuring ACLs
Applying ACL Configuration to the Ports
createAclConfig createAclConfigRequest acl_name acl_nid_50000

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# createAclConfig commit
CreateAclConfig Commit Success!!!
Applying ACL Configuration to the Ports

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionACL
Example:
Step 4
applyAclToPortapplyAclToPortRequest {acl_name WORD Applies the ACL global configuration.

| port_number Port_Number}
acl_namespecifies the extended ACL.
WORDACL name.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# applyAclToPort
applyAclToPortRequest acl_name nid_acl_50000
applyAclToPortRequest port_number 3
Step 5
applyAclToPort review
port_numberSpecifies the port number.

Port_Numberport number. The range
is from 1 to 6.
Example:
review
Step 6
applyAclToPort commit
Example:
commit
Later Releases
233
Configuring ACLs
Viewing ACL Global Configurations
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# applyAclToPort applyAclToPortRequest acl_name
nid_acl_50000
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# applyAclToPort applyAclToPortRequest port_number 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# applyAclToPort review
Commands in queue:
applyAclToPort applyAclToPortRequest acl_name nid_acl_50000
applyAclToPort applyAclToPortRequest port_number 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# applyAclToPort commit
ApplyAclToPort
Commit Success!!!
For applying the policy ID using EVC configuration, see Configuring ECE Sample Rule 1 and Other
Commands For EVC Configuration

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionACL
Example:
and Later Releases
234
Configuring ACLs
Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose
getAclConfiggetAclConfigRequest {acl_name WORD}
Displays the ACL global configuration.

acl_nameSpecifies the extended ACL .
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# getAclConfig
getAclConfigRequest acl_name nid_acl_50000
Step 5
getAclConfig review
WORDACL name.
Example:
review
Step 6
getAclConfig commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Example 1: MAC
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# getAclConfig getAclConfigRequest acl_name
nid_acl_50000
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# getAclConfig review
Commands in queue:
getAclConfig getAclConfigRequest acl_name nid_acl_50000
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# getAclConfig commit
GetAclConfig_Output.getAclConfigResponse.acl_definition = '
Extended MAC access list nid_acl_50000
permit host 0000.0000.0001 host 5555.5556.5557
permit any any etype-6000'
GetAclConfig Commit Success!!!
Example 2: IP
nid_acl_50000
Commands in queue:
getAclConfig getAclConfigRequest acl_name nid_acl_50000
Later Releases
235
Configuring ACLs
Removing ACL Global Configurations

Extended IP access list nid_acl_1001
ip access-list extended nid_acl_1001
deny ip host 15.15.1.2 host 15.15.1.3'
Removing ACL Global Configurations

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionACL
Example:
Step 4
removeAclconfigremoveAclConfigRequest {acl_name WORD} Removes the ACL global configuration.

Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# removeAclconfig
removeAclConfigRequest acl_name nid_acl_50000
Step 5
removeAclconfig review
acl_nameSpecifies the extended ACL .

WORDACL name.
Example:
review
Step 6
removeAclconfig commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
and Later Releases
236
Configuring ACLs
Removing ACL Port Configurations
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# removeAclconfig removeAclConfigRequest acl_name
nid_acl_50000
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# removeAclconfig review
Commands in queue:
removeAclconfig removeAclConfigRequest acl_name nid_acl_50000
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# removeAclconfig commit
RemoveAclConfig Commit Success!!!
To verify the remove action:
nid_acl_50000
nid_acl_50000 does not exist '
What to Do Next
Use the getAclConfig getAclConfigRequest command to verify the remove action.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# getAclConfig getAclConfigRequest acl_name acl_name

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionACL
Example:
Step 4
removeAclFromPort removeAclFromPortRequest
{acl_name WORD | port_number Port_Number}
Removes the ACL port configuration.

acl_nameSpecifies the extended ACL.
Later Releases
237
Configuring ACLs
Command or Action
Purpose
WORDACL name.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)#
removeAclFromPort removeAclFromPortRequest
port-number 3
Step 5
removeAclFromPort review
port_numberSpecifies the port number.

Port_NumberPort number. The range
is from 1to 6.
Example:
removeAclFromPort review
Step 6
removeAclFromPort commit
Example:
removeAclFromPort commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# removeAclFromPort removeAclFromPortRequest port_number
3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# removeAclFromPort review
Commands in queue:
removeAclFromPort removeAclFromPortRequest port_number 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# removeAclFromPort commit
RemoveAclFromPort Commit Success!!!
What to Do Next
Use the showAclConfigSummary command to view the interface ACL summary.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# showAclConfigSummary showAclConfigSummaryRequest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# showAclConfigSummary review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# showAclConfigSummary commit
and Later Releases
238
Configuring ACLs
Verifying ACL Configurations

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionACL
Example:
Step 4
showAclConfigSummaryshowAclConfigSummaryRequest
Displays the ACL configuration summary.
Example:
showAclConfigSummary showAclConfigSummaryRequest
Step 5
showAclConfigSummary review
Example:
showAclConfigSummary review
Step 6
showAclConfigSummary commit
Example:
showAclConfigSummary commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# showAclConfigSummary showAclConfigSummaryRequest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# showAclConfigSummary review
Commands in queue:
showAclConfigSummary showAclConfigSummaryRequest
Later Releases
239
Configuring ACLs
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionACL)# showAclConfigSummary commit

ShowAclConfigSummary_Output.showAclConfigSummaryResponse.showOutput = '
Acl Configuration Summary
policyid: 0 aclname: nid_acl_50000
Interface Acl Summary
Port 3: nid_acl_50000'
ShowAclConfigSummary Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
240
CHAPTER
14
Configuring Quality of Service (QoS)

QoS includes traffic classification, marking, policing, queuing, and scheduling configured with service
policies that are attached to ingress and egress targets. With QoS, you can provide preferential treatment to
certain types of traffic at the expense of other types. When you do not configure QoS, the switch offers
best-effort service to each packet, regardless of the packet contents or size.
Ingress QoS includes classification, marking, and policing. Classification can be based on the class of service
(CoS), Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) in the inbound packet. You can classify based on Layer
2 MAC, IP-standard, or match based on AMAC, IP parameters using QCE configurations.
For EVC level QoS, see Creating a Policer, on page 103.
Hierarchical QoS on the Cisco ME 1200 Series Carrier Ethernet Access Devices supports queuing and
scheduling per EVC level per port. 8 queues are supported per port on the EVC. The EVC must be configured
on the interface before configuring HQoS.
Note
Single EVC per single UNI (input port) is supported.

The port scheduler is configured by default for fair round-robin scheduling between each EVC and non-service
traffic, but can be weighted by configuring guaranteed bandwidths for the EVC. When guaranteed bandwidth
is configured for an EVC, the remaining bandwidth of the port is divided equally between the remaining
EVCs and non-service traffic.
Note
Configuring of guaranteed bandwidth for non-service traffic is not supported.

The CIR bandwidth requirements are configured for each CoS per EVC. Excess traffic is strictly not prioritized,
but is shared proportionally between the CoS within the EVC.
For more information, see Configuring Quality of Service (QoS).
How to Configure QoS, page 242
Displaying the QCE List on the Controller, page 294
Displaying QoS Queue Statistics on the Controller, page 295
Displaying the Hierarchical QoS ID List on the Controller, page 296
Later Releases
241

How to Configure QoS
How to Configure QoS

Provisioning the Controller to Configure QoS
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal

mode.
Example:
Step 2

configuration mode.
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionQos
Enters QoS provisioning mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionQos
Step 4
ProvisionQos {default | deleteQCE | exit | getInputGlobalPolicy |

getInputGlobalPolicy | getOutputGlobalPolicy | getOutputPortPolicy | getQCE |
getSystemQosSettings | no | reorderQCEentries | setInputGlobalPolicy |
setInputPortPolicy | setOutputGlobalPolicy | setOutputPortPolicy | setQCE |
setSystemQosSettings | showQCElist | showQueueStatistics}
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# ?
ProvisionQos sub-mode commands:
default
deleteQCE
Delete a particular QCE
exit
Exit from ProvisionQos sub configuration mode
getInputGlobalPolicy
Show Output QoS global features configured
getInputPortPolicy
Show Input Policy configured on Physical Port
getOutputGlobalPolicy Show Global Output QoS features
getOutputPortPolicy
Show Output Policy configured on Physical Port
getQCE
getQCE (default)
getSystemQosSettings
getSystemQosSettings (default)
no
reorderQCEentries
reorderQCEentries (default)
setInputGlobalPolicy
configure Global Input QoS features
setInputPortPolicy
configure Input policy on Physical Port
setOutputGlobalPolicy configure Global Output QoS features
setOutputPortPolicy
configure Output policy on Physical Port
setQCE
setQCE (default)
setSystemQosSettings
set System-wide QoS settings
showQCElist
showQCElist (default)
showQueueStatistics
Display egress queue statistics
and Later Releases
242
Displays the supported

configurations for QoS.

Configuring QoS Input Policy Features Globally on the Controller
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Exits the QoS provisioning

mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# exit
The following example shows the supported QoS configuration:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# ?
ProvisionQos sub-mode commands:
default
deleteQCE
exit
getInputPortPolicy
getOutputGlobalPolicy Show Global Output QoS features
getOutputPortPolicy
getQCE
getQCE (default)
no
reorderQCEentries
setInputPortPolicy
setOutputGlobalPolicy configure Global Output QoS features
setOutputPortPolicy
setQCE
setQCE (default)
showQCElist
showQueueStatistics

Before You Begin
Perform the steps to provision QoS on the controller. See Provisioning the Controller to Configure QoS,
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 1 setInputGlobalPolicy {commit | flush |

inputGlobalPolicyConfig | review}
Sets the global input QoS policy.

commitSends the QoS configuration to NID.
Example:
flushFlushes all QoS configuration from the queue.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)#
setInputGlobalPolicy ?
commit
commit
inputGlobalPolicyConfigSets the input policy global configuration

on the controller.
Later Releases
243

Command or Action
flush
flush all
setInputGlobalPolicy commands from queue
inputGlobalPolicyConfig configure
Global Input QoS features
review
review
setInputGlobalPolicy commands
Purpose
reviewDisplays the configuration on the controller.
Step 2 setInputGlobalPolicy inputGlobalPolicyConfig Configures input global policy.

{match_DSCP value_xx {mark_DSCP
match_DSCPMatches a particular DSCP value .
dscp_value | mark_egress_class egress_queue}
| service_policy {attach | detach}}
value_xxSets DSCP values on the controller. Use the following
values:
Example:
inputGlobalPolicyConfig match_DSCP
value_00 mark_DSCP 4
value_00 mark_egress_class 4
inputGlobalPolicyConfig service_policy
attach
value_00 DSCP 0. Default PHB for best effort traffic

value_01 DSCP 1
value_02 DSCP 2
value_03 DSCP 3
value_04 DSCP 4
value_05 DSCP 5
value_06 DSCP 6
value_07 DSCP 7
value_08 CS1. Class Selector PHB precedence 1(DSCP 8)
value_09 DSCP 9
value_10 AF11. Assured Forwarding PHB (DSCP 10)
value_11 DSCP 11
value_13 DSCP 13
value_15 DSCP 15
value_17 DSCP 17
value_19 DSCP 19
value_21 DSCP 21
value_23 DSCP 23
value_25 DSCP 25
and Later Releases
244

Command or Action
Purpose
value_27 DSCP 27
value_29 DSCP 29
value_31 DSCP 31
value_33DSCP 33
value_35 DSCP 35
value_37 DSCP 37
value_39 DSCP 39
value_41 DSCP 41
value_42 DSCP 42
value_43 DSCP 43
value_44 VA. Voice Admit PHB(DSCP 44)
value_45 DSCP 45
value_46 Expedited Forwarding PHB(DSCP 46)
value_47 DSCP 47
value_49 DSCP 49
value_50 DSCP 50
value_51 DSCP 51
value_52 DSCP 52
value_53 DSCP 53
value_54 DSCP 54
value_55 DSCP 55
value_57 DSCP 57
value_58 DSCP 58
value_59 DSCP 59
Later Releases
245

Command or Action
Purpose
value_60 DSCP 60
value_61 DSCP 61
value_62 DSCP 62
value_63 DSCP 63
mark_DSCPMarks the DSCP on the controller. The valid range
is from 0 to 63. 64 is invalid.
mark_egress_classAssigns to egress queue. The valid range is
from 0 to 7. 8 is invalid.
service_policyAttaches or detaches the service policy.
attachAttaches the service policy and enables the
configuration.
detachRemoves the service policy, removes all configuration
and restore the default configuration.
Step 3 setInputGlobalPolicy review
Displays the QoS configuration on the controller.
Example:
setInputGlobalPolicy review
Commands in queue:
value_02 mark_egress_class 4
inputGlobalPolicyConfig service_policy
attach
Step 4 setInputGlobalPolicy commit
Sends the QoS configuration to the NID.
Example:
setInputGlobalPolicy commit
Step 5 exit
Exits the QoS provisioning mode.
Example:
exit
and Later Releases
246

Configuring QoS Input Policy Features at Port level on the Controller
The example shows how to configure QoS input policy globally on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setInputGlobalPolicy inputGlobalPolicyConfig
match_DSCP value_00 mark_DSCP 4
match_DSCP value_00 mark_egress_class 4
service_policy attach
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setInputGlobalPolicy review
Commands in queue:
setInputGlobalPolicy inputGlobalPolicyConfig match_DSCP value_02 mark_DSCP 4
setInputGlobalPolicy inputGlobalPolicyConfig match_DSCP value_02 mark_egress_class
4
setInputGlobalPolicy inputGlobalPolicyConfig service_policy attach
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setInputGlobalPolicy commit
SetInputGlobalPolicy Commit Success!!!

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 1 setInputPortPolicy {commit | flush | inputPortPolicyConfig Sets the input QoS policy at port level.
| review}
Example:
setInputPortPolicy ?
commit
commit setInputPortPolicy
flush
flush all setInputPortPolicy
commands from queue
inputPortPolicyConfig configure Input policy on
Physical Port
review
review setInputPortPolicy
commands
inputPortPolicyConfigSets the input policy

configuration at port level on the controller.
Configures input policy at port.

Step 2 inputPortPolicyConfig {egress_class_marking {enable |
disable} | globalDscpBasedDscpIngressMarking {enable |
egress_class_markingEnables egress class marking
disable} | globalDscpBasedEgressClassMarking {enable |
as configured per each cos matched packet.
disable} | match cos value_xx mark_egress_class
egress_queue | port_numberport_number | port_policer {cir
globalDscpBasedDscpIngressMarkingEnables
kbps | state {enable | disable}} | qce {address {destination |
DSCP based DSCP ingress marking on the port as per
source} | key {double_tag | ip_address | mac_ip_addr |
the configured global policy.
normal}} | service_policy {attach | detach}}
globalDscpBasedEgressClassMarkingEnable DSCP
based Egress Class marking on the port as per the
configured global policy.
Later Releases
247

Command or Action
Purpose
enableEnables the marking.
Example:
disableDisables the marking.
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig
egress_class_marking enable
globalDscpBasedDscpIngressMarking enable
globalDscpBasedEgressClassMarking enable
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig match cos
value_0
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig port_number
1
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig port_policer
cir 1000
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig port_policer
state enable
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig qce address
destination
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig qce key
double_tag
matchMatches input packet COS.

cosSets the COS value.
value_0Sets the COS value 0.
mark_egress_class egress_queueSets the egress
queue value. The valid range is from 0 to 7. Queue 8 in
invalid.
port_number port_numberSets the port number.
The valid range is from 1 to 6. Port 7 is invalid.
port_policerSets port level policer.
cir kbpsSets committed information rate in kbps. The
valid range is from 100 to 1000000.
stateEnables or disables the policer state.
qceSets TCAM based QoS control entry settings for
the port.
addressMatches the source or destination address of
incoming packet in QCE.
destinationMatches against destination address.
sourceMatches against source address.
keyMatches the key template in QCE. The default is
normal.
double_tagMatches against Match outer tag,
inner tag, IP protocol, DSCP and DPORT.
ip_addressMatches against Match outer tag,
SMAC/DMAC, IP protocol, DSCP, SIP and DIP.
and Later Releases
248

Command or Action
Purpose
mac_ip_addrMatch outer tag, inner tag,
SMAC, DMAC, IP protocol, DSCP, SIP,DIP,
SPORT and DPORT.
normalMatch outer tag, SMAC/DMAC, IP
protocol, DSCP, SIP/DIP, SPORT and DPORT
(default).
service_policyAttaches or detaches the service policy
on the port.
attachAttaches the service policy and enables the
configuration.
detachRemoves the service policy, removes the
configuration and restores the default configuration.
Step 3 setInputPortPolicy review
Example:
setInputPortPolicy review
Commands in queue:
Commands in queue:
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig match
cos value_0 mark_egress_class 5
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig match
cos value_0 mark_egress_class 5
port_policer state enable
port_number 1
port_policer cir 1000
port_policer state enable
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig qce
address source
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig qce
key normal
Step 4 setInputPortPolicycommit
Example:
setInputPortPolicy commit
Later Releases
249

Configuring QoS Output Policy Features Globally on the Controller
Command or Action
Step 5 exit
Purpose
Example:
The example shows how to configure QoS input port policy on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig match cos
value_0
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig port_number
1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig port_policer
cir 1000
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig port_policer
state enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig qce address
destination
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig qce key
double_tag
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setInputPortPolicy review
Commands in queue:
Commands in queue:
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig egress_class_marking enable
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig globalDscpBasedDscpIngressMarking enable
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig globalDscpBasedEgressClassMarking enable
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig match cos value_0 mark_egress_class 5
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig match cos value_0 mark_egress_class 5
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig port_policer state enable
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig port_number 1
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig port_policer cir 1000
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig port_policer state enable
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig qce address source
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig qce key normal
setInputPortPolicy inputPortPolicyConfig service_policy attach
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setInputPortPolicy commit
SetInputPortPolicy Commit Success!!!

Before You Begin
on page 242.
and Later Releases
250

DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 1 setOutputGlobalPolicy {commit | flush |

outputGlobalPolicyConfig | review}
Sets the global output QoS policy.

Example:
setOutputGlobalPolicy ?
commit
commit
setOutputGlobalPolicy
flush
flush all
setOutputGlobalPolicy commands from
queue
outputGlobalPolicyConfig configure
Global Output QoS features
review
review
setOutputGlobalPolicy commands
outputGlobalPolicyConfigSets the output policy global

configuration on the controller.
Step 2 setOutputGlobalPolicy
outputGlobalPolicyConfig {match_DSCP
value_xx {mark_DSCP dscp_value} |
service_policy {attach | detach}}
Example:
Configures output global policy.

match_DSCPMatches a particular DSCP value .
value_xxSets DSCP values on the controller. Use the following
values:
value_00 DSCP 0. Default PHB for best effort traffic
outputGlobalPolicyConfig match_DSCP
outputGlobalPolicyConfig service_policy
attach
value_01 DSCP 1
value_02 DSCP 2
value_03 DSCP 3
value_04 DSCP 4
value_05 DSCP 5
value_06 DSCP 6
value_07 DSCP 7
value_09 DSCP 9
value_11 DSCP 11
value_13 DSCP 13
value_15 DSCP 15
value_17 DSCP 17
Later Releases
251

Command or Action
Purpose
value_19 DSCP 19
value_21 DSCP 21
value_23 DSCP 23
value_25 DSCP 25
value_27 DSCP 27
value_29 DSCP 29
value_31 DSCP 31
value_33DSCP 33
value_35 DSCP 35
value_37 DSCP 37
value_39 DSCP 39
value_41 DSCP 41
value_42 DSCP 42
value_43 DSCP 43
value_44 VA. Voice Admit PHB(DSCP 44)
value_45 DSCP 45
value_46 Expedited Forwarding PHB(DSCP 46)
value_47 DSCP 47
value_49 DSCP 49
value_50 DSCP 50
value_51 DSCP 51
and Later Releases
252

Command or Action
Purpose
value_52 DSCP 52
value_53 DSCP 53
value_54 DSCP 54
value_55 DSCP 55
value_57 DSCP 57
value_58 DSCP 58
value_59 DSCP 59
value_60 DSCP 60
value_61 DSCP 61
value_62 DSCP 62
value_63 DSCP 63
mark_DSCPMarks the DSCP on the controller. The valid range is
service_policyApplies the service policy.
attachAdds the service policy.
detachRemoves the service policy.
Step 3 setOutputGlobalPolicy review
Example:
setOutputGlobalPolicy review
Commands in queue:
outputGlobalPolicyConfig match_DSCP
outputGlobalPolicyConfig service_policy
attach
Step 4 setOutputGlobalPolicycommit
Example:
setOutputGlobalPolicy commit
Step 5 exit
Example:
exit
Later Releases
253

Configuring QoS Output Policy Features at Port level on the Controller
The example shows how to configure QoS output policy globally on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setOutputGlobalPolicy outputGlobalPolicyConfig
match_DSCP value_00 mark_DSCP 4
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setOutputGlobalPolicy outputGlobalPolicyConfig
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setOutputGlobalPolicy review
Commands in queue:
setOutputGlobalPolicy outputGlobalPolicyConfig match_DSCP value_01 mark_DSCP 1
setOutputGlobalPolicy outputGlobalPolicyConfig service_policy attach
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setOutputGlobalPolicy commit
SetOutputGlobalPolicy Commit Success!!!

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 1 setOutputPortPolicy {commit | flush | outputPortPolicyConfig Sets the output QoS policy at port level.
| review}
Example:
setOutputPortPolicy ?
commit
commit setOutputPortPolicy
flush
flush all setOutputPortPolicy
commands from queue
outputPortPolicyConfig configure Output policy on
Physical Port
review
review setOutputPortPolicy
commands
flushFlushes all QoS configuration from the

queue.
outputPortPolicyConfigSets the output policy
configuration at port level on the controller.
controller.
Configures output policy at port.

Step 2 outputPortPolicyConfig {cos_marking {enable | disable} |
globalDscpBasedDscpEgressMarking {enable | disable} |
cos_markingEnables egress class marking as
matchegress_class_xx {bandwidth {priority_level pr_level |
configured per each cos matched packet.
remaining_ratio ratio} | mark_cos mark_cos_vlaue | shaper
{rate rate_value | state {enable | disable}}} |
globalDscpBasedDscpEgressMarkingEnables
port_numberport_number | port_shape {rate rate_value | state
DSCP based DSCP egress marking on the port as
{enable | disable}} |service_policy {attach | detach}}
per the configured global policy.
Example:
setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig cos_marking
enable
enableEnables the marking.

disableDisables the marking.
matchMatches output packet COS.
and Later Releases
254

Command or Action
Purpose
setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig
globalDscpBasedDscpEgressMarking enable
setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig match
egress_class_0 bandwidth priority_level 8
egress_class_0 bandwidth remaining_ratio 20
egress_class_0 mark_cos 7
setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig port_number
1
setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig port_shaper
rate 1000
setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig port_shaper
state enable
all-egress_classesSets the egress for all

queues from 0 to 7.
egress_class_0Sets queue 0, lowest priority.
egress_class_1Sets queue 1.
egress_class_5Sets queue 5, higher priority.
egress_class_6Sets queue 6, highest priority.
bandwith Sets scheduling scheme.
priority_level pr_levelConfigures priority
scheduling. The valid range is from 1 to 8.
remaining_ratio ratioConfigures weighted round
robin mode of scheduling. The vallid range is from
1 to 100.
shaper Configures queue level shaper.
mark_cos cos_vallueSets the COS value for
marking The valid range is from 0 to 7. COS 8 in
invalid.
port_number port_numberSets the port number.
The valid range is from 1 to 6. Port 7 is invalid.
port_shaperSets port level shaper.
rate kbpsSets shaper rate in kbps. The valid range
is from 100 to 1000000.
stateEnables or disables the port shaper state.
service_policySets the service policy on the port.
attachAdds the service policy.
detachRemoves the service policy.
Step 3 setOutputPortPolicy review
Example:
setOutputPortPolicy review
Commands in queue:
cos_marking enable
Later Releases
255

Command or Action
Purpose
all-egress_classes mark _cos 7
port_number 4
port_shaper rate 100
port_shaper state enable
Step 4 setOutputPortPolicycommit
Example:
setOutputPortPolicy commit
Step 5 exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure QoS output port policy on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig cos_marking
enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig match
egress_class_0 bandwidth remaining_ratio 20
egress_class_0 mark_cos 7
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig port_number
1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig port_shaper
rate 1000
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig port_shaper
state enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setOutputPortPolicy review
Commands in queue:
setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig cos_marking enable
setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig globalDscpBasedDscpEgressMarking enable
setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig match egress_class_0 bandwidth
priority_level 8
setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig match all-egress_classes mark _cos 7
setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig port_number 4
setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig port_shaper rate 100
setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig port_shaper state enable
setOutputPortPolicy outputPortPolicyConfig service_policy attach
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setOutputPortPolicy commit
and Later Releases
256

Configuring QoS Control Entry (QCE) on the Controller
SetInputPortPolicy Commit Success!!!


Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
setQCE {commit | flush | QCE_configuration | review}
Sets QCE configuration.

Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setQCE ?
QCE_configuration setQCE (default)
commit
commit setQCE
flush
flush all setQCE commands from
queue
review
review setQCE commands

queue.
QCE_configurationSets the default QCE on the
controller.
controller.
Step 2
setQCE QCE_configuration {control {actions |

ingress_match} | qce-id}
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setQCE
QCEconfiguration control action mark_Cos 4
QCEconfiguration ingress_match frame_type any
match_fields inner_cos val_0-1
match_type vlan c_tagged
QCEconfiguration qce-id 4
Step 3
Configures QCE.
controlConfigures QCE.
actionsConfigures QCE actions. See Configuring
QoS Control Entry (QCE) Control Actions on the
Controller, on page 258.
ingress_matchConfigures ingress match. See
Configuring QCE Match Ingress Parameters on the
qce-idSpecifies the QCE ID. The valid range is
setQCE review
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setQCE review
Step 4
setQCE commit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setQCE commit
Later Releases
257

Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure QoS QCE on the controller:
any match_fields inner_cos val_0-1
any match_type vlan c_tagged
setQCE QCEconfiguration control action mark_Cos 4

setQCE QCEconfiguration ingress_match frame_type
setQCE QCEconfiguration ingress_match frame_type
setQCE review
Commands in queue:
setQCE QCE_configuration control actions mark_COS 4
setQCE QCE_configuration control actions mark_DSCP 3
setQCE QCE_configuration control actions mark_egress_class 4
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match frame_type any
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match inner_tag_match match_fields inner_cos
val_0-1
SetQCE Commit Success!!!
Configuring QoS Control Entry (QCE) Control Actions on the Controller

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose

Configures QCE.
Example:
and Later Releases
258

Command or Action
Step 2
Purpose

setQCE QCE_configurationcontrol {actions {mark_COS

cos_vlaue | mark_DSCP dscp_vlaue | mark_egress_class
egress_queue}
mark_COS cos_vlaueMarks the Cos packets. The

valid range is from 0 to 7. Value 8 is invalid.
Example:
QCEconfiguration control action mark_DSCP 3
QCEconfiguration control action mark_egress_class 4
Step 3
actionsConfigures QCE actions.
mark_DSCP dscp_vlaueMarks the DSCP packets.

The valid range is from 0 to 63. Value 64 is invalid.
mark_egress_class egress_queueMarks the egress
queue. The valid range is from 0 to 7. Value 8 is
invalid.
setQCE review
Example:
Step 4
setQCE commit
Example:
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure QoS input policy globally on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setQCE QCEConfig match_DSCP value_00 mark_DSCP 4
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setQCE QCEConfig match_DSCP value_00 mark_egress_class
4
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setQCE QCEConfig service_policy attach
Commands in queue:
setQCE QCE_configuration control actions mark_COS 4
setQCE QCE_configuration control actions mark_DSCP 3
setQCE QCE_configuration control actions mark_egress_class 4
Later Releases
259

Configuring QCE Match Ingress Parameters on the Controller

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose

Configures QCE.
Example:
Step 2
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match

{frame_type | inner_tag_match | mac_params
outer_tag_match | ports}
Example:
QCE_configuration control ingress_match frame_type
any match_fields inner_cos val_0-1 any
QCE_configuration control ingress_match
inner_tag_match match_fields inner_cos val_0-3
QCE_configuration control ingress_match mac_params
dmac_filter any
QCE_configuration control ingress_match
outer_tag_match match_fields cos val_2-3
QCE_configuration control ingress_match ports
gigabitEthernet_2 enable
qce-idSpecifies the QCE ID. The valid range is from
1 to 1024. 0 is invalid.
ingress_matchConfigures ingress match.
frame_typeMatches against frame payload.
See Configuring QCE Control Ingress Match
Frame Type Parameter on the Controller, on
page 261.
inner_tag_matchMatches against inner tag.
See Configuring QCE Control Ingress Inner Tag
Match Parameter on the Controller, on page 265.
mac_paramsMatches against MAC filters.
See Configuring QCE Control Ingress MAC
Params Parameter on the Controller, on page
267.
outer_tag_matchMatches against outer tag.
See Configuring QCE Control Ingress Outer Tag
Match Parameter on the Controller, on page 269.
portsMatches against ports. See Configuring
QCE Control Ingress Ports Parameter on the
and Later Releases
260

Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
setQCE review
Example:
Step 4
setQCE commit
Example:
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure QCE control ingress match parameters on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setQCE QCE-configuration control ingress_match
frame_type any match_fields inner_cos val_0-1 any
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match
inner_tag_match match_fields inner_cos val_0-3
mac_params dmac_filter any
outer_tag_match match_fields cos val_2-3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match ports
gigabitEthernet_2 enable
Commands in queue:
val_0-3
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match mac_params dmac_filter any
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match outer_tag_match match_fields cos
val_2-3
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match ports GigabitEthernet_2 enable
Configuring QCE Control Ingress Match Frame Type Parameter on the Controller
Before You Begin
on page 242.
Later Releases
261

DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 1 setQCE QCE_configuration {control {actions | ingress_match} Configures QCE.

| qce-id}
Example:
QCEconfiguration ingress_match frame_type any match_fields
inner_cos val_0-1
QCEconfiguration ingress_match frame_type any match_type
vlan c_tagged
Step 2 setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match frame_type

{any | ipv4 {dest_ip_filter {any | host host_name | network
{dest_ip_addr dest_add | dest_ip_mask dest_mask}} | dscp_filter
{any | range range_value | specific dscp_filter} | fragment_type
{any | frag | non_frag} | protocol {any | specific protocol_value |
tcp | udp} | source_ip_filter {any | host host_name | network
{source_ip_addr source_ip_addr source_add | source_ip_mask
source_mask}} | ipv6 {dest_ip_filter {any | specific
{dest_ip_addr_32bits dest_add | dest_ip_mask_32bits dest_mask}}
| dscp_filter {any | range range_value | specific dscp_filter} |
protocol {any | specific protocol_value | tcp | udp} |
source_ip-filter {any | specific source_ip_addr_32bits source_add
| source_ip_mask_32bits source_mask}}
Example:
QCE_configuration ingress_match frame_type any
QCE_configuration ingress_match frame_type ipv4
dest_ip_filter any
dest_ip_filter host host1
dest_ip_filter network dest_ip_addr addr2
dscp_filter host any
dscp_filter range 3-4
fragment_type frag
QCE_configuration ingress_match frame_type ipv4 protocol
specific 45

controlConfigures QCE .
frame_typeMatches against frame payload.
anyMatches against any frame payload .
ipv4Matches against IPv4 frames.
dest_ip_filterMatches against
destination IP address filter .
dscp_filterMatches against DSCP
filter .
fragment_typeMatches against
fragment type filter .
protocolMatches against protocol
filter .
source_ip_filterMatches against
source IP address filter .
ipv6Matches against IPv6 frames .
anyMatches against any IP address, or
filter.
host host_nameMatches against a specified
host .
networkMatches against a network .
dest_ip_addr dest_addMatches against the
destination IP address .
and Later Releases
262

Command or Action
Purpose
source_ip_filter network source_ip_mask soumask
dest_ip_filter any
dest_ip_filter specfic dest_ip_addr_32its dest34
dscp_filter specific 45 any
specific 450
specific 45
source_ip_filter specific source_ip_mask source-mask
dest_ip_mask dest_maskMatches against

the destination IP address mask.
range range_valueMatches against the
specified range .
specific dscp_filterMatches against the
specific DSCP filter .
fragMatches against the specified IP
fragment type .
non_fragMatches against the non fragment
type .
specific protocol_valueMatches against the
specific protocol value .
tcpMatches against the TCP value .
udpMatches against the UDP value .
source_ip_addr source_addrMatches
against the source IP address .
source_ip_mask source_maskMatches
against the source IP address mask.
dest_ip_addr_32bits dest_addMatches
against the destination IP address.
dest_ip_mask_32bits dest_maskMatches
against the destination IP address mask.
source_ip_addr_32bits
source_addMatches against the source IP
address.
source_ip_mask_32bits
source_maskMatches against the source IP
address mask.
Step 3 setQCE review
Example:
Step 4 setQCE commit
Example:
Later Releases
263

Command or Action
Step 5 exit
Purpose
Example:
The example shows how to configure QCE Control Ingress Match frame type parameters on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setQCE QCE_configuration
any
ipv4 dest_ip_filter any
ipv4 dest_ip_filter host host1
ipv4 dest_ip_filter network dest_ip_addr addr2
ipv4 dscp_filter host any
ipv4 dscp_filter range 3-4
ipv4 fragment_type frag
ipv4 protocol specific 45
ipv4 source_ip_filter network source_ip_mask soumask
ipv6 dest_ip_filter any
ipv6 dest_ip_filter specfic dest_ip_addr_32its dest34
ipv6 dscp_filter specific 45 any
ipv6 source_ip_filter specific source_ip_mask source-mask
ingress_match frame_type

Commands in queue:
val_0-3
val_2-3
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match frame_type ipv6 dest_ip_filter any
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match frame_type ipv6 dscp_filter specific
45
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match frame_type ipv6 protocol pecific 450
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match frame_type ipv6 source_ip_filter
specific source_ip_mask_32bits source-mask
and Later Releases
264

Configuring QCE Control Ingress Inner Tag Match Parameter on the Controller
Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose

Configures QCE.
Example:
Step 2
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match

inner_tag_match {match_fields {inner_cos
inner_cos_xx | vlan_id_filter {any | range vlan_range |
specifc specific_vlan}} | match_type {any | c-tagged |
s_tagged | tagged | untagged}}
Example:
QCE_configuration ingress_match inner_tag_match
match_fields vlan_id_filter any
match_fields vlan_id_filter range range1
match_type c_tagged
actionsConfigures QCE actions. See Configuring QoS
Control Entry (QCE) Control Actions on the Controller,
on page 258.
qce-idSpecifies the QCE ID. The valid range is from 1
to 1024. 0 is invalid.
inner_tag_matchMatches against inner tag value.
match_fieldsMatches against tag fields .
inner-cos inner_cos_xxMatches against inner
packet Cos value.
val_0-1Specifies packet COS 0-1.
val_0-onlySpecifies packet COS 0.
val_2-onlySpecifies packet COS 2-only.
Later Releases
265

Command or Action
Purpose
val_anySpecifies packet COS any.
vlan_id_filterMatches against VLAN ID
filter.
anyMatches against any VLAN.
range vlan_rangeMatches against the
specified VLAN range .
specific specific_vlanMatches against the
specific VLAN. The valid range is from 1 to
4095.
match_typeMatches against tag fields.
anyMatches against any tagged .
c-taggedMatches against C tagged .
s-taggedMatches against S tagged .
taggedMatches against tagged .
untaggedMatches against untagged .
Step 3
setQCE review
Example:
review
Step 4
setQCE commit
Example:
commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
and Later Releases
266

The example shows how to configure QCE Control Match Ingress inner tag parameters on the controller:
match_type c_tagged


Commands in queue:
val_0-1
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match inner_tag_match match_fields
vlan_id_filter any
vlan_id_filter range range1
vlan_id_filter specific 450
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match inner_tag_match match_type c_tagged
Configuring QCE Control Ingress MAC Params Parameter on the Controller

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
Purpose
setQCE QCE_configuration {control {actions | ingress_match} Configures QCE.

| qce-id}
Example:
QCEconfiguration ingress_match frame_type any match_type
vlan c_tagged
Step 2
setQCE QCE_configuration {control ingress_match

mac_params {dmac_filter {any | broadcast | multicast | specific
actionsConfigures QCE actions. See

Configuring QoS Control Entry (QCE) Control
Actions on the Controller, on page 258.
Configuring QCE Match Ingress Parameters on
the Controller, on page 260.
qce-idSpecifies the QCE ID. The valid range
Later Releases
267

Command or Action
specific_fillter | unicast} |smac_filter {any | specific
specific_filter}
Purpose
mac_paramsConfigures MAC filters.
dmac_filterConfigures destination MAC
filters.
Example:
smac_filterConfigures source MAC filters.

QCE_configuration ingress_match mac_params dmac_filter
any
broadcast
specific filter1
QCE_configuration ingress_match mac_params smac_filter
any
QCE_configuration ingress_match mac_params smac_filter
specific filter2
Step 3
setQCE review
anyConfigures any MAC filter.

broadcastConfigures any broadcast MAC
filter.
multicastConfigures any multicast MAC filter.
specific specific_filterConfigures specific
MAC filter.
Example:
Step 4
setQCE commit
Example:
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure QCE Control Match Ingress MAC params parameters on the controller:
match_fields inner_cos val-0-1
match_type c-tagged


Commands in queue:
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match mac_params dmac_filter broadcast
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match mac_params smac_filter specific
source1
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match mac_params dmac_filter specific
and Later Releases
268

filter1
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match mac_params smac_filter specific
filter2
Configuring QCE Control Ingress Outer Tag Match Parameter on the Controller
Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose

Configures QCE.
Example:
Step 2
setQCE QCE_configuration {control ingress_match

outer_tag_match {match_fields {cos cos_xx |
vlan_id_filter {any | range vlan_range | specifc
specific_vlan} | match_type {any | c-tagged | s_tagged |
tagged | untagged}
actionsConfigures QCE actions. See Configuring QoS
Control Entry (QCE) Control Actions on the Controller,
on page 258.
qce-idSpecifies the QCE ID. The valid range is from 1
to 1024. 0 is invalid.
outer_tag_matchMatches against the outer tag
value.
match_fieldsMatches against outer tag fields .
Example:
QCE_configuration ingress_match outer_tag_match
match_fields cos val_0-1
match_type c-tagged
cos cos_xxMatches against packet Cos value.

Later Releases
269

Command or Action
Purpose
val_anySpecifies packet COS any.
vlan_id_filterMatches against VLAN ID
filter.
anyMatches against any VLAN.
range vlan_rangeMatches against the
specified VLAN range .
specific specific_vlanMatches against the
specific VLAN. The valid range is from 1 to
4095.
match_typeMatches against tag fields.
anyMatches against any tagged .
c-taggedMatches against C tagged .
s-taggedMatches against S tagged .
taggedMatches against tagged .
untaggedMatches against untagged .
Step 3
setQCE review
Example:
review
Step 4
setQCE commit
Example:
commit
and Later Releases
270

Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure QCE Control Match Ingress outer tag parameters on the controller:
match_fields cos val_0-1
match_type c-tagged


Commands in queue:
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match outer_tag_match match_fields
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match outer_tag_match match_fields
vlan_id_filter range vlan2
val_0-1
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match outer_tag_match match_type c_tagged
Configuring QCE Control Ingress Ports Parameter on the Controller

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose

Configures QCE.
Example:
Later Releases
271

Command or Action
Step 2
Purpose


setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match ports

{GigabitEthernet_1 | GigabitEthernet_2 |
GigabitEthernet_3 | GigabitEthernet_4 | GigabitEthernet_5
| GigabitEthernet_6} {enable | disable}


portsConfigures ingress ports.
GigabitEthernet_1Configures physical port 1.
Example:
QCE_configuration ingress_match ports
GigabitEthernet_1 enable
QCE_configuration ingress_match ports
GigabitEthernet_3 disable

enableEnables the port.
disableDisables the port.
Step 3
setQCE review
Example:
Step 4
setQCE commit
Example:
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure QCE Control Match Ingress ports on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setQCE QCE_configuration ingress_match ports
GigabitEthernet_1 enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setQCE QCE_configuration ingress_match ports
GigabitEthernet_3 disable
and Later Releases
272

Configuring System QoS on the Controller

Commands in queue:
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match ports GigabitEthernet_1 enable
setQCE QCE_configuration control ingress_match ports GigabitEthernet_3 disable

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
setSystemQosSettings {commit | flush | system_qos_config |

review}
Sets the system Qos configuration.
Example:
setSystemQosSettings ?
commit
commit setSystemQosSettings
flush
flush all setSystemQosSettings
commands from queue
review
review setSystemQosSettings commands
system_qos_config
Step 2

queue.
system_qos_configSets the system wide QoS
settings on the controller.
controller.
setSystemQosSettings system_qos_config WRED

Configures system QoS.
{egress_class_0 | egress_class_1 | egress_class_2 | egress_class_3
WREDEnables WRED algorithm for a
| egress_class_4 | egress_class_5} {max_threshold
non-priority queues on all ports.
threshold_value| min_threshold threshold_value | state {enable
| disable}}
egress_class_0Egress queue 0.
Example:
egress_class_0 max_threshold 20
egress_class_1 min_threshold 40
egress_class_2 state enable
max_threshold threshold_valueSets the
maximum threshold.
min_threshold threshold_valueSets the
minimum threshold.
stateSets the WRED state per queue.
Later Releases
273

Command or Action
Purpose
enableEnables the WRED.
disableDisables the WRED.
Step 3
setSystemQosSettings review
Example:
Commands in queue:
Step 4
setSystemQosSettingscommit
Example:
setSystemQosSettings commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure QOS system settings on the controller:

Commands in queue:
setSystemQosSettings system_qos_config WRED egress_class_0 max_threshold
setSystemQosSettings system_qos_config WRED egress_class_1 min_threshold
setSystemQosSettings system_qos_config WRED egress_class_2 state enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setSystemQosSettings commit
and Later Releases
274
20
40

Configuring Hierarchical QoS on the Controller

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
setsetHqosId {commit | flush | hqos_id_config | review}
Sets the hierarchical QoS configuration.

Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setHqosId ?
commit
commit setHqosId
flush
flush all setHqosId commands from
queue
hqos_id_config setHqosId (default)
review
review setHqosId commands

queue.
hqos_id_configSets the hierarchical QoS ID on
the controller.
controller.
Step 2
Configures hierarchical QoS.

setsetHqosId hqos_id_config {bandwidth {rate kbps | state
{enable | disable}} | hqos_id hqos-id | match {egress_class_0 |
bandwidthSpecifies bandwidth for logical
egress_class_1 | egress_class_2 | egress_class_3 | egress_class_4
interface.
| egress_class_5 | egress_class_6 | egress_class_7} {bandwidth
priority-level priority} | shaper {rate kbps | state {enable |
rateSpecifies bandwidth rate in kbps. The valid
disable}} | port_number port-number | shaper {rate kbps | state
range if from 100 to 1000000.
{enable | disable}}
stateSpecifies bandwidth state.
Example:
enableEnables bandwidth state.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# sethqosid
hqos_id_config bandwidth rate 100
hqos_id_config bandwidth state enable
hqos_id_config hqos_id 4
hqos_id_config match egress_class_7 bandwidth
priority_level 1
hqos_id_config match egress_class_7 shaper rate 100
hqos_id_config match egress_class_7 shaper state enable
hqos_id_config port 2
hqos_id_config shaper rate 100
hqos_id_config shaper state enable
disbleDisables bandwidth state.

hqos_id hqos-idSpecifies HQos ID. The valid
range is 0 to 256. 0 is invalid.
match Specifies HQoS match queues.
egress_class_0Egress queue 0; lowest priority
egress_class_6Egress queue 6; higher priority.
Later Releases
275

Command or Action
Purpose
egress_class_7Egress queue 7; highest priority.
bandwidhtpriority-levelprioritySets the
bandwidth priority scheduling level in strict mode.
The valid values are 1-1.
shaperSets the queue level shaper.
port_number port-numberSets the port number.
The valid range is from 1 to 6. Port 7 is invlaid.
shaperSets the interface level shaper.
disableDisables the WRED.
Step 3
Displays the HQoS configuration on the controller.
setHqosId review
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setHqosId review
Commands in queue:
setHqosId hqos_id_config bandwidth rate 100
setHqosId hqos_id_config bandwidth state enable
setHqosId hqos_id_config hqos_id 4
setHqosId hqos_id_config match egress_class_7
bandwidth priority_level 1
setHqosId hqos_id_config
shaper rate 100
shaper state enable
Step 4
match egress_class_7
match egress_class_7
port_number 2
shaper rate 100
setHqosIdcommit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setHqosId commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure HQOS on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# sethqosid hqos_id_config bandwidth rate 100
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# sethqosid hqos_id_config bandwidth state enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# sethqosid hqos_id_config hqos_id 4
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# sethqosid hqos_id_config match egress_class_7
bandwidth priority_level 1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# sethqosid hqos_id_config match egress_class_7 shaper
rate 100
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# sethqosid hqos_id_config match egress_class_7 shaper
and Later Releases
276

Configuring EVC Hierarchical QoS Policy on the Controller
state enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# sethqosid hqos_id_config port 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# sethqosid hqos_id_config shaper rate 100
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# sethqosid hqos_id_config shaper state enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setHqosId review
Commands in queue:
setHqosId hqos_id_config bandwidth rate 100
setHqosId hqos_id_config bandwidth state enable
setHqosId hqos_id_config hqos_id 4
setHqosId hqos_id_config match egress_class_7 bandwidth priority_level 1
setHqosId hqos_id_config match egress_class_7 shaper rate 100
setHqosId hqos_id_config match egress_class_7 shaper state enable
setHqosId hqos_id_config port_number 2
setHqosId hqos_id_config shaper rate 100
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setHqosId commit
SetHqosId Commit Success!!!
Configuring EVC Hierarchical QoS Policy on the Controller

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
Purpose
setEvcHqosPolicy {commit | flush | hqos_id_config | review} Sets the hierarchical QoS configuration on the EVC.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setEvcHqosPolicy
?
commit
commit setEvcHqosPolicy
evcHqosPolicyConfig setEvcHqosPolicy (default)
flush
flush all setEvcHqosPolicy
commands from queue
review
review setEvcHqosPolicy commands
Step 2

queue.
evcHqosPolicyConfigSets the EVC HQoS
policy on the controller.
controller.
setEvcHqosPolicy evcHqosPolicyConfig {evc_id evc-id | hqos_id Configures hierarchical QoS on the EVC.
hqos-id | service_policy {attach | detach}
evc_id evc-idSpecifies EVC ID. The valid
range is from 1 to 1024
Example:
evcHqosPolicyConfig evc_id 1
evcHqosPolicyConfig hqos_id 2
evcHqosPolicyConfig service_policy attach
hqos_id hqos-idSpecifies HQos ID. The valid

range is 0 to 256. 0 is invalid.
service_policy Specifies service policy that
should be applied or removed on the EVC.
attachApplies the policy on the EVC.
detachDetaches the policy on the EVC.
Later Releases
277

Reordering QoS Control Entry (QCE) on the Controller
Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
setEvcHqosPolicy review
Displays the HQoS EVC configuration on the

controller.
Example:
review
Commands in queue:
setEvcHqosPolicy evcHqosPolicyConfig evc_id 1
setEvcHqosPolicy evcHqosPolicyConfig
setEvcHqosPolicy evcHqosPolicyConfig
service_policy detach
setEvcHqosPolicy evcHqosPolicyConfig hqos_id 2
Step 4
setEvcHqosPolicycommit
Example:
commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure EVC HQOS on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setEvcHqosPolicy evcHqosPolicyConfig evc_id 1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setEvcHqosPolicy evcHqosPolicyConfig hqos_id 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setEvcHqosPolicy evcHqosPolicyConfig attach
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setEvcHqosPolicy review
Commands in queue:
setEvcHqosPolicy evcHqosPolicyConfig service_policy attach
setEvcHqosPolicy evcHqosPolicyConfig service_policy detach
setEvcHqosPolicy evcHqosPolicyConfig hqos_id 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# setEvcHqosPolicy commit

Before You Begin
on page 242.
and Later Releases
278

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
reorderQCEentries {commit | flush | reorder_qce | review}
Reorders the QCE entries.

Example:
reorderQCEentries ?
commit
commit reorderQCEentries
flush
flush all reorderQCEentries commands
from queue
reorder_qce reorderQCEentries (default)
review
review reorderQCEentries commands
Step 2

queue.
reorder_qceReorders the QCE on the
controller.
controller.
reorderQCEentries reorder_qce {qce_id qce_id | reorder {after

| before | last} {qce_id qce_id}}
reorder_qceReorders QCE .
Example:
afterReorders after the specified QCE ID.
reorderQCEentries reorder_qce qce_id 3
reorderQCEentries reorder reorder before qce_id 2
beforeReorders before the specified QCE ID..
reorderSpecifies the reorder operation.
lastReorders QCE ID as last.

qce-id Specifies the QCE ID. The valid range
Step 3
reorderQCEentries review review
Example:
reorderQCEentries review
Commands in queue:
reorderQCEentries reorder_qce reorder before
qce_id 2
Step 4
setQCE commitcommit
Example:
reorderQCEentries commit
ReorderQCEentries Commit Success!!!
Step 5
exit
Example:
Later Releases
279

Deleting QoS Control Entry (QCE) on the Controller
The example shows how to reorder QoS QCE on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# reorderQCEentries reorder_qce qce_id 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# reorderQCEentries reorder reorder before qce_id 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# reorderQCEentries review
Commands in queue:
reorderQCEentries reorder_qce reorder before qce_id 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# reorderQCEentries commit
reorderQCEentries commit
Deleting QoS Control Entry (QCE) on the Controller

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
deleteQCE {commit | flush | delete_qce qce-id | review}
Deletes QoS configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# deleteQCE ?
commit
commit deleteQCE
delete_qce Delete a particular QCE
flush
flush all deleteQCE commands from queue
review
review deleteQCE commands
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# deleteQCE
delete_qce 2
Step 2
deleteQCE review

queue.
delete_qce qce-idDeletes the QCE ID on
the controller.
controller.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# deleteQCE review
Commands in queue:
deleteQCE delete_qce 3
Step 3
deleteQCE commitcommit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# deleteQCE commit
DeleteQCE Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
280

Deleting HQoS ID on the Controller
Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
The example shows how to delete QoS QCE on the controller:
Commands in queue:
DeleteQCE Commit Success!!!
deleteQCE review
deleteQCE commit
exit
Deleting HQoS ID on the Controller

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
deleteHqosId {commit | flush | delete_hqos_id hqos-id | review} Deletes HQoS ID configuration.

Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# deleteHqosId ?
commit
commit deleteHqosId
delete_hqos_id deleteHqosId (default)
flush
flush all deleteHqosId commands from
queue
review
review deleteHqosId commands
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# deleteHqosId
delete_hqos_id 2
Step 2
Purpose
deleteHqosId review

queue.
delete_hqos_id hqos-idDeletes the HQoS
ID on the controller.
controller.
Displays the HQoS ID configuration on the
controller.
Example:
review
Commands in queue:
deleteHqosId delete_hqos_id 2
Later Releases
281

Negating QoS and Restoring Defaults
Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
deleteHqosIdcommit
Example:
commit
deleteHqosId Commit Success!!!
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example shows how to delete HQoS IDon the controller:
Commands in queue:
DeleteHqosId Commit Success!!!
deleteHqosId review
deleteHqosId commit
exit
Negating QoS and Restoring Defaults

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
no ?
Negates the commands and

sets the default configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQoS)# no ?
deleteQCE
exit
getInputPortPolicy
getOutputGlobalPolicy
getOutputPortPolicy
getQCE
reorderQCEentries
setInputPortPolicy

Show Global Output QoS features
getQCE (default)
and Later Releases
282

Viewing QoS Input Policy Global Features on the Controller
Command or Action
Purpose
setOutputPortPolicy
setQCE
showQCElist
showQueueStatistics
Step 2
configure Global Output QoS features

setQCE (default)
Exits the QoS provisioning

mode.
exit
Example:

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
getInputGlobalPolicy {commit | flush | input | review}
View the global input QoS policy.

Example:
getInputGlobalPolicy ?
commit commit getInputGlobalPolicy
flush
flush all getInputGlobalPolicy commands from
queue
input
review review getInputGlobalPolicy commands
getInputGlobalPolicy input
Step 2
getInputGlobalPolicy review

queue.
input Displays the input policy QoS global
features configured the controller.
controller.
Example:
Commands in queue:
Later Releases
283

Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
getInputGlobalPolicy commit
Example:
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example displays the QoS input port policy on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getInputGlobalPolicy input
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getInputGlobalPolicy review
CCommands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getInputGlobalPolicy commit
GetInputGlobalPolicy_Output.inputGlobalPolicyConfig.match_DSCP.value_00.mark_DSCP = 64
GetInputGlobalPolicy_Output.inputGlobalPolicyConfig.match_DSCP.value_00.mark_egress_class
= 8
= 8
= 8
= 8
= 8
= 8
= 8
= 8
= 8
.
.
!
GetInputGlobalPolicy Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
284

Viewing QoS Input Policy Features at Port level on the Controller
Viewing QoS Input Policy Features at Port level on the Controller

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
getInputPortPolicy {commit | flush | input_port port_number| View the input QoS policy at port level.
review}
Example:
getInputPortPolicy ?
commit
commit getInputPortPolicy
flush
flush all getInputPortPolicy commands
from queue
input_port Show Input Policy configured on Physical
Port
review
review getInputPortPolicy commands
getInputPortPolicy input_port 2
Step 2
Purpose
getInputPortPolicy review

queue.
input_port port_numberDisplays the input
port policy configuration at port level on the
controller. The valid ports are 1 to 6. port 7 is
invalid.
controller.
Example:
getInputPortPolicy review
Commands in queue:
Step 3
getInputPortPolicy commit
Example:
getInputPortPolicy commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example displays the QoS input port policy on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getInputPortPolicy input_port 2
Later Releases
285

Viewing QoS Output Policy Global Features on the Controller
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getInputPortPolicy review

Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getInputPortPolicy commit
GetInputPortPolicy_Output.inputPortPolicyConfig.port_number = 2
GetInputPortPolicy_Output.inputPortPolicyConfig.port_policer.state = false
GetInputPortPolicy_Output.inputPortPolicyConfig.port_policer.cir = 1000000
GetInputPortPolicy_Output.inputPortPolicyConfig.globalDscpBasedDscpIngressMarking = false
GetInputPortPolicy_Output.inputPortPolicyConfig.globalDscpBasedEgressClassMarking = false
GetInputPortPolicy_Output.inputPortPolicyConfig.match.cos_.value_0.mark_egress_class = 1
GetInputPortPolicy_Output.inputPortPolicyConfig.egress_class_marking = false
GetInputPortPolicy_Output.inputPortPolicyConfig.qce.address.t = 1
GetInputPortPolicy_Output.inputPortPolicyConfig.qce.address.u.source = ''
GetInputPortPolicy_Output.inputPortPolicyConfig.qce.key.t = 1
GetInputPortPolicy_Output.inputPortPolicyConfig.qce.key.u.normal = ''
GetInputPortPolicy_Output.inputPortPolicyConfig.service_policy.t = 2
GetInputPortPolicy_Output.inputPortPolicyConfig.service_policy.u.detach = ''
GetInputPortPolicy Commit Success!!!
Viewing QoS Output Policy Global Features on the Controller

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
getInputGlobalPolicy {commit | flush | output | review}
View global output QoS policy.
Example:
getInputGlobalPolicy ?
commit commit getOutputGlobalPolicy
flush
flush all getOutputGlobalPolicy commands from
queue
output Show Global Output QoS features
review review getOutputGlobalPolicy commands
getInputGlobalPolicy output
Step 2
getOutputPortPolicy review

queue.
input Displays the input policy QoS global
features configured the controller.
controller.
Example:
and Later Releases
286

Viewing QoS Output Policy Features at Port level on the Controller
Command or Action
Purpose
Commands in queue:
getOutputGlobalPolicy output
Step 3
getOutputPortPolicy commit
Example:
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example displays the QoS output policy global features on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getInputGlobalPolicy output
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getInputGlobalPolicy review
Commands in queue:
getOutputGlobalPolicy output
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getInputGlobalPolicy commit
GetOutputGlobalPolicy_Output.outputGlobalPolicyConfig.match_DSCP.value_00.mark_DSCP
GetOutputGlobalPolicy_Output.outputGlobalPolicyConfig.match_DSCP.value_08.mark_D
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
GetOutputGlobalPolicy Commit Success!!!


Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
getOutputPortPolicy {commit | flush | output_port

port_number| review}
View the output Qos policy at port level.

Later Releases
287

Command or Action

queue.
Example:
getOutputPortPolicy ?
ccommit
commit getOutputPortPolicy
flush
flush all getOutputPortPolicy commands
from queue
output_port Show Output Policy configured on Physical
Port
review
review getOutputPortPolicy commands
getOutputPortPolicy output_port 4
Step 2
Purpose
output_port port_numberDisplays the output

port policy configuration at port level on the
controller. The valid ports are 1 to 6. port 7 is
invalid.
controller.
Example:
Commands in queue:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example displays the QoS output port policy on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getOutputPortPolicy output_port 4
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getOutputPortPolicy review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getOutputPortPolicy commit
GetOutputPortPolicy_Output.outputPortPolicyConfig.port_number = 4
GetOutputPortPolicy_Output.outputPortPolicyConfig.port_shaper.state = false
GetOutputPortPolicy_Output.outputPortPolicyConfig.port_shaper.rate = 1000000
GetOutputPortPolicy_Output.outputPortPolicyConfig.globalDscpBasedDscpEgressMarking = false
GetOutputPortPolicy_Output.outputPortPolicyConfig.match.egress_class_7.bandwidth.priority_level
= 1
GetOutputPortPolicy_Output.outputPortPolicyConfig.match.egress_class_7.shaper.state = false
GetOutputPortPolicy_Output.outputPortPolicyConfig.match.egress_class_7.shaper.rate = 1000000
GetOutputPortPolicy_Output.outputPortPolicyConfig.match.egress_class_7.mark_cos= 7
GetOutputPortPolicy_Output.outputPortPolicyConfig.match.egress_class_6.bandwidth.priority_level
= 2
GetOutputPortPolicy_Output.outputPortPolicyConfig.match.egress_class_6.shaper.state = false
GetOutputPortPolicy_Output.outputPortPolicyConfig.match.egress_class_6.shaper.rate = 1000000
.
and Later Releases
288

Viewing QoS Control Entry (QCE) Configuration on the Controller
.
!
GetOutputPortPolicy Commit Success!!!
Viewing QoS Control Entry (QCE) Configuration on the Controller

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
getQCE {commit | flush | QCE_ID qce_id| review}
View the QCE configuration.

Example:
getOutputPortPolicy ?
QCE_ID getQCE (default)
commit commit getQCE
flush
flush all getQCE commands from queue
review review getQCE commands
getOutputPortPolicy qce-id 4
Step 2

queue.
QCE_ID qce_idDisplays the QCE
configuration for QCE ID on the controller. The
valid ports are 1 to 1024.
controller.
getQCE review
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getQCE review
Commands in queue:
getQCE QCE_ID 2
getQCE QCE_ID 3
getQCE QCE_ID 23
Step 3
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getQCE commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
Later Releases
289

Viewing System QoS Settings on the Controller
The example displays the QoS output port policy on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getOutputPortPolicy qce-id 4
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getQCE review
Commands in queue:
getQCE QCE_ID 2
getQCE QCE_ID 3
getQCE QCE_ID 23
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getQCE commit
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.qce_id = 0
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.ports.GigabitEthernet_1 = false
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.ports.GigabitEthernet_2 =false
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.outer_tag_match.match_type.t = 1
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.outer_tag_match.match_type.u.any =
'0'
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.outer_tag_match.match_fields.vlan_id_filter.t
= 1
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.outer_tag_match.match_fields.vlan_id_filter.u.any
= '0'
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.outer_tag_match.match_fields.cos_.t
= 1
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.outer_tag_match.match_fields.cos_.u.val_any
= '0'
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.inner_tag_match.match_type.t = 1
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.inner_tag_match.match_type.u.any =
'0'
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.inner_tag_match.match_fields.vlan_id_filter.t
= 1
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.inner_tag_match.match_fields.vlan_id_filter.u.any
= '0'
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.inner_tag_match.match_fields.inner_cos.t
= 1
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.inner_tag_match.match_fields.inner_cos.u.val_any
= '0'
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.mac_params.smac_filter.t = 1
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.mac_params.smac_filter.u.any = '0'
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.mac_params.dmac_filter.t = 1
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.mac_params.dmac_filter.u.any = '0'
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.frame_type.t = 1
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.ingress_match.frame_type.u.any = '0'
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.actions.mark_egress_class = 8
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.actions.mark_COS = 8
GetQCE_Output.QCE_configuration.control.actions.mark_DSCP = 64
GetQCE Commit Success!!!
GetOutputPortPolicy Commit Success!!!

Before You Begin
on page 242.
and Later Releases
290

DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
getSystemQosSettings {commit | flush | QCE_ID qce_id| review} View the system QoS configuration.
commitSends the QoS configuration to
NID.
Example:
Step 2
Purpose
getSystemQosSettings ?
commit
commit getSystemQosSettings
flush
flush all getSystemQosSettings commands
from queue
review
review getSystemQosSettings commands
system_qos getSystemQosSettings (default)
flushFlushes all QoS configuration from

the queue.
getSystemQosSettings system_qos

controller.
getSystemQosSettings review
system_qosDisplays the system QOS

Example:
getSystemQosSettings review
Commands in queue:
Step 3
getSystemQosSettings commit
Example:
getSystemQosSettings commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example displays the system QoS settings on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getSystemQosSettings system_qos
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getSystemQosSettings review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getSystemQosSettings commit
GetSystemQosSettings_Output.system_qos_config.WRED.egress_class_0.state = false
GetSystemQosSettings_Output.system_qos_config.WRED.egress_class_0.min_threshold = 0
GetSystemQosSettings_Output.system_qos_config.WRED.egress_class_0.max_threshold= 100
GetSystemQosSettings_Output.system_qos_config.WRED.egress_class_1.min_threshold= 0
GetSystemQosSettings_Output.system_qos_config.WRED.egress_class_2.min_threshold= 0
Later Releases
291

Viewing HQoS ID on the Controller
GetSystemQosSettings_Output.system_qos_config.WRED.egress_class_3.min_threshold=
GetSystemQosSettings_Output.system_qos_config.WRED.egress_class_3.max_threshold=
0
100
0
100
0
100
GetSystemQosSettings Commit Success!!!

Viewing HQoS ID on the Controller

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
getHqosId {commit | flush | hqos_id_value hqos_id | review} View the HQoS ID configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getHqosId ?
commit
commit getHqosId
flush
flush all getHqosId commands from
queue
hqos_id_value getHqosId (default)
review
review getHqosId commands
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getHqosId
hqos_id_value 4
Step 2
Purpose
getHqosId review

queue.
hqos_id_value hqos_idDisplays the HQOS ID
configuration on the controller. The valid range is
from 1 to 256.
controller.
Displays the HQoS ID configuration on the controller.
Example:
review
Commands in queue:
getHqosId hqos_id_value 2
Step 3
getHqosId commit
Sends the HQoS configuration to the NID.
Example:
commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
and Later Releases
292

Viewing EVC HQoS ID on the Controller
The example displays the system HQoS ID on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getHqosId hqos_id_value 4
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getHqosId review
Commands in queue:
getHqosId hqos_id_value 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getHqosId commit
GetHqosId_Output.hqos_id_config.hqos_id = 4
GetHqosId_Output.hqos_id_config.port_number = 4
GetHqosId_Output.hqos_id_config.shaper.state = true
GetHqosId_Output.hqos_id_config.shaper.rate = 100000
GetHqosId_Output.hqos_id_config.bandwidth.state = true
GetHqosId_Output.hqos_id_config.bandwidth.rate = 10000
GetHqosId_Output.hqos_id_config.match.egress_class_7.bandwidth.priority_level = 1
GetHqosId_Output.hqos_id_config.match.egress_class_7.shaper.state = true
GetHqosId_Output.hqos_id_config.match.egress_class_7.shaper.rate = 40000
GetHqosId_Output.hqos_id_config.match.egress_class_6.bandwidth.priority_level = 2
GetHqosId_Output.hqos_id_config.match.egress_class_6.shaper.state = true
GetHqosId_Output.hqos_id_config.match.egress_class_6.shaper.rate = 50000
GetHqosId_Output.hqos_id_config.match.egress_class_5.bandwidth.t = 2
GetHqosId_Output.hqos_id_config.match.egress_class_5.bandwidth.u.remaining_ratio =
GetHqosId Commit Success!!!
5
4
4
3
3
2
Viewing EVC HQoS ID on the Controller

Before You Begin
on page 242.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
getEvcHqosPolicy {commit | flush | evcHqosPolicy

evc-idevc_id | review}
View the EVC HQoS ID configuration.
Example:
getEvcHqosPolicy ?

queue.
Later Releases
293

Displaying the QCE List on the Controller
Command or Action
commit
evcHqosPolicy
flush
from queue
review
commit getEvcHqosPolicy
getEvcHqosPolicy (default)
flush all getEvcHqosPolicy commands
evcHqosPolicy evc-idevc_idDisplays the EVC

HQOS ID configuration on the controller. The
review getEvcHqosPolicy commands
getEvcHqosPolicy evcHqosPolicy evc_id 1
Step 2
Purpose
getEvcHqosPolicy review

controller.
Displays the EVC HQoS ID configuration on the
controller.
Example:
getEvcHqosPolicy review
Commands in queue:
Step 3
getHqosId commit
Sends the EVC HQoS configuration to the NID.
Example:
getEvcHqosPolicy commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example displays the EVC HQoS ID on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getEvcHqosPolicy evcHqosPolicy evc_id 1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getEvcHqosPolicy review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)# getEvcHqosPolicy commit
Displaying the QCE List on the Controller

Before You Begin
on page 242.
and Later Releases
294

Displaying QoS Queue Statistics on the Controller
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Step 2
Command or Action
Purpose
showQCElist {commit | flush | show_qce {all | specific

specific_QCE} | review}
Displays the QCE list.

show_qceDisplays QCE list.
Example:
allDisplays entire QCE list.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)#showQCElist
show_qce all
show_qce specific 2
review
commit
specific specific_QCEDisplays specific QCE list.

commitSends the QoS configuration to the NID.
reviewDisplays the QoS configuration on the
controller.
exit
Example:
The example displays the QCE list on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)#showQCElist show_qce all
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)#showQCElist show_qce specific 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)#showQCElist review
Commands in queue:
showQCElist show_qce all
showQCElist show_qce specific 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)#showQCElist commit
ShowQCElist_Output.show_qce_configuration.QCE_List[0].qce_id = 2
ShowQCElist_Output.show_qce_configuration.QCE_List[0].status = false
ShowQCElist Commit Success!!!
Displaying QoS Queue Statistics on the Controller

Before You Begin
on page 242.
Later Releases
295

Displaying the Hierarchical QoS ID List on the Controller
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
Purpose
showQueueStatistics {commit | flush | queue_stats port_number Displays the QoS queue statistics.
port_num} | review}
queue_statsDisplays egress queue statistics.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQoS)#showQueueStatistics
queue_stats port_number 3
review
commit
port_number port_numDisplays statistics

for specified port. The valid range is from 1 to
6.
flushFlushes all QoS from the queue.
reviewDisplays the QoS configuration on
the controller.
Step 2
exit
Example:
The example displays the egress queue statistics on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQoS)#showQueueStatistics queue_stats port_number 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQoS)#showQueueStatistics review
Commands in queue:
showQueueStatistics queue_stats port_number 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQoS)#showQueueStatistics commit
ShowQueueStatistics_Output.queue_statistics.port_number = 3
ShowQueueStatistics_Output.queue_statistics.Queue_0.frames = 0
ShowQueueStatistics Commit Success!!!
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQoS)# exit

Before You Begin
on page 242.
and Later Releases
296

DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
Purpose
showHqosIdList {commit | flush | show_hqos_id {all | specific Displays the HQoS ID list.
specific_QCE} | review}
show_hqos_idDisplays HQoS ID list.
Example:
allDisplays entire HQoS ID list.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)#showHqosIdList
show_hqos_id all
show_hqos_id specific 2
review
commit
specific specific_hqos-idDisplays specific HQos

ID list.
commitSends the QoS configuration to the NID.
queue.
reviewDisplays the QoS configuration on the
controller.
Step 2
exit
Example:
The example displays the HQoS ID list on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)#showHqosIdList show_hqos_id specific 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)#showHqosIdList review
Commands in queue:
showHqosIdList show_hqos_id all
showHqosIdList show_hqos_id specific 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionQos)#showHqosIdList commit
ShowHqosIdList_Output.show_hqos_id_response.hqos_id_list[0].hqos_id = 2
ShowHqosIdList_Output.show_hqos_id_response.hqos_id_list[0].status = false
ShowHqosIdList Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
297

and Later Releases
298
CHAPTER
15
Configuring Ethernet OAM, Link OAM, and CFM

Ethernet Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) is a protocol for installing, monitoring, and
troubleshooting Ethernet networks to increase management capability within the context of the overall
Ethernet infrastructure. The Cisco ME 1200 Series Carrier Ethernet Access Device supports IEEE 802.1ag
Connectivity Fault Management (CFM), and IEEE 802.3ah Ethernet OAM discovery, link monitoring,
remote fault detection, and remote loopback.
This document provides information about configuring Ethernet OAM, Link OAM, and CFM.
For more information on Ethernet OAM and CFM, see the Cisco IOS Carrier Ethernet Configuration Guide.
Understanding the Ethernet OAM Protocol , page 299
Understanding Link OAM, page 311
Understanding Connectivity Fault Management, page 315
Configuration Example: Loopback, page 323
Configuration Example: Loss MeasurementSingle Ended, page 325
Configuration Example: Loss MeasurementDual Ended, page 329
Understanding the Ethernet OAM Protocol

The Ethernet OAM protocol for installing, monitoring, and troubleshooting Metro Ethernet networks and
Ethernet WANs relies on an optional sublayer in the data link layer of the OSI model. Normal link operation
does not require Ethernet OAM. You can implement Ethernet OAM on any full-duplex point-to-point or
emulated point-to-point Ethernet link for a network or part of a network (specified interfaces).
OAM frames, called OAM protocol data units (OAM PDUs) use the slow protocol destination MAC address
0180.c200.0002. They are intercepted by the MAC sublayer and cannot propagate beyond a single hop within
an Ethernet network. Ethernet OAM is a relatively slow protocol, with a maximum transmission rate of 10
frames per second, resulting in minor impact to normal operations. However, when you enable link monitoring,
because the CPU must poll error counters frequently, the number of required CPU cycles is proportional to
the number of interfaces that must be polled.
Later Releases
299

OAM Features
OAM Features
These OAM features are defined by IEEE 802.3ah:
Discovery identifies devices in the network and their OAM capabilities. It uses periodic OAM PDUs to
advertise OAM mode, configuration, and capabilities; PDU configuration; and platform identity. An
optional phase allows the local station to accept or reject the configuration of the peer OAM entity.
Link monitoring detects and indicates link faults under a variety of conditions and uses the event
notification OAM PDU to notify the remote OAM device when it detects problems on the link. Error
events include when the number of symbol errors, the number of frame errors, the number of frame
errors within a specified number of frames, or the number of error seconds within a specified period
exceed a configured threshold.
Remote failure indication conveys a slowly deteriorating quality of an OAM entity to its peers by
communicating these conditions: Link Fault means a loss of signal, Dying Gasp means an unrecoverable
condition, and Critical Event means an unspecified vendor-specific critical event. The switch can receive
and process but not generate Link Fault or Critical Event OAM PDUs. It can generate Dying Gasp OAM
PDUs to show when Ethernet OAM is disabled, the interface is shut down, the interface enters the
error-disabled state, or the switch is reloading. It also supports Dying Gasp PDUs based on loss of power.
Remote loopback mode to ensure link quality with a remote peer during installation or troubleshooting.
In this mode, when the switch receives a frame that is not an OAM PDU or a pause frame, it sends it
back on the same port. The link appears to the user to be in the up state. You can use the returned loopback
acknowledgment to test delay, jitter, and throughput.
The following sections describe how to configure ethernet OAM on the Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Setting the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
OperationsMepPortType
Enters the OperationsMepPortType mode and enables

provisioning of the MEP.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# OperationsMepPortType
Step 4
setAis aisConfig{aisAction {disable | enable {framerate | Enables or disables the alarm indication signal request
on a Maintenance End Point (MEP) instance.
protect} | mepInstance mep_instance_number}
and Later Releases
300

Setting Delay Measurement
Command or Action
Purpose
aisActionEnables or disables the AIS.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)#
setAis aisConfig aisAction enable frameRate fr1s
setAis aisConfig aisAction enable protect disable
setAis aisConfig aisAction disable
setAis aisConfig mepInstance 1
Step 5
framerateDefines the frame rate, whether

frames per minutes, or frames per second.
protectDefines whether or not AIS can be used
for protection.
mepInstanceSets the MEP instance number.
Displays the setAis configuration.
setAis review
Example:
setAis review
Step 6
Sends the setAis configuration to the Cisco ME 1200

NID.
setAis commit
Example:
setAis commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Later Releases
301

Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
ProvisionMepPortType

Example:
Step 4
setDm dmConfig {dmAction {disable | enable {calculation | Enables or disables the delay measurement request.
cast | interval | lastN | mode | priority}} | mepInstance
dmActionEnables or disables the delay
mep_instance_number}
measurement.
calculationIs the delay calculation.
Example:
dmConfig dmAction enable calculation rdtrp
dmConfig dmAction enable cast uni mepId 0
dmConfig dmAction enable interval 10
dmConfig dmAction enable lastN 10
dmConfig dmAction enable mode twoWay
dmConfig dmAction enable priority 0
dmConfig dmAction disable
dmConfig mepInstance 1
setDM
setDM
setDM
setDM
setDM
setDM
setDM
setDM
castIs either unicast or multicast.

intervalIs the interval between PDU
transmission. The valid values are from 10 to
65535.
lastNAre the last N delays used for average
last N calculation.
modeIs either one-way mode or two-way
mode.
priorityIs the priority in case of tagged OAM.
In the EVC domain this is the COS-ID.
mepInstanceIs the MEP instance number. The
Step 5
setDm review
Displays the setDm configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setDm
review
Step 6
setDm commit
Sends the setDm configuration to the Cisco ME 1200

NID.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setDm
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# exit
and Later Releases
302

Updating Delay Measurement

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:

fault management and performance monitoring on the
MEP.
Step 4
updateDM updateDMConfig {mepInstance mep_instance_id Updates the delay measurement request.

| update {overflowReset {keep | reset} | synchronized
mepInstanceConfigures the MEP instance
{disable | enable} | txmode {proprietary | standardize} |
number. The valid values are from 1 to 128.
unit {ns | us}
updateUpdates the delay measurement
parameters.
Example:
updateDM updateDmConfig update overflowReset keep
updateDM updateDmConfig update syncronized disable
updateDM updateDmConfig update txMode standardize
updateDM updateDmConfig update unit us
overflowRestConfigures all Delay Measurement

results on total delay counter overflow.
synchronizedSynchronizes the near- and far-end
in real time.
txmodeConfigures the transmission mode.
unitConfigures the delay in nano seconds or
microseconds.
Step 5
updateDM review
Displays the updateDM configuration.
Example:
updateDM review
Step 6
updateDM commit
Sends the updateDM configuration to the Cisco ME

1200 NID.
Example:
updateDM commit
Later Releases
303

Setting Loss Measurement
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
exit
Setting Loss Measurement

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Enters the OperationsMepPortType mode and enables fault

management and performance monitoring on the MEP.
Example:
Step 4
setlm lmConfig {lmAction {disable | enable {cast | flr |

framerate | mode | priority}} | mepInstance
Example:
setLM lmConfig lmAction enable cast uni
setLM lmConfig lmAction enable flr 5
setLM lmConfig lmAction enable frameRate fr1s
setLM lmConfig lmAction enable mode single
setLM lmConfig lmAction enable priority 0
setLM lmConfig lmAction disable
setLM lmConfig mepInstance 1
Enables or disables the loss measurement request.

lmActionEnables or disables the loss
measurement.
castDefines whether OAM PDU is transmitted
with either unicast MAC or multicast MAC.
flrIs the frame loss ratio. The valid values for
frame loss interval ratio is from 0 to 99.
framerateDefines the frame rate, whether 1 or 10
frames per second, 1 or 6 frames per minutes, or 6
frames per hour.
modeIs either single mode or dual mode.
priorityIs the priority in case of tagged OAM. In
the EVC domain this is the COS-ID. The valid values
are from 0 to 7.
and Later Releases
304

Setting Lock Signal
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 5
Displays the setLM configuration.
setLM review
Example:
setLM review
Step 6
Sends the setLM configuration to the Cisco ME 1200 NID.
setLM commit
Example:
setLM commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
Setting Lock Signal

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:

MEP.
Step 4
setlck lckConfig{lckAction {disable | enable framerate |

mepInstance mep_instance_number}
Enables or disables the lock signal request.

lckActionEnables or disables the lock signal
request.
Later Releases
305

Setting Link Trace
Command or Action
Example:
setLck lckConfig lckAction enable frameRate fr1s
setLck lckConfig lckAction disable
setLck lckConfig mepInstance 1
Step 5
setlck review
Purpose
framerateDefines the frame rate, whether
frames per minutes, or frames per second.
Displays the setlck configuration.
Example:
setlck review
Step 6
setlck commit
Sends the setlck configuration to the Cisco ME 1200

NID.
Example:
setlck commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
Setting Link Trace

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:

MEP.
and Later Releases
306

Setting Loopback
Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose
setlinkTrace linkTrace {ltAction {disable | enable

{destination | priority | ttl} | mepInstance
Enables or disables the link trace request.
enable destinationEnables the target peer

MEP.
Example:
setLinkTrace linkTrace ltAction enable destination
mepId 0
setLinkTrace linkTrace ltAction enable priority 0
setLinkTrace linkTrace ltAction enable ttl 1
setLinkTrace linkTrace ltAction disable
setLinkTrace linkTrace mepInstance 1
Step 5
ltActionEnables or disables the link trace.
setLinkTrace review

In the EVC domain, this value is the COS-ID.
ttlIs the time-to-live value. The valid values
are from 1 to 999.
Displays the setLinkTrace configuration.
Example:
setLinkTrace review
Step 6
setLinkTrace commit
Sends the setLinkTrace configuration to the Cisco ME

1200 NID.
Example:
setLinkTrace commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Setting Loopback
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Later Releases
307

Setting Loopback
Step 2
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 3
Example:

MEP.
Step 4
setloopBack loopBackConfig {lbAction {disable | enable Enables or disables the loopback request.
{cast | count | dei | interval | priority | size}} | mepInstance
lbActionEnables or disables loopback.
castIs either unicast or multicast.
Example:
setLoopBack loopBackConfig lbAction enable cast uni
mepId 0
setLoopBack loopBackConfig lbAction enable count 5
setLoopBack loopBackConfig lbAction enable dei disable
setLoopBack loopBackConfig lbAction enable interval
10
setLoopBack loopBackConfig lbAction enable priority
0
setLoopBack loopBackConfig lbAction enable size 100
setLoopBack loopBackConfig lbAction disable
setLoopBack loopBackConfig mepInstance 1
countIs the number of loopback message (LBM)

PDUs to send in one loop test.
deiIs the Drop Eligible Indicator in case of
tagged OAM.
intervalIs the interval between transmitting
LBM protocol data unit (PDU). The valid values
are from 1 to 100.
In the EVC domain this is the COS-ID.
sizeIs the number of bytes in the LBM PDU
Data Pattern TLV. The valid values are from 1 to
1400.
Step 5
setloopBack review
Displays the setloopBack configuration.
Example:
setloopBack review
Step 6
setloopBack commit
Sends the setloopBack configuration to the Cisco ME

1200 NID.
Example:
setloopBack commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
and Later Releases
308

Setting Test Signal
Setting Test Signal

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Enters the OperationsMepPortType mode and enables fault

management and performance monitoring on the MEP.
Example:
Step 4
settst tstConfig tstConfig {dei {disable | enable} | mepId Enables or disables the test signal request.
| mepInstance mep_instance_id | pattern | priority | rate |
tstConfigEnables or disables the test signal request.
sequence size}
deiDefines the Drop Eligible Indicator in case of
tagged OAM.
Example:
setTst tstConfig dei disable
setTst tstConfig mepId 0
setTst tstConfig mepInstance 1
setTst tstConfig pattern allZero
setTst tstConfig priority 0
setTst tstConfig rate 1
setTst tstConfig sequence disable
setTst tstConfig size 64
mepIdDefines peer MEP ID. The valid values are

from 0 to 8191.
patternEnables the sequence number in test PDU.
priorityIs the priority in case of tagged OAM. In
the EVC domain this is the COS-ID.
rateIs the test frame transmission bit rate in Mega
bits per second. The valid values are from 1 to 400.
sequence Enables and disables sequence number
in test PDUs
sizeIs the test frame size. The valid values are from
1 to 1581.
Later Releases
309

Setting Test Signal
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
setTst review
Displays the setTst configuration.
Example:
setTst review
Step 6
setTst commit
Sends the setTst configuration to the Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Example:
setTst commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
Updating Test Signal

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:

fault management and performance monitoring on
the MEP.
Step 4
updateTst updateTstConfig {mepInstance mep_instance_id Updates the test signal request.

| update {Rx {disable | enable} | Tx {disable | enable}}
updateTstConfigUpdates the test signal
parameters.
Example:
updateTst updateTstConfig update Rx enable
mepInstanceIs the MEP instance number.

updateEnables or disables the receive and
transmit test signals.
and Later Releases
310

Understanding Link OAM
Command or Action
Purpose
updateTst updateTstConfig update Tx enable

updateTst updateTstConfig mepInstance 1
Step 5
updateTst review
Displays the updateTst configuration.
Example:
updateTst review
Step 6
updateTst commit
Sends the updateTst configuration to the Cisco ME

1200 NID.
Example:
updateTst commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Understanding Link OAM

The following sections describe how to configure Link OAM on the Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Setting OAM Port Operations

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
LinkOamPortType
Enters the LinkOamPortType mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# LinkOamPortType
Later Releases
311

Setting OAM Port Operations
Command or Action
Step 4
setLinkOamPortConfig portConfig {linkOam enable |

Sets the Link OAM port configuration.
linkmonitorSupport enable | loopbackOperation enable |
linkOamSets the supported Link OAM.
loopbackSupport enable | mibretrivalSupport enable | oamMode
{active | passive} | portNumber port_number | variableRetrieve
linkmonitorSupportEnables or disables the
{localInfo | remoteInfo}
Link monitor support.
loopbackOperationSets the loopback
operation.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-LinkOamPortType)#
setLinkOamPortConfig portConfig portNumber 5
setLinkOamPortConfig portConfig linkOam enable
setLinkOamPortConfig portConfig linkmonitorSupport enable
setLinkOamPortConfig portConfig loopbackOperation enable
setLinkOamPortConfig portConfig loopbackSupport enable
setLinkOamPortConfig portConfig mibretrivalSupport enable
setLinkOamPortConfig portConfig oamMode active
setLinkOamPortConfig portConfig variableRetrieve
localInfo
Step 5
Purpose
setLinkOamPortConfig review
loopbackSupportSets the Link OAM

remote loopback support.
mibretrivalSupportSet MIB retrieval
support.
oamModeSets the Link OAM mode to
Active or Passive.
portNumberSets the interface number. The
variableRetrieveSets the MIB variable
retrieve value to local information or remote
information.
Displays the LinkOamPortType configuration.
Example:
setLinkOamPortConfig review
Step 6
setLinkOamPortConfig commit
Sends the LinkOamPortType configuration to the

Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Example:
setLinkOamPortConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-LinkOamPortType)# exit
What to Do Next
LinkOamPortType configuration.
Switch(config-controller-LinkOamPortType)# getLinkOamPortConfig linkOamRequest portNumber
5
and Later Releases
312

Setting Link OAM Event Configuration
Switch(config-controller-LinkOamPortType)# getLinkOamPortConfig review

Switch(config-controller-LinkOamPortType)# getLinkOamPortConfig commit
Setting Link OAM Event Configuration

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
LinkOamPortType
Example:
Step 4
setlinkeventConfig linkEventConfig {errorFrame

Sets the Link Event configuration request.
{threshold | window} | frameSeconds {threshold |
errorFrameConfigures the frame error event
window} | portNumber interface_number | symbolPeriod
thresholds and window for error frames that trigger an
{threshold | window}}
error-frame link event.The valid threshold values are
from 0 to 4294967295 number of frames. The valid
Example:
window vales to count the number of error frames is
from 1 to 60 seconds.
setLinkEventConfig linkEventConfig portNumber 5
setLinkEventConfig linkEventConfig errorFrame
threshold 0
setLinkEventConfig linkEventConfig errorFrame
window 1
setLinkEventConfig linkEventConfig frameSeconds
threshold 0
setLinkEventConfig linkEventConfig frameSeconds
window 10
setLinkEventConfig linkEventConfig symbolPeriod
threshold 0
setLinkEventConfig linkEventConfig symbolPeriod
window 1
frameSecondsConfigures the frame seconds

summary. The valid threshold values are from 0 to
65535 number of permissible error frames. The valid
window vales for monitoring the frames is from 10 to
900 seconds.
portNumberIs the port number for the Link Event
configuration request. The valid values are from 1 to
6.
symbolPeriodConfigures the window and thresholds
for an error-symbol period that triggers an error-symbol
period link event. The valid threshold values are from
0 to 4294967295 number of permissible error symbols.
The valid window vales for monitoring the frames is
Later Releases
313

Setting Remote Loopback Start And Stop
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
setLinkEventConfig review
Displays the setLinkEventConfig configuration.
Example:
setLinkEventConfig review
Step 6
setLinkEventConfig commit
Sends the setLinkEventConfig configuration to the Cisco

ME 1200 NID.
Example:
setLinkEventConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
What to Do Next
setLinkEventConfig configuration.
Switch(config-controller-LinkOamPortType)# getLinkEventConfig linkOamRequest portNumber 5
Switch(config-controller-LinkOamPortType)# getLinkEventConfig review
Switch(config-controller-LinkOamPortType)# getLinkEventConfig commit
Setting Remote Loopback Start And Stop

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
LinkOamPortType
Example:
and Later Releases
314

Understanding Connectivity Fault Management
Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose
setremoteLoopBack remoteLoopBak {start portList | stop

portList}
Sets the remote loopback request.
Example:
setRemoteLoopBack remoteLoopBack start portList 1
Step 5
setRemoteLoopBack review
startStarts the remote loopback on the

defined port list.
stopStops the remote loopback on the
defined port list.
Displays the setRemoteLoopBack configuration.
Example:
setRemoteLoopBack review
Commands in queue:
setRemoteLoopBack remoteLoopBack start portList
1
setRemoteLoopBack remoteLoopBack stop portList
1
Step 6
setRemoteLoopBack commit
Sends the setRemoteLoopBack configuration to

Example:
setRemoteLoopBack commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Understanding Connectivity Fault Management

Ethernet CFM is an end-to-end per VLAN Ethernet layer OAM protocol that includes proactive connectivity
monitoring, fault verification, and fault isolation. End-to-end can be provider-edge-to-provider-edge (PE-to-PE)
device or customer-edge-to-customer-edge (CE-to-CE) device. Ethernet CFM, as specified by IEEE 802.1ag,
is the standard for Layer 2 ping, Layer 2 traceroute, and end-to-end connectivity check of the Ethernet network.
CFM Domain
A CFM maintenance domain is a management space on a network that is owned and operated by a single
entity and defined by a set of ports internal to it, but at its boundary. You assign a unique maintenance level
(from 0 to 7) to define the hierarchical relationship between domains. The larger the domain, the higher the
Later Releases
315

Maintenance Associations and Maintenance Points
level. For example, as shown in the figure below, a service-provider domain would be larger than an operator
domain and might have a maintenance level of 6, while the operator domain maintenance level is 3 or 4.
Figure 9: CFM Maintenance Domains
Maintenance Associations and Maintenance Points

A maintenance association (MA) identifies a service that can be uniquely identified within the maintenance
domain. The CFM protocol runs within a maintenance association. A maintenance point is a demarcation
point on an interface that participates in CFM within a maintenance domain. Maintenance points drop all
lower-level frames and forward all higher-level frames. There are two types of maintenance points:
Maintenance end points (MEPs) are points at the edge of the domain that define the boundaries and
confine CFM messages within these boundaries. Outward facing or Down MEPs communicate through
the wire side (connected to the port). Inward facing or Up MEPs communicate through the relay function
side, not the wire side.
Maintenance intermediate points (MIPs) are internal to a domain, not at the boundary, and respond to
CFM only when triggered by traceroute and loopback messages. They forward CFM frames received
from MEPs and other MIPs, drop all CFM frames at a lower level (unless MIP filtering is enabled), and
forward all CFM frames at a higher level and at a lower level and regardless of whether they are received
from the relay or wire side. When MIP filtering is enabled, the MIP drops CFM frames at a lower level.
MIPs also catalog and forward continuity check messages (CCMs), but do not respond to them.
The following sections describe how to configure CFM on the Cisco ME 1200 NID.
and Later Releases
316

Adding Continuity Check and Automatic Protection Switching
Adding Continuity Check and Automatic Protection Switching

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Enters the ProvisionMepPortType mode and enables

Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionMepPortType
Step 4
addccAps mepFunctionalConfig {aps {disable | enable Adds the CC or APS configuration request.
{mode {multi |uni} | priority | switchingProtocol {laps
mepFunctionalConfigAdds the Continuity Check
| raps}} | cc {disable | enable {framerate | priority}
(CC) or automatic protection switching (APS)
configuration request.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)#
addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig aps enable mode multi
addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig aps enable
switchingProtocol laps
addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig cc enable frameRate
fr1s
addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig cc enable priority
1
apsEnables or disables the APS parameters.

modeDefines whether multicast or unicast.
priorityDefines the priority in case of tagged OAM.
In the EVC domain, this parameter is the COS-ID.
switchingProtocolSets the appropriate APS
switching protocolLinear Automatic Protection
Switching protocol (LAPS) or Ring Automatic
Protection Switching protocol (RAPS).
ccEnables or disables the CC parameters.
framerateSets the CC frame rate.
Step 5
Displays the addCcAps configuration.
addCcAps review
Example:
addCcAps review
Step 6
addCcAps commit
Sends the addCcAps configuration to the Cisco ME 1200

NID.
Example:
addCcAps commit
Later Releases
317

Adding Peer MEP IDs
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
exit
Adding Peer MEP IDs

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3

Example:
Step 4
addPeerMepId mepClientConfig {macAddress mac_address Adds the client configuration request.

| mepInstance mep_instance | peerMepId peer_mep_id}
mepClientConfigAdds the client configuration
request.
Example:
addPeerMepId mepClientConfig aisPriority aisHighest
addPeerMepId mepClientConfig domain VLAN
addPeerMepId mepClientConfig flowId 21
addPeerMepId mepClientConfig mepInstance 1
Step 5
addPeerMepId review
macAddressThe peer MAC address. This MAC

address will be overwritten by any learned MAC
address through CCM reception.
peerMepIdSets the peer MEP ID. The valid
Displays the addPeerMepId configuration.
Example:
addPeerMepId review
and Later Releases
318

Adding Peer MEP IDs
Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
addPeerMepId commit
Sends the addPeerMepId configuration to the Cisco

ME 1200 NID.
Example:
addPeerMepId commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# exit
Adding Client Configuration

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3

Example:
Step 4
addClient mepClientConfig {aisPriority {aisHighest |

priority} | domain {evc |vlan} | flowID flow_id |
lckPriority {lckHighest | priority} | level meg_level |
mepInstance mep_instance}
Example:
addClient mepClientConfig aisPriority aisHighest
addClient mepClientConfig domain VLAN
addClient mepClientConfig flowId 21
addClient mepClientConfig mepInstance 1
Adds the client configuration request.

mepClientConfigAdds the client configuration
request.
aisPrioritySets the alarm indication signal priority.
The AIS priority can be set to either the highest
priority or any other priority between 0 and 7.
domainSets the domainwhether EVC or VLAN.
flowIDSets the ID of the flow. MEP is related to
this flow.
Later Releases
319

Creating MEP Configuration
Command or Action
Purpose
lckPrioritySets the lock priority. The lock priority
can be set to either the highest priority or any other
priority between 0 and 7.
levelSets the MEG level of the MEP. The valid
mepInstanceSets the MEP instance number. The
Step 5
addClient review
Displays the addClient configuration.
Example:
addClient review
Step 6
addClient commit
Sends the addClient configuration to the Cisco ME 1200

NID.
Example:
addClient commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
and Later Releases
320

Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose

Example:
Step 4
createMep createMepConfig {direction {DOWN | UP} Creates the Maintenance End Point configuration.
| domain {EVC | PORT | VLAN} | flowId flow_id | level
createMepConfigCreates the MEP configuration.
meg_level | megDomain {maName | megIdFormat {ieee
| ituCcMeg | ituMeg}} | mepId mep_id | mepInstance
directionSets the direction of the MEPwhether
mep_instance | mode {mep | mip} | residencePort port |
down (Down MEP) or up (Up MEP).
vid vid_number | voe {disable | enable}}
domainSets the domainwhether EVC, Port, or
VLAN.
Example:
createMep createMepConfig direction UP
createMep createMepConfig domain VLAN
createMep createMepConfig flowId 21
createMep createMepConfig level 0
createMep createMepConfig mode MEP
createMep createMepConfig residencePort 1
createMep createMepConfig voe disable
flowIDSets the ID of the flow. MEP is related to this

flow.
levelSets the MEG level of the MEP. The valid values
are from 0 to 7.
megDomainSets the maintenance domain
configuration to either maName (ITU/IEEE MEG-ID)
or megIdFormat.
mepIdSets the MEP ID. The valid values are from 0
to 8191.
mepInstanceSets the MEP instance number. The
modeSets the mode of the MEP instancewhether
Maintenance Entity End Point (MEP) or Maintenance
Entity Intermediate Point (MIP).
residencePortDefines the port that MEP is
monitoring. The valid values are from 1 to 6.
vidThe valid values are from 0 to 4094.
Note
If the MEP is a port Up-MEP or an EVC
customer MIP, the VID must be provided.
voeEnables or disables the MEP VOE.
Step 5
Displays the createMep configuration.
createMep review
Example:
createMep review
Step 6
Sends the createMep configuration to the Cisco ME 1200

NID.
createMep commit
Example:
createMep commit
Later Releases
321

Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
exit
Updating MEP Configuration

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3

Example:
Step 4
updateMep mepUpdateConfig {mepInstance mep_instance Updates the Maintenance End Point configuration.
| update {level meg_level | megDomain {maName |
megIdFormat {ieee | ituCcMeg | ituMeg}} | mepId mep_id
| performanceMonitoring {disable | enable} | vid vid_number
| voe {disable | enable}}}
updateUpdates the MEP configuration.
Example:
createMep createMepConfig direction UP
createMep createMepConfig domain VLAN
createMep createMepConfig voe disable
levelSets the MEG level of the MEP. The valid

megDomainSets the maintenance domain
configuration to either maName (ITU/IEEE
MEG-ID) or megIdFormat.
mepIdSets the MEP ID. The valid values are
from 0 to 8191.
performanceMonitoringEnables or disables
performance monitoring
vidThe valid values are from 0 to 4094.
and Later Releases
322

Configuration Example: Loopback
Command or Action
Purpose
Note
If the MEP is a port Up-MEP or an EVC

customer MIP, the VID must be provided.
voeEnables or disables the MEP VOE.

Step 5
Displays the updateMep configuration.
updateMep review
Example:
updateMep review
Step 6
updateMep commit
Sends the updateMep configuration to the Cisco ME

1200 NID.
Example:
updateMep commit
Step 7
exit
Example:

(Gi1/5)NID-3(Gi1/3)====(Gi1/3)NID-4(Gi1/6)
Configuration on Cisco ME 1200 NID-3
createVlanCommand createVlanReq vlan_list 2000
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode trunk allowed vlan add vlan_list 2000
modifySwPort commit
modifySwPort commit
exit
createMep createMepConfig mepInstance 100
createMep createMepConfig direction DOWN
createMep createMepConfig domain vlan
createMep createMepConfig megDomain maName ERPS-128
createMep createMepConfig megDomain megIdFormat ituMeg
createMep createMepConfig mepId 100
createMep createMepConfig flow 2000
Later Releases
323

createMep commit
addPeerMepId peerMepConfig mepInstance 100
addPeerMepId peerMepConfig peerMepId 101
addPeerMepId commit
addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig mepInstance 100
addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig cc enable priority 7
addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig cc enable frameRate fr1s
addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig aps enable priority 7
addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig aps enable switchingProtocol raps octet 1
addCcAps commit
exit
setLoopBack
setLoopBack
setLoopBack
setLoopBack
setLoopBack
setLoopBack
setLoopBack
setloopBack
loopBackConfig
loopBackConfig
loopBackConfig
loopBackConfig
loopBackConfig
loopBackConfig
loopBackConfig
commit
mepInstance 100
lbAction enable
lbAction enable
lbAction enable
lbAction enable
lbAction enable
lbAction enable
cast multi
count 10
dei disable
interval 1
priority 7
size 70
Configuration on the Cisco ME 1200 NID-4

modifySwPort commit
modifySwPort commit
exit
createMep commit
addPeerMepId commit
addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig aps enable priority 7
addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig aps enable switchingProtocol raps octet 1
addCcAps commit
exit
Loopback in Cisco ME 1200 NID-3

showloopBack mepRequest mepInstance 100
showloopBack commit
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.mepInstance = 100
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.dei.t = 2
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.dei.u.disable = 'DEI Disable'
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.priority = 7
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.cast.t = 2
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.cast.u.multi = 'MULTI'
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.count = 10
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.size = 70
and Later Releases
324

Configuration Example: Loss MeasurementSingle Ended
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.interval = 1
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.mepInstance = 32
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.transactionId = 11
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.txLBM.upper = 0
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.txLBM.lower = 10
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.reply[0].rcvMac = '00-3A-99-FD-47-2F'
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.reply[0].received.upper = 0
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.reply[0].received.lower = 10
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.reply[0].outOfOrder.upper = 0
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.reply[0].outOfOrder.lower = 0
showLoopBack Commit Success!!!

TG1====(Gi1/5)NID-3(Gi1/4)====(Gi0/1UPE NID ControllerGi0/20)====(Gi1/5)NID-4(Gi1/6)====TG2
Cast: Multi
Ended: Single
ProvisionEVC
addEVC evcConfiguration instance 1024
addEVC evcConfiguration internal_vid 1024
addEVC evcConfiguration learning enable
addEVC evcConfiguration nni_ports GigabitEthernet_4_NNI enable
addEVC evcConfiguration nni_vid 1024
addEVC commit
exit
ProvisionEVC
addECE ece_configuration control ingress_match uni_ports GigabitEthernet_5_UNI
enable
addECE ece_configuration control ingress_match outer_tag_match match_type tagged
addECE ece_configuration control ingress_match outer_tag_match match_fields
addECE ece_configuration control egress_outer_tag mode enabled
addECE ece_configuration control egress_outer_tag pcp_mode fixed
addECE ece_configuration control egress_outer_tag pcp_value 7
addECE ece_configuration control actions class specific 7
addECe commit
exit
createMep createMepConfig domain EVC
createMep createMepConfig megDomain maName LM-Check
createMep createMepConfig voe enable
createMep commit
addPeerMepId commit
addCcAps commit
Later Releases
325

exit
opearationsMepPortType
setLM lmConfig mepInstance
setLM lmConfig lmAction
setLM commit
exit
98
enable
enable
enable
enable
cast multi
frameRate fr1s
mode single
priority 7

ProvisionEVC
addEVC commit
exit
ProvisionEVC
enable
addECe commit
exit
createMep createMepConfig megDomain maName LM-Check
createMep commit
addPeerMepId commit
addCcAps commit
exit
setLM lmConfig lmAction enable cast multi
setLM lmConfig lmAction enable mode single
setLM commit
exit
Configuration on the UPE NID Controller

Controller-Switch# show policy-map lm-v1024
Policy Map lm-v1024
Class lm-v1024
police cir 1000000 bc 31250
conform-action transmit
exceed-action drop
and Later Releases
326

Controller-Switch# show class-map lm-v1024

Class Map match-all lm-v1024 (id 2)
Match
dscp af12 (12)
Controller-Switch#
!
interface GigabitEthernet0/1
switchport trunk allowed vlan none
!
service instance 1024 ethernet
encapsulation dot1q 1024
bridge-domain 1024
!
!
service-policy input lm-v1024
!
bridge-domain 1024
!
Send 20Mbps traffic from TG2 on VLAN 1024 with DSCP set to af12
Controller-Switch(config-controller-OpearationsMepPortType)# showLM mepRequest mepInstance
98
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].config.mepInstance = 98
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].config.priority = 7
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].config.cast.t = 2
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].config.cast.u.multi = 'multi'
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].config.mode.t = 2
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].config.mode.u.single = 'single'
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].config.frameRate.t = 3
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].config.frameRate.u.fr1s = 'fr1s'
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].config.flr = 5
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].state.mepInstance = 98
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].state.tx = 85
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].state.rx = 85
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].state.nearCount = 180123
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].state.farCount = 0
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].state.nearRatio = 94
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].state.farRatio = 0
To view loss measurement:

Controller-Switch(config)# controller nid 0/2
Controller-Switch(config-controller)# OpearationsMepPortType
Controller-Switch(config-controller-OpearationsMepPortType)# showlm mepRequest mepInstance
98
Controller-Switch(config-controller-OpearationsMepPortType)# showlm review
Commands in queue:
showLM mepRequest mepInstance 98
Controller-Switch(config-controller-OpearationsMepPortType)# showlm commit
Later Releases
327

showLM Commit Success!!!
Controller-Switch(config-controller-OpearationsMepPortType)#
To stop traffic, do the following:

Controller-Switch# show policy-map int gi 0/20
GigabitEthernet0/20
Service-policy input: lm-v1024
Class-map: lm-v1024 (match-all)
2175126 packets, 287116632 bytes
5 minute offered rate 5839000 bps, drop rate 5512000 bps
Match: dscp af12 (12)
police:
cir 1000000 bps, bc 31250 bytes
exceed-action drop
conform: 122168 (packets) 16126176 (bytes)
exceed: 2052958 (packets) 270990456 (bytes)
conform: 331000 bps, exceed: 5512000 bps
Input Policer:
Policer Packets Drop: 2052958
Policer Bytes Drop: 270990456
Class-map: class-default (match-any)
3606 packets, 293801 bytes
Match: any

Controller-(config-controller-OpearationsMepPortType)# showlm review
Commands in queue:
Controller-Switch(config-controller-OpearationsMepPortType)# controller nid 0/2
Controller-Switchconfig-controller-#OpearationsMepPortType
Commands in queue:
and Later Releases
328

Configuration Example: Loss MeasurementDual Ended
Controller-config-controller-(OpearationsMepPortType)#

TG1====(Gi1/5)NID-3(Gi1/4)====(Gi0/1)ME 3600(Gi0/20)====(Gi1/5)NID-4(Gi1/6)====TG2
Cast: Multi
Ended: Dual
ProvisionEVC
addEVC commit
exit
ProvisionEVC
enable
addECe commit
exit
createMep createMepConfig megDomain maName LM-Dual
createMep commit
addPeerMepId commit
Later Releases
329


addCcAps commit
exit
setLM lmConfig lmAction enable mode dual
setLM commit
exit
ProvisionEVC
addEVC
addEVC
addEVC
addEVC
addEVC
addEVC commit
exit
evcConfiguration
evcConfiguration
evcConfiguration
evcConfiguration
evcConfiguration
instance 1021
internal_vid 1021
learning enable
nni_ports GigabitEthernet_4_NNI enable
nni_vid 1021

ProvisionEVC
addEVC commit
exit
ProvisionEVC
enable
addECe commit
exit
createMep createMepConfig megDomain maName LM-Dual
createMep commit
addPeerMepId commit
addCcAps commit
exit
setLM lmConfig lmAction enable mode dual
and Later Releases
330


setLM commit
exit
Configuration on the UPE NID Controller

Controller-Switch# show policy-map lm-v1022
Policy Map lm-v1022
Class lm-v1022
police cir 1000000 bc 31250
exceed-action drop
Controller-Switch#
!
!
bridge-domain 1022
!
!
service-policy output lm-v1022
!
bridge-domain 1022
!
Send 20Mbps traffic from TG2 on VLAN 1022 with DSCP set to af11
Controller-Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# controller nid 0/2
Controller-Switch(config-controller)#ProvisionMepPortType
Controller-Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# showMepConfig flush
Controller-Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# showMepalar mepRequest mepInstance
94
Controller-Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# showMepalar commit
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].mepInstance = 94
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].cLevel = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].cMeg = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].cMep = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].cAis = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].cLck = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].cSsf = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].aBlk = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].atsf = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].peerMepState[0].peerMepId = 102
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].peerMepState[0].cLoc = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].peerMepState[0].cRdi = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].peerMepState[0].cPeriod = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].peerMepState[0].cPrio = false
showMepAlarms Commit Success!!!

Controller-Switch(config-controller-OpearationsMepPortType)# showlm mepRequest mepInstance
98
Commands in queue:
Later Releases
331

Controller-Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)#controller nid 0/1
Controller-Switch(config-controller)#ProvisionMepPortType
Controller-Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)#showMepConfig flush
Controller-Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)#showMepalar mepRequest mepInstance
94
Controller-Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)#showMepalar commit
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].mepInstance = 94
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].cLevel = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].cMeg = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].cMep = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].cAis = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].cLck = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].cSsf = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].aBlk = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].atsf = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].peerMepState[0].peerMepId = 103
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].peerMepState[0].cLoc = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].peerMepState[0].cRdi = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].peerMepState[0].cPeriod = false
ShowMepAlarms_Output.mepState.mepInst[0].peerMepState[0].cPrio = false
showMepAlarms Commit Success!!!
Controller-Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)#
Controller-Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)#controller nid 0/1
Controller-Switch(config-controller)#OpearationsMepPortType
Controller-Switch(config-controller-OpearationsMepPortType)#showlm flush
Controller-Switch(config-controller-OpearationsMepPortType)#showlm mepRequest mepInstance
94
Controller-Switch(config-controller-OpearationsMepPortType)#showlm commit
ShowLM_Output.lossMeasurentInfo.mepInst[0].config.mode.u.dual = 'dual'
Controller-Switch(config-controller-OpearationsMepPortType)#controller nid 0/2
Controller-Switch(config-controller)#OpearationsMepPortType
Controller-Switch(config-controller-OpearationsMepPortType)#showlm flush
Controller-Switch(config-controller-OpearationsMepPortType)#showlm mepRequest mepInstance
94
Controller-Switch(config-controller-OpearationsMepPortType)#showlm commit
and Later Releases
332

To stop traffic, do the following:

Service-policy output: lm-v1022
Class-map: lm-v1022 (match-all)
3389497 packets, 447413604 bytes
Match: dscp af11 (10)
police:
cir 1000000 bps, bc 31250 bytes
exceed-action drop
conform: 196188 (packets) 25112064 (bytes)
exceed: 3193309 (packets) 408743552 (bytes)
conform: 492000 bps, exceed: 7880000 bps
Queue-limit current-queue-depth 0 bytes
Output Queue:
Default Queue-limit 49152 bytes
Tail Packets Drop: 3193309
Tail Bytes Drop: 421516788
Class-map: class-default (match-any)
2491 packets, 170276 bytes
Match: any

Controller-Switch(config-controller)#
Commands in queue:
Later Releases
333


Commands in queue:
and Later Releases
334
CHAPTER
16
Configuring Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitor is a carrier Ethernet software feature which provides:
Monitoring delay measurements
Monitoring loss measurements
Monitoring ECE
Monitoring EVC
Storing the monitored data
Transferring the monitored data
For information on configuring EVC, see How to Configure Ethernet Virtual Circuit, on page 101.
For information on configuring MEP, see Creating MEP Configuration, on page 320.
Restrictions for Configuring Performance Monitoring, page 335
ITU-T Y.1731 Performance Monitoring in a Service Provider Network, page 335
How to Configure Performance Monitoring, page 337
Verifying Performance Monitoring, page 372
Restrictions for Configuring Performance Monitoring

Performance monitoring is not enabled by default for loss measurement (LM), delay measurement (DM),
EVC, and ECE.
ITU-T Y.1731 Performance Monitoring in a Service Provider

Network
ITU-T Y.1731 performance monitoring provides standard-based Ethernet performance monitoring that
encompasses the measurement of Ethernet frame delay, frame-delay variation, and throughput as outlined in
Later Releases
335

Frame Delay and Frame-Delay Variation
the ITU-T Y.1731 specification and interpreted by the Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF). Service providers offer
service level agreements (SLAs) that describe the level of performance customers can expect for services.
This document describes the Ethernet performance management aspect of SLAs.
Frame Delay and Frame-Delay Variation

The Frame Delay parameter can be used for on-demand OAM measurements of frame delay and frame-delay
variation. When a maintenance end point (MEP) is enabled to generate frames with frame-delay measurement
(ETH-DM) information, it periodically sends frames with ETH-DM information to its peer MEP in the same
maintenance entity. Peer MEPs perform frame-delay and frame-delay variation measurements through this
periodic exchange during the diagnostic interval.
An MEP requires the following specific configuration information to support ETH-DM:
MEG levelMEG level at which the MEP exists
Priority
Drop eligibilitymarked drop ineligible
Transmission rate
Total interval of ETH-DM
MEF10 frame-delay variation algorithm
A MEP transmits frames with ETH-DM information using the TxTimeStampf information element.
TxTimeStampf is the time stamp for when the ETH-DM frame was sent. A receiving MEP can compare the
TxTimeStampf value with the RxTimef value, which is the time the ETH-DM frame was received, and
calculate one-way delay using the formula frame delay = RxTimef TxTimeStampf.
One-way frame-delay measurement (1DM) requires that clocks at both the transmitting MEP and the receiving
MEPs are synchronized. Measuring frame-delay variation does not require clock synchronization and the
variation can be measured using 1DM or a frame-delay measurement message (DMM) and a frame-delay
measurement reply (DMR) frame combination.
If it is not practical to have clocks synchronized, only two-way frame-delay measurements can be made. In
this case, the MEP transmits a frame containing ETH-DM request information and the TxTimeStampf element,
and the receiving MEP responds with a frame containing ETH-DM reply information and the TxTimeStampf
value copied from the ETH-DM request information.
Two-way frame delay is calculated as frame delay = RxTimeb TxTimeStampf, where RxTimeb is the time
that the frame with ETH-DM reply information was received. Two-way frame delay and variation can be
measured using only DMM and DMR frames.
To allow more precise two-way frame-delay measurement, the MEP replying to a frame with ETH-DM request
information can also include two additional time stamps in the ETH-DM reply information:
RxTimeStampfTime stamp of the time at which the frame with ETH-DM request information was
received.
TxTimeStampbTime stamp of the time at which the transmitting frame with ETH-DM reply information
was sent.
and Later Releases
336

How to Configure Performance Monitoring
Note
The frame-delay and frame-delay variation measurement processes are aborted when faults related to
continuity and availability occur or when known network topology changes occur.
An MIP is transparent to the frames with ETH-DM information; therefore, an MIP does not require information
to support the ETH-DM function.
The figure below shows a functional overview of a typical network in which Y.1731 performance monitoring
is used.
Figure 10: Y.1731 Performance Monitoring
How to Configure Performance Monitoring

Provisioning the Controller to Configure Performance Monitoring
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Later Releases
337

Provisioning the Controller to Configure Performance Monitoring
Step 2
Command or Action
Purpose
Enters the controller configuration

mode.
Example:
Step 3
Enters performance monitoring

provisioning (PM) mode.
Example:
Step 4
OperationsMepPortType {clearMepStats | default | exit| no | setAis | setDM | Displays the supported

configurations for performance
setLM | setLck | setLinkTrace | setLoopBack | setTst | showAis | showDM |
showLM | showLck | showLinkTrace | showLoopBack | showTst | updateDM | monitoring.
updateTst}
Example:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# ?
OperationsMepPortType sub-mode commands:
clearMepStats Clear mep statistics request
default
exit
Exit from OperationsMepPortType sub configuration mode
no
setAis
setDM
setLM
setLck
setLinkTrace
setLoopBack
setTst
showAis
showDM
showLM
showLck
showLinkTrace

Enable or Disable AIS request
Enable or Disable delay measurement request
Enable or Disable loss measurement request
Enable or Disable lock signal request
Enable or Disable linktrace request
Enable/Disable loopback
Enable or Disable test signal request
Show AIS configuration request
Show delay measurement statistics request
Show LM statistics request
Show lock signal current configuration request
Show linktrace state and current configuration request
showLoopBack
Show loopback state and current configuration request
showTst
request
updateDM
updateTst
Step 5
Show test signal statistics and current configuration

Update DM parameters request
Update Tst signal request
Exits the performance monitoring

provisioning mode.
exit
Example:
The following example shows the supported PM configuration:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# ?
OperationsMepPortType sub-mode commands:
default
exit
Exit from OpearationsMepPortType sub configuration mode
and Later Releases
338

Configuring Performance Monitoring with Default Configuration
no
setAis
setDM
setLM
setLck
setLinkTrace
setLoopBack
setTst
showAis
showDM
showLM
showLck
showLinkTrace
showLoopBack
showTst
updateDM
updateTst

Show test signal statistics and current configuration request
Configuring Performance Monitoring with Default Configuration

You can set the default performance monitoring configurations on the controller.
Before You Begin

Perform the steps to provision performance monitoring on the controller. See Provisioning the Controller
to Configure Performance Monitoring, on page 337.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 1 default{clearMepStats | setAis | setDM | setLM |setLck |

setLinkTrace | setLoopBack | setTst | showAis | showDM |
showLM | showLck | showLinkTrace | showLoopBack |
showTst | updateDM | updateTst |exit}
clearMepStatsClears MEP statistics.

setAisEnables or disables AIS.
setDMEnables or disables delay measurement.
Example:
default ?
exit
Exit from OpearationsMepPortType sub
configuration mode
setAis
setDM
Enable or Disable delay measurement
request
setLM
Enable or Disable loss measurement
request
setLck
setLinkTrace
setLoopBack
setTst
Sets the default configuration.

setLMEnables or disables loss measurement.

setLckEnables or disables lock signals
setLinkTraceEnables or disables link traces.
setLoopBackEnables or disables loopback
setTstEnables or disables the test signal.
showAisDisplays AIS configuration request.
showDMDisplays delay measurement statistics.
showLMDisplays loss measurement statistics.
showAis
showDM
Show delay measurement statistics
request
showLM
showLck
Show lock signal current configuration
request
showLinkTrace Show linktrace state and current
showLckDisplays current configured loss signals.

showLinkTraceDisplays current configured link
trace state.
Later Releases
339

Configuring Alarm Information Signal (AIS) on the Controller
Command or Action
Purpose
showLoopBackDisplays current configured
loopback state.
configuration request
showLoopBack
Show loopback state and current
showTst
Show test signal statistics and
current configuration request
updateDM
updateTst
showTstDisplays current configured test signals

statistics.
updateDMUpdates the delay measurement
parameters.
updateTstUpdates test signal parameters.
exitExits from OperationsMepPortType
configuration mode.
Step 2 exit
Exits the performance monitoring provisioning mode.
Example:

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
setAis {commit | flush | aisConfig | review}
Configures alarm information signal (AIS).
Example:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setAis
?
aisConfig Enable or Disable AIS request
commit
commit setAis
flush
flush all setAis commands from qu
review
review setAis commands
Step 2
commitSends the configuration to NID.

flushFlushes all configuration from the queue.
aisConfigEnables or disables the AIS
configuration.
controller.
setAis aisConfig {aisaction {enable {frameRate {fr1m | fr1s} Configures AIS.

| disable} | protect {enable | disable} } |
aisactionEnables or disables AIS on the
mepInstanceinstance_no}
controller.
and Later Releases
340

Command or Action
Purpose
enableEnables lock signal configuration.
Example:
disableDisables lock signal configuration.
aisConfig aisaction enable frameRate fr1m
aisConfig aisaction enable frameRate fr1s
aisConfig aisaction enable protect enable
aisConfig mepInstance 20
Step 3
setAis
frameRateIndicates the frame rate.
setAis
fr1mIndicates the frame rate is 1 f/m.
setAis
setAis
fr1sIndicates the frame rate is 1 f/s.

mepinstance instance_noIndicates the MEP
instance. The valid values are from 1 to 128.
Displays the AIS configuration on the controller.
setAis review
Example:
review
Commands in queue:
setAis aisConfig aisAction enable protect enable
setAis aisConfig aisAction enable frameRate
fr1s
setAis aisConfig aisAction enable frameRate
fr1m
Step 4
Sends the AIS configuration to the NID.
setAiscommit
Example:
commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure AIS on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setAis aisConfig aisaction enable frameRate
fr1m
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setAis aisConfig aisaction enable frameRate
fr1s
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setAis aisConfig aisaction enable protect
enable
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setAis review
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setAis aisConfig mepInstance 20
Commands in queue:
setAis aisConfig
setAis aisConfig
setAis aisConfig
setAis aisConfig
aisAction enable protect enable

aisAction enable frameRate fr1s
aisAction enable frameRate fr1m
mepInstance 20
Later Releases
341

Configuring Delay Measurement (DM) on the Controller
Commands in queue:
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setAis commit
SetAis_Output.mepResponse = 34537474
SetAis Commit Success!!!
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)#end

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 1 setDM {commit | flush | dmConfig | review}
Configures delay measurement.

Example:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setDM
?
commit
commit setDM
dmConfig Enable or Disable delay measurement request
flush
review

dmConfigEnables or disables the delay
measurement configuration.
flush all setDM commands from queue

review setDM commands
Sets DM parameters
Step 2 setDM dmConfig {dmaction {enable {calculation {flow |
rdtrp} | cast {mutli | uni mepId mep_Id } | interval interval_no
dmactionEnables or disables DM on the controller.
| lastN delay_calc | mode {oneway | twoway} | priority
priority_no } | disable } | mepInstance instance_no }
enableEnables delay measurement configuration.
disableDisables delay measurement configuration.
Example:
dmConfig dmaction enable calculation flow
dmConfig dmaction enable calculation rdtrp
dmConfig dmaction enable cast multi
dmConfig dmaction enable cast uni mepId 23
dmConfig dmaction enable interval 20
dmConfig dmaction enable lastN 200
dmConfig dmaction enable mode oneway
dmConfig dmaction enable mode twoway
setDM
setDM
setDM
setDM
calculationCalculates delay.
flowTwo-way delay is calculated as round trip
symmetrical flow. Far end resistance time is
subtracted.
setDM
rdtrpTwo-way delay is calculated as round trip

delay. Far end resistance time is not subtracted.
setDM
castSpecifies transmission mode.
setDM
multiSpecifies OAM protocol data units (PDU)

transmission with multicast MAC.
setDM
and Later Releases
342

Command or Action
Purpose
dmConfig dmaction enable priority 3
dmConfig dmaction enable calculation rdtrp
dmConfig mepInstance 1
uniSpecifies OAM protocol data units (PDU)

transmission with unicast MAC. The MAC is procured
from the peer MEP MAC database.
mepId mep_idSpecifies Peer MEP ID for unicast
MAC.
interval interval_noSpecifies the interval time
between the PDU transmission in ms. The valid range
is from 0 to 65535. The minimum value is 10ms.
lastNSpecifies the latest N delays for calculation.
modeSpecifies the mode of delay measurement.
onewaySpecifies mode on 1DM PDU
measurement.
twowaySpecifies mode on DMM or DMR PDU.
priority priority_noPriority in case of tagged
OAM. In the EVC domain this is the COS-ID. The
mepinstance instance_noIndicates the MEP
Step 3 setDM review
Displays the DM configuration on the controller.
Example:
review
Commands in queue:
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
flow
setDM dmConfig
rdtrp
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
flow
setDM dmConfig
rdtrp
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
23
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
dmAction
dmAction
dmAction
dmAction
enable
enable
enable
enable
mode oneWay
interval 10
lastN 20
calculation
dmAction enable calculation

dmAction enable priority 2
dmAction enable cast multi
dmAction enable cast uni mepId
dmAction enable interval 20
dmAction enable priority 3
mepInstance 2
Later Releases
343

Command or Action
Purpose
Step 4 setDMcommit
Sends the DM configuration to the NID.
Example:
commit
SetDM Commit Success!!!
Step 5 exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure DM on the controller:
flow
rdtrp
mepId 23
20
rdtrp
Commands in queue:
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
setDM dmConfig
dmAction enable
dmAction enable
dmAction enable
dmAction enable
dmAction enable
dmAction enable
dmAction enable
dmAction enable
dmAction enable
dmAction enable
dmAction enable
dmAction enable
mepInstance 2
setDM dmConfig dmaction enable calculation

setDM dmConfig dmaction enable calculation
setDM dmConfig dmaction enable cast multi
setDM dmConfig dmaction enable cast uni
setDM dmConfig dmaction enable interval
setDM
setDM
setDM
setDM
setDM
dmConfig dmaction enable lastN 200

dmConfig dmaction enable mode oneway
dmConfig dmaction enable mode twoway
dmConfig dmaction enable priority 3
dmConfig dmaction enable calculation
setDM dmConfig mepInstance 1

setDM review
mode oneWay
interval 10
lastN 20
calculation flow
calculation rdtrp
priority 2
calculation flow
calculation rdtrp
cast multi
cast uni mepId 23
interval 20
priority 3
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setDM commit

DM.dmConfig.mepInstance = 119
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.t = 1
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.priority = 4
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.cast.t = 2
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.cast.u.multi = 'any test element'
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.mode.t = 2
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.mode.u.twoWay = 'any test element'
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.calculation.t = 2
and Later Releases
344

Configuring Loss Measurement (LM) on the Controller
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.calculation.u.flow = 'any test elemen

t'
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.interval = 42689
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.lastN = 1573
DM.dmConfig.mepInstance = 119
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.t = 1
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.priority = 0
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.cast.t = 1
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.cast.u.uni.mepId = 23
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.mode.t = 1
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.mode.u.oneWay = 'one-way'
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.calculation.t = 1
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.calculation.u.rdtrp = 'rdtrp'
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.interval = 42689
DM.dmConfig.dmAction.u.enable.lastN = 1573
SetDM_Output.mepResponse = 0

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
setLM {commit | flush | lmConfig | review}
Configures loss measurement (LM).

Example:
setLM ?
commit
commit setLM
lmConfig Enable or Disable loss measurement
request
flush
flush all setLM commands from queue
review
review setLM commands
Step 2

lmConfigEnables or disables the loss measurement
configuration.
setLM LmConfig { lmaction {enable {cast {multi | uni} Sets LM parameters.

| flr frame_interval | frameRate {fr10s | fr1m | fr1s | fr6h
lmactionEnables or disables LM on the controller.
| fr6m} | mode {dual | single} | priority priority_no } |
disable } | mepInstance instance_no }
enableEnables loss measurement configuration.
disableDisables loss measurement configuration.
Example:
setLM lmConfig lmaction enable cast multi
setLM lmConfig lmaction enable cast uni
setLM lmConfig lmaction enable flr
setLM lmConfig lmaction frameRate fr10s
setLM lmConfig lmaction enable mode dual
castSpecifies transmission mode.

Later Releases
345

Command or Action
Purpose
setLM lmConfig lmaction enable priority 4
flr frame_intervalSpecifies the frame loss ratio interval

time. The valid range is from 0 to 99.
frameRateSpecifies the LM frame rate.
fr10s Specifies the frame rate as 10 f/s.
fr1m Specifies the frame rate as 1 f/min.
fr1s Specifies the frame rate as 1 f/s.
fr6h Specifies the frame rate as 6 f/hour.
fr6m Specifies the frame rate as 6 f/min.
modeSpecifies the mode of delay measurement.
dualSpecifies dual LM mode on CCM PDU.
singleSpecifies single LM mode on LMM or LMR
PDU.
priority priority_noPriority in case of tagged OAM.
In the EVC domain this is the COS-ID. The valid range
is from 0 to 7.
mepinstance instance_noIndicates the MEP instance.
Step 3
Displays the LM configuration on the controller.
setLM review
Example:
setLM review
Commands in queue:
setLM lmConfig
setLM lmConfig
setLM lmConfig
setLM lmConfig
fr10s
setLM lmConfig
setLM lmConfig
Step 4
lmAction
lmAction
lmAction
lmAction
enable
enable
enable
enable
cast multi
cast uni
flr 2
frameRate
lmAction enable mode dual

lmAction enable priority 4
setLMcommit
Sends the LM configuration to the NID.
Example:
setLM commit
SetLM Commit Success!!!
Step 5
exit
Example:
exit
and Later Releases
346

Configuring Lock Signal on the Controller
The example shows how to configure LM on the controller:
Commands in queue:
setLM lmConfig
setLM lmConfig
setLM lmConfig
setLM lmConfig
setLM lmConfig
setLM lmConfig
lmAction
lmAction
lmAction
lmAction
lmAction
lmAction
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
setLM
setLM
setLM
setLM
setLM
setLM
setLM
setLM
lmConfig
lmConfig
lmConfig
lmConfig
lmConfig
lmConfig
lmConfig
review
lmaction enable cast multi

lmaction enable cast uni
lmaction enable flr
lmaction frameRate fr10s
lmaction enable mode dual
lmaction enable priority 4
mepInstance 1
cast multi
cast uni
flr 2
frameRate fr10s
mode dual
priority 4
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setLM commit

SetLM_Output.mepResponse = 0 SetLM-Output.mepResponse = 0
SetLM Commit Success!!!

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
setLck {commit | flush | lckConfig | review}
Configures lock signal.

Example:
setLck ?
commit
commit setLck
flush
flush all setLck commands from queue
lckConfig Enable or Disable lock signal request
review
review setLck commands
Step 2

lckConfigEnables or disables the lock signal
configuration.
setLck lckConfig {lckaction {enable frameRate {fr1m | Sets lock signal parameters.
fr1s} | disable} | mepInstance instance_no}
lckactionEnables or disables lock signal on the
controller.
Later Releases
347

Command or Action
Purpose
enableEnables lock signal configuration.
Example:
frameRateConfigures the frame rate.
setlck lckConfig lckaction enable frameRate fr1m
setlck lckConfig lckaction mepInstance 1
fr1mSpecifies frame rate as 1 f/m.

fr1sSpecifies frame rate as 1 f/s.
disableDisables lock signal configuration.
mepInstance instance_noIndicates the MEP
Step 3
setlck review
Displays the lock signal configuration on the controller.
Example:
setlck review
Commands in queue:
setLck lckConfig lckAction enable frameRate
fr1m
Step 4
setlckcommit
Sends the lock signal configuration to the NID.
Example:
setlck commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
exit
The example shows how to configure lock signal on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setlck lckConfig lckaction enable frameRate
frm1
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setlck lckConfig lckaction mepInstance 1
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setlck review
Commands in queue:
setLck lckConfig lckAction enable frameRate fr1m
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setlck commit
SetLck_Output.mepResponse = 0
SetLck Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
348

Configuring LoopBack on the Controller

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 1 setLoopBack {commit | flush | loopBackConfig | review}
Configures loopback.
Example:
setLoopBack ?
commit
commit setLoopBack
flush
flush all setLoopBack commands from
queue
loopBackConfig Enable/Disable loopback
review
review setLoopBack commands

loopBackConfigEnables or disables the loopback
configuration.
Step 2 setLoopBack loopBackConfig {lbAction {enable {cast {multi Sets loopback parameters.
| uni {destination {macAddress target_MAC | mepid mep_id}
lbactionEnables or disables loop back on the
} } | count count_no | dei { enable | disable} | interval interval
controller.
| priority priority_no | size bytes} | disable} | mepInstance
instance_no}
enableEnables loop back trace configuration.
castSpecifies the type of loop back configuration.
Example:
setLoopBack loopbackConfig lbaction enable cast multi
setLoopBack loopbackConfig lbaction enable cast uni
destination macAddress mac1
setLoopBack loopbackConfig lbaction enable cast
unidestination mepId 3
setLoopBack loopbackConfig lbaction enable count 345
setLoopBack loopbackConfig lbaction enable dei enable
setLoopBack loopbackConfig lbaction enable interval
20
setLoopBack loopbackConfig lbaction enable priority 7
setLoopBack loopbackConfig lbaction enable size 1400
setLoopBack loopbackConfig mepInstance 125

destinationSpecifies the target peer MEP.
macAddress target_MACSpecifies the MAC
address for LT in MEP.
mepId mep_idSpecifies Peer MEP ID. The valid
range is from 0 to 8191.
deiSpecifies drop eligible indicator for tagged
OAM.
enableEnables drop eligible indicator configuration.
disableDisables drop eligible indicator
configuration.
Later Releases
349

Command or Action
Purpose
count count_noSpecifies the number of loop back
PDU sent in a single loop test .
interval interval_noSpecifies the interval time
between the PDU transmission in ms. The valid range
is from 0 to 65535. The minimum value is 10ms.
priority priority_noSpecifies the priority for tagged
OAM. In EVC domain, it indicates the COS-ID. The
size framesSpecifies the number of bytes. The valid
disableDisables loop back configuration.
Step 3 setloopback review
Displays the loop back configuration on the controller.
Example:
setloopback review
Commands in queue:
setLoopBack loopBackConfig lbAction enable
cast multi
cast uni destination macAddress mac1
cast uni destination mepId 3
count 345
setLoopBack loopBackConfig lbAction enable dei
enable
interval 20
priority 7
size 1400
setLoopBack loopBackConfig mepInstance 125
Step 4 setlckcommit
Sends the loop back configuration to the NID.
Example:
setloopback commit
Step 5 exit
Example:
and Later Releases
350

Configuring Link Trace on the Controller
The example shows how to configure loop back on the controller:
cast multi
cast uni destination macAddress mac1
cast unidestination mepId 3
count 345
dei enable
interval 20
priority 7
size 1400
Commands in queue:
setLoopBack
setLoopBack
ss mac1
setLoopBack
setLoopBack
setLoopBack
setLoopBack
setLoopBack
setLoopBack
setLoopBack
setLoopBack loopbackConfig lbaction enable

setLoopBack loopbackConfig mepInstance 125
setsetloopback review
loopBackConfig lbAction enable cast multi

loopBackConfig lbAction enable cast uni destination macAddre
loopBackConfig
loopBackConfig
loopBackConfig
loopBackConfig
loopBackConfig
loopBackConfig
loopBackConfig
lbAction
lbAction
lbAction
lbAction
lbAction
lbAction
lbAction
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable

count 345
dei enable
interval 20
priority 7
size 1400
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setsetloopback commit

SetLoopBack_Output.mepResponse = 34275330
SetLoopBack Commit Success!!!

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
setLinkTrace {commit | flush | linkTrace | review}
Configures link trace.

Example:
setLinkTrace ?
commit
commit setLinkTrace
flush
flush all setLinkTrace commands from

linkTraceEnables or disables the link trace
configuration.
Later Releases
351

Command or Action
queue
linkTrace
review
Step 2
Purpose

review setLinkTrace commands
setLinkTrace linkTrace {ltAction {enable {destination Sets link trace parameters.

{macAddress target_MAC | mepId mep_id} | priority
ltactionEnables or disables link trace on the
priority_no | ttl ttl_time disable}} | mepInstance
controller.
instance_no}
enableEnables link trace configuration.
Example:
setlinkTrace linkTrace ltkaction enable destination
macAddress mac1
setlinkTrace linkTrace ltkaction enable destination
mepId 3
setlinkTrace linkTrace ltkaction enable priority
2
setlinkTrace linkTrace ltkaction enable ttl 3
destinationSpecifies the target peer MEP.

macAddress target_MACSpecifies the link trace
MAC address for LT in MEP.
mepId mep_idSpecifies Peer MEP ID for link
trace. The valid range is from 0 to 8191.
ttl ttl_timeSpecifies the time to live. The valid range
is from 1 to 999.
disableDisables link trace signal configuration.
mepInstance instance_noIndicates the MEP instance.
Step 3
setLinkTrace review
Displays the link trace configuration on the controller.
Example:
setlinkTrace review
Step 4
setlckcommit
Sends the link trace configuration to the NID.
Example:
setlinkTrace commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
exit
and Later Releases
352

Configuring Test Signal on the Controller
The example shows how to configure link trace on the controller:
destination macAddress mac1
destination mepId 3
priority 2
ttl 3
setlinkTrace linkTrace ltkaction enable

setlinkTrace review
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setlinkTrace commit

SetLinkTrace_Output.mepResponse = 34340866
SetLinkTrace Commit Success!!!

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
setTst {commit | flush | tstConfig | review}
Configures test signal.

Example:
setTst ?
commit
commit setTst
flush
flush all setTst commands from queue
review
review setTst commands
tstConfig Enable or Disable test signal request
Step 2
setTst tstConfig {dei {enable | disable} | mepId mep_Id |

mepInstance mep_instance | pattern {allOne | allZero |
oneZero} | priority priority_no | rate bit_rate | sequence
{enable | disable} | size frames}

tstConfigEnables or disables the test signal
configuration.
Sets test signal parameters.
deiSpecifies drop eligible indicator for tagged OAM.
enableEnables drop eligible indicator configuration.
disableDisables drop eligible indicator configuration.
Example:
setTst tstConfig dei enable
setTst tstConfig mepid 2
setTst tstConfig mepinstance 2
mepId mep_instanceSpecifies Peer MEP ID. The

Later Releases
353

Command or Action
setTst tstConfig pattern allOne
setTst tstConfig sequence enable
Purpose
pattern Specifies the sequence number is test PDU.
allOneSpecifies the test pattern to all one.
allZeroSpecifies the test pattern to all zero.
oneZeroSpecifies the test pattern to one zero.
rate bit_rateSpecifies the test frame transmission
rate in Megabits per second. The valid range is from
1 to 1518.
sequenceEnables or disables the sequence in test
PDU.
size framesSpecifies the test pattern size in frames.
Step 3
setTst review
Displays the test signal configuration on the controller.
Example:
setTst review
Commands in queue:
Step 4
setTstcommit
Sends the link trace configuration to the NID.
Example:
setTst commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
exit
and Later Releases
354

Viewing Alarm Information Signal (AIS) on the Controller
The example shows how to configure test signal on the controller:
setTst
setTst
setTst
setTst
setTst
setTst
setTst
setTst
tstConfig
tstConfig
tstConfig
tstConfig
tstConfig
tstConfig
tstConfig
tstConfig
dei enable
mepid 2
mepinstance 2
pattern allOne
pattern allZero
rate 400
sequence enable
size 45
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setTst review

Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# setTst commit
SetTst_Output.mepResponse = 34471938
SetTst Commit Success!!!
Viewing Alarm Information Signal (AIS) on the Controller

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
showAis {commit | flush | mepRequest | review}
Displays alarm information signal configuration.

Example:
showAis ?
commit
commit showAis
flush
flush all showAis commands from queue
mepRequest Show AIS configuration request
review
review showAis commands
Step 2

mepRequestDisplays the alarm configuration.
controller.
showAis mepRequest {all | mepInstance instance_no}
allDisplays AIS configuration for all MEPs on

the controller.
Example:

Later Releases
355

Viewing Delay Measurement (DM) Statistics on the Controller
Command or Action
Purpose
showAis mepRequest all

showAis mepRequest mepInstance 120
Step 3
showAis review
Displays the configuration on the controller.
Example:
showAis review
Commands in queue:
Step 4
showAis commit
Example:
showAis commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to display the AIS on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showAis mepRequest all
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showAis mepRequest mepInstance 120
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showAis review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showAis commit
Ais_Output.aisInfo.mepInst[0].config.mepInstance = 100
ShowAis_Output.aisInfo.mepInst[0].config.frameRate.t = 2
ShowAis_Output.aisInfo.mepInst[0].config.frameRate.u.fr1s = 'fr1s'
ShowAis_Output.aisInfo.mepInst[0].config.protect.t = 1
ShowAis_Output.aisInfo.mepInst[0].config.protect.u.enable = 'enable'
showAis Commit Success!!!
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# end

Before You Begin
and Later Releases
356

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
showDM {commit | flush | mepRequest | review}
Displays delay measurement (DM).

Example:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showDM
?
commit
commit showDM
flush
flush all showDM commands from queue
mepRequest Show delay measurement statistics request
review
Step 2
mepRequestDisplays the configuration.

controller.
review showDM commands
showDM mepRequest {all | mepInstance instance_no}
allDisplays DM configuration for all MEPs

on the controller.
Example:

mepRequest all
mepRequest mepInstance 100
Step 3
showDM review
Example:
review
Commands in queue:
showDM mepRequest all
showDM mepRequest mepInstance 100
Step 4
showDM commit
Example:
commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to display the delay measurement statistics on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showDM mepRequest all
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showDM mepRequest mepInstance 100
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showDM review
Commands in queue:
showDM mepRequest mepInstance 100
Later Releases
357

Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showDM commit

ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.mepInstance = 98
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.priority = 7
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.cast.t = 1
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.cast.u.uni.mepId = 106
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.mode.t = 2
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.mode.u.twoWay = 'two-way'
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.txMode.t = 1
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.txMode.u.standardize = 'standardize'
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.calculation.t = 1
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.calculation.u.rdtrp = 'rdtrp'
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.interval = 10
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.lastN = 10
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.unit.t = 2
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.unit.u.us = 'micro seconds'
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.syncronized.t = 2
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.syncronized.u.disable = 'Disable'
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.overflowReset.t = 1
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].config.overflowReset.u.keep = 'keep'
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mepInstance = 106
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.F_to_N.tx = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.F_to_N.rxTimeout = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.F_to_N.rx = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.F_to_N.rxError = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.F_to_N.avgTotal = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.F_to_N.avgLastN = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.F_to_N.min = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.F_to_N.max = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.F_to_N.avgVariationTotal =
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.F_to_N.avgVariationLastN =
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.F_to_N.minVar = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.F_to_N.maxVar = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.F_to_N.overflow = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.N_to_F.tx = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.N_to_F.rxTimeout = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.N_to_F.rx = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.N_to_F.rxError = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.N_to_F.avgTotal = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.N_to_F.avgLastN = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.N_to_F.min = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.N_to_F.max = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.N_to_F.avgVariationTotal =
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.N_to_F.avgVariationLastN =
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.N_to_F.minVar = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.N_to_F.maxVar = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.oneWay.N_to_F.overflow = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.twoWay.tx = 793
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.twoWay.rxTimeout = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.twoWay.rx = 793
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.twoWay.rxError = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.twoWay.avgTotal = 17
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.twoWay.avgLastN = 17
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.twoWay.min = 17
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.twoWay.max = 18
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.twoWay.avgVariationTotal = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.twoWay.avgVariationLastN = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.twoWay.minVar = 0
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.twoWay.maxVar = 1
ShowDM_Output.dmInfo.mepInst[0].state.mode.twoWay.overflow = 0
showDM Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
358
0
0
0
0

Viewing Loss Measurement (LM) Statistics on theController
Viewing Loss Measurement (LM) Statistics on theController

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
showLM {commit | flush | mepRequest | review}
Displays loss measurement configuration.

Example:
showLM ?
commit
commit showLM
flush
flush all showLM commands from queue
mepRequest Show LM statistics request
review
review showLM commands
Step 2

controller.
showLM mepRequest {all | mepInstance instance_no}
allDisplays LM statistics for all MEPs on the

controller.
Example:

Switch(config-controllerOperationsMepPortType)# showLM
mepRequest all
Step 3
showLM review
Example:
showLM review
Commands in queue:
showLM mepRequest all
Step 4
showLM commit
Example:
showLM commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
Later Releases
359

Viewing Lock Signal on the Controller
The example shows how to display the loss measurement statistics on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showLM mepRequest all
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showLM mepRequest mepInstance 100
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showLM review
CCommands in queue:
showLM mepRequest all
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showLM commit
Viewing Lock Signal on the Controller

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
showlck {commit | flush | mepRequest | review}
Displays lock signal information.
Example:
showAis ?
commit
commit showLck
flush
flush all showLck commands from queue
mepRequest Show lock signal current configuration
request
review
review showLck commands
Step 2
showlck mepRequest {all | mepInstance instance_no}

controller.
allDisplays lock signal configuration for all
MEPs on the controller.
and Later Releases
360

Viewing Loopback State on the Controller
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
showlck mepRequest all
showlck mepRequest mepInstance 20
Step 3
showlck review
Example:
showlck review
Commands in queue:
showLck mepRequest all
showLck mepRequest mepInstance 20
Step 4
setlck commit
Example:
showlck commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to display the lock signal on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showlck mepRequest all
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showlck mepRequest mepInstance 20
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showlck review
Commands in queue:
showLck mepRequest all
showLck mepRequest mepInstance 20
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showlck commit
SetLck_Output.mepResponse = 0
SetLck Commit Success!!!

Before You Begin
Later Releases
361

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
showLoopBack {commit | flush | mepRequest | review}
Display loopback information.

Example:
showLoopBack ?
commit
commit showLoopBack
flush
flush all showLoopBack commands from
queue
mepRequest Show loopback state and current
review
review showLoopBack commands
Step 2

controller.
showLoopBack mepRequest {all | mepInstance instance_no}
allDisplays loopback configuration for all

MEPs on the controller.
Example:

showLoopBack mepRequest all
showLoopBack mepRequest mepInstance 30
Step 3
flushFlushes all configuration from the

queue.
showLoopBack review
Example:
showLoopBack review
Commands in queue:
Step 4
showLoopBack commit
Example:
showLoopBack commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to display the loop back state on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showLoopBack mepRequest all
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showLoopBack mepRequest mepInstance 30
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showLoopBack review
Commands in queue:
and Later Releases
362

Viewing Link Trace State on the Controller
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showLoopBack commit

ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.mepInstance = 100
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.dei.t = 2
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.dei.u.disable = 'DEI Disable'
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.priority = 7
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.cast.t = 2
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.cast.u.multi = 'MULTI'
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.count = 10
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.size = 70
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].config.interval = 1
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.mepInstance = 32
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.transactionId = 11
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.txLBM.upper = 0
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.txLBM.lower = 10
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.reply[0].rcvMac = '00-3A-99-FD-47-2F'
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.reply[0].received.upper = 0
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.reply[0].received.lower = 10
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.reply[0].outOfOrder.upper = 0
ShowLoopBack_Output.loopbackInfo.mepInst[0].state.reply[0].outOfOrder.lower = 0

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
showLinkTrace {commit | flush | mepRequest | review}
Displays link trace configuration.

Example:
showLinkTrace ?
commit
commit showLinkTrace
flush
flush all showLinkTrace commands from
queue
mepRequest Show linktrace state and current
review
review showLinkTrace commands
Step 2

queue.
controller.
showLinkTrace mepRequest {all | mepInstance instance_no}
allDisplays link trace state configuration for

all MEPs on the controller.
Example:

showLinkTrace mepRequest all
showLinkTrace mepRequest mepInstance 40
Later Releases
363

Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
showLinkTrace review
Example:
showLinkTrace review
Commands in queue:
Step 4
showLinkTrace commit
Example:
showLinkTrace commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to display the link trace state on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showLinkTrace mepRequest all
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showLinkTrace mepRequest mepInstance 40
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showLinkTrace review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showLinkTrace commit
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].config.mepInstance = 100
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].config.priority = 7
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].config.mepId = 101
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].config.macAddress = '00-00-00-00-00-00'
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].config.ttl = 1
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].state[0].transactionId = 1
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].state[0].reply[0].ttl = 0
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].state[0].reply[0].mode.t = 1
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].state[0].reply[0].mode.u.MEP = 'MEP'
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].state[0].reply[0].direction.t = 2
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].state[0].reply[0].direction.u.DOWN = 'DOWN'
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].state[0].reply[0].forwarded.t = 2
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].state[0].reply[0].forwarded.u.NO = 'Not
forwarded'
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].state[0].reply[0].relay = 1
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].state[0].reply[0].lastMac = '00-3A-99-FD-4A-53'
ShowLinkTrace_Output.linkTraceInfo.mepInst[0].state[0].reply[0].nextMac = '00-3A-99-FD-47-2F'
forwarded'
and Later Releases
364

Viewing Test Signal Statistics on the Controller
forwarded'
showLinkTrace Commit Success!!!

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
showTst {commit | flush | mepRequest | review}
Displays test signal statistics.

Example:
showTst ?
commit
commit showTst
flush
flush all showTst commands from queue
mepRequest Show test signal statistics and current
review
review showTst commands
Step 2

controller.
showTst mepRequest {all | mepInstance instance_no}
allDisplays test signal statistics configuration

for all MEPs on the controller.
Example:

showTst mepRequest all
showTst mepRequest mepInstance 50
Step 3
showTst review
Example:
showTst review
Commands in queue:
Later Releases
365

Command or Action
Purpose

Step 4
showTstcommit
Example:
showTst commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to display the test signal statistics on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showTst mepRequest all
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showTst mepRequest mepInstance 120
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showTst review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# showTst commit
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].config.mepInstance = 100
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].config.dei.t = 2
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].config.dei.u.disable = 'Disable'
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].config.priority = 7
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].config.mepId = 101
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].config.rate = 1000
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].config.size = 64
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].config.pattern.t = 1
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].config.pattern.u.allZero = 'all-zero'
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].config.sequence.t = 1
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].config.sequence.u.enable = 'Enable'
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].config.Tx.t = 1
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].config.Tx.u.enable = 'Enable'
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].config.Rx.t = 1
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].config.Rx.u.enable = 'Enable'
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].state.txFrameCount.upper = 0
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].state.txFrameCount.lower = 241803
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].state.rxFrameCount.upper = 0
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].state.rxFrameCount.lower = 0
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].state.rxRate = 0
ShowTst_Output.tstInfo.mepInst[0].state.testTime = 162
showTst Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
366

Updating Delay Measurement (DM) on the Controller

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
updateDM {commit | flush | updateDmConfig | review}
Updates delay measurement (DM).

Example:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# updateDM
?
commit
commit updateDM
flush
flush all updateDM commands from queue
review
updateDmConfig
Step 2

updateDmConfigUpdates the delay
measurement parameters.
controller.
review updateDM commands

updateDM updateDmConfig {mepInstance instance_no | update Updates DM parameters.

{overflowReset {keep | reset} | syncronized {enable | disable} |
txMode {proprietary | standardize} | unit {ns | us}}}
Example:
updateDmConfig mepInstance 100
updateDmConfig update overflowReset keep
updateDmConfig update overflowReset reset
updateDmConfig update synchronized enable
Switchconfig-controller-OperationsMepPortType)#
updateDmConfig update overflowReset keep
updateDmConfig update txMode proprietary
updateDmConfig update txMode standardize
updateDmConfig update unit ns
updateDmConfig update unit us
updateDM
updateDM
updateDM
updateUpdates DM parameters for all MEPs

on the controller.
overflowResetReset all delay Measurement
results on total delay counters.
keepRetains all delay Measurement results.
updateDM
resetResets all delay Measurement results.

updateDM
updateDM
updateDM
updateDM
updateDM
syncronizedSynchronizes near end and far end

time intervals.
enableEnables synchronization of near and far
end time interval.
disableDisables synchronization of near and
far end time interval.
txModeSets the Tx mode.
proprietarySets the proprietary delay
measurement parameters .
standardizeSets the Y.1731 standards to
transmit 1DM/DMR delay measurement
parameters.
Later Releases
367

Command or Action
Purpose
unitSets the delay in units.
nsSpecifies nanoseconds.
usSets microseconds.
Step 3
updateDM review
Example:
review
Commands in queue:
updateDM updateDmConfig mepInstance 1
updateDM updateDmConfig update overflowReset
reset
updateDM updateDmConfig update syncronized enable
updateDM updateDmConfig update txMode proprietary
updateDM updateDmConfig update unit ns
Step 4
updateDM commit
Example:
commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to update the delay measurement parameters on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# updateDM updateDmConfig mepInstance 100
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# updateDM updateDmConfig update overflowReset
keep
reset
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# updateDM updateDmConfig update synchronized
enable
keep
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# updateDM updateDmConfig update txMode
proprietary
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# updateDM updateDmConfig update txMode
standardize
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# updateDM updateDmConfig update unit ns
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# updateDM updateDmConfig update unit us
and Later Releases
368

Updating Test Signal Parameters on the Controller
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# updateDM review

Commands in queue:
updateDM updateDmConfig mepInstance 1
updateDM updateDmConfig update overflowReset reset
updateDM updateDmConfig update syncronized enable
updateDM updateDmConfig update txMode proprietary
updateDM updateDmConfig update unit ns
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# updateDM commit
Updating Test Signal Parameters on the Controller

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
updateTst {commit | flush | updateTstConfig | review}
Updates the test signal parameters.

Example:
updateTst ?
commit
commit updateTst
flush
flush all updateTst commands from
queue
review
review updateTst commands
updateTstConfig Update Tst signal request
Step 2
updateTst updateTstConfig {mepInstance instance_no | update

{Rx | Tx} {enable | disable}}
updateTstConfigUpdates the test signal

parameters.
controller.
updateUpdates DM parameters for all MEPs.
Example:
updateTst updatetstConfig mepInstance 100
updateTst updatetstConfig update Rx enable
updateTst updatetstConfig update Tx enable
Step 3

queue.
RxSets the Rx mode.

TxSets the Tx mode.
enableEnables the mode.
disableDisables the mode.
updateTst review
Example:
updateTst review
Later Releases
369

Clearing MEP Statistics on the Controller
Command or Action
Commands in queue:
updateTst updateTstConfig
Step 4
Purpose
mepInstance 2
update Rx enable
update Tx enable
update Tx enable
updateTst commit
Example:
updateTst commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to update the test signal parameters on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# updateTst updatetstConfig mepInstance 100
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# updateTst updatetstConfig update Rx enable
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# updateTst updatetstConfig update Tx enable
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# updateTst review
Commands in queue:
updateTst updateTstConfig mepInstance 2
updateTst updateTstConfig update Rx enable
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# updateTst commit

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
clearMepStats {commit | flush | clearStats | review}
Clears the MEP statistics.
Example:

and Later Releases
370

Command or Action
Step 2
Purpose
clearMepStats ?
clearStats Clear mep statistics request
commit
commit clearMepStats
flush
flush all clearMepStats commands from
queue
review
review clearMepStats commands
clearStatsClears the MEP statistics.
clearMepStats cleatStats {mepInstance instance_no |

StatsType {DM | LM | TST}}


controller.
StatstypeIndicates the protocol type.
Example:
DMSpecifies the delay measurement statistics.
clearMepStats clearStats mepInstance 25
clearMepStats clearStats statstype DM
Step 3
clearMepStats review
LMSpecifies the loss measurement statistics.

TSTSpecifies the test signal statistics.
Example:
clearMepStats review
Commands in queue:
Step 4
clearMepStats commit
Example:
clearMepStats commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to clear the MEP statistics on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# clearMepStats clearStats mepInstance 25
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# clearMepStats clearStats statstype DM
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# clearMepStats review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# clearMepStats commit
Later Releases
371

Negating Performance Monitoring Configuration and Restoring Defaults
Negating Performance Monitoring Configuration and Restoring Defaults

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
no ?
Negates the commands and sets

the default configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-OperationsMepPortType)# no ?
clearMepStats
exit
setAis
setDM
setLM
setLck
setLinkTrace
setLoopBack
setTst
showAis
showDM
showLM
showLck
showLinkTrace
showLoopBack
showTst
request
updateDM
updateTst
Step 2
Clear mep statistics request

Exit from OperationsMepPortType sub configuration mode
Show test signal statistics and current configuration
Exits the performance

monitoring provisioning mode.
exit
Example:
Verifying Performance Monitoring

Use the show perf-mon commands to verify the Performance Monitoring status on the controller.
show perf-mon {current | interval-id unit instance instance_id | interval-info | id unit} {feature {dm | ece
| evc | lm}
This command displays the current delay measurement status. The following is a sample output from
the command:
Switch# show perf-mon current feature dm
and Later Releases
372

This command displays the current loss measurement status The following is a sample output from the
command:
Switch# show perf-mon current feature lm
This command displays the delay measurement status for interval-id. The following is a sample output
from the command:
Switch# show perf-mon interval-id id 3 instance 4 feature dm
This command displays the loss measurement status for interval-info. The following is a sample output
from the command:
Switch# show perf-mon interval-info 5 feature lm
Later Releases
373

and Later Releases
374
CHAPTER
17
Configuring EPS
This document describes the Ethernet Protection Switching (EPS) feature and configuration steps to implement
protection switching mechanisms for Ethernet layer topologies.
Prerequisites for Configuring EPS, page 375
Information About EPS, page 375
How to Provision EPS, page 376
Verifying EPS, page 408
Prerequisites for Configuring EPS

Information About EPS

EPS is a fully allocated protection mechanism that ensures the route and bandwidth of the protection entity
are reserved for a selected working entity. It provides a fast and simple protection mechanism. It is easier for
the network administrators to monitor the status of the network (e.g., active network topology) with EPS when
compared with other protocols such as Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
The following figure shows the topology used for provisioning EPS on NID-1 and NID-2.
Figure 11: EPS Topology
Later Releases
375
Configuring EPS
How to Provision EPS
How to Provision EPS

Creating MEP on NID-1
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1 configure terminal
Purpose
Example:
Step 2 controller nid 1 NID_ID
Example:
Switch(config)# contoller nid 1/2
Step 3 ProvisionMepPortType
Enters the ProvisionMepPortType mode.
Example:
Step 4 createMep {createMepConfig {mepinstance | mode {mep Creates MEP configuration.

| mip} | direction {up | down} | domain {port | evc | vlan}
mepinstanceSpecifies the MEP instance number.
| flowId | vid | level level_number | residencePort
port_number | mepld id_number | megdomain {maName
modeSpecifies the mode of the MEP instance.
ma_name | megIdFormat {ituMeg | ituCcMeg | ieee}}}
mepSpecifies the maintenance entity end point.
Example:
createMep createMepConfig domain PORT
createMep createMepConfig megDomain maName nid-nid
createMep createMepConfig megDomain megIdFormat
ituMeg
createMep createMepConfig vid 1112
mipSpecifies the maintenance entity intermediate point.

directionSelects the direction of the MEP.
upSpecifies an Up MEP - monitoring egress OAM and
traffic on residence port.
downSpecifies a Down MEP - monitoring ingress OAM
and traffic on residence port.
domainSelects the domain of the MEP.
portSpecifies a MEP in the Port Domain. Flow Instance
is a Port.
evcSpecifies a MEP in the EVC Domain. Flow Instance
is a EVC. The EVC must be created.
vlanSpecifies a MEP in the VLAN Domain. Flow
Instance is a VLAN. The VLAN must be created.
flowIdSpecifies the flow related to the MEP.
and Later Releases
376
Configuring EPS
Command or Action
Purpose
vidIn case the MEP is a port Up-MEP or a EVC
customer MIP the VID must be given.
levelSpecifies the MEG level of the MEP.
level_numberMEG level number.
residencePortSpecifies the port monitored by MEP.
port_numberResidence port number.
mepldSpecifies MEP ID.
id_numberMEP ID number.
megdomainSpecifies the maintenance domain
configuration.
maNameSpecifies the ITU/IEEE MEG-ID (short MA
name).
ma_nameShort MA name.
megIdFormatSelects the MEG ID format.
ituMegSpecifies the MEG-ID using ITU format (ICC UMC).
ituCcMegSpecifies the MEG-ID using ITU Country
Code format (CC - ICC - UMC).
ieeeSpecifies the MEG-ID (Short MA Name) using IEEE
Character String format.
Step 5 addPeerMepId {commit | flush | peerMepConfig

{macAddress | mepInstance | peerMepId}}
Adds peer MEP request.

commitCommits addPeerMepId.
flushFlushes all addPeerMepId commands from queue.
Example:
peerMepConfigAdds peer mep request.

macAddressSpecifies the peer MAC. This is overwritten
by any learned MAC - through CCM reception.
mepInstanceSpecifies the mep instance number.
peerMepIdSpecifies the peer MEP-ID.
Step 6 addCcAps {commit | flush | mepFunctionalConfig {aps Adds CC/APS configuration request.
{enable | disable} | cc {enable | disable} | mepInstance
commitCommits addCcAps.
mep_instance_number} | review}
flushFlushes all addCcAps commands from queue.
Example:
mepFunctionalConfigAdds CC/APS configuration

request.
Later Releases
377
Configuring EPS
Command or Action
7
fr1s
addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig aps enable mode uni
addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig aps enable priority
7
Purpose
apsSpecifies APS protocol.
enableEnables APS.
disbaleDisables APS.
ccSpecifies continuity check.
enableEnables CC.
disbaleDisables CC.
mep_instance_numberMEP instance number.
Step 7 createMep createMepConfig {mepinstance | mode {mep Creates MEP configuration.

Example:
ituMeg

is a Port.
and Later Releases
378
Configuring EPS
Command or Action
Purpose
configuration.
maNameSpecifies the ITU/IEEE MEG-ID(short MA
name)


Example:

Example:
7
fr1s
7

request.
enableEnables APS.
enableEnables CC.
disbaleDisables CC.
Later Releases
379
Configuring EPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 10 addCcAps review
Example:
addCcAps review
Step 11 addCcAps commit
Example:
addCcAps commit
Step 12 exit
Exits the ProvisionMepPortType mode.
Example:
exit
The example shows how to create MEP on NID-1:
nid-nid
megIdFormat ituMeg
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
mepInstance 20
mepId 12
direction DOWN
domain PORT
residencePort 4
mode MEP
level 0
megDomain maName
createMep createMepConfig megDomain

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# addPeerMepId peerMepConfig mepInstance 20

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# addPeerMepId peerMepConfig peerMepId 11
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# addPeerMepId commit
20
priority 7
frameRate fr1s
mode uni
priority 7
addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig mepInstance

addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig cc enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# createMep createMepConfig mepInstance 21

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# createMep createMepConfig mepId 14
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# createMep createMepConfig direction DOWN
Switchconfig-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# createMep createMepConfig domain PORT
and Later Releases
380
Configuring EPS
nid-nid
megIdFormat ituMeg
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
residencePort 5
mode MEP
level 0
megDomain maName


Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig mepInstance
21
Switchconfig-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig cc enable
priority 7
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig cc enable
frameRate fr1s
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig aps enable
mode uni
Switchconfig-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig aps enable
priority 7
Switchconfig-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig aps enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# addCcAps review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# addCcAps commit

DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 2 controller nid 1 NID_ID
Enters the configuration mode.
Example:
Step 3 ProvisionMepPortType
Example:

Example:
Later Releases
381
Configuring EPS
Command or Action
ituMeg
Purpose
is a Port.
customer MIP, the VID must be given.
configuration.
name).


and Later Releases
382
Configuring EPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:

Example:
7
fr1s
7

request.
enableEnables APS.
enableEnables CC.
disbaleDisables CC.

Example:

is a Port.
Later Releases
383
Configuring EPS
Command or Action
ituMeg
Purpose
configuration.
maNameSpecifies the ITU/IEEE MEG-ID(short MA
name)

Example:

and Later Releases
384
Configuring EPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
7
fr1s
7

request.
enableEnables APS.
enableEnables CC.
disbaleDisables CC.
Step 10 addCcAps review
Example:
addCcAps review
Step 11 addCcAps commit
Example:
addCcAps commit
Step 12 exit
Exits the ProvisionMepPortType mode.
Example:
exit
The example shows how to create MEP on NID2:
nid-nid
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
mepInstance 20
mepId 11
direction DOWN
domain PORT
residencePort 4
mode MEP
level 0
megDomain maName
Later Releases
385
Configuring EPS
Configuring Bidirectional EPS on NID-2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# createMep createMepConfig megDomain

megIdFormat ituMeg
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# createMep createMepConfig vid 1112
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# addPeerMepId commit
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig mepInstance
20
Switchconfig-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig cc enable
priority 7
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMepPortType)# addCcAps mepFunctionalConfig cc enable
frameRate fr1s
mode uni
priority 7
nid-nid
megIdFormat ituMeg
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
mepInstance 21
mepId 13
direction DOWN
domain PORT
residencePort 5
mode MEP
level 0
megDomain maName


21
priority 7
frameRate fr1s
mode uni
priority 7



Before You Begin
Architecture a1plus1 bidirectional
Domain port
and Later Releases
386
Configuring EPS
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
controller nid 1 NID_ID
Example:
Step 3
Enters the EpsPortType mode.
EpsPortType
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# EpsPortType
Step 4
setEpsInstConfig epsConfig {epsInst epsInst_number | Sets EPS configuration.

domain {port | evc} | architecture {a1plus1 | a1for1} |
epsConfigSpecifies the EPS configuration.
workflow {inst inst_number | portNo port_number} |
protectFlow {inst inst_number | portNo port_number} |
epsInst Specifies the EPS instance.
mepWork mepWork_number | mepProtect
epsInst_numberEPS instance number.
mepProtect_number | mepAps mepAPS_number}
domainSpecifies the domain of the EPS.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)#
setEpsInstance epsConfig epsInst 30
setEpsInstance epsConfig architecture a1plus1
setEpsInstance epsConfig domain port
setEpsInstance epsConfig mepAps 21
setEpsInstance epsConfig mepProtect 21
setEpsInstance epsConfig mepWork 20
setEpsInstance epsConfig protectFlow portNo 5
setEpsInstance epsConfig workFlow portNo 4
portSpecifies that this EPS is protecting in the port

domain.
evcSpecifies that this EPS is protecting in the EVC
domain.
architectureSpecifies the EPS architecture.
a1plus1Specifies that the architecture is 1 plus 1.
a1for1Specifies that the architecture is 1 for 1.
workflowSpecifies the working flow instance for the
related EPS.
instSpecifies the working flow instance number when
not in the port domain.
inst_numberWorking flow instance number.
portNoSpecifies port ID.
port_numberPort ID number.
protectFlowSpecifies the protect flow instance for the
related EPS.
instSpecifies the protect flow instance number when
Later Releases
387
Configuring EPS
Command or Action
Purpose
inst_numberProtect flow instance number.
mepWorkSpecifies working MEP instance.
mepWork_numberWorking MEP number.
mepProtectSpecifies protect MEP instance.
mepProtect_numberProtect MEP number.
mepApsSpecifies APS MEP instance.
mepAPS_numberAPS MEP number.
Step 5
setEpsInstProperties epsInstconfig {epsInst

eps_instance_number | protectionType {uni | bi} | aps
{enable | disable} | revertive {enable | disable} |
wtrTime wtime[m | s] holdoff}
Example:
setEpsInstProperties epsInstConfig epsInst 30
setEpsInstProperties epsInstConfig holdoff 1
setEpsInstProperties epsInstConfig protectionType
bi
setEpsInstProperties epsInstConfig revertive
enable
setEpsInstProperties epsInstConfig wtrTime w10s
Adds CC/APS configuration request.

epsInstSpecifies the EPS instance.
ep_instance_numberEPS instance number.
protectionTypeSpecifies the protection type in case of
1plus1.
uniSpecifies unidirectional.
bi Specifies bidirectional.
apsSpecifies EPS 1+1 unidirectional with APS
protection type.
enableEnables APS protection.
disableDisables APS protection.
revertiveSpecifies revertive EPS.
enableEnables revertive EPS.
disable Disables revertive EPS.
wtrTime Specifies the WTR time.
timeWTR time in minutes or seconds.
m Time in minutes. Valid values are from 5 to 12.
s Time in seconds. Valid values are 10 and 30.
holdoff Specifies the hold off timer.
and Later Releases
388
Configuring EPS
Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
setEpsInstProperties review
Example:
Step 7
setEpsInstProperties commit
Example:
Step 8
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# exit
The example shows how to configure bidirectional EPS on NID-2:
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsInst 30
architecture a1plus1
domain port
mepAps 21
mepProtect 21
mepWork 20
protectFlow portNo 5
workFlow portNo 4
bi

setEpsInstProperties epsInstConfig revertive enable
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# setEpsInstProperties review

Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# setEpsInstProperties commit

Before You Begin
Domain port
Later Releases
389
Configuring EPS
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
EpsPortType
Example:
Step 4
setEpsInstConfig epsConfig {epsInst epsInst_number | Sets EPS configuration.

domain {port | evc} | architecture {a1plus1 | a1for1} |
workflow {inst inst_number | portNo port_number} |
protectFlow {inst inst_number | portNo port_number} |
mepWork mepWork_number | mepProtect
Example:

domain.
domain.
related EPS.
related EPS.
instSpecifies the protect flow instance number when
and Later Releases
390
Configuring EPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 5

Example:
bi
enable

1plus1.
apsSpecifies EPS 1+1 unidirectional with APS
protection type.
Later Releases
391
Configuring EPS
Configuring Unidirectional EPS on NID-2
Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 7
Example:
Step 8
exit
Example:
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsInst 30
architecture a1plus1
domain port
mepAps 21
mepProtect 21
mepWork 20
workFlow portNo 4
bi



Before You Begin
Architecture a1plus1 unidirectional aps enable
Domain port
and Later Releases
392
Configuring EPS
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
EpsPortType
Example:
Step 4
setEpsInstConfig epsConfig {epsInst epsInst_number| Sets EPS configuration.

domain {port | evc} | architecture {a1plus1 | a1for1}
| workflow {inst inst_number | portNo port_number} |
protectFlow {inst inst_number | portNo port_number}
| mepWork mepWork_number | mepProtect
Example:

domain.
domain.
related EPS.
related EPS.
instSpecifies the protect flow instance number when not
in the port domain.
Later Releases
393
Configuring EPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 5

eps_instance_numberEPS instance number.
Example:
setEpsInstProperties epsInstConfig aps enable
setEpsInstProperties epsInstConfig
protectionType uni

1plus1.
apsSpecifies EPS 1+1 unidirectional with APS protection
type.
and Later Releases
394
Configuring EPS
Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 7
Example:
Step 8
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure unidirectional EPS on NID-2:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPotType)# setEpsInstance epsConfig epsInst 30
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# setEpsInstance epsConfig architecture a1plus1
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# setEpsInstance epsConfig domain port
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# setEpsInstance epsConfig mepAps 21
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# setEpsInstance epsConfig mepProtect 21
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# setEpsInstance epsConfig mepWork 20
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# setEpsInstance epsConfig protectFlow portNo 5
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# setEpsInstance epsConfig workFlow portNo 4
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# setEpsInstProperties epsInstConfig epsInst 30
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# setEpsInstProperties epsInstConfig aps enable
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# setEpsInstProperties epsInstConfig protectionType
uni

Before You Begin
Architecture a1for1 bidirectional
Domain port
Later Releases
395
Configuring EPS
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
EpsPortType
Example:
Step 4
setEpsInstConfig epsConfig {epsInst epsInst_number Sets EPS configuration.

| domain {port | evc} | architecture {a1plus1 | a1for1}
| workflow {inst inst_number | portNo port_number} |
protectFlow {inst inst_number | portNo port_number}
| mepWork mepWork_number | mepProtect
Example:
setEpsInstance epsConfig architecture a1for1

domain.
domain.
related EPS.
related EPS.
instSpecifies the protect flow instance number when not
in the port domain.
and Later Releases
396
Configuring EPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 5

Example:
bi
enable

1plus1.
apsSpecifies EPS 1+1 unidirectional with APS protection
type.
Later Releases
397
Configuring EPS
Displaying EPS
Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 7
Example:
Step 8
exit
Example:
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
setEpsInstance
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsConfig
epsInst 30
architecture a1for1
domain port
mepAps 21
mepProtect 21
mepWork 20
workFlow portNo 4
bi


Displaying EPS
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
and Later Releases
398
Configuring EPS
Displaying EPS
Step 2
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 3
EpsPortType
Example:
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
getEpsInstProperties epsRequest epsInst

eps_instance_number
getEpsInstProperties epsRequest epsInst 30
getEpsInstance epsRequest {epsInst

eps_instance_number

epsRequestSpecifies EPS get request parameter.
Example:
getEpsInstance epsRequest epsInst 30
showEpsConfig showEpsReq epsInstList

eps_instance_list_number

showEpsReqDisplays the EPS configuration.
epsInstListSpecifies the EPS instance list.
showEpsConfig showEpsReq epsInstList 30
showEpsState showEpsReq epsInstList

eps_instance_list_number
eps_instance_list_numberEPS instance list

number.
showEpsReqDisplays EPS request parameter.
epsInstListSpecifies the EPS instance list.
Example:
showEpsState showEpsReq epsInstList 30
Step 8
epsRequestSpecifies EPS get request parameter.
Example:
Example:
Step 7
Sets EPS configuration.
eps_instance_list_numberEPS instance list

number. The valid value are from 1-100.
Example:
Later Releases
399
Configuring EPS
Clearing EPS Wait-To-Restore Timer
Step 9
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 10
exit
Example:
The example shows how to display EPS:
getEpsInstProperties epsRequest epsInst 30

getEpsInstance epsRequest epsInst 30
exit
Clearing EPS Wait-To-Restore Timer

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
EpsPortType
Example:
Step 2
clearEpsWtr clearEps epsInst eps_instance_number

Example:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# clearEpsWtr
clearEps epsInst 30
Sets EPS configuration.

clearEpsSpecifies clear EPS WTR.
Step 3
exit
Example:
and Later Releases
400
Configuring EPS
Updating EPS
The example shows how to clear EPS:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# clearEpsWtr clearEps epsInst 30
Updating EPS
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
EpsPortType
Example:
Step 4
updateEpsInstance epsCommand {epsInst epsInst_number | Use only one of the following commands, as required:
command {lockout | forced | manualp | manualw | exercise | Sets EPS configuration.
freeze | localLockout}}
epsCommandSpecifies the EPS command
configuration.
Example:
updateEpsInstance epsCommand epsInst 1

Example:
updateEpsInstance epsCommand epsInst 1
updateEpsInstance epsCommand command exercise
updateEpsInstance epsCommand command forced
updateEpsInstance epsCommand command freeze
updateEpsInstance epsCommand command localLockout
updateEpsInstance epsCommand command lockout
updateEpsInstance epsCommand command manualp
updateEpsInstance epsCommand command manualw
commandSpecifies the EPS commands.

lockoutLocks out of protection.
forcedForces switching of normal traffic to
protection.
manualpManually switches normal traffic to
protection.
manualwManually switches normal traffic to
working.
exerciseSpecifies the exercise signal.
freezeSpecifies local freezing of EPS.
localLockoutSpecifies local lockout of EPS.
clearClears EPS commands.
Later Releases
401
Configuring EPS
Deleting EPS
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
updateEpsInstance review
Example:
updateEpsInstance review
Step 6
updateEpsInstance commit
Example:
updateEpsInstance commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to update EPS:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# updateEpsInstance epsCommand epsInst 1
Use only one of the following commands, as required:

updateEpsInstance
updateEpsInstance
updateEpsInstance
updateEpsInstance
updateEpsInstance
updateEpsInstance
updateEpsInstance
epsCommand
epsCommand
epsCommand
epsCommand
epsCommand
epsCommand
epsCommand
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# updateEpsInstance review

Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# updateEpsInstance commit
Deleting EPS
Before You Begin
Domain port
and Later Releases
402
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
exercise
forced
freeze
localLockout
lockout
manualp
manualw
Configuring EPS
Deleting EPS
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
EpsPortType
Example:
Step 4
deleteEps deleteEpsConfig {epsInst eps_instance_number Adds CC/APS configuration request.

| delete {eps | command | holdoff | revertive}}
deleteEpsConfigDeletes EPS configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# deleteEps
deleteEpsConfig epsInst 30
deleteEpsConfig delete eps

deleteDeletes the configuration.
epsDeletes EPS instance.
commandDeletes EPS commands.
holdoffClears hold off timer.
revertiveDisables revertive EPS.
Step 5
deleteEps review
Example:
review
Step 6
deleteEps commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Later Releases
403
Configuring EPS
Deleting EPS Command
The example shows how to delete EPS:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# deleteEps deleteEpsConfig epsInst 30
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# deleteEps deleteEpsConfig delete eps
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# deleteEps review
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# deleteEps commit
Deleting EPS Command

Before You Begin
Domain port
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
EpsPortType
Example:
Step 4

Example:
deleteEpsConfig delete command

and Later Releases
404
Configuring EPS
Deleting EPS Hold Off Timer
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
deleteEps review
Example:
review
Step 6
deleteEps commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to delete EPS command:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# deleteEps deleteEpsConfig delete command

Before You Begin
Domain port
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Later Releases
405
Configuring EPS
Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
EpsPortType
Example:
Step 4

Example:
deleteEpsConfig delete holdoff

Step 5
deleteEps review
Example:
review
Step 6
deleteEps commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to delete EPS hold off timer:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# deleteEps deleteEpsConfig delete holdoff
and Later Releases
406
Configuring EPS
Deleting EPS Revertive Timer
Deleting EPS Revertive Timer

Before You Begin
Domain port
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
EpsPortType
Example:
Step 4

Example:
deleteEpsConfig delete revertive

Step 5
deleteEps review
Example:
review
Step 6
deleteEps commit
Example:
commit
Later Releases
407
Configuring EPS
Verifying EPS
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
The example shows how to delete EPS revertive timer:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# deleteEps deleteEpsConfig delete revertive
Verifying EPS
Use the following commands to verify the EPS status on the controller.
This command displays the EPS configuration status on the NID. The following is a sample output from
the command:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# showEpsConfig showEpsReq epsInstList 1
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# showEpsConfig review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# showEpsConfig commit
Clearing Socket 5
xpinfo->value : 1Clearing Socket 5
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].epsInst = 1
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].config.domain.t = 1
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].config.domain.u.port =
'Port'
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].config.architecture.t =
1
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].config.architecture.u.a1plus1
= '1plus1'
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].config.workFlow.t = 2
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].config.workFlow.u.portNo
= 1
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].config.protectFlow.t = 2
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].config.protectFlow.u.portNo
= 1
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].config.mepWork = 1
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].config.mepProtect = 1
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].config.mepAps = 1
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].instConfig.protectionType.t
and Later Releases
408
Configuring EPS
Verifying EPS
= 1
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].instConfig.protectionType.u.uni
= 'unidirectional'
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].instConfig.revertive.t =
2
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].instConfig.revertive.u.disable
= 'Disable'
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].instConfig.aps.t = 2
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].instConfig.aps.u.disable
= 'Disable'
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].instConfig.wtrTime.t = 1
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].instConfig.wtrTime.u.w10m
= ''
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].instConfig.holdoff = 100
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].command.t = 2
ShowEpsConfig_Output.epsInfo.epsInstance[0].command.u.forced = 'forced'
ShowEpsConfig Commit Success!!!
This command displays the EPS status on the NID. The following is a sample output from the command:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# showEpsState showEpsReq epsInstList 1
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# showEpsState review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# showEpsState commit

ShowEpsState_Output.epsStateInfo.epsInst[0].epsInst = 1
ShowEpsState_Output.epsStateInfo.epsInst[0].protectionState = 'Disable'
ShowEpsState_Output.epsStateInfo.epsInst[0].wFlow = 'Ok'
ShowEpsState_Output.epsStateInfo.epsInst[0].pFlow = 'Ok'
ShowEpsState_Output.epsStateInfo.epsInst[0].transmitAps = 'LO'
ShowEpsState_Output.epsStateInfo.epsInst[0].receiveAps = 'LO'
ShowEpsState_Output.epsStateInfo.epsInst[0].architectureMismatch =
true
ShowEpsState_Output.epsStateInfo.epsInst[0].APSOnWorking = true
ShowEpsState_Output.epsStateInfo.epsInst[0].switchingIncomplete = true
ShowEpsState_Output.epsStateInfo.epsInst[0].noAPSReceived = true
ShowEpsState_Output.epsStateInfo.epsInst[0].txApsRe = 1
ShowEpsState_Output.epsStateInfo.epsInst[0].txApsBr = 2200564160
ShowEpsState_Output.epsStateInfo.epsInst[0].rxApsRe = 2200566368
ShowEpsState_Output.epsStateInfo.epsInst[0].rxApsBr = 2222748384
ShowEpsState Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
409
Configuring EPS
Verifying EPS
and Later Releases
410
CHAPTER
18
Configuring ERPS
This document describes the Ethernet Ring Protection Switching (ERPS) feature and configuration steps to
implement protection switching mechanisms for Ethernet layer ring topologies.
Prerequisites for Configuring ERPS, page 411
Restrictions for Configuring ERPS, page 411
Information About ERPS, page 411
How to Provision ERPS, page 412
Verifying ERPS, page 436
Prerequisites for Configuring ERPS

Restrictions for Configuring ERPS

Maintenance End Point (MEP) is not supported on Ethernet Virtual Connections (EVC) bridge domain.
MEP domain for control VLAN is only on Port or VLAN.
Information About ERPS

The ITU-T G.8032 ERPS feature implements protection switching mechanisms for Ethernet layer ring
topologies. This feature uses the G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) protocol, defined in ITU-T G.8032,
to provide protection for Ethernet traffic in a ring topology, while ensuring that no loops are within the ring
at the Ethernet layer. The loops are prevented by blocking traffic on either a predetermined link or a failed
link.
Later Releases
411
Configuring ERPS
How to Provision ERPS
The following figure shows the topology used for provisioning ERPS on NID-1 and NID-2 using a UPE NID
Controller.
Figure 12: ERPS Topology
How to Provision ERPS

Creating VLAN on NID-1
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
Creates VLAN list.
Example:
Step 5
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig interface interface_id |

mode [access Vlan vlan_number] | trunk {allowed | native}
Modifies the switchport configuration.

configured.
and Later Releases
412
Configuring ERPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Interface IdSpecifies the interface ID.
Example:
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode trunk allowed vlan
add vlan_list 2000
add vlan-list 2000
modeSpecifies the mode of operation.

accessSets mode to ACCESS
unconditionally.
vlanSets VLAN when interface is in
access mode.
vlan_numberSpecifies the VLAN number.
trunkSets mode to TRUNK
unconditionally.
allowedSets allowed VLAN characteristics
when interface is in trunk mode.
nativeSets native VLAN.
Step 6
modifySwPort review
Example:
modifySwPort review
Step 7
modifySwPort commit
Example:
modifySwPort commit
Step 8
exit
Example:
The example shows how to create VLAN on NID-1:
2000
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionPortVlanPortType)# modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig interface
3
trunk native vlan 1
trunk allowed vlan add vlan_list 2000
4
trunk native vlan 1
Later Releases
413
Configuring ERPS
Creating MEP on Port 1 of NID-1


DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
createMep createMepConfig {mepinstance | mode {mep Creates MEP configuration.

Example:
ituMeg

downSpecifies a Down MEP - monitoring ingress
OAM and traffic on residence port.
is a Port.
and Later Releases
414
Configuring ERPS
Command or Action
Purpose
configuration.
name).
ituMegSpecifies the MEG-ID using ITU format (ICC
- UMC).
ieeeSpecifies the MEG-ID (Short MA Name) using
IEEE Character String format.
Step 5
addPeerMepId commit | flush | peerMepConfig

{macAddress | mepInstance | peerMepId}

Example:

macAddressSpecifies the peer MAC. This is
overwritten by any learned MAC - through CCM
reception.
Step 6
addCcAps {commit | flush | mepFunctionalConfig {aps Adds CC/APS configuration request.

Later Releases
415
Configuring ERPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
fr1s
7
switchingProtocol raps octet 1

request.
enableEnables APS.
enableEnables CC.
disbaleDisables CC.
Step 7
addCcAps review
Example:
addCcAps review
Step 8
addCcAps commit
Example:
addCcAps commit
Step 9
exit
Example:
exit
The example shows how to create MEP on port 1 of NID-1:
ERPS-1
megIdFormat ituMeg
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
mepInstance 100
direction DOWN
domain vlan
level 0
megDomain maName

createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
mepId 100
mode MEP
residencePort 3
flow 2000
and Later Releases
416
Configuring ERPS

100
priority 7
frameRate fr1s
mode multi
priority 7



DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4

Example:
createMep createMepConfig megDomain maName
W-N-V2000

Later Releases
417
Configuring ERPS
Command or Action
ieee name W-N-V2000
Purpose
portSpecifies a MEP in the Port Domain. Flow
Instance is a Port.
configuration.
name).
- UMC).
Step 5

Example:

reception.
and Later Releases
418
Configuring ERPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 6

Example:
fr1s
7

request.
enableEnables APS.
enableEnables CC.
disbaleDisables CC.
Step 7
addCcAps review
Example:
addCcAps review
Step 8
addCcAps commit
Example:
addCcAps commit
Step 9
exit
Example:
exit
The example shows how to create MEP on port2 of NID-1:
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
mepInstance 99
direction DOWN
domain vlan
level 0
Later Releases
419
Configuring ERPS
Configuring ERPS on NID-1
W-N-V2000
megIdFormat ieee name W-N-V2000

createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
mepId 101
mode MEP
residencePort 4
flow 2000

99
priority 7
frameRate fr1s
mode multi
priority 7



DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ErpsPortType
Enters the ErpsPortType mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ErpsPortType
Step 4
setErpsInstConfig erpsConfig {erpsInst erpsInst_number |

mep {port0 {sf sf_number | aps aps_number} | port1 {sf
sf_number | aps aps_number}} | ringType {major | sub}}
Sets ERPS configuration.

erpsConfigSpecifies the ERPS configuration.
erpsInst Specifies the ERPS instance.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ErpsPortType)#
setErpsInstConfig erpsConfig erpsInst 1
setErpsInstConfig erpsConfig mep port0 aps 100
setErpsInstConfig erpsConfig mep port0 sf 100
erpsInst_numberERPS instance number

mepSpecifies the MEP configuration.
port0Selects the ERPS port 0 interface.
and Later Releases
420
Configuring ERPS
Command or Action
Purpose
setErpsInstConfig erpsConfig port0 3
setErpsInstConfig erpsConfig ringType major

sfSpecifies signal fail MEP.
sf_numberSignal fail MEP number.
apsSpecifies the APS MEP.
aps_number APS MEP number.
ringTypeSpecifies type of ring.
majorSpecifies the major ring.
subSpecifies the sub ring.
Step 5
setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig {wtrTime

time_in_minutes | erpsInst erp_instance_number | rplPort
{port0 | port1} | rplRole {owner | neighbour} | vlan {vlanList
vlan_list_number | add | remove | none}}
time_in_minutesWTR time in minutes. Allowed
range is 1, 5-12.
Example:
setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig wtrTime 1
setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig erpsInst 1
setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig rplPort port0
setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig rplRole owner
setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig vlan vlanList
2-10
erpsInstSpecifies the ERPS instance.

erp_instance_numberERPS instance number.
rplPortSpecifies the RPL port.
port1 Selects the ERPS port 1 interface.
rplRoleSpecifies the RPL role.
ownerSpecifies the RPL owner.
neighbourSpecifies the RPL neighbour.
vlanSpecifies the VLAN configuration.
vlanListSpecifies the VLAN list.
vlan_list_number VLAN list number.
addAdds to the set of included VLANs.
removeRemoves from the set of included
VLANs.
none Does not include any VLANs.
Step 6
setErpsInstProperties review
Example:
Later Releases
421
Configuring ERPS
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
setErpsInstProperties commit
Example:
Step 8
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ErpsPortType)# exit
The example shows how to configure ERPS on NID-1:
setErpsInstConfig
setErpsInstConfig
setErpsInstConfig
setErpsInstConfig
setErpsInstConfig
setErpsInstConfig
setErpsInstConfig
setErpsInstConfig
erpsConfig
erpsConfig
erpsConfig
erpsConfig
erpsConfig
erpsConfig
erpsConfig
erpsConfig
2-10
setErpsInstProperties
erpsInst 1
mep port0 aps 100
mep port0 sf 100
mep port1 aps 99
mep port1 sf 99
port0 3
port1 4
ringType major
erpsInstconfig
erpsInstconfig
erpsInstconfig
erpsInstconfig
erpsInstconfig
wtrTime 1
erpsInst 1
rplPort port0
rplRole owner
vlan vlanList
Switch(config-controller-ErpsPortType)# setErpsInstProperties review

Switch(config-controller-ErpsPortType)# setErpsInstProperties commit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
and Later Releases
422
Configuring ERPS
Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 4
Creates VLAN list.
Example:
Step 5
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig interface interface_id |

mode [access Vlan vlan_number] | trunk {allowed | native}
Example:
Modifies the switchport configuration.

configured.
add vlan_list 2000
Interface IdSpecifies the interface ID.
add vlan_list 2000
vlanSets VLAN when interface is in

access mode.
modeSpecifies the mode of operation.

accessSets mode to ACCESS
unconditionally.
vlan_numberSpecifies the VLAN number.

trunkSets mode to TRUNK
unconditionally.
allowedSets allowed VLAN characteristics
when interface is in trunk mode.
nativeSets native VLAN.
Step 6
modifySwPort review
Example:
modifySwPort review
Step 7
modifySwPort commit
Example:
modifySwPort commit
Step 8
exit
Example:
Later Releases
423
Configuring ERPS
The example shows how to create VLAN on NID-2:
2000
3
trunk native vlan 1
5
trunk native vlan 1

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4

Example:

and Later Releases
424
Configuring ERPS
Command or Action
Purpose

ituMeg

is a Port.
configuration.
name).
- UMC).
Step 5


Example:
Later Releases
425
Configuring ERPS
Command or Action
Purpose
reception.
Step 6

Example:
fr1s
7

request.
enableEnables APS.
enableEnables CC.
disbaleDisables CC.
Step 7
addCcAps review
Example:
addCcAps review
Step 8
addCcAps commit
Example:
addCcAps commit
Step 9
exit
Example:
exit
and Later Releases
426
Configuring ERPS
ERPS-1
megIdFormat ituMeg
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
mepInstance 100
direction DOWN
domain vlan
level 0
megDomain maName

createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
mepId 101
mode MEP
residencePort 3
flow 2000

100
priority 7
frameRate fr1s
mode multi
priority 7



DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4

Later Releases
427
Configuring ERPS
Command or Action
Purpose

Example:
W-N-V2000
ieee name W-N-V2000

portSpecifies a MEP in the Port Domain. Flow
Instance is a Port.
configuration.
name).
- UMC).
and Later Releases
428
Configuring ERPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 5


Example:

reception.
Step 6

Example:
fr1s
7

request.
enableEnables APS.
enableEnables CC.
disbaleDisables CC.
Step 7
addCcAps review
Example:
addCcAps review
Step 8
addCcAps commit
Example:
addCcAps commit
Later Releases
429
Configuring ERPS
Step 9
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
exit
W-N-V2000
megIdFormat ieee name W-N-V2000
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
mepInstance 99
direction DOWN
domain vlan
level 0
megDomain maName

createMep
createMep
createMep
createMep
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
createMepConfig
mepId 103
mode MEP
residencePort 5
flow 2000

99
priority 7
frameRate fr1s
mode multi
priority 7



DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
and Later Releases
430
Configuring ERPS
Step 2
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 3
Enters the ErpsPortType mode.
ErpsPortType
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ErpsPortType
Step 4
setErpsInstConfig erpsConfig {erpsInst erpsInst_number |

mep {port0 {sf sf_number | aps aps_number} | port1 {sf
sf_number | aps aps_number}} | ringType {major | sub}}
Sets ERPS configuration.

erpsConfigSpecifies the ERPS configuration.
erpsInst Specifies the ERPS instance.
Example:
setErpsInstConfig erpsConfig erpsInst 1
setErpsInstConfig erpsConfig ringType major
erpsInst_numberERPS instance number

mepSpecifies the MEP configuration.
sfSpecifies signal fail MEP.
sf_numberSignal fail MEP number.
apsSpecifies the APS MEP.
aps_number APS MEP number.
ringTypeSpecifies type of ring.
majorSpecifies the major ring.
subSpecifies the sub ring.
Step 5
setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig {wtrTime

Sets ERPS instance.
time_in_minutes | erpsInst erp_instance_number | rplPort
{port0 | port1} | rplRole {owner | neighbour} | vlan {vlanList
vlan_list_number | add | remove | none}}
time_in_minutesWTR time in minutes. Allowed
range is 1, 5-12.
Example:
setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig erpsInst 1
setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig rplPort port0
setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig rplRole neighbour
setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig vlan vlanList
2-10
erpsInstSpecifies the ERPS instance.

erp_instance_numberERPS instance number.
rplPortSpecifies the RPL port.
port1 Selects the ERPS port 1 interface.
rplRoleSpecifies the RPL role.
ownerSpecifies the RPL owner.
Later Releases
431
Configuring ERPS
Command or Action
Purpose
neighbourSpecifies the RPL neighbour.
vlanSpecifies the VLAN configuration.
vlanListSpecifies the VLAN list.
vlan_list_number VLAN list number.
addAdds to the set of included VLANs.
removeRemoves from the set of included
VLANs.
none Does not include any VLANs.
Step 6
Example:
Step 7
Example:
Step 8
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure ERPS on NID-2:
setErpsInstConfig
setErpsInstConfig
setErpsInstConfig
setErpsInstConfig
setErpsInstConfig
setErpsInstConfig
setErpsInstConfig
setErpsInstConfig
erpsConfig
erpsConfig
erpsConfig
erpsConfig
erpsConfig
erpsConfig
erpsConfig
erpsConfig
erpsInst 1
mep port0 aps 100
mep port0 sf 100
mep port1 aps 99
mep port1 sf 99
port0 3
port1 5
ringType major
Switch(config-controller-ErpsPortType)# setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig wtrTime 1

Switch(config-controller-ErpsPortType)# setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig erpsInst 1
Switch(config-controller-ErpsPortType)# setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig rplPort port0
Switch(config-controller-ErpsPortType)# setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig rplRole neighbour
Switch(config-controller-ErpsPortType)# setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig vlan vlanList
2-10
Switch(config-controller-ErpsPortType)# setErpsInstProperties erpsInstconfig wtrTime 1
Switch(config-controller-ErpsPortType)# setErpsInstProperties review
Switch(config-controller-ErpsPortType)# setErpsInstProperties commit
and Later Releases
432
Configuring ERPS
Configuring ERPS on the UPE NID Controller

To configure ERPS on the UPE NID Controller, such as Cisco ME 3600X Series Ethernet Access Switch,
complete the following steps.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
enable
Enables privileged EXEC mode.

Enter your password if prompted.
Example:
Device> enable
Step 2
configure terminal
Example:
Device# configure terminal
Step 3
ethernet ring g8032 ring-name
Specifies the Ethernet ring and enters Ethernet ring port

configuration mode.
Example:
Device(config)# ethernet ring g8032 ring1
Step 4
port0 interface type number
Connects port0 of the local node of the interface to the

Ethernet ring and enters Ethernet ring protection mode.
Example:
Device(config-erp-ring)# port0 interface
fastethernet 0/1/0
Step 5
monitor service instance instance-id
Assigns the Ethernet service instance to monitor the ring

port (port0) and detect ring failures.
Example:
Device(config-erp-ring-port)# monitor service
instance 1
Step 6
Exits Ethernet ring port configuration mode.
exit
Example:
Device(config-erp-ring-port)# exit
Step 7
port1 {interfacetype number | none}
Connects port1 of the local node of the interface to the

Ethernet ring and enters Ethernet ring protection mode.
Example:
Device(config-erp-ring)# port1 interface
fastethernet 0/1/1
Later Releases
433
Configuring ERPS
Step 8
Command or Action
Purpose
monitor service instance instance-id
Assigns the Ethernet service instance to monitor the ring

port (port1) and detect ring failures.
Example:
Device(config-erp-ring-port)# monitor service
instance 2
Step 9
exit
The interface (to which port1 is attached) must be a

subinterface of the main interface.
Exits Ethernet ring port configuration mode.
Example:
Device(config-erp-ring-port)# exit
Step 10
exclusion-list vlan-ids vlan-id
Specifies VLANs that are unprotected by the Ethernet ring

protection mechanism.
Example:
Device(config-erp-ring)# exclusion-list vlan-ids
2
Step 11
open-ring
Specifies the Ethernet ring as an open ring.
Example:
Device(config-erp-ring)# open-ring
Step 12
instance instance-id
Configures the Ethernet ring instance and enters Ethernet

ring instance configuration mode.
Example:
Device(config-erp-ring)# instance 1
Step 13
description descriptive-name
Specifies a descriptive name for the Ethernet ring instance.
Example:
Device(config-erp-inst)# description
cisco_customer_instance
Step 14
profile profile-name
Specifies the profile associated with the Ethernet ring

instance.
Example:
Device(config-erp-inst)# profile profile1
Step 15
rpl {port0 | port1} {owner | neighbor | next-neighbor Specifies the Ethernet ring port on the local node as the
RPL owner, neighbor, or next neighbor.
}
Example:
Device(config-erp-inst)# rpl port0 neighbor
and Later Releases
434
Configuring ERPS
Step 16
Command or Action
Purpose
inclusion-list vlan-ids vlan-id
Specifies VLANs that are protected by the Ethernet ring

protection mechanism.
Example:
Device(config-erp-inst)# inclusion-list vlan-ids
11
Step 17
Enters Ethernet ring instance aps-channel configuration

mode.
aps-channel
Example:
Device(config-erp-inst)# aps-channel
Step 18
level level-value
Example:
Device(config-erp-inst-aps)# level 5
Step 19
port0 service instance instance-id
Specifies the Automatic Protection Switching (APS)

message level for the node on the Ethernet ring.
All nodes in the Ethernet ring must be configured
with the same level.
Associates APS channel information with port0.
Example:
Device(config-erp-inst-aps)# port0 service
instance 100
Step 20
port1 service instance {instance-id | none }
Associates APS channel information with port1.
Example:
Device(config-erp-inst-aps)# port1 service
instance 100
Step 21
Returns to user EXEC mode.
end
Example:
Device(config-erp-inst-aps)# end
The example shows how to configure ERPS on the UPE NID Controller:
!
ethernet cfm domain W-N-V2000 level 0
service W-N-V2000 evc evc2000 vlan 2000 direction down
continuity-check
continuity-check interval 1s
efd notify g8032
!
!
Later Releases
435
Configuring ERPS
Verifying ERPS

!
service instance 2000 ethernet evc2000
bridge-domain 2000
cfm mep domain W-N-V2000 mpid 102
rmep mpid 101
!
!
!
service instance 2000 ethernet evc2000
bridge-domain 2000
cfm mep domain W-N-V2000 mpid 104
rmep mpid 103
!
!
ethernet ring g8032 profile 1
timer wtr 1
!
ethernet ring g8032 1
port0 interface GigabitEthernet0/1
port1 interface GigabitEthernet0/20
instance 1
profile 1
inclusion-list vlan-ids 2-10,2000
aps-channel
level 0
port0 service instance 2000
port1 service instance 2000
!
!
Verifying ERPS
Use the following command to verify the ERPS status on the controller.
showErpsConfig showErpsReq erpsInstList 1
This command displays the ERPS status on the NID. The following is a sample output from the command:
Switch(config-controller-ErpsPortType)# showErpsConfig showErpsReq erpsInstList 1
Switch(config-controller-ErpsPortType)# showErpsConfig review
showErpsConfig reviewCommands in queue:

showErpsConfig showErpsReq erpsInstList 1
Switch(config-controller-ErpsPortType)# showErpsConfig commit
Stat = 0ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].grpId = 1
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].config.ringType.t = 1
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].config.ringType.u.major
= 'major'
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].config.virtualConnection.t
= 2
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].config.virtualConnection.u.disable
= 'Disable'
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].config.interconnect.t
= 2
and Later Releases
436
Configuring ERPS
Verifying ERPS
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].config.interconnect.u.disable
= 'Disable'
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].config.instance = 0
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].config.port0 = 3
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].config.port1 = 4
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].config.mep.port0.sf =
100
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].config.mep.port0.aps
= 100
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].config.mep.port1.sf =
99
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].config.mep.port1.aps
= 99
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].instConfig.guardTime
= 500
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].instConfig.wtrTime =
1
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].instConfig.revertive.t
= 1
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].instConfig.revertive.u.enable
= 'Enable'
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].instConfig.version.t
= 2
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].instConfig.version.u.v2
= 'V2'
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].instConfig.topologyChangePropagate.t
= 2
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].instConfig.topologyChangePropagate.u.disable
= 'Disable'
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].instConfig.holdoff =
0
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].instConfig.rplRole.t
= 1
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].instConfig.rplRole.u.owner
= 'owner'
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].instConfig.rplPort.t
= 1
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].instConfig.rplPort.u.port0
= 'port0'
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].instConfig.vlan.t = 1
ShowErpsConfig_Output.erpsInfo.erpsInstance[0].instConfig.vlan.u.vlanList
=
'2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,1023,1024,1022,1021,1013,1012'
ShowErpsConfig Commit Success!!!
showErpsStats erpsShowStateReq erpsInst 1
This command displays the ERPS status on the NID. The following is a sample output from the command:
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# showErpsStats erpsShowStateReq erpsInst 1
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# showErpsStats erpsShowStateReq show brief
Switch(config-controller-EpsPortType)# showErpsstats commit
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].grpId = 1
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.t = 1
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.grpId = 1
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.type = 'Maj'
Later Releases
437
Configuring ERPS
Verifying ERPS
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.version = '2'
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.port0 =
'GigabitEthernet 1/3'
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.port0Lnk =
'U'
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.port0Blk =
'B'
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.majGrp = ''
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.rplRole =
'Ownr'
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.rplPort =
'Port0'
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.rplBlk = 'Y'
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.fsmState =
'IDLE'
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.rApsTx = 'Y'
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.rApsPort0Rx
= ' '
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.fop = 'N'
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.port1 =
'GigabitEthernet 1/4'
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.port1Lnk =
'U'
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.port1Blk =
'U'
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.revertive =
'Rev'
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.ringType =
'-'
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.rplRole_1 =
''
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.rplPort_1 =
''
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.rplBlk_1 = ''
ShowErpsStats_Output.erpsState.erpsInst[0].show.u.brief.rApsPort1Rx
= ' '
ShowErpsStats Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
438
CHAPTER
19
Configuring L2CP
This document describes the Layer 2 Control Protocol (L2CP) feature and configuration steps to implement
L2CP.
Prerequisites for Configuring L2CP, page 439
Restrictions for Configuring L2CP, page 439
Information About L2CP, page 440
Configuring L2CP Using a UPE NID Controller, page 440
Prerequisites for Configuring L2CP

Restrictions for Configuring L2CP

When committing multiple lists, the list in previous commit is not retained. Example: a peer list 16-18
in a previous commit is replaced by a new commit of peer list 21.
To retain multiple lists, you must specify the lists in a single commit. Example: peer list 16-18,21.
Any L2CP processing configured using forward/peer/discard modes applies to all EVCs on the port.
Provisioning L2CP in tunnel mode is not supported. You cannot prevent core switches from processing
frame as a L2CP frame in a service provider network.
To delete a previously configured discardList, you must configure discard discardList command with
no before you commit the command. Otherwise, by default the previously configured value is retained.
Example:
setL2CPPortConfig l2cpPortConfiguration portNumber 6
setL2CPPortConfig l2cpPortConfiguration discard discardList no
Later Releases
439
Configuring L2CP
Information About L2CP
Information About L2CP

L2CP addresses the requirement for a bidirectional, IP- based protocol that operates across a number of access
and aggregation network technologies such as Ethernet. The L2CP message exchange conveys status and
control information between access devices and one or more other devices that require the information for
executing local functions.
L2CP handling is required for edge switches providing Ethernet Virtual Connections (EVCs) in a service
provider network.
In this case, UPE NID Controller and NID are used to establish an EVC between UNI ports of two Customer
Premise Equipment (CPE).
The following options are available to provision L2CP on NID:
ForwardThe L2CP frame is forwarded to the network port like other layer 2 frames in the EVC.
PeerThe L2CP frame is processed by a local protocol entity and is not forwarded.
DiscardThe L2CP frame is discarded.
The following figure shows the topology used for provisioning L2CP on NIDs using UPE NID Controllers.
Figure 13: L2CP Topology
Configuring L2CP Using a UPE NID Controller

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
and Later Releases
440
Configuring L2CP
Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
ProvisionL2CPPortType
Enters the ProvisionL2CPPortType mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionL2CPPortType
Step 4
ProvisionL2CPPortType {default | exit |

getL2CPPortConfig | no | setL2CPPortConfig}
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionL2CPPortType
Sub-command options.
defaultSets a command to its defaults.
exitExits from ProvisionL2CPPortType sub
configuration mode.
getL2CPPortConfigRetrieves current L2CP
configuration request.
noNegates a command or set its defaults.
setL2CPPortConfigConfigures L2CP forward on
EVCs on this port.
Step 5
getL2CPPortConfig l2cpPort l2cpPort_number
l2cpPortSpecifies L2CP port configuration request.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#
getL2CPPortConfig l2cpPort 5
Step 6
Retrieves initial or default L2CP configuration.
l2cpPort_numberL2CP port number. The valid range

is from 1 to 6.
setL2CPPortConfig l2cpPortConfiguration {enabled Sets up L2CP forward/peer/discard configuration request on

all EVCs on this port.
| portNumber portNumber | discard {discardList
discardList_range} | forward {forwardList
enabledSpecifies L2CP configuration
forwardList_range} | peer {peerList peerList_range}}
enabled/disabled on this port.
Example:
setL2CPPortConfig l2cpPortConfiguration
portNumber 5
setL2CPPortConfig l2cpPortConfiguration enabled
enable
portNumberSpecifies port number to configure

L2CP.
portNumberPort number to configure L2CP. The
discardDiscards L2CP frames.
discardList Selects BPDU addresses and GARP
addresses.
discardList_range BPDU addresses (0-15) and
GARP addresses (16-31).
forward Allows forwarding of L2CP frames.
forwardListSelects BPDU addresses and GARP
addresses.
forwardList_range BPDU addresses (0-15) and
GARP addresses (16-31).
Later Releases
441
Configuring L2CP
Command or Action
Purpose
peerRedirects L2CP frames to local protocol entity.
peerListSelects BPDU addresses and GARP
addresses.
peerList_range BPDU addresses (0-15) and GARP
addresses (16-31).
Step 7
setL2CPPortConfig review
(Optional) Displays the configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-L2CPPortType)#
setL2CPPortConfig review
Step 8
setL2CPPortConfig flush
(Optional) Flushes the configuration.
Example:
setL2CPPortConfig flush
Step 9
setL2CPPortConfig commit
Example:
setL2CPPortConfig commit
Step 10
getL2CPPortConfig l2cpPort l2cpPort_number

Example:
Step 11
getL2CPPortConfig review
Retrieves current L2CP configuration for a specified port.

l2cpPortSpecifies L2CP port configuration request.
l2cpPort_numberL2CP port number. The valid range
is from 1 to 6.
Example:
getL2CPPortConfig review
Step 12
getL2CPPortConfig flush
(Optional) Flushes the configuration.
Example:
getL2CPPortConfig flush
Step 13
getL2CPPortConfig commit
Example:
getL2CPPortConfig commit
and Later Releases
442
Configuring L2CP
Step 14
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
exit
The example shows how to enable L2CP on a port:
Switch(config-controller)#ProvisionL2CPPortType ?
<cr>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#?
ProvisionL2CPPortType sub-mode commands:
default
exit
Exit from ProvisionL2CPPortType sub configuration mode
getL2CPPortConfig Get current L2CP configuration request
no
setL2CPPortConfig Configure L2CP forward on EVCs on this port
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#setL2CPPortConfig ?
commit
commit setL2CPPortConfig
flush
flush all setL2CPPortConfig commands from queue
l2cpPortConfiguration Configure L2CP forward on EVCs on this port
review
review setL2CPPortConfig commands
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#setL2CPPortConfig l2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#$pPortConfiguration ?
discard
Discard L2CP frames
enabled
L2CP configuration enabled/disabled on this port
forward
Allow forwarding of L2CP frames
peer
Redirect L2CP frames to local protocol entity
portNumber Port number to configure L2CP
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#$guration portNumber 3
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#$guration enabled enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#setL2CPPortConfig review
Commands in queue:
setL2CPPortConfig l2cpPortConfiguration enabled enable
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#setL2CPPortConfig commit
SetL2CPPortConfig Commit Success!!!
When SetL2CPPortConfig operation is executed on a NID from a CPE NID Controller, initially
GetL2CPPortConfig fetches the current configuration. This is followed by SetL2CPPortConfig to set
the new L2CP configuration. The following is a sample output on the NID.
#
Decoding of Request message was successful
Decoded record:
GetL2CPPortConfig_Output.l2cpPortConfiguration.enabled = true
GetL2CPPortConfig_Output.l2cpPortConfiguration.portNumber = 3
GetL2CPPortConfig_Output.l2cpPortConfiguration.discard.discardList =
Later Releases
443
Configuring L2CP
''
GetL2CPPortConfig_Output.l2cpPortConfiguration.forward.forwardList =
'16-31'
GetL2CPPortConfig_Output.l2cpPortConfiguration.peer.peerList = '0-15'
GetL2CPPortConfig_Output.xmlns:ns0 = "http://new.webservice.namespace"
GetL2CPPortConfig_Output.xmlns:http =
"http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/wsdl/http/"
GetL2CPPortConfig_Output.xmlns:mime =
"http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/wsdl/mime/"
GetL2CPPortConfig_Output.xmlns:soap =
"http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/wsdl/soap/"
GetL2CPPortConfig_Output.xmlns:soapenc =
"http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/encoding/"
GetL2CPPortConfig_Output.xmlns:wsdl =
"http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/wsdl/"
Decoded record:
SetL2CPPortConfig_Input.l2cpPortConfiguration.enabled = true
SetL2CPPortConfig_Input.l2cpPortConfiguration.portNumber = 3
SetL2CPPortConfig_Input.l2cpPortConfiguration.discard.discardList =
''
SetL2CPPortConfig_Input.l2cpPortConfiguration.forward.forwardList =
'16-31'
SetL2CPPortConfig_Input.l2cpPortConfiguration.peer.peerList = '0-15'
Encoding of Response message was successful
Encoded record:
SetL2CPPortConfig_Output.l2cpPortConfigResponse = 0
SetL2CPPortConfig_Output.xmlns:ns0 = "http://new.webservice.namespace"
SetL2CPPortConfig_Output.xmlns:http =
SetL2CPPortConfig_Output.xmlns:mime =
SetL2CPPortConfig_Output.xmlns:soap =
SetL2CPPortConfig_Output.xmlns:soapenc =
SetL2CPPortConfig_Output.xmlns:wsdl =
The examples shows how to enable L2CP Forward on a port.
<cr>
default
exit
no
commit
flush
review
discard
Discard L2CP frames
and Later Releases
444
Configuring L2CP
enabled
forward
peer
portNumber

Port number to configure L2CP
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#$guration forward for
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#$orward forwardList 1-14
Commands in queue:
setL2CPPortConfig l2cpPortConfiguration forward forwardList 1-14

#
Decoded record:
GetL2CPPortConfig_Input.l2cpPort = 3
Encoded record:
''
'16-31'
Decoded record:
''
'1-14'
Encoded record:
Later Releases
445
Configuring L2CP
#show running-config interface GigabitEthernet 1/3
Building configuration...
switchport hybrid allowed vlan 1
switchport hybrid acceptable-frame-type untagged
switchport hybrid ingress-filtering
switchport hybrid port-type unaware
lldp med type end-point
qos dscp-remark rewrite
evc l2cp forward 1-14
The examples shows how to enable L2CP Forward, Peer, Discard on a port.
<cr>
default
exit
no
commit
flush
review
discard
Discard L2CP frames
enabled
forward
peer
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#$guration forward for
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#$orward forwardList 1-14
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#$peer peerList 16-20
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#$guration discard di
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#$iscard discardList 19
Commands in queue:
setL2CPPortConfig l2cpPortConfiguration peer peerList 16-20
setL2CPPortConfig l2cpPortConfiguration discard discardList 19
Commands in queue:
and Later Releases
446
Configuring L2CP


# Decoding of Request message was successful
Decoded record:
Encoded record:
''
'1-14'
Decoded record:
'19'
'1-14'
Encoded record:
# show running-config interface GigabitEthernet 1/3
Later Releases
447
Configuring L2CP

evc l2cp peer 16-18,20 forward 1-14 discard 19
!
end
The examples shows how to disable or reset L2CP Discard on a port.
<cr>
default
exit
no
commit
flush
review
discard
Discard L2CP frames
enabled
forward
peer
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#$guration discard di
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#$iscard discardList no
Commands in queue:
Commands in queue:
setL2CPPortConfig l2cpPortConfiguration discard discardList no

Decoded record:
Encoded record:
'19'
and Later Releases
448
Configuring L2CP
'1-14'
Decoded record:
'no'
'1-14'
Encoded record:
# show running-config interface GigabitEthernet 1/3
evc l2cp peer 16-20 forward 1-14
The examples shows how to retrieve current configuration on a NID.
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#getL2CPPortConfig ?
commit
commit getL2CPPortConfig
flush
flush all getL2CPPortConfig commands from queue
l2cpPort Get current L2CP configuration request
review
review getL2CPPortConfig commands
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#getL2CPPortConfig l2cpPort ?
<1-6> Get L2CP Port Configuration Request
Later Releases
449
Configuring L2CP
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#$Config l2cpPort 3 ?
<cr>
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#getL2CPPortConfig review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#getL2CPPortConfig commit
GetL2CPPortConfig_Output.l2cpPortConfiguration.discard.discardList = 'no'
GetL2CPPortConfig_Output.l2cpPortConfiguration.forward.forwardList = '1-14'
GetL2CPPortConfig Commit Success!!!

Decoded record:
Encoded record:
'no'
'1-14'
The examples shows how to flush L2CP configuration on a port.
<cr>
default
exit
no
commit
flush
review
Commands in queue:
and Later Releases
450
Configuring L2CP

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#setL2CPPortConfig flush
No commands in queue
The examples shows how to remove specific configuration CLI from a CPE NID controller.
<cr>
default
exit
no
commit
flush
review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#no setL2CPPortConfig l2cpPor$
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionL2CPPortType)#$n forward forwardList 1-14
Commands in queue:
Commands in queue:
Later Releases
451
Configuring L2CP
and Later Releases
452
CHAPTER
20
Configuring MAC Security

This document describes the MAC security feature and configuration steps to implement MAC security.
Prerequisites for Configuring MAC Security, page 453
Information About MAC Security, page 453
How to Provision MAC Security, page 454
Verifying MAC Security, page 459
Prerequisites for Configuring MAC Security

Information About MAC Security

You can use the MAC security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC
addresses of the devices that are allowed to access the port. When you assign secure MAC addresses to a
secure port, the port does not forward packets with source addresses outside the group of defined addresses.
If you limit the number of secure MAC addresses to one and assign a single secure MAC address, the device
attached to that port is assured the full bandwidth of the port.
Later Releases
453

How to Provision MAC Security
How to Provision MAC Security

Configuring Port Security
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionMacTableSecurityType
Enters the ProvisionMacTableSecurityType mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionMacTableSecurityType
Step 4
portSecurityGlobalConfig portSecurityGlobalConfigReq {mode Port Security Global Configuration.

{disable | enable} | agingTime {time time | disable}}
portSecurityGlobalConfigReqSpecifies port
security global configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)#
portSecurityGlobalConfig portSecurityGlobalConfigReq
agingTime time 60
portSecurityGlobalConfig portSecurityGlobalConfigReq
mode enable
modeOption to enable/disable port security.

disableDisables port security globally.
enableEnables port security globally.
agingTimeEnables or disables port security
aging.
timeEnables and sets time.
timeTime. The valid range is from 10 to
10000000 seconds.
disableDisables aging.
Step 5
portSecurityGlobalConfig review
Example:
and Later Releases
454

Configuring Port Security
Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
portSecurityGlobalConfig commit
Example:
Step 7
portSecurityInterfaceConfig portSecurityInterfaceConfigReq Interface mode Port Security Configuration.

{interface_id interface_id | port_security {mode {disable |
interface_idSpecifies the interface ID.
enable} | mac_limit {maximum max_mac_number | disable} |
violation {protect | shutdown | traponly | trap-shutdown |
interface_idInterface ID. The valid range is
disable}}}
from 1 to 6.
port_securityConfigures port security.
Example:
portSecurityInterfaceConfig
portSecurityInterfaceConfigReq interface_id 2
portSecurityInterfaceConfigReq port_security mode enable
modeSpecifies the mode for port security.
portSecurityInterfaceConfigReq port_security mac_limit
maximum 100
mac_limitSpecifies MAC address learning

limit.
portSecurityInterfaceConfigReq port_security violation
shutdown
disableDisables port security.

enableEnables port security.
maximumSpecifies the maximum number

of MAC addresses.
max_mac_numberMaximum number of MAC
addresses. The valid range is from 1 to 1024.
disableRemoves the MAC limit.
violationSpecifies the action when exceeding
the limit.
protectSpecifies no action.
shutdownShuts down the port.
traponlySends an SNMP trap.
trap-shutdownSends an SNMP trap and
shuts down the port.
disableDisables violation type.
Step 8
portSecurityInterfaceConfig review
Example:
portSecurityInterfaceConfig review
Step 9
portSecurityInterfaceConfig commit
Example:
portSecurityInterfaceConfig commit
Later Releases
455

Step 10
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
exit
The example shows how to configure port security:
portSecurityGlobalConfigReq agingTime time 60
portSecurityGlobalConfigReq mode enable
portSecurityGlobalConfig
portSecurityGlobalConfig
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# portSecurityInterfaceConfig
portSecurityInterfaceConfigReq port_security mode enable
portSecurityInterfaceConfigReq port_security mac_limit maximum 100
portSecurityInterfaceConfigReq port_security violation shutdown
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# portSecurityInterfaceConfig review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# portSecurityInterfaceConfig commit
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# exit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
and Later Releases
456

Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
Enters the ProvisionMacTableSecurityType mode.
Example:
Step 4
setMacGlobalConfig setMacGlobalConfigReq {macAgingTime Global Configuration for MAC address table.

{setAgingTime aging_time | disable} | staticMacEntry | learning}
macAgingTimeConfigures MAC aging
time.
Example:
setMacGlobalConfig setMacGlobalConfigReq macAgingTime
setAgingTime 100
setAgingTimeSpecifies aging time.

aging_timeAging time in seconds. Valid
disableDisables MAC aging.
staticMacEntrySpecifies static MAC
address.
learningSpecifies MAC learning on
VLAN.
Step 5
setMacGlobalConfig review
Example:
setMacGlobalConfig review
Step 6
setMacGlobalConfig commit
Example:
setMacGlobalConfig commit
Step 7
setMacInterfaceConfig setMacInterfaceConfigReq {interface_id Interface mode for MAC configuration.

interface-id | mode {learning {enable | disable} | secure {enable
interface_idSpecifies the interface ID.
| disable}}}
interface_idInterface ID.
Example:
setMacInterfaceConfig setMacInterfaceConfigReq
interface-id 3
setMacInterfaceConfig setMacInterfaceConfigReq mode
learning enable
modeSpecifies the learning mode.

learningSpecifies port default learning
mode.
enableEnables MAC learning.
disableDisables MAC learning.
secureSpecifies port secure learning mode.
enableEnables secure MAC learning.
disableDisables secure MAC learning.
Later Releases
457

Clearing MAC Address Table
Step 8
Command or Action
Purpose
setMacInterfaceConfig review
Example:
Step 9
setMacInterfaceConfig commit
Example:
Step 10
exit
Example:
exit
The example shows how to configure MAC table learning:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# setMacGlobalConfig
setMacGlobalConfigReq macAgingTime setAgingTime 100
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# setMacGlobalConfig review
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# setMacGlobalConfig commit
setMacInterfaceConfigReq interface_id 3
setMacInterfaceConfigReq mode learning enable
setMacInterfaceConfig
setMacInterfaceConfig
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# exit
Clearing MAC Address Table

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
and Later Releases
458

Verifying MAC Security
Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
Enters the ProvisionMacTableSecurityType

mode.
Example:
Step 4
clearMacTable clearMacTableReq clearAll
Clears MAC address table.

clearAllClears all entries.
Example:
clearMacTable clearMacTableReq clearAll
Step 5
clearMacTable review
Example:
Step 6
clearMacTable commit
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
The example shows how to configure port security:
clearAll
clearMacTable clearMacTableReq
exit

Use the following command to verify the MAC security status on the controller.
showMacTableLearningReq mode
This command displays the MAC table learning status. The following is a sample output from the
command:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# showmacTablelearning
showMacTableLearningReq mode
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# showmacTablelearning review
Later Releases
459

Commands in queue:
showMacTableLearning showMacTableLearningReq mode
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# showmacTablelearning commit
Clearing Socket 4
ShowMacTableLearning_Output.showMacTableLearingResp.status[0].interface_
= 1
ShowMacTableLearning_Output.showMacTableLearingResp.status[0].mode =
'Auto'
= 2
'Auto'
= 3
'Auto'
= 4
'Auto'
= 5
'Auto'
= 6
'Auto'
ShowMacTableLearning Commit Success!!!
showMacTableEntriesReq all
This command displays the list of all MAC entries. The following is a sample output from the command:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# showMacTableEntries
showMacTableEntriesReq all
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# showmacTableentries review
Commands in queue:
showMacTableEntries showMacTableEntriesReq all
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# showmacTableentries commit
Clearing Socket 4
ShowMacTableEntries_Output.showMacTableEntriesResp.macEntries[0].type
= 'Static '
ShowMacTableEntries_Output.showMacTableEntriesResp.macEntries[0].vlan_id
= 1
ShowMacTableEntries_Output.showMacTableEntriesResp.macEntries[0].mac_address
= '00:00:0c:07:ac:03'
ShowMacTableEntries_Output.showMacTableEntriesResp.macEntries[0].ports
= 'GigabitEthernet 1/1 CPU'
= 'Static '
= 1
= '00:09:e8:74:36:c5'
and Later Releases
460

= 'Static '
= 1
= '00:14:1b:ec:18:00'
= 'Static '
= 1
= '00:19:a9:a2:9e:80'
= 'Static '
= 1
= '00:1c:b0:f5:b4:00'
= 'Static '
= 1
= '00:1c:b1:9a:00:00'
= 'Static '
= 1
= '00:1c:b1:f9:d0:00'
= 'Static '
= 1
= '00:1c:b1:fa:48:00'
= 'Static '
= 1
= '00:3a:99:fd:4b:1c'
= ' CPU'
Later Releases
461

= 'Static '
= 1
= '18:9c:5d:a7:f4:1c'
= 'Static '
= 1
= '33:33:00:00:00:01'
= 'GigabitEthernet 1/1-6 CPU'
= 'Static '
= 1
= '33:33:00:00:00:02'
= 'Static '
= 1
= '33:33:ff:fd:4b:1c'
= 'Static '
= 1
= 'ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff'
ShowMacTableEntries Commit Success!!!
showMacTableEntriesReq interface_id 2
This command displays the list of all MAC entries for a given interface. The following is a sample output
from the command:
showMacTableEntriesReq interface_id 2
Commands in queue:
showMacTableEntries showMacTableEntriesReq interface_id 2
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# showmactableentries commit
Clearing Socket 4
= 'Static'
and Later Releases
462

= 1
= '33:33:00:00:00:01'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '33:33:00:00:00:02'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '33:33:ff:fd:4b:1c'
= 'Static'
= 1
showMacTableEntriesReq mac_address ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
This command displays the list of all MAC entries for a given MAC address. The following is a sample
output from the command:
showMacTableEntriesReq mac-address ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
Commands in queue:
showMacTableEntries showMacTableEntriesReq mac_address
ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
Clearing Socket 4
= 'Static'
= 1
Later Releases
463

showMacTableEntriesReq static
This command displays all the static MAC entries. The following is a sample output from the command:
showMacTableEntriesReq static
Commands in queue:
showMacTableEntries showMacTableEntriesReq static
Clearing Socket 4
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:00:0c:07:ac:03'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:09:e8:74:36:c5'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:14:1b:ec:18:00'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:19:a9:a2:9e:80'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:1c:b0:f5:b4:00'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:1c:b1:9a:00:00'
and Later Releases
464

= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:1c:b1:f9:d0:00'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:1c:b1:fa:48:00'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:3a:99:fd:4b:1c'
= ' CPU'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '18:9c:5d:a7:f4:1c'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '33:33:00:00:00:01'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '33:33:00:00:00:02'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '33:33:ff:fd:4b:1c'
Later Releases
465

= 'Static'
= 1
showMacTableEntriesReq vlan_id 1
This command displays all the MAC entries for a specified VLAN ID. The following is a sample output
from the command:
showMacTableEntriesReq vlan-id 1
Commands in queue:
showMacTableEntries showMacTableEntriesReq vlan_id 1
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# showMacTableEntries commit
Clearing Socket 4
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:00:0c:07:ac:03'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:09:e8:74:36:c5'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:14:1b:ec:18:00'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:19:a9:a2:9e:80'
= 'Static'
and Later Releases
466

= 1
= '00:1c:b0:f5:b4:00'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:1c:b1:9a:00:00'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:1c:b1:f9:d0:00'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:1c:b1:fa:48:00'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '00:3a:99:fd:4b:1c'
= ' CPU'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '18:9c:5d:a7:f4:1c'
= 'Static'
= 1
= '33:33:00:00:00:01'
= 'Static'
= 1
Later Releases
467

= '33:33:00:00:00:02'
= 'Static'
ShowMacTableEntries_Output.showMacTableEntriesResp.macEntries[12].vlan0_id
= 1
= '33:33:ff:fd:4b:1c'
= 'Static'
= 1
showMacAddressCountReq count
This command displays count of MAC addresses learnt per interface. The following is a sample output
from the command:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# showMacTableCount
showMacAddressCountReq count
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# showmacTablecount review
Commands in queue:
showMacTableCount showMacAddressCountReq count
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# showmacTablecount commit
Clearing Socket 4
ShowMacTableCount_Output.showMacAddressCountResp.macCount[0].Interface_id
= 1
ShowMacTableCount_Output.showMacAddressCountResp.macCount[0].count =
9
= 2
0
= 3
0
= 4
0
= 5
0
= 6
and Later Releases
468

0
ShowMacTableCount Commit Success!!!
showMacTableAgingReq agingTimeValue
This command displays the MAC aging time. The following is a sample output from the command:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# showMacTableAgingTime
showMacTableAgingReq agingTimeValue
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# showmactableagingTime review
Commands in queue:
showMacTableAgingTime showMacTableAgingReq agingTimeValue
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionMacTableSecurityType)# showmactableagingTime commit
Clearing Socket 4
ShowMacTableAgingTime_Output.showMacTableAgingResp.macAgingTime = 'MAC
Age Time: 300'
ShowMacTableAgingTime Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
469

and Later Releases
470
CHAPTER
21
Configuring NTP
The Network Time Protocol (NTP) synchronizes the time of day among a set of distributed time servers and
clients so that you can correlate events when you receive system logs and other time-specific events from
multiple network devices. NTP uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as its transport protocol. All NTP
communications use Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
Prerequisites for Configuring NTP, page 471
Restrictions for Configuring NTP, page 471
Information About NTP, page 471
How to Configure NTP, page 473
Verifying NTP, page 478
Prerequisites for Configuring NTP

NTP is disabled by default. The NTP IPv4 and IPv6 address must be configured.
The controller must acquire the time from the NTP server.
Restrictions for Configuring NTP

Maximum number of servers supported is 5.
Information About NTP

Network Time Protocol
Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol designed to time-synchronize a network of machines. NTP runs
on UDP, which in turn runs on IP. NTP Version 3 (NTPv3) is documented in RFC 1305.
Later Releases
471
Configuring NTP
Network Time Protocol
An NTP network usually gets its time from an authoritative time source such as a radio clock or an atomic
clock attached to a time server. NTP then distributes this time across the network. NTP is extremely efficient;
no more than one packet per minute is necessary to synchronize two machines to the accuracy of within a
millisecond of one another.
NTP uses the concept of a stratum to describe how many NTP hops away a machine is from an authoritative
time source. A stratum 1 time server typically has an authoritative time source (such as a radio or atomic clock
or a Global Positioning System [GPS] time source) directly attached, a stratum 2 time server receives its time
via NTP from a stratum 1 time server, and so on.
NTP has two ways to avoid synchronizing to a machine whose time may not be accurate. NTP does not
synchronize to a machine that is not in turn synchronized with the NTP. NTP compares the time reported by
several machines and does not synchronize to a machine whose time is significantly different from others,
even if its stratum is lower. This strategy effectively builds a self-organizing tree of NTP servers.
Our implementation of NTP does not support stratum 1 service; that is, you cannot connect to a radio or atomic
clock (for some specific platforms, however, you can connect to a GPS time-source device). We recommend
that the time service you derive for your network from the public NTP servers that are available in the IP
Internet.
If the network is isolated from the Internet, our implementation of NTP allows a machine to be configured
so that it acts as though it is synchronized via NTP, when in fact the network has determined the time by using
other means. Other machines can then synchronize to that machine via NTP.
A number of manufacturers include NTP software for their host systems and a publicly available version for
systems running UNIX. This software also allows UNIX-derivative servers to acquire the time directly from
an atomic clock, which would subsequently propagate time information along to Cisco devices.
The communication between machines running NTP (known as associations) are usually statically configured;
each machine is given the IP address of all machines with which it should form associations. Accurate
timekeeping is made possible through exchange of NTP messages between each pair of machines with an
association.
However, in a LAN environment, NTP can be configured to use IP broadcast messages instead. This alternative
reduces configuration complexity because each machine can be configured to send or receive broadcast
messages. However, the accuracy of timekeeping is marginally reduced because the information flow is only
one way.
The time kept on a machine is a critical resource, so we strongly recommend that you use the security features
of NTP to avoid the accidental or malicious setting of incorrect time. Two security mechanisms are available:
an access-list-based restriction scheme and an encrypted authentication mechanism.
When multiple sources of time (VINES, hardware clock, manual configuration) are available, NTP is always
considered to be more authoritative. NTP time overrides the time set by any other method.
NTP services are disabled on all interfaces by default.
For more information about NTP, see the following sections:
and Later Releases
472
Configuring NTP
How to Configure NTP
How to Configure NTP

Provisioning the Controller to Configure NTP
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Enters NTP provisioning mode.
NtpPortType
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# NtpPortType
Step 4
NtpPortType {default | deleteNtpConfig | exit | getNtpConfig | no |

setNtpConfig}
Displays the supported configurations for

NTP.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)#-NtpPortType)# ?
NtpPortType sub-mode commands:
default
deleteNtpConfig delete NTP config request
exit
Exit from NtpPortType sub configuration
mode
getNtpConfig
get ntp properties request
no
setNtpConfig
Set Ntp Server Details
Step 5
Exits the NTP provisioning mode.
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)# exit
The following example shows the supported NTP configuration:
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)# ?
NtpPortType sub-mode commands:
default
exit
Exit from NtpPortType sub configuration mode
getNtpConfig
Later Releases
473
Configuring NTP
Configuring NTP on the Controller
no
setNtpConfig

Configuring NTP on the Controller

Before You Begin
Ensure that the NID is reachable for the provided NTP server.
Set the time zone for synchronization with the NTP server. See Configuring the System Clock, on page
27.
Perform the steps to provision NTP on the controller. See Provisioning the Controller to Configure NTP,
on page 473
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
setNtpConfig {commit | flush | ntpConfig | review}
Sets NTP configuration
Example:
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)# setNtpConfig ?
commit
commit deleteNtpConfig
flush
flush all deleteNtpConfig commands from
queue
ntpConfig
review
review deleteNtpConfig commands
commitSends the NTP configuration to

NID.
flushFlushes all NTP configuration from
the queue.
ntpConfigSets the NTP server
controller.
Step 2
Configures NTP.
setNtpConfig ntpConfig {hostinfo {hostname host_name} |
ipv4address IPv4_address | ipv6address IPv6_address} | ntpmode
hostinfoSets the host information such as
{enable | number server_number}}
host name, IPv4 address and IPv6 address on
the controller.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)# setNtpConfig
hostinfo hostname host1
ipv4address 192.34.7.8
ipv6address 2001:DB8:0:ABCD::1
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)# setNtpConfig ntpmode
enable
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)# setNtpConfig ntpmode
number 5
Step 3
setNtpconfig review
ntpmodeEnables or disables the NTP mode

on the controller.
number server_numberSets the NTP server
details. The valid range is from 1 to 5.
Displays the NTP configuration on the controller.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)# setNtpconfig review
Commands in queue:
setNtpConfig ntpConfig hostInfo hostName host1
and Later Releases
474
Configuring NTP
Configuring NTP with Default Configuration
Command or Action
Purpose
setNtpConfig
192.34.7.8
setNtpConfig
setNtpConfig
setNtpConfig
Step 4
ntpConfig hostInfo ipv4Address

ntpConfig ntpMode enable
ntpConfig number 5
ntpConfig ntpMode enable
Sends the NTP configuration to the NID.
setNtpconfigcommit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)# setNtpconfig commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure NTP on the controller:
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)#
Commands in queue:
setNtpConfig
setNtpConfig
setNtpConfig
setNtpConfig
setNtpConfig
ntpConfig
ntpConfig
ntpConfig
ntpConfig
ntpConfig
setNtpConfig
setNtpConfig
setNtpConfig
setNtpConfig
setNtpConfig
setNtpconfig
hostinfo hostname host1

ipv6address 2001:DB8:0:ABCD::1
ntpmode enable
ntpmode number 5
review
hostInfo hostName host1

hostInfo ipv4Address 192.34.7.8
ntpMode enable
number 5
ntpMode enable
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)# setNtpconfig commit

Configuring NTP with Default Configuration

You can set the default NTP configuration on the controller.
Before You Begin

on page 473.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
Purpose
default{getNtpConfig | setNtpConfig | deleteNtpConfig | Sets the default NTP configuration.

exit }
Later Releases
475
Configuring NTP
Viewing the NTP Configuration
Command or Action
Purpose
getNtpConfigView the configuration on the
controller.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)# default ?
setNtpConfigSets the configuration on the

controller.

exit
Exit from NtpPortType sub
configuration mode
getNtpConfig
setNtpConfig
deleteNtpConfigDeletes the configuration from

the controller.
exitExits from NtpPortType configuration mode.
Step 2
exit
Example:
Viewing the NTP Configuration

Before You Begin
on page 473.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
getNtpConfig {commit | flush | ntpStatusRequest ntp_status|

review}
Example:
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)#getNtpConfig
ntpStatusRequest 1
review
commit
Step 2
exit
Purpose
ntpStatusRequestRequest NTP configuration
properties.
commitSends the NTP configuration to NID.
flushFlushes all NTP configuration from the
queue.
reviewDisplays the configuration.
Example:
and Later Releases
476
Configuring NTP
Deleting the NTP Configuration
The example shows how to view the configuration:
getNtpConfig ntpStatusRequest 1
getNtpConfig review
Commands in queue:
getNtpConfig commmit
end

Before You Begin
on page 473.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
deleteNtpConfig {commit | flush | ntpDeleteConfig | review} Removes the NTP configuration.

Example:
deleteNtpConfig ?
commit
flush
flush all deleteNtpConfig commands
from queue
ntpDeleteConfig delete NTP config request
review
Step 2
ntpDeleteConfig {ntpEnable | ntpServerNoserver_num}

queue.
ntpDeleteConfigDeletes the NTP configuration
request on the controller.
controller.
Removes NTP configuration.
ntpEnableDisables the NTP configuration.
Example:
deleteNtpConfig ntpDeleteConfig ntpEnable
deleteNtpConfig ntpDeleteConfig ntpServer 1
Step 3
Purpose
ntpDeleteConfig review
ntpServerNoDisables the NTP server.

server_numSpecifies the NTP server. The valid
Displays the NTP configuration.
Example:
deleteNtpConfig review
Later Releases
477
Configuring NTP
Verifying NTP
Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose
ntpDeleteConfig commit
Sends the NTP configuration to the NID.
Example:
deleteNtpConfig commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The following example shows how to delete the NTP configuration:
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)# deleteNtpConfig ntpDeleteConfig
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)# deleteNtpConfig ntpDeleteConfig
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)# deleteNtpConfig review
Commands in queue:
deleteNtpConfig ntpDeleteConfig ntpServerNo 2
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)# deleteNtpConfig commit
DeleteNtpConfig Commit Success!!!
Switch(config-controller-NtpPortType)# deleteNtpConfig exit
ntpEnable
ntpServer 1
Verifying NTP
Use these commands to verify the NTP status on the controller.
show ntp status
This command displays the NTP status on the NID. The following is a sample output from the command:
Switch# show ntp status
NTP Mode : disabled
Idx
Server IP host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name string
-------------------------------------------------------1
2
3
4
5
and Later Releases
478
CHAPTER
22
Configuring Storm Control

A traffic storm occurs when packets flood the LAN, creating excessive traffic and degrading network
performance. The traffic broadcast and multicast suppression (or storm control) feature prevents LAN ports
from being disrupted by a broadcast, multicast and unicast traffic storm on physical interfaces.
Restrictions for Configuring Strorm Control, page 479
Information on Storm Control, page 479
How to Configure Storm Control, page 480
Restrictions for Configuring Strorm Control

Storm control cannot be configured per port. It is configured globally on all ports
Information on Storm Control

A broadcast storm occurs when huge amount of broadcast, multicast, or unknown unicast packets flood the
LAN, creating excessive traffic and degrading network performance. Errors in the protocol-stack implementation
or in the network configuration can also cause a storm. The mechanism to prevent and control such events is
known as storm control or broadcast suppression.
Broadcast and Multicast Suppression monitors incoming traffic levels periodically, and compares traffic level
with configured storm control policer level or rate. The traffic storm control threshold level is measured based
on the traffic rate in bits (or kilobits) per second at which broadcast, multicast, unicast packets are received.
Storm control prevents traffic on a LAN from being disrupted by a broadcast, multicast, or unicast storm on
a port. Storm control is applicable for physical interfaces and is used to restrict the unicast, broadcast and
multicast ingress traffic on the Layer2 interfaces.
Later Releases
479

How to Configure Storm Control
How to Configure Storm Control

Provisioning the Controller to Configure Storm Control
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ProvisionStormControl
Enters Storm control provisioning mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ProvisionStormControl
Step 4
ProvisionStormControl {getStormControlGlobal |
Displays the supported configurations for storm control.
setStormControlGlobal | showStormControl |no | exit}
getStormControlGlobalView the configuration,
see Retrieving the Storm Control Configuration, on
Example:
page 483.
Switch((config-controller)ProvisionStormControl)#
?
setStormControlGlobalConfigures storm control,

see Configuring Storm Control on the Controller, on
page 481.
showStormControlGlobalDisplays the
configuration, see Displaying the Storm Control
Configuration, on page 484.
noNegates the configuration, see Negating Storm
Control Configuration and Restoring Defaults, on page
486.
exitExits the configuration.
Step 5
exit
Exits the storm control provisioning mode.
Example:
Switch((config-controller)ProvisionStormControl)#
exit
and Later Releases
480

Configuring Storm Control on the Controller
The following example shows the supported storm control configuration:
Switch((config-controller)ProvisionStormControl)# ?
ProvisionStormControl sub-mode commands:
exit
Exit from ProvisionStormControl sub configuration mode
getStormControlGlobal Storm Control Global Configuration Get Request
no
setStormControlGlobal Storm Control Global Configuration Set Request
showStormControl
Display Storm Control Policer properties

Before You Begin
Perform the steps to provision storm control on the controller. See Provisioning the Controller to Configure
Storm Control, on page 480.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 1 setStormControlGlobal {commit | flush |

stormControlGlobalConfiguration | review}
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)#
setStormControlGlobal ?
commit
commit setStormControlGlobal
flush
setStormControlGlobal commands
flush all
from queue
review
review setStormControlGlobal
commands
stormControlGlobalConfiguration Storm Control Global
Configuration Set
Request
Step 2 setStormControlGlobal stormControlGlobalConfiguration {broadcast

{bc_enabled {enable | disable} | level level_bps | mode {bps | kbps}} |
multicast {level level_bps | mc_enabled {enable | disable} | mode {bps |
kbps}} | unicast {level level_bps | uc_enabled {enable | disable} | mode
{bps | kbps}}}
Configures global storm control.

commitSends the storm control
configuration to NID.
flushFlushes all storm control
configuration from the queue.
stormControlGlobalConfigurationSets
the storm control configuration globally.
Storm control is configured
globally (all ports) and not per
port.
Note
broadcastSets police broadcast frames.

multicastSets police multicast frames.
unicastSets police unicast frames.
bc_enabledSets broadcast policer rate.
Example:
mc_enabledSets multicast policer rate.
uc_enabledSets unicast policer rate.
setStormControlGlobal stormControlGlobalConfiguration broadcast level

64
setStormControlGlobal stormControlGlobalConfiguration broadcast mode

kps
level level_bpsConfigure policer rate

or level. Allowed values are
1,2,4,8,16,32,64,128,256,512 (bps/kbps)
and 1024 kbps.
Later Releases
481

Command or Action
Purpose
setStormControlGlobal stormControlGlobalConfiguration broadcast

bc_enabled enable
setStormControlGlobal stormControlGlobalConfiguration mulicast level 8

setStormControlGlobal stormControlGlobalConfiguration mulicast mode

bps
setStormControlGlobal stormControlGlobalConfiguration broadcast

mc_enabled disable
modeSets the mode in bps or kbps

bpsConfigures policer rate in bps.
kbpsConfigures policer rate in kbps.
disableDisables the storm control
configuration.
enableEnables the storm control
configuration.
setStormControlGlobal stormControlGlobalConfiguration unicast level 16

setStormControlGlobal stormControlGlobalConfiguration unicast uc_enabled

disable
setStormControlGlobal stormControlGlobalConfiguration unicast mode bps

Step 3 setStormControlGlobal review
Displays the storm control configuration.
Example:
setStormControlGlobal review
Commands in queue:
setStormControlGlobal
broadcast bc_enabled enable
broadcast level 64
broadcast mode bps
unicast uc_enabled enable
unicast level 16
unicast mode kbps
multicast mc_enabled enable
multicast mode bps
unicast level 8
stormControlGlobalConfiguration
Step 4 setStormControlGlobalcommit
Sends the storm control configuration to the

NID.
Example:
setStormControlGlobal commit
Step 5 exit
Example:
Switch((config-controller)ProvisionStormControl)# exit
and Later Releases
482

Retrieving the Storm Control Configuration
The example shows how to configure storm control on the controller:
stormControlGlobalConfiguration broadcast level 64

stormControlGlobalConfiguration broadcast mode kps

stormControlGlobalConfiguration broadcast bc_enabled enable
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)# setStormControlGlobal
stormControlGlobalConfiguration mulicast level 8
stormControlGlobalConfiguration mulicast mode bps
stormControlGlobalConfiguration broadcast mc_enabled disable
stormControlGlobalConfiguration unicast level 16
stormControlGlobalConfiguration unicast uc_enabled disable
stormControlGlobalConfiguration unicast mode bps
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)# setStormControlGlobal review
Commands in queue:
broadcast bc_enabled enable

broadcast level 64
broadcast mode bps
unicast uc_enabled enable
unicast level 16
unicast mode kbps
multicast mc_enabled enable
multicast mode bps
unicast level 8
SetStormControlGlobal Commit Success!!!
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)#end
commit
Retrieving the Storm Control Configuration

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 1 getStormControlGlobal {commit | flush | getStormControlGlobalRequest |

review}
Retrieve the storm control configuration.

getStormControlGlobalRequestRequest
storm control configuration properties.
Later Releases
483

Displaying the Storm Control Configuration
Command or Action
Purpose
commitSends the storm control
Example:
flushFlushes all storm control

Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)#getStormControlGlobal
getStormControlGlobalRequest
review
commit
Step 2 exit

Example:
The example shows how to retrieve the configuration on the ME1200:
getStormControlGlobalRequest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)#getStormControlGlobal review
Commands in queue:
getStormControlGlobal getStormControlGlobalRequest
getStormControlGlobal getStormControlGlobalRequest
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)# getStormControlGlobal commmit
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)# end

Before You Begin
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
showStormControl {commit | flush | showStormControlReq | review}
Displays the storm control configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)#showStormControl
showStormControlReq
review
commit
showStormControlReqDisplays
storm control policer properties.
commitSends the show storm control
flushFlushes all show storm control
and Later Releases
484

Command or Action
Purpose
reviewDisplays the show storm
configuration.
Step 2
exit
Example:
The example shows how to view the configuration:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)#showStormControl showStormControlReq
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)#showStormControl review
Commands in queue:
showStormControl showStormControlReq
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)#showStormControl commit
ShowStormControl_Output.stormControlGlobalConfiguration.broadcast.bc_enabled = true
ShowStormControl_Output.stormControlGlobalConfiguration.broadcast.level = 1024000
ShowStormControl_Output.stormControlGlobalConfiguration.broadcast.mode.t = 2
ShowStormControl_Output.stormControlGlobalConfiguration.broadcast.mode.u.kbps = 'kbps'
ShowStormControl_Output.stormControlGlobalConfiguration.multicast.mc_enabled = true
ShowStormControl_Output.stormControlGlobalConfiguration.multicast.level = 512000
ShowStormControl_Output.stormControlGlobalConfiguration.multicast.mode.t = 2
ShowStormControl_Output.stormControlGlobalConfiguration.multicast.mode.u.kbps = 'kbps'
ShowStormControl_Output.stormControlGlobalConfiguration.unicast.uc_enabled = true
ShowStormControl_Output.stormControlGlobalConfiguration.unicast.level = 1000
ShowStormControl_Output.stormControlGlobalConfiguration.unicast.mode.t = 2
ShowStormControl_Output.stormControlGlobalConfiguration.unicast.mode.u.kbps = 'kbps'
ShowStormControl Commit Success!!!
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)# exit
Later Releases
485

Negating Storm Control Configuration and Restoring Defaults
Negating Storm Control Configuration and Restoring Defaults

Note
Following are the default values for storm control:

broadcast
bc_enabled = false
level = 1
mode = bps
multicast
mc_enabled = false
level = 1
mode = bps
unicast
uc_enabled = false
level = 1
mode = bps
Before You Begin

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
no {getStormControlGlobal | setStormControlGlobal |
showStormControl | exit}
Negates storm control configurations.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)# no ?
exit
Exit from ProvisionStormControl
sub configuration mode
getStormControlGlobal Storm Control Global
Configuration Get Request
setStormControlGlobal Storm Control Global
Configuration Set Request
showStormControl
Display Storm Control Policer
properties
getStormControlGlobalView the
configuration.
setStormControlGlobalSets the
configuration.
showStormControlDisplays the
configuration.
exitExits from ProvisionStormControl mode.
and Later Releases
486

Step 2
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
The following example is a sample output for negation:
Commands in queue:
showStormControl showStormControlReq
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)#no showStormControl showStormControlReq
No commands in queue
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)#setStormControlGlobal review
Commands in queue:
setStormControlGlobal stormControlGlobalConfiguration broadcast bc_enabled enable
setStormControlGlobal stormControlGlobalConfiguration broadcast level 64
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)#no setStormControlGlobal
stormControlGlobalConfiguration broadcast level 64
Switch(config-controller-ProvisionStormControl)#stormControlGlobal review
Commands in queue:
setStormControlGlobal stormControlGlobalConfiguration broadcast bc_enabled enable

Before You Begin
on page 473.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
Purpose
deleteNtpConfig {commit | flush | ntpDeleteConfig | review} Removes the storm control configuration.
Example:
deleteNtpConfig ?
commit
flush
flush all deleteNtpConfig commands
from queue
ntpDeleteConfig delete NTP config request
review

queue.
ntpDeleteConfigDeletes the NTP configuration
request on the controller.
Later Releases
487

Command or Action
Step 2
ntpDeleteConfig { ntpEnable | ntpServerNoserver_num }

Example:
deleteNtpConfig ntpDeleteConfig ntpServer 1
Step 3
exit
Purpose
ntpEnableDisables the NTP configuration.
ntpServerNoDisables the NTP server.
server_numSpecifies the NTP server. The valid
Example:
and Later Releases
488
CHAPTER
23
Configuring Syslog
This document describes the Syslog feature and configuration steps to implement Syslog.
Prerequisites for Configuring Syslog, page 489
Information About Syslog, page 489
Enabling Syslog, page 490
Clearing Syslog, page 491
Verifying Syslog, page 493
Prerequisites for Configuring Syslog

Information About Syslog

Syslog is a method to collect messages from devices to a server running a syslog daemon. A syslog service
simply accepts messages, and stores them in files or prints them according to a simple configuration file. This
form of logging is the best available for Cisco devices because it can provide protected long-term storage for
logs. This is useful both in routine troubleshooting and in incident handling.
Later Releases
489
Configuring Syslog
Enabling Syslog
Enabling Syslog
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
sysLog
Enters the sysLog mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# sysLog
Step 4
setSyslogProperties sysLogConf {valid | logServer {valid Configures syslog properties.

| host {hostname | ipv4address}} | level {info | error |
sysLogConfSets syslog properties.
warning}} {enable | disable}
validEnables or disables logging.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-sysLog)#
setSyslogProperties sysLogConf valid enable
setSyslogProperties sysLogConf level info
setSyslogProperties sysLogConf logServer valid
enable
setSyslogProperties sysLogConf logServer host
logServerSpecifies the logging server.

validEnables or disables logging server.
hostSpecifies log server name or hostname.
hostnameSpecifies domain name of the logging
server.
ipv4addressSpecifies IPv4 address of the logging
server.
levelSpecifies the log level.
info Specifies the level information.
error Specifies the level error.
warning Specifies the level warning.
enable Enables configuration of syslog properties.
disable Disables configuration of syslog properties.
Step 5
setSyslogProperties review
Example:
setSyslogProperties review
and Later Releases
490
Configuring Syslog
Clearing Syslog
Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
setSyslogProperties commit
Example:
setSyslogProperties commit
Step 7
.Exits to the config-controller mode.
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-sysLog)# exit
The example shows how to enable syslog:
10.78.101.221
setSyslogProperties
setSyslogProperties
setSyslogProperties
setSyslogProperties
sysLogConf valid enable

sysLogConf level info
sysLogConf logServer valid enable
sysLogConf logServer host ipv4address
Switch(config-controller-sysLog)# setSyslogProperties review

Switch(config-controller-sysLog)# setSyslogProperties commit
Clearing Syslog
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Enters the sysLog mode.
sysLog
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# sysLog
Step 4
clearSysLog clearLogLevelConf {error | info |

warning} {enable | disable}
Clears system log information.

clearLogLevelConfClears log information.
Later Releases
491
Configuring Syslog
Clearing Syslog
Command or Action
Purpose
errorSpecifies level error.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-sysLog)# clearSysLog
clearLogLevelConf info enable
infoSpecifies level information.

warningSpecifies level warning.
enableEnables the clearing of log information.
disableDisables the clearing of log information.
Step 5
clearSysLog review
Example:
review
Step 6
clearSysLog commit
Example:
commit
Step 7

Clears system log level errors.

Example:
clearLogLevelConf error enable

Step 8
clearSysLog review
Example:
review
Step 9
clearSysLog commit
Example:
commit
Step 10

Clears system log level warnings.

Example:
clearLogLevelConf warning enable

and Later Releases
492
Configuring Syslog
Verifying Syslog
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 11
clearSysLog review
Example:
review
Step 12
clearSysLog commit
Example:
commit
Step 13
exit
Example:
The example shows how to clear syslog:
clearSysLog
clearSysLog
clearSysLog
clearSysLog
clearSysLog
clearSysLog
clearSysLog
clearSysLog
clearSysLog
exit
clearLogLevelConf info
review
commit
clearLogLevelConf error
review
commit
clearLogLevelConf warning
review
commit
Verifying Syslog
Use the following command to verify the syslog status on the controller.
showLogLevelConf
This command displays the syslog configuration status on the NID. The following is a sample output
from the command:
Switch(config-controller-sysLog)# showSysLog showLogLevelConf
Switch(config-controller-sysLog)# showSysLog review
Commands in queue:
showSysLog showLogLevelConf
Switch(config-controller-sysLog)# showSysLog commit
Later Releases
493
Configuring Syslog
Verifying Syslog

ShowSysLog_Output.showLogLevelResponse.hostMode = true
ShowSysLog_Output.showLogLevelResponse.hostAddress = '10.78.101.221'
ShowSysLog_Output.showLogLevelResponse.logLevel = 'info'
ShowSysLog_Output.showLogLevelResponse.noOfLogEntries.InfoCounter =
40
ShowSysLog_Output.showLogLevelResponse.noOfLogEntries.warningCounter
= 0
ShowSysLog_Output.showLogLevelResponse.noOfLogEntries.errorCounter =
0
ShowSysLog Commit Success!!!
and Later Releases
494
CHAPTER
24
Configuring Dedicated Debug Shell

This document describes the configuration steps to directly access Cisco ME 1200 NID using a dedicated
debug shell.
Prerequisites for Directly Accessing Cisco ME 1200 NID, page 495
Information About Dedicated Debug Shell, page 495
How to Provision Dedicated Debug Shell, page 496
Directly Accessing the Cisco ME 1200 NID Using a Dedicated Debug Shell, page 496
Prerequisites for Directly Accessing Cisco ME 1200 NID

Information About Dedicated Debug Shell

Dedicated debug shell provides direct access to Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Later Releases
495

How to Provision Dedicated Debug Shell
How to Provision Dedicated Debug Shell

Configuring the UPE NID Controller to Directly Access a Cisco ME 1200 NID
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
debugShell
Enters the dedicated debug shell mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# debugShell
The example shows how to configure an UPE NID Controller to Directly Access a Cisco ME 1200 NID:
Switch(config-controller)# debugShell
What to Do Next
Log on to the Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Directly Accessing the Cisco ME 1200 NID Using a Dedicated

Debug Shell
Log on to the Cisco ME 1200 NID using the username and password.
and Later Releases
496

Directly Accessing the Cisco ME 1200 NID Using a Dedicated Debug Shell
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
Displays the available

commands to enter the
dedicated debug shell.
Example:
NID-1# ?
apply
clear
configure
copy
delete
diagnostic
dir
disable
do
dot1x
enable
erps
exit
firmware
help
ip
link-oam
logout
more
no
ping
platform
ptp
reload
rfc2544
send
show
terminal
Step 2
exit
Reset functions
Enter configuration mode
Copy from source to destination
Delete one file in flash: file system
diagnostic mode
Directory of all files in flash: file system
Turn off privileged commands
To run exec commands in config mode
IEEE Standard for port-based Network Access Control
Turn on privileged commands
Ethernet Ring Protection Switching
Exit from EXEC mode
Firmware upgrade/swap
Description of the interactive help system
IPv4 commands
Link OAM configuration
Exit from EXEC mode
Display file
Send ICMP echo messages
Platform configuration
Misc non persistent 1588 settings
Reload system.
RFC2544 perfomance tests
Send a message to other tty lines
Show running system information
Set terminal line parameters
Exits the Cisco ME 1200
NID interface.
Example:
NID-1# exit
Later Releases
497

Directly Accessing the Cisco ME 1200 NID Using a Dedicated Debug Shell
and Later Releases
498
CHAPTER
25
Configuring SPAN
This document describes the Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN) feature and configuration steps to implement
SPAN.
Prerequisites for Configuring SPAN, page 499
Restrictions for Configuring SPAN, page 499
Information About SPAN, page 500
How to Provision SPAN, page 500
Verifying Diagnostics POST, page 509
Prerequisites for Configuring SPAN

You must enable SPAN globally to support the desired SPAN configuration.
NID must have an IP address.
You must select a SPAN source from the following options:
Interfaceone or more source interfaces.
VLAN one or more source VLANs.
CPU to monitor CPU traffic.
Restrictions for Configuring SPAN

You cannot configure a port as both a source and destination port.
VLAN SPAN monitors only the traffic that leaves or enters Layer 2 ports in the VLAN.
SPAN sources interface and VLAN cannot exit together.
Later Releases
499
Configuring SPAN
Information About SPAN
Information About SPAN

Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN) feature, sometimes called port mirroring or port monitoring, selects network
traffic for analysis by a network analyzer. The SPAN feature is local when the monitored ports are all located
on the same switch as the destination port. A local SPAN session is an association of a destination port with
source ports. You can monitor incoming or outgoing traffic on a series or range of ports.
SPAN is used to monitor traffic within the switch. Traffic source can be from:
Single or multiple ports
Single or multiple VLANs
Source CPU
Destination can be an interface on the same switch. The following figure shows the topology used for
provisioning SPAN on a NID using a UPE NID Controller.
Figure 14: SPAN Topology
How to Provision SPAN

Enabling SPAN Globally to Start a Monitoring Session
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
and Later Releases
500
Configuring SPAN
Configuring SPAN Source Interface
Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
span
Enters the SPAN mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# span
Step 4
setSpanGlobalConfReq {enable | disbale}
Enters SPAN global configuration mode.

Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setSpanGlobalConf
setSpanGlobalConfReq enable
enableEnables SPAN globally.

disbaleDisables SPAN globally.
Step 5
setSpanGlobalConf review
Example:
review
Step 6
setSpanGlobalConf commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# exit
The example shows how to enable SPAN globally:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setSpanGlobalConf setSpanGlobalConfReq enable
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setSpanGlobalConf review
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setSpanGlobalConf commit

Before You Begin
Perform the steps to enable SPAN globally. See Enabling SPAN Globally to Start a Monitoring Session, on
page 500.
Later Releases
501
Configuring SPAN
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
Purpose
setSpanSrcConfRequest {source {cpu {rx | tx | Configures SPAN source interface.

both} | {vlan vlan_list} | interface {intf_range |
sourceMirrors source interface or VLAN.
traffic-type {rx | tx | both}}
cpuMirrors source CPU.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)#
setSpanSrcConf commitsetSpanSrcConf
setSpanSrcConfRequest source interface
intf_range 1-2
rxMirrors received traffic.

txMirrors transmitted traffic.
bothMirrors received and transmitted traffic.
vlanMirrors source VLAN.
vlan_listMirrors source VLAN.
interface Mirrors source interface and traffic type.
intf_rangeMirrors an interface number or a range from 1 to
6.
traffic-typeMirrors traffic type.
Step 2
setSpanSrcConfRequest {source {cpu {rx | tx | Configures SPAN source traffic type as both, receive and transmit.
Example:
setSpanSrcConf commitsetSpanSrcConf
setSpanSrcConfRequest source interface
traffic-type both

intf_rangeMirrors an interface number or a range from 1 to
6.
and Later Releases
502
Configuring SPAN
Configuring SPAN Source CPU
Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
setSpanSrcConf review
Example:
Step 4
Example:
setSpanSrcConf commit
Step 5
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure SPAN on an interface range:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setSpanSrcConf commitsetSpanSrcConf setSpanSrcConfRequest
source interface intf_range 1-2
source interface traffic-type both
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setSpanSrcConf review
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setSpanSrcConf commit

Before You Begin
page 500.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
setSpanSrcConfRequest {source {cpu {rx | tx |

Configures SPAN source CPU.

Later Releases
503
Configuring SPAN
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
setSpanSrcConf setSpanSrcConfRequest source
cpu both

intf_rangeMirrors an interface number or a range from 1
to 6.
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setSpanSrcConf setSpanSrcConfRequest source cpu both
and Later Releases
504
Configuring SPAN
Configuring SPAN Source VLAN
Configuring SPAN Source VLAN

Before You Begin
page 500.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose

Configures SPAN source VLAN.

Example:
setSpanSrcConf setSpanSrcConfRequest source
vlan vlan_list 100

intf_rangeMirrors an interface number or a range from 1
to 6.
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Later Releases
505
Configuring SPAN
Configuring SPAN Destination
Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setSpanSrcConf setSpanSrcConfRequest source vlan
vlan_list 100
Configuring SPAN Destination

Before You Begin
page 500.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
setSpanDestConfRequest destination intf_id
Configures SPAN destination.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setSpanDestConf
setSpanDestConfRequest destination intf_id 4
Step 2
setSpanDestConf review
destinationMirrors destination interface.

intf_idSpecifies single port ID range from
1 to 6.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setSpanDestConf review
Step 3
setSpanDestConf commit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setSpanDestConf commit
and Later Releases
506
Configuring SPAN
Deleting SPAN Source Configuration
Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure SPAN destination:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setSpanDestConf setSpanDestConfRequest destination
intf_id 4
Deleting SPAN Source Configuration

Before You Begin
page 500.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
Purpose
delSpanSrcConfRequest {source {cpu {rx | tx Deletes SPAN source configuration.

| both} | {vlan vlan_list} | interface {intf_range
sourceRemoves mirror of source interface or VLAN.
| traffic-type {rx | tx | both}}
cpuRemoves mirror of source CPU.
Example:
delSpanSrcConf delSpanSrcConfRequest
source cpu rx
rxRemoves mirror of received traffic.

txRemoves mirror of transmitted traffic.
bothRemoves mirror of received and transmitted traffic.
vlanRemoves mirror of source VLAN.
vlan_listRemoves mirror of source VLAN.
interface Removes mirror of source interface and traffic type.
intf_rangeRemoves mirror of interface number or a range
from 1 to 6.
Later Releases
507
Configuring SPAN
Deleting SPAN Destination Configuration
Command or Action
Purpose
traffic-typeRemoves mirror of traffic type.
rxRemoves mirror of received traffic.
txRemoves mirror of transmitted traffic.
bothRemoves mirror of received and transmitted traffic.
Step 2
delSpanSrcConf review
Example:
delSpanSrcConf review
Step 3
delSpanSrcConf commit
Example:
delSpanSrcConf commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# delSpanSrcConf delSpanSrcConfRequest source cpu rx
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# delSpanSrcConf review
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# delSpanSrcConf commit
Deleting SPAN Destination Configuration

Before You Begin
page 500.
and Later Releases
508
Configuring SPAN
Verifying Diagnostics POST
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
delSpanDestConfRequest destination intf_id
Deletes SPAN destination configuration.

destinationRemoves mirror of destination
interface.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# delSpanDstConf
delSpanDstConfRequest detination intf_id 4
Step 2
intf_idSpecifies single port ID range from 1

to 6.
delSpanDstConf review
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# delSpanDstConf review
Step 3
delSpanDstConf commit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# delSpanDstConf commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure SPAN destination:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# delSpanDstConf delSpanDstConfRequest detination intf_id
4
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# delSpanDstConf review
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# delSpanDstConf commit
Verifying Diagnostics POST

Use the following commands to verify the diagnostics test status.
showDiagResults showDiagTestResults
The following is a sample output from the command:
Switch(config-controller-Diagnostics)#
showDiagResults review
Later Releases
509
Configuring SPAN
Commands in queue:
showDiagResults commit
ShowDiagResults_Output.diagTestResults.testresult[0]
Loopback Test =>'
Reference Source Clock Test =>'
Test =>'
ShowDiagResults Commit Success!!!
= 'External Port
= 'Passed'
= 'Sync-E
= 'Passed'
= 'PTP One PPS
= 'Passed'
Related Documents
Related Topic
Document Title

MIBs
MIB
MIBs Link
and Later Releases
510
Configuring SPAN
Description
Link

Later Releases
511
Configuring SPAN
and Later Releases
512
CHAPTER
26
Configuring RSPAN
This document describes the Remote Switched Port Analyzer (RSPAN) feature and configuration steps to
implement RSPAN.
Prerequisites for Configuring RSPAN, page 513
Restrictions for Configuring RSPAN, page 513
Information About RSPAN, page 514
How to Provision RSPAN, page 514
Verifying RSPAN, page 521
Prerequisites for Configuring RSPAN

You must enable SPAN globally to support the desired SPAN configuration.
You must select a SPAN source from the following options:
Interfaceone or more source interfaces.
VLAN one or more source VLANs.
CPU to monitor CPU traffic.
Restrictions for Configuring RSPAN

You cannot configure a port as both a source and destination port.
VLAN SPAN monitors only the traffic that leaves or enters Layer 2 ports in the VLAN.
SPAN sources interface and VLAN cannot exit together.
Later Releases
513
Configuring RSPAN
Information About RSPAN
Information About RSPAN

Remote Switched Port Analyzer (RSPAN) is an advanced feature that requires a special VLAN to carry the
traffic that is monitored by SPAN between switches. RSPAN is useful when source ports are not located on
the same switch as the destination port. The following figure shows the topology used for provisioning RSPAN
on two NIDs using a UPE NID Controller.
Figure 15: RSPAN Topology
How to Provision RSPAN

Enabling SPAN Globally to Start a Monitoring Session
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
span
Example:
Step 4
setSpanGlobalConfReq {enable | disbale}
Enters SPAN global configuration mode.

Example:
setSpanGlobalConfReq enable
enableEnables SPAN globally.
and Later Releases
514
Configuring RSPAN
Configuring SPAN Source Interface on NID-1
Command or Action
Purpose
disbaleDisables SPAN globally.
Step 5
setSpanGlobalConf review
Example:
review
Step 6
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to enable SPAN globally:
Configuring SPAN Source Interface on NID-1

Before You Begin
page 500.
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose

Configures SPAN source interface.

Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setSpanSrcConf
commitsetSpanSrcConf setSpanSrcConfRequest
source interface intf_range 1/4

Later Releases
515
Configuring RSPAN
Configuring Destination VLAN on NID-1
Command or Action
Purpose
intf_rangeMirrors an interface number or a range from
1 to 6.
Step 2
Example:
review
Step 3
Example:
commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure SPAN source on NID-1:
source interface intf_range 1/4
Configuring Destination VLAN on NID-1

Before You Begin
Perform the steps to configure SPAN source on NID-1. See Configuring SPAN Source Interface on NID-1,
on page 515.
and Later Releases
516
Configuring RSPAN
Configuring Source VLAN on NID-2
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
setrSpandestConf setRSpanDestConfRequest remote vlan_id Configures destination VLAN.

remoteMirrors remote destination.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setrSpandestConf
setRSpanDestConfRequest 500 vlan_id 500
Step 2
Purpose
setrSpandestConf review
vlan_id Remote mirror destination VLAN

number.
Example:
review
Step 3
setrSpandestConf commit
Example:
commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure destination VLAN on NID-1:
Switch(SPAN)# exit Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setrSpandestConf
setRSpanDestConfRequest remote vlan_id 500
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setrSpandestConf review
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setrSpandestConf commit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Enters the global configuration mode.
Example:
Later Releases
517
Configuring RSPAN
Step 2
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 3
span
Example:
Step 4
setrSpansrcConf setRSpanSrcConfRequest remote vlan_id Configures RSPAN source.

remoteMirrors remote source.
Example:
Switch((config-controller)SPAN)# setrSpansrcConf
setRSpanSrcConfRequest remote vlan_id 500
Step 5
setrSpansrcConf review
vlan_id Remote mirror source VLAN

number.
Example:
review
Step 6
setrSpansrcConf commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch((config-controller)SPAN)# exit
The example shows how to configure source VLAN on NID-2:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setrSpansrcConf setRSpanSrcConfRequest remote vlan_id
500
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setrSpansrcConf review
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setrSpansrcConf commit
and Later Releases
518
Configuring RSPAN
Configuring Destination Interface on NID-2
Configuring Destination Interface on NID-2

Before You Begin
Perform the steps to configure source VLAN on NID-2. See Configuring Source VLAN on NID-2, on page
517.
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Step 1
Purpose
setSpanDestConf setSpanDestConfRequest destination intf_id Configures destination interface.

destinationMirrors destination interface.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# setSpanDestConf
setSpanDestConfRequest destination intf_id 5
Step 2
intf_id Single port ID from 1 to 6.

Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example shows how to configure destination VLAN on NID-1:
intf_id 5
setSpanDestConf setSpanDestConfRequest destination

exit
Later Releases
519
Configuring RSPAN
Deleting RSPAN Source Configuration on NID-2
Deleting RSPAN Source Configuration on NID-2

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
delRSpanSrcConfRequest remote vlan_id
Deletes RSPAN source configuration.

remoteRemoves remote mirror source.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# delRSpanSrcConf
delRSpanSrcConfRequest remote vlan_id 500
Step 2
vlan_id Removes remote mirror source

VLAN number.
delRSpanSrcConf review
Example:
review
Step 3
delRSpanSrcConf commit
Example:
commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example shows how to delete RSPAN source configuration on NID-2:
500
delRSpanSrcConf delRSpanSrcConfRequest remote vlan_id

delRSpanSrcConf review
delRSpanSrcConf commit
exit
and Later Releases
520
Configuring RSPAN
Deleting RSPAN Destination Configuration on NID-1
Deleting RSPAN Destination Configuration on NID-1

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
delRSpanDstConfRequest remote vlan_id
Deletes RSPAN destination configuration.

remoteRemoves remote mirror destination.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# delRSpanDstConf
delRSpanDstConfRequest remote vlan_id 500
Step 2
vlan_idRemoves remote mirror destination

VLAN number.
delSpanDstConf review
Example:
review
Step 3
delSpanDstConf commit
Example:
commit
Step 4
exit
Example:
The example shows how to delete RSPAN destination configuration on NID-1:
500
delRSpanDstConf delRSpanDstConfRequest remote vlan_id

delRSpanDstConf review
delRSpanDstConf commit
exit
Verifying RSPAN
Use the following commands to verify the RSPAN status on the controller.
showSpanConfig showSpanConfigReq
This command displays the SPAN configuration status on the NID, when source interface is 1/4 and
traffic type is both. The following is a sample output from the command:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# showSpanConfig showSpanConfigReq
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# showSpanConfig review
Later Releases
521
Configuring RSPAN
Commands in queue:
showSpanConfig showSpanConfigReq
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# showSpanConfig commit
ShowSpanConfig_Output.showSpanConfigResp.span_config[0] = 'Session:
1, Mode: Disabled'
ShowSpanConfig_Output.showSpanConfigResp.span_config[1] = 'Type: Remote
Source Session'
ShowSpanConfig_Output.showSpanConfigResp.span_config[2] = 'Dest RMIRROR
VLAN: 500'
ShowSpanConfig_Output.showSpanConfigResp.span_config[3] = 'Source
VLAN(s): '
ShowSpanConfig_Output.showSpanConfigResp.span_config[4] = 'Source
port(s): 1/5'
ShowSpanConfig_Output.showSpanConfigResp.span_config[5] = 'Traffic
Type: '
ShowSpanConfig_Output.showSpanConfigResp.span_config[6] = 'rx : 1/5'
ShowSpanConfig_Output.showSpanConfigResp.span_config[7] = 'Destination
Ports: 1/4'
ShowSpanConfig Commit Success!!!
Related Documents
Related Topic
Document Title

MIBs
MIB
MIBs Link
and Later Releases
522
Configuring RSPAN
Description
Link

Later Releases
523
Configuring RSPAN
and Later Releases
524
CHAPTER
27
Configuring RFC 2544

This document describes the RFC 2544 feature and configuration steps to implement RFC 2544.
Prerequisites for Configuring RFC 2544, page 525
Restrictions for Configuring RFC 2544, page 525
Information About RFC 2544, page 526
How to Provision RFC 2544, page 528
Verifying RFC 2544, page 565
Prerequisites for Configuring RFC 2544

You must disable:
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) transmit and receive on source port.
Loop protection on destination port or Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) on destination and source
port.
You must create:
Traffic test loop on destination port.
RFC 2544 profile with source port specified.
There should be no traffic coming in or out of the ports.
Restrictions for Configuring RFC 2544

Ethernet Virtual Circuit (EVC) Maintenance End Points (MEP) is not supported.
Later Releases
525

Information About RFC 2544
The RFC 2544 report can not be accessed on the Controller. You can save the report to a TFTP server.

RFC 2544 defines a number of tests that can be used to describe the performance characteristics of a network
interconnect devices. These tests certify that a Service Level Agreement (SLA) between a customer and a
service provider is met.
You can perform RFC 2544 benchmark tests on Carrier Ethernet switch platforms running ME 1200 software
without the need for any external test equipment.
The RFC 2544 benchmarking can be run on a Metro Ethernet and offers a variety of diagnosis, such as:
ThroughputMeasures the maximum rate at which none of the offered frames are dropped on the device.
Back-to-backMeasures the buffering capacity of a device.
Frame lossMeasures the performance of a network device in an overloaded state.
LatencyMeasures the round-trip time taken by a test frame to travel through a network device or across
the network and back to the test port.
In addition, the ME 1200 software includes a test suite tool that allows creating, saving, and executing test
profiles and capturing and reporting results. The Local Node acts as a frame generator and checker.
Note
For RFC 2544 to function properly, the Remote Node must support looping of particular frames.
The RFC 2544 benchmarking can be done either on the Port MEP or Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN)
MEP. The following figure shows the topology used for provisioning RFC 2544 on two NIDs using a UPE
NID Controller.
Figure 16: RFC 2544 Topology
Before executing RFC 2544 test, you must prepare a test profile. The RFC 2544 test profile contains all the
parameters associated with one test, where one test may be a combination of one or more sub-tests (Throughput,
Latency, and Frame Loss, Back-to-Back).
Common and sub-test specific parameters in a test profile are listed below:
Common Parameters
Profile Name Name of each profile. Name can be up to 32 characters. Default name is New
profile.
and Later Releases
526

Profile DescriptionA text description up to 128 characters associated with the profile. Default
description is blank.
MEG Level Maintenance Entity Group (MEG) level on which the RFC 2544 test is run. Default
MEG level is 7.
Egress PortEgress port of the switch on which the RFC 2544 test frames are generated and
checked.
Sequence Number CheckChecks generated frame sequence number. Default is Disabled.
Dwell TimeNumber of seconds to wait after each trial for the system to settle before reading
statistics from the hardware. Default is 2 seconds.
TypeSelects between two types of traffic: Port Down_MEP and VLAN-based Down_MEP.
With VLAN-based Down_MEP, a configurable VLAN tag is inserted in the generated test frames.
VLAN IDSpecifies the VLAN ID if VLAN-based Down_MEP is configured.
PCPSpecifies the PCP value if VLAN-basedDown_MEP is configured.
DEISpecifies the DEI value if VLAN-based Down_MEP is configured.
DMACSpecifies the DMAC of the generated frames for both Port-based and VLAN-based
Down_MEP.
Frame SizeSpecifies the frame size each test must be repeated with, such as 64,128,256,512,
1024,1280,1518,2000, and 9600 bytes. Default frame size is all but 9600.
Sub-Tests To RunSpecifies the sub-tests to be run in the profile (Throughput, Latency, Frame
Loss, Back-to-Back). Default sub-tests to run is Throughput and Latency.
Throughput Test Parameters
Trial DurationDuration of a trial run in seconds. Valid range is from 1 to 1800 seconds. Default
trial duration is 60 seconds.
Minimum and Maximum RateSpecifies the maximum and minimum search rates.
Rate StepSpecifies the granularity of search within the minimum and maximum rates define
above. All three input parameters are specified in % of the egress ports actual link speed and must
be in the range from 1 to 1000% with a granularity of 1%. Default rate step is Minimum: 800%
of link speed, Maximum: 1000% of link speed, and Step size: 20% of link speed.
Allowed Frame LossSpecifies the allowable frame loss. Valid value is in range is from 0 to
100% with a granularity of 1%. Default allowable frame loss is 0.
Latency Test Parameters
Delay Measurement IntervalSpecifies the number of seconds between each delay measurement.
Valid range is from 1 to 60 seconds in steps of 1 second. Default delay measurement interval is
10 seconds.
Allowed Frame LossSpecifies the pass criterion of an allowable frame loss. Valid range is from
0 to 10% with a granularity of 0.1%. Default allowed frame loss is 0.
Later Releases
527

How to Provision RFC 2544
Frame Loss Test Parameters

Minimum and Maximum RateSpecifies the maximum and minimum search rates.
Rate StepSpecifies the granularity of search within the minimum and maximum rates define
above. All three input parameters must be specified in % of the egress ports actual link speed and
must be in the range from 1 to 1000% with a granularity of 1%. Default rate step is Minimum:
800%.
Back-to-Back Test Parameters
Trial durationSpecifies the duration of a burst. Valid range is from 100 to 10000 milliseconds.
Default trial duration is 2000 milliseconds.
Trial CountSpecifies the number of times the trial is executed. Valid range is from 1 to 100.
Default trial count is 50. Up to 16 profiles can be created and saved in the switch flash memory.
RFC 2544 Test Report

On executing a RFC 2544 test profile, RFC 2544 test report is generated. The RFC 2544 test report is in clear
text format and contains all the input parameters defined by the associated test profile and the measurement
results. The RFC 2544 test report can be used to certify if an SLA is met.
The last 10 RFC 2544 test reports are stored in the Flash memory of the UPE NID controller.
How to Provision RFC 2544

Disabling LLDP Port on NID-1
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
and Later Releases
528

Command or Action
Step 4
Purpose
setLldpportconfig lldpPortConfiguration {lldp_receive_enable Sets the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
{disable | enable} | lldp_transmit_enable {disable | enable} | port configuration.
lldp_receive_enableWhether LLDP receive
is enabled or disabled.
Example:
Step 5

Displays the setLldpPortConfig configuration.
Example:
Step 6
Sends the setLldpConfig configuration to the ME

1200 NID.
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to disable LLDP port on NID-1:
port_number 3
exit
Later Releases
529

Creating Layer 2 VLANs on NID-1

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4

1 to 4095.
Example:
Step 5
Example:
Step 6
Sends the createVlanCommand configuration to

the ME 1200 NID.
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
The example shows how to create Layer 2 VLANs on NID-1:
2-4095
and Later Releases
530

Assigning VLANs to Ports on NID-1


DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode access vlan

vlan_id
Sets the mode to ACCESS, and assigns a VLAN.
Example:
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode trunk native
vlan 3
Step 5

Example:

vlan_dSpecifies the VLAN ID. The valid
Step 6
modifySwPort review
Example:
modifySwPort review
Later Releases
531

Disabling Spanning-Tree Protocol on NID-1
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
modifySwPort commit
Sends the modifySwPort configuration to the ME

1200 NID.
Example:
modifySwPort commit
Step 8
exit
Example:
exit
The example shows how to assign VLANs to ports on NID-1:
interaface 3
trunk native vlan 3
modifySwPort review
modifySwPort commit
exit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
and Later Releases
532

Command or Action
Step 4
Purpose
setStpglobalConfig stpGlobalConfig {edge

{bpdu-filter | bpdu-guard} {enable | disable} | mode
{mstp | rstp | stp} {enable | disable} | mst
configuration.
{forward-time Fwdtime | instance instance {active
{enable | disable} | priority Prio | vlan WORD} |
max-age Maxage | max-hops Maxhops | name Name |
bpdu-filterEnables or disables the BPDU filter
revision Revision } | port-number Port number {enable
(stop BPDU tx/rx).
| disable} | recovery Interval | transmit hold-count }
bpdu-guardEnables or disables the BPDU guard.
Example:
setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig port-number
3 disable
Note
If the spanning-tree mode is STP or RSTP, and

if the priority for the software needs to be
changed, you can change using mst instance 0
and priority.

mstpEnables or disables the Multiple Spanning
Tree (802.1s).
rstpEnables or disables the Rapid Spanning Tree
(802.1w)
stpEnables or disables the Spanning Tree (802.1D).
FwdtimeForward time. The range is from 4 to 30
seconds.
Prio Specifies the priority. The range is from
0 to 61440 seconds. The range should be given
in the sets of (0, 4096, 8192...) and so on.
WORDVLAN range.
MaxageMaximum age. The range is from 6 to 40
seconds.
MaxhopsMaximum hops. The range is from 6 to
40 hop counts.
NameName of the bridge. You can use 32 characters
to define.
revisions.
port-numberConfigures the port number in the range
from 1 to 6.
Port numberPort number. The range is from 1 to 6.
Later Releases
533

Command or Action
Purpose
seconds.
hold-countMaximum number of transmit BPDUs
per second. The range is from 1 to 10 seconds.
Step 5
Displays the setStpGlobalConfig.
Example:
Step 6
Sends the setStpGlobalConfig configuration to the ME 1200 NID.
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
exit
The example shows how to disable Spanning-Tree Protocol on NID-1:
3 disable
and Later Releases
534


DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
setLldpportconfig lldpPortConfiguration {lldp_receive_enable Sets the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
{disable | enable} | lldp_transmit_enable {disable | enable} | port configuration.
lldp_receive_enableWhether LLDP
receive is enabled or disabled.
Example:
Step 5
Displays the setLldpPortConfig configuration.
Example:
Step 6
Sends the setLldpConfig configuration to the ME

1200 NID.
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
Later Releases
535

The example shows how to disable LLDP port on NID-2:
port_number 3
exit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4

1 to 4095.
Example:
Step 5
Example:
Step 6
Sends the createVlanCommand configuration to

the ME 1200 NID.
Example:
and Later Releases
536

Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
exit
The example shows how to create Layer 2 VLANs on NID-2:
2-4095

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig interface interface_id Modifies the switchport configuration on the defined
interface.
Example:
Step 5
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode access vlan

vlan_id
Sets the mode to ACCESS, and assigns a VLAN.
Later Releases
537

Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
modifySwPort modifySWPortConfig mode trunk native
vlan 3
Step 6

Example:

vlan_dSpecifies the VLAN ID. The valid
Step 7
modifySwPort review
Example:
modifySwPort review
Step 8
modifySwPort commit
Sends the modifySwPort configuration to the ME

1200 NID.
Example:
modifySwPort commit
Step 9
exit
Example:
exit
The example shows how to assign VLANs to ports on NID-2:
interaface 3
trunk native vlan 3
modifySwPort review
modifySwPort commit
exit
and Later Releases
538


DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Example:
Step 4
setStpglobalConfig stpGlobalConfig {edge

{bpdu-filter | bpdu-guard} {enable | disable} | mode
{mstp | rstp | stp} {enable | disable} | mst
configuration.
{forward-time Fwdtime | instance instance {active
{enable | disable} | priority Prio | vlan WORD} |
max-age Maxage | max-hops Maxhops | name Name |
bpdu-filterEnables or disables the BPDU filter
revision Revision } | port-number Port number {enable
(stop BPDU tx/rx).
| disable} | recovery Interval | transmit hold-count }
bpdu-guardEnables or disables the BPDU guard.
Example:
setStpGlobalConfig stpGlobalConfig port-number
3 disable
Note
If the spanning-tree mode is STP or RSTP, and

if the priority for the software needs to be
changed, you can change using mst instance 0
and priority.

mstpEnables or disables the Multiple Spanning
Tree (802.1s).
rstpEnables or disables the Rapid Spanning Tree
(802.1w)
stpEnables or disables the Spanning Tree (802.1D).
FwdtimeForward time. The range is from 4 to 30
seconds.
Later Releases
539

Command or Action
Purpose
Prio Specifies the priority. The range is from
0 to 61440 seconds. The range should be given
in the sets of (0, 4096, 8192...) and so on.
WORDVLAN range.
MaxageMaximum age. The range is from 6 to 40
seconds.
MaxhopsMaximum hops. The range is from 6 to
40 hop counts.
NameName of the bridge. You can use 32 characters
to define.
revisions.
port-numberConfigures the port number in the range
from 1 to 6.
Port numberPort number. The range is from 1 to 6.
seconds.
hold-countMaximum number of transmit BPDUs
per second. The range is from 1 to 10 seconds.
Step 5
Displays the setStpGlobalConfig.
Example:
Step 6
Sends the setStpGlobalConfig configuration to the ME 1200 NID.
Example:
and Later Releases
540

Creating Port MEP Profile on NID-1
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
exit
The example shows how to disable Spanning-Tree Protocol on NID-2:
3 disable

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Enters the RFC2544PortType mode.
RFC2544PortType
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# RFC2544PortType
Step 4
setRfc2544Profile Rfc2544Profile {profileName |

Creates Port MEP profile.
description | megLevel | egressPort | seqNoCheck
profileNameSpecifies RFC 2544 profile name.
{enable | disable} | dwellTime | mepType
{portDownMep | vlanDownMep} | vlanId | pcp | dei |
descriptionAdds a description to profile.
dMac}
Note
We recommend that you add a description for
the profile.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)#
setRfc2544Profile Rfc2544Profile profileName
profile1
megLevelSets profile MEG level used in TST PDUs.

egressPortSets the egress interface on which PDUs
are transmitted.
Later Releases
541

Command or Action
setRfc2544Profile Rfc2544Profile description
profile1
setRfc2544Profile Rfc2544Profile egressPort 3
setRfc2544Profile Rfc2544Profile megLevel 5
setRfc2544Profile Rfc2544Profile mepType
portDownMep
setRfc2544Profile Rfc2544Profile seqNoCheck
disable
Purpose
seqNoCheckEnables sequence number checking of
looped TST PDUs.
enableEnables sequence number.
disableDisables sequence number.
dwellTimeControls the number of seconds that the
execution pauses after each trial, before reading counters
and status from hardware.
mepTypeSpecifies MEP type port. MEP or VLAN
MEP.
portDownMepCreates a port down MEP.
vlanDownMepCreates a VLAN down MEP. All
PDUs are then transmitted with a VLAN tag.
vlanIdSpecifies VLAN ID incase of VLAN down MEP.
pcpSpecifies PCP value used in the VLAN tag incase
of VLAN MEP.
deiSpecifies DEI value used in the VLAN tag incase
vlan mep.
dMacSpecifies destination MAC address used in
generation of the Y.1731 TST and 1DM frames.
Step 5
setRfc2544Profile review
Displays the setRfc2544Profile.
Example:
Switch((config-controller)RFC2544PortType)#
Step 6
setRfc2544Profile commit
Sends the setRfc2544Profile configuration to the Cisco ME

1200 NID.
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch((config-controller)RFC2544PortType)# exit
and Later Releases
542

Creating Traffic Test Loop on Destination Port on NID-2
The example shows how to create Port MEP profile on NID-1:
profile1
profile1
portDownMep
disable

setRfc2544Profile Rfc2544Profile seqNoCheck
setrfc2544profile commit
exit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Enters the RFC2544PortType configuration mode.
RFC2544PortType
Example:
Step 4
setTrafficTestLoop trafficTestLoopConfig
Creates traffic test loop on destination port on NID-2.
{instNum | adminState {enable | disable} | custVID
instNumSpecifies the traffic-test-loop instance number.
| name | type {macLoop | oamLoop} | interface |
direction {facility | terminal} | domain {evc | port
adminStateSpecifies the administrative state.
| vlan} | flowld | level}
enableCreates a loop if all required resources are
available and operational state is up.
Example:
interface 3
setTrafficTestLoop trafficTestLoopConfig type
macLoop
direction facility
disableDeletes the loop and operational state is down.

custVIDOnly relevant for OAM-loop in EVC domain. Loops
C-tagged customer frames with this specified VID in the EVC.
nameSpecifies the traffic-test-loop name.
typeSpecifies the type of the traffic-test-loop. Currently only
MAC loop is supported.
Later Releases
543

Command or Action
domain port
adminState enable
instNum 1
Purpose
macLoopAll frames in the flow are looped with MAC
swap.
oamLoopY.1731 OAM aware and is looping the
following:
Loopback Messages (LBM) and Loopback Replies
(LBR)
Delay Measurement Message (DMM) and Delay
Measurement Reply (DMR)
interfaceSpecifies the residence port of the traffic-test-loop.
directionSpecifies the direction of the traffic-test-loop.
facilitySpecifies that this traffic-test-loop is pointing
to the port. Looping is done from ingress to egress.
terminalSpecifies that this traffic-test-loop is pointing
to the forwarding plane. Looping is done from egress to
ingress.
Note
The terminal option is not
supported.
domainThe domain of the traffic-test-loop.
evcThis traffic-test-loop is in the EVC domain.
portThis traffic-test-loop is in the Port domain.
vlanThis traffic-test-loop is in the VLAN domain.
Note
Only port domain is

supported.
flowldSpecifies the EVC domain instance ID or VID in

VLAN domain.
levelSpecifies the Y.1731 OAM level of the traffic-test-loop.
This is relevant only for OAM looping type traffic-test-loop.
Step 5
setTrafficTestLoop review
Displays the setTrafficTestLoop configuration.
Example:
setTrafficTestLoop review
Step 6
setTrafficTestLoop commit
Sends the setTrafficTestLoop configuration to the ME 1200 NID.
Example:
setTrafficTestLoop commit
and Later Releases
544

Disabling Loop Protection on Destination Port on NID-2
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
exit
The example shows how to create traffic test loop on destination port on NID-2:
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setTrafficTestLoop trafficTestLoopConfig interface
3
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setTrafficTestLoop trafficTestLoopConfig type
macLoop
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setTrafficTestLoop trafficTestLoopConfig direction
facility
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setTrafficTestLoop trafficTestLoopConfig domain
port
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setTrafficTestLoop trafficTestLoopConfig adminState
enable
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setTrafficTestLoop trafficTestLoopConfig instNum
1
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setTrafficTestLoop review
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setTrafficTestLoop commit
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# exit
Disabling Loop Protection on Destination Port on NID-2

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
RFC2544PortType
Enters the RFC2544PortType configuration mode.
Example:
Step 4
deleteTrafficTestLoop deleteLoopConfig {trafficLoop Disables loop protection on destination port on NID-2.

instNum |loopPotect interface}
deleteLoopConfigDeletes traffic test loop
configuration.
Later Releases
545

Setting RFC 2544 Reporting Parameters on NID-1
Command or Action
Purpose
trafficLoopDeletes traffic test loop configuration.
Example:
instNumSpecifies the traffic-test-loop

instance number.
deleteTrafficTestLoop deleteLoopConfig loopPotect
interface 3
loopPotectDeletes loop protection at port level.

interfaceSpecifies the residence port of the
traffic-test-loop.
Step 5
Displays the deleteTrafficTestLoop configuration.
deleteTrafficTestLoop review
Example:
deleteTrafficTestLoop review
Step 6
Sends the deleteTrafficTestLoop configuration to the ME

1200 NID.
deleteTrafficTestLoop commit
Example:
deleteTrafficTestLoop commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch((config-controller)RFC2544PortType)# exit
The example shows how to disable loop protection on destination port on NID-2:
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# deleteTrafficTestLoop deleteLoopConfig loopPotect
interface 3
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# deleteTrafficTestLoop review
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# deleteTrafficTestLoop commit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
and Later Releases
546

Step 2
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 3
RFC2544PortType
Example:
Step 4
setReportParams rfc2544Reports reportAction {delete Sets RFC 2544 reporting parameters.

reportName | save {reportName | tftpPath} | start
reportActionSpecifies action to be performed on the
{reportName | profileName | description} | stop
report.
reportName | rename {oldName | newName}}
deleteDeletes the existing report.
Example:
setReportParams rfc2544Reports reportAction
start profileName profile1
start reportName profile1
start description profile1
reportNameSpecifies name of the report.

saveSaves the existing report.
reportNameSpecifies the name of existing
report.
tftpPathSpecifies TFTP server URL
tftp://server[:port]/path-to-file.
startStarts profile execution
reportNameSpecifies unique name of the
resulting report.
profileNameSpecifies name of the profile
to execute.
description(Optional) Provides a
description of the report.
Note
We recommend that you add a
description for the report.
stopStops the report.
reportNameSpecifies name of the report to
be stopped.
renameRenames the existing report.
oldNameSpecifies name of the old profile.
newNameSpecifies name of the new profile.
Later Releases
547

Displaying RFC 2544 Profile and Report on NID-1
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
setReportParams review
Displays the setReportParams configuration.
Example:
Step 6
setReportParams commit
Sends the setReportParams configuration to the ME 1200 NID.
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to set the RFC 2544 reporting parameters on NID-1:
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setReportParams rfc2544Reports reportAction start
profileName profile1
reportName profile1
description profile1
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setReportParams review
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setReportParams commit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
and Later Releases
548

Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
RFC2544PortType
Example:
Step 4
showRfc2544 showRequest show {profiles | report}
Displays RFC 2544 profile.

showDisplays profile or report.
Example:
showRfc2544 showRequest show profiles
profilesDisplays profile information.

reportDisplays report information.
Step 5
showRfc2544 review
Displays the showRfc2544 configuration.
Example:
showRfc2544 review
Step 6
showRfc2544 commit
Sends the setRfc2544Profile configuration to the ME

1200 NID.
Example:
showRfc2544 commit
Step 7

Example:
showRfc2544 showRequest show report

Step 8
showRfc2544 review
Example:
showRfc2544 review
Step 9
showRfc2544 commit

1200 NID.
Example:
showRfc2544 commit
Step 10
exit
Example:
Later Releases
549

Creating VLAN Profile on NID-1
The example shows how to display RFC 2544 profile and report on NID-1:
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# showRfc2544 showRequest show profiles
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# showRfc2544 review
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# showRfc2544 commit
ShowRfc2544_Output.showResponse.t = 1
ShowRfc2544_Output.showResponse.u.profile[0].profileName = 'profile1'
ShowRfc2544_Output.showResponse.u.profile[0].description = 'profile1'
ShowRfc2544 Commit Success!!!
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# showRfc2544 showRequest show report
ShowRfc2544_Output.showResponse.u.report[0].reportName = 'Report1'
ShowRfc2544_Output.showResponse.u.report[0].created =
'1970-01-04T07:29:25+00:00'
ShowRfc2544_Output.showResponse.u.report[0].status = 'Succeeded'
ShowRfc2544_Output.showResponse.u.report[1].reportName = 'Rep15'
'1970-01-02T01:57:34+00:00'
ShowRfc2544_Output.showResponse.u.report[1].status = 'Failed'
'1970-01-02T02:08:12+00:00'
ShowRfc2544_Output.showResponse.u.report[3].reportName = 'profile1'
'1970-01-02T03:48:16+00:00'

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
and Later Releases
550

Step 2
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 3
RFC2544PortType
Example:
Step 4
setRfc2544Profile Rfc2544Profile {profileName |

Creates RFC profile.
description | megLevel | egressPort | seqNoCheck
{enable | disable} | dwellTime | mepType
{portDownMep | vlanDownMep} | vlanId | pcp | dei |
descriptionAdds a description to profile.
dMac}
Note
We recommend that you add a description for
the profile.
Example:
vlan-profile
vlanDownMep
setRfc2544Profile Rfc2544Profile vlanId 999
vlanprofile
megLevelSets profile MEG level used in TST PDUs.

egressPortSets the egress interface on which PDUs
are transmitted.
seqNoCheckEnables sequence number checking of
looped TST PDUs.
enableEnables sequence number.
disableDisables sequence number.
dwellTimeControls the number of seconds that the
execution pauses after each trial, before reading counters
and status from hardware.
mepTypeSpecifies MEP type port. MEP or VLAN
MEP.
portDownMepCreates a port down MEP.
vlanDownMepCreates a VLAN down MEP. All
PDUs are then transmitted with a VLAN tag.
vlanIdSpecifies VLAN ID incase of VLAN down
MEP.
pcpSpecifies PCP value used in the VLAN tag incase
of VLAN MEP.
deiSpecifies DEI value used in the VLAN tag incase
vlan mep.
dMacSpecifies destination MAC address used in
generation of the Y.1731 TST and 1DM frames.
Later Releases
551

Getting RFC 2544 Profile for VLAN on NID-1
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
Displays the setRfc2544Profile.
Example:
Switch(config-controllerRFC2544PortType)#
Step 6
Sends the setRfc2544Profile configuration to the ME 1200

NID.
Example:
Switch(config-controllerRFC2544PortType)#
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controllerRFC2544PortType)# exit
The example shows how to create VLAN profile on NID-1:
vlan-profile
vlanDownMep
vlanprofile

setRfc2544Profile Rfc2544Profile vlanId 999
setrfc2544profile commit
exit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
and Later Releases
552

Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
RFC2544PortType
Example:
Step 4
getRfc2544Profile rfc2544Request profileName profileName Gets the RFC 2544 profile.

Example:
getRfc2544Profile rfc2544Request profileName
vlan-profile
Step 5
getRfc2544Profile review
rfc2544RequestSpecifies RFC2544 request

parameter.
profileNameSpecifies name of the profile.
Displays the getRfc2544Profile configuration.
Example:
getRfc2544Profile review
Step 6
getRfc2544Profile commit
Sends the getRfc2544Profile configuration to the

ME 1200 NID.
Example:
getRfc2544Profile commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to get RFC 2544 profile for VLAN on NID-1:
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# getRfc2544Profile rfc2544Request profileName
vlan-profile
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# getRfc2544Profile review
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# getRfc2544Profile commit
GetRfc2544Profile_Output.Rfc2544Profile.profileName = 'vlan-profile'
GetRfc2544Profile_Output.Rfc2544Profile.description = 'vlanprofile'
GetRfc2544Profile_Output.Rfc2544Profile.megLevel = 4
GetRfc2544Profile_Output.Rfc2544Profile.egressPort = 3
GetRfc2544Profile_Output.Rfc2544Profile.seqNoCheck.t = 2
GetRfc2544Profile_Output.Rfc2544Profile.seqNoCheck.u.disable = ''
GetRfc2544Profile_Output.Rfc2544Profile.dwellTime = 2
GetRfc2544Profile_Output.Rfc2544Profile.mepType.t = 2
GetRfc2544Profile_Output.Rfc2544Profile.mepType.u.vlanDownMep = ''
GetRfc2544Profile_Output.Rfc2544Profile.vlanId = 999
GetRfc2544Profile_Output.Rfc2544Profile.pcp = 0
GetRfc2544Profile_Output.Rfc2544Profile.dei = 0
GetRfc2544Profile_Output.Rfc2544Profile.dMac = '00-00-00-00-00-01'
Later Releases
553

Setting RFC 2544 Reporting Parameters for VLAN on NID-1
GetRfc2544Profile Commit Success!!!


DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
RFC2544PortType
Example:
Step 4
setReportParams rfc2544Reports reportAction {delete Sets RFC 2544 reporting parameters.

reportName | save {reportName | tftpPath} | start
reportActionSpecifies action to be performed on the
{reportName | profileName | description} | stop
report.
reportName | rename {oldName | newName}}
deleteDeletes the existing report.
Example:
start profileName vlan-profile
start reportName vlan-profile
start description vlan-profile
reportNameSpecifies name of the report.

saveSaves the existing report.
reportNameSpecifies the name of existing
report.
tftpPathSpecifies TFTP server URL
tftp://server[:port]/path-to-file.
startStarts profile execution
reportNameSpecifies unique name of the
resulting report.
profileNameSpecifies name of the profile
to execute.
description(Optional) Provides a
description of the report.
Note
We recommend that you add a
description for the report.
and Later Releases
554

Command or Action
Purpose
stopStops the report.
reportNameSpecifies name of the report to
be stopped.
renameRenames the existing report.
oldNameSpecifies name of the old profile.
newNameSpecifies name of the new profile.
Step 5
Displays the setReportParams configuration.
Example:
Step 6
Sends the setReportParams configuration to the ME 1200 NID.
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to set the RFC 2544 reporting parameters for VLAN on NID-1:
profileName vlan-profile
reportName vlan-profile
description vlan-profile
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setReportParams review
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setReportParams commit
Later Releases
555

Displaying RFC 2544 Report for VLAN on NID-1

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
RFC2544PortType
Example:
Step 4

Example:
showRfc2544 showRequest show profiles

Step 5
showRfc2544 review
Example:
showRfc2544 review
Step 6
showRfc2544 commit

1200 NID.
Example:
showRfc2544 commit
Step 7

Example:
showRfc2544 showRequest show report

Step 8
showRfc2544 review
Example:
showRfc2544 review
and Later Releases
556

Step 9
Command or Action
Purpose
showRfc2544 commit

1200 NID.
Example:
showRfc2544 commit
Step 10
exit
Example:
The example shows how to display RFC 2544 report for VLAN on NID-1:
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# showRfc2544 showRequest show report
'1970-01-04T07:29:25+00:00'
'1970-01-02T01:57:34+00:00'
'1970-01-02T02:08:12+00:00'
'1970-01-02T03:48:16+00:00'
Later Releases
557

Deleting RFC 2544 Profile on NID-1
Deleting RFC 2544 Profile on NID-1

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
RFC2544PortType
Example:
Step 4
deleterfc2544 rfc2544DeleteConfig {profileName

profileName | delete {btob | dMAC | description |
dwellTime | frameLoss | frameSizes | ifc | latency |
megLevel | rfc2544 | throughput | vid}}
Example:
deleteRfc2544 rfc2544DeleteConfig profileName
profile1
Deletes RFC profile.

profileNameName of the RFC 2544 profile .
deleteDeletes the specific attributes of the profile.
btobRemoves back-to-back test.
dMACRemoves destination MAC.
descriptionRemoves description.
dwellTimeRemoves dwell time.
frameLossRemoves frame loss test.
frameSizesRemoves frame sizes.
ifcRemoves IFC.
latencyRemoves latency test.
megLevelRemoves MEG level.
rfc2544Removes RFC 2544 profile.
throughputRemoves throughput test.
vidRemoves version ID (VID).
and Later Releases
558

Modifying RFC 2544 with Frameloss and Backtoback
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
deleteRfc2544 review
Displays the deleteRfc2544 configuration.
Example:
Step 6
Sends the deleteRfc2544 configuration to the ME 1200 NID.
deleteRfc2544 commit
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to delete RFC 2544 profile on NID-1:
profile1
deleteRfc2544 rfc2544DeleteConfig profileName

exit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
RFC2544PortType
Example:
Later Releases
559

Command or Action
Step 4
Purpose
SetRfc2544TestToRun testParameters
Modifies RFC 2544 with Frameloss and Backtoback.
{profileName profileName | frameSizes | testToRun
testParametersSpecifies RFC 2544 test parameters.
{throughput | latency | frameLoss | backToBack}
| thoughputTParams {trialDuration | minRate |
maxRate | accuracy | allowedFrameLoss} |
profileNameName of the RFC 2544 profile.
latencyTParams {trialDuration | delayMessInterval
| allowedFrameLoss} | frameLossTParams
frameSizesSpecifies frame sizes separated by a comma, for
{trialDuration | minRate | maxRate | rateStep} |
example, 1024,128,1280,1518, 2000, 256, 512, 64, 9600.
backToBackTParams {trialDuration | trialCount}}
testToRunTest to be run.
Example:
setRfc2544TestToRun testParameters profileName
vlan-profile
setRfc2544TestToRun testParameters
backToBackTParams trialCount 2
frameLossTParams minRate 100
frameLossTParams maxRate 200
frameLossTParams rateStep 10
throughputEnables throughput test and optionally set

its parameters.
latencyEnables latency test and optionally set its
parameters.
frameLossEnables frame-loss test and optionally set
its parameters.
backToBackEnables back-to-back test and optionally
set its parameters.
thoughputTParamsSpecifies throughput test parameters.
trialDurationSets the duration of one trial.
minRateSets the minimum rate.
maxRateSets the maximum rate.
accuracySets the accuracy (stop criterion).
allowedFrameLossSets the maximum allowed test
protocol data unit (PDU) loss at which the test is
considered successful.
latencyTParamsSpecifies latency test parameters.
delayMessIntervalSpecifies interval between sending
delay measurement frames.
PDU loss at which the test is considered successful.
frameLossTParamsSpecifies frame loss test parameters.
minRate Sets the minimum rate.
maxRate Sets the maximum rate.
and Later Releases
560

Command or Action
Purpose
rateStepSets the step rate.
backToBackTParamsSpecifies back to back test parameters.
trialDurationSpecifies the time (in milliseconds) to
transmit a burst of Y.1731 test frames at line rate and
frame size.
trialCountSpecifies the number of times to repeat the
burst.
Step 5
SetRfc2544TestToRun review
Displays the SetRfc2544TestToRun configuration.
Example:
Step 6
SetRfc2544TestToRun commit
Sends the SetRfc2544TestToRun configuration to the ME 1200 NID.
Example:
Step 7
SetRfc2544TestToRun testParameters
Modifies RFC 2544 with Frameloss and Backtoback.
{profileName profileName | frameSizes | testToRun
testParametersSpecifies RFC 2544 test parameters.
{throughput | latency | frameLoss | backToBack}
| thoughputTParams {trialDuration | minRate |
maxRate | accuracy | allowedFrameLoss} |
profileNameName of the RFC 2544 profile.
latencyTParams {trialDuration | delayMessInterval
| allowedFrameLoss} | frameLossTParams
frameSizesSpecifies frame sizes separated by a comma, for
{trialDuration | minRate | maxRate | rateStep} |
example, 1024,128,1280,1518, 2000, 256, 512, 64, 9600.
backToBackTParams {trialDuration | trialCount}}
testToRunTest to be run.
Example:
setRfc2544TestToRun testParameters testToRun
backToBack enable
frameLoss enable
latency disable
throughput disable
vlan-profile
throughputEnables throughput test and optionally set

its parameters.
latencyEnables latency test and optionally set its
parameters.
frameLossEnables frame-loss test and optionally set
its parameters.
backToBackEnables back-to-back test and optionally
set its parameters.
thoughputTParamsSpecifies throughput test parameters.
minRateSets the minimum rate.
maxRateSets the maximum rate.
Later Releases
561

Command or Action
Purpose
accuracySets the accuracy (stop criterion).
protocol data unit (PDU) loss at which the test is
considered successful.
latencyTParamsSpecifies latency test parameters.
delayMessIntervalSpecifies interval between sending
delay measurement frames.
PDU loss at which the test is considered successful.
frameLossTParamsSpecifies frame loss test parameters.
minRate Sets the minimum rate.
maxRate Sets the maximum rate.
rateStepSets the step rate.
backToBackTParamsSpecifies back to back test parameters.
trialDurationSpecifies the time (in milliseconds) to
transmit a burst of Y.1731 test frames at line rate and
frame size.
trialCountSpecifies the number of times to repeat the
burst.
Step 8
Displays the SetRfc2544TestToRun configuration.
Example:
Step 9
Sends the SetRfc2544TestToRun configuration to the ME 1200 NID.
Example:
Step 10 exit
Example:
exit
and Later Releases
562

Getting RFC 2544 Profile after Modifying Frameloss and Backtoback
The example shows how to modify and enable RFC 2544 with Frameloss and Backtoback:
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setRfc2544TestToRun testParameters profileName
vlan-profile
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setRfc2544TestToRun testParameters
backToBackTParams trialCount 2
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setRfc2544TestToRun testParameters frameLossTParams
minRate 100
maxRate 200
rateStep 10
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setRfc2544TestToRun review
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# setRfc2544TestToRun commit
backToBack enable
frameLoss enable
latency disable
throughput disable
vlan-profile

setRfc2544TestToRun review
setRfc2544TestToRun commit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
RFC2544PortType
Example:
Later Releases
563

Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose
getRfc2544TestToRun rfc2544Request profileName

profileName
Gets the RFC 2544 profile.
Example:
getRfc2544TestToRun rfc2544Request profileName
vlan-profile
Step 5
getRfc2544TestToRun review
rfc2544RequestSpecifies RFC2544 request

parameter.
profileNameSpecifies name of the profile.
Displays the getRfc2544Profile configuration.
Example:
getRfc2544TestToRun review
Step 6
getRfc2544TestToRun commit
Sends the getRfc2544Profile configuration to the

ME 1200 NID.
Example:
getRfc2544TestToRun commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to get RFC 2544 Profile after modifying frameloss and backtoback:
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# getRfc2544TestToRun rfc2544Request profileName
vlan-profile
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# getRfc2544TestToRun review
Switch(config-controller-RFC2544PortType)# getRfc2544TestToRun commit
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.profileName = 'vlan-profile'
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.frameSizes =
'64-128-256-512-1024-1280-1518-2000'
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.testToRun.throughput = false
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.testToRun.latency = false
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.testToRun.frameLoss = true
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.testToRun.backToBack = true
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.thoughputTParams.trialDuration
= 60
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.thoughputTParams.minRate = 800
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.thoughputTParams.maxRate = 1000
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.thoughputTParams.accuracy = 2
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.thoughputTParams.allowedFrameLoss
= 0
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.latencyTParams.trialDuration =
120
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.latencyTParams.delayMessInterval
= 10
and Later Releases
564

Verifying RFC 2544
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.latencyTParams.allowedFrameLoss
= 0
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.frameLossTParams.trialDuration
= 60
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.frameLossTParams.minRate = 800
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.frameLossTParams.maxRate = 1000
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.frameLossTParams.rateStep = 5
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.backToBackTParams.trialDuration
= 2000
GetRfc2544TestToRun_Output.testParameters.backToBackTParams.trialCount =
50
GetRfc2544TestToRun Commit Success!!!
Verifying RFC 2544

Use the following commands to verify the RFC 2544 status on the controller.
showRfc2544 com
This command displays the RFC 2544 report. The following is a sample output from the command:
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# showRfc2544 com
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# showRfc2544 com review
Commands in queue:
showRfc2544 com
Switch(config-controller-SPAN)# showSpanConfig commit
ShowRfc2544_Output.showResponse.u.report[0].reportName = 'Jul3'
'1970-01-04T01:02:24+00:00'
ShowRfc2544_Output.showResponse.u.report[1].reportName = 'July3'
'1970-01-04T01:15:37+00:00'
ShowRfc2544_Output.showResponse.u.report[2].reportName = 'repjuly3'
'1970-01-04T01:52:07+00:00'
'1970-01-04T07:29:25+00:00'
ShowRfc2544_Output.showResponse.u.report[4].reportName = 'rep-vlan'
'1970-01-04T21:01:59+00:00'
'1970-01-01T08:15:17+00:00'
Later Releases
565

'1970-01-01T09:36:14+00:00'
'1970-01-02T00:55:43+00:00'
Related Documents
Related Topic
Document Title

MIBs
MIB
MIBs Link
Description
Link

and Later Releases
566
CHAPTER
28
Configuring sFlow
This document describes the sampled flow (sFlow) feature and configuration steps to implement sFlow.
Prerequisites for Configuring sFlow, page 567
Restrictions for Configuring sFlow, page 567
Information About sFlow, page 567
How to Provision sFlow, page 568
Verifying sFlow, page 578
Prerequisites for Configuring sFlow

You must enable sFlow on an interface on Cisco ME 1200 NID.
Restrictions for Configuring sFlow

ME 1200 NID does not support configuring more than one sFlow instance with maximum sample rate
on the specified data source, either in the ingress or egress direction.
Information About sFlow

Using sFlow, a standards-based protocol mechanism, allows you to monitor Layer 2 traffic in data networks
that contain switches and routers. It consists of :
sFlow Agent (embedded on ME 1200 NID)The sFlow Agent uses sampling technology to capture
traffic statistics from the monitored device and then forwards the sampled data to a central sFlow Collector
for analysis. Packet sampling is done using one or more sFlow instances, each configured with a sampling
rate.
Later Releases
567
Configuring sFlow
How to Provision sFlow
sFlow InstancesThere may be one or more sFlow Instances associated with a single data source.
Each sFlow instance operates independently of other sFlow instances. For example, Packet Flow
Sampling instances have their own sampling rates and Counter Sampling instances have their own
sampling intervals.
sFlow CollectorThe sFlow Collector is a software application that can receive sFlow datagrams and
present a view of traffic and other network parameters which are output as type, length, and value (TLV)
in the datagrams. The sFlow collectors can also read and configure sFlow-managed objects. Both counter
and packet flow statistics are collected and sent as sFlow Datagrams (defined by maximum datagram
size of 200-1468) to a sFlow Collector.
sFlow DatagramThe sFlow Datagram format specifies a standard format for the sFlow Agent
to send sampled data to a remote sFlow Collector. The sFlow Datagram version 5 is supported.
The format of the sFlow Datagram is specified using the External Data Representation (XDR)
standard. This makes it simpler for the sFlow Agent to encode and the sFlow Collector to decode.
Samples are sent as User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packets to the host and port specified in the
SFLOW MIB or CLI. The assigned port for sFlow (and the default specified in the SFLOW MIB)
is port 6343. All sFlow Agents and applications by default must use UDP port 6343.
By default, sFlow is disabled on ME 1200 NID. You can enable sFlow on a specific interface or port.
How to Provision sFlow

Enabling sFlow Globally
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
sflow
Enters the sFlow mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# sflow
Step 4
sFlow_global {agent-ip {ipv4 | ipv6} | collector-ip {ipv4 |

ipv6} | collector-port | datagram-maxsize | rx-timeout}
Enters the sFlow global configuration mode.

agent-ipSpecifies Agent IP address.
and Later Releases
568
Configuring sFlow
Enabling sFlow Globally
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# setsFlowGlobalConfig
sFlow_global agent-ip ipv4 7.25.16.63
sFlow_global collector-ip ipv4 7.25.16.253
sFlow_global collector-port 2033
sFlow_global datagram-maxsize 512
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)#setsFlowGlobalConfig
sFlow_global rx-timeout 50000
collector-ipSpecifies collector IP address.

collector-portSpecifies collector UDP port. The
datagram-maxsizeSpecifies maximum datagram
size. The valid range is from 200 to 1468.
rx-timeoutSpecifies the receive timeout in
seconds. The valid range is from 0 to 2147483647.
The switch decrements the timeout once every
second, and samples are received as long as it is
non-zero. Once it reaches zero, receiver and all its
configurations are reset to defaults.
Step 5
setsFlowGlobalConfig review
Example:
review
Step 6
setsFlowGlobalConfig commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# exit
The example shows how to enable sFlow globally:
7.25.16.63
7.25.16.253
512
sFlow_global agent-ip ipv4

sFlow_global collector-ip ipv4
sFlow_global collector-port 2033
sFlow_global datagram-maxsize
Later Releases
569
Configuring sFlow
Enabling sFlow on a Port
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# setsFlowGlobalConfig sFlow_global rx-timeout 50000

Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# setsFlowGlobalConfig review
Commands in queue:
setsFlowGlobalConfig sFlow_global agent-ip ipv4 7.25.16.63
setsFlowGlobalConfig sFlow_global collector-ip ipv4 7.25.16.253
setsFlowGlobalConfig sFlow_global collector-port 6343
setsFlowGlobalConfig sFlow_global datagram-maxsize 512
setsFlowGlobalConfig sFlow_global rx-timeout 50000
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# setsFlowGlobalConfig commit
SetsFlowGlobalConfig Commit Success!!!


DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
sflow
Example:
Step 4
sflow_port {interface-id | enable | flow-sampler

Enters the sFlow port specific configuration mode.
{enable-defaults | sampling-rate | sampling-maxsize}
interface-idSpecifies physical port.
| counter-poller {enable | interval}}
enableEnables or disables sFlow on this port.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)#
setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port interface-id 3
setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port enable enable
setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port counter-poller
enable enable
setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port counter-poller
interval 10
setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port flow-sampler
enable-defaults enable
flow-samplerSpecifies sFlow flow sampler

configuration.
enable-defaultsEnables the flow sampler
default values.
Note
To configure sampling-rate and
sampling-maxsize as per your
requirement, you must set this option to
disable.
sampling-rateSpecifies the statistical sampling
rate. The valid range is from 1 to 4294967295.
and Later Releases
570
Configuring sFlow
Command or Action
Purpose
sampling-maxsizeSpecifies maximum number
of bytes to transmit per flow sample. The valid
counter-pollerSpecifies Interface counter poller
configuration.
enableEnables counter poller.
intervalSpecifies counter poll interval. The
valid range is from 1 to 3600 seconds.
Step 5
setsFlowPortConfig review
Example:
setsFlowPortConfig review
Step 6
setsFlowPortConfig commit
Example:
setsFlowPortConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Note
sFlow configuration does not persist on the NID. Running show running-config.xml command does not
display the sFlow configuration globally or per-port. This is working as designed.
The example shows how to enable sFlow on a port with default values enabled:
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# setsFlowPortConfig
enable-defaults enable
sFlow_port interface-id 3
sFlow_port enable enable
sFlow_port flow-sampler
review
Commands in queue:
Later Releases
571
Configuring sFlow
setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port flow-sampler enable-defaults

enable
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# setsFlowPortConfig commit
SetsFlowPortConfig Commit Success!!!

The example shows how to enable sFlow on a port without any default values set:
enable-defaults disable
sFlow_port flow-sampler
review
Commands in queue:
setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port flow-sampler enable-defaults
disable

The example shows how enable sFlow on a port with user-configured parameters:
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port interface-id 1
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port enable enable
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port flow-sampler
enable-defaults disable
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port flow-sampler
sampling-maxsize 512
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port flow-sampler sampling-rate
200
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port counter-poller enable
enable
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port counter-poller interval
30
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# setsFlowPortConfig review
Commands in queue:
setsFlowPortConfig
setsFlowPortConfig
setsFlowPortConfig
disable
setsFlowPortConfig
512
setsFlowPortConfig
sFlow_port flow-sampler enable-defaults
sFlow_port flow-sampler sampling-maxsize
sFlow_port flow-sampler sampling-rate 200
setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port counter-poller enable enable

setsFlowPortConfig sFlow_port counter-poller interval 30
and Later Releases
572
Configuring sFlow
Getting Current Global sFlow Values


DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
sflow
Example:
Step 4
sFlow_global_req
Enters the sFlow global configuration mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# getsFlowGlobalConfig
sFlow_global_req
Step 5
getsFlowGlobalConfig review
Example:
review
Step 6
getsFlowGlobalConfig commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to get current global sFlow values:
Later Releases
573
Configuring sFlow
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# getsFlowGlobalConfig sFlow_global_req

Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# getsFlowGlobalConfig review
Commands in queue:
getsFlowGlobalConfig sFlow_global_req
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# getsFlowGlobalConfig commit
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.sFlow_global.agent_ip.t = 1
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.sFlow_global.agent_ip.u.ipv4 = '0.0.0.0'
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.sFlow_global.collector_ip.t = 1
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.sFlow_global.collector_ip.u.ipv4 =
'0.0.0.0'
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.sFlow_global.collector_port = 65535
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.sFlow_global.datagram-maxsize = 1468
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.sFlow_global.rx-timeout = 50000
GetsFlowGlobalConfig Commit Success!!!

Decoding of Request message was successful urn:#getsFlowConfig
Decoded record:
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Input.sFlow_global_req = '0'
Encoded record:
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.sFlow_global.agent_ip.t = 1
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.sFlow_global.agent_ip.u.ipv4 = '0.0.0.0'
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.sFlow_global.collector_ip.t = 1
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.sFlow_global.collector_ip.u.ipv4 =
'0.0.0.0'
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.sFlow_global.collector_port = 65535
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.sFlow_global.datagram-maxsize = 1468
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.sFlow_global.rx-timeout = 50000
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.xmlns:ns0 =
"http://new.webservice.namespace"
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.xmlns:http =
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.xmlns:mime =
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.xmlns:soap =
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.xmlns:soapenc =
GetsFlowGlobalConfig_Output.xmlns:wsdl =
and Later Releases
574
Configuring sFlow
Getting Current Port Specific sFlow Values

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
sflow
Example:
Step 4
sflowPortConfigReq port id
Enters the sFlow port-specific configuration

mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# getsFlowPortConfig
sflowPortConfigReq 2
Step 5
getsFlowGlobalConfig review
Example:
review
Step 6
getsFlowGlobalConfig commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to get current port-specific sFlow values:
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# getsFlowPortConfig sflowPortConfigReq 2
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# getsFlowGlobalConfig review
Later Releases
575
Configuring sFlow
Commands in queue:
getsFlowPortConfig sFlowPortConfigReq 2
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# getsFlowGlobalConfig commit
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.sFlow_port.interface_id = 2
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.sFlow_port.enable = false
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.sFlow_port.flow_sampler.enable_defaults =
true
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.sFlow_port.flow_sampler.sampling_rate = 4096
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.sFlow_port.flow_sampler.sampling-maxsize =
128
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.sFlow_port.counter_poller.enable = false
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.sFlow_port.counter_poller.interval = 60
GetsFlowPortConfig Commit Success!!!

GetsFlowPortConfig_Input.sFlowPortConfigReq = 2
Encoded record:
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.sFlow_port.interface_id = 2
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.sFlow_port.enable = false
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.sFlow_port.flow_sampler.enable_defaults =
true
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.sFlow_port.flow_sampler.sampling_rate = 4096
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.sFlow_port.flow_sampler.sampling-maxsize =
128
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.sFlow_port.counter_poller.enable = false
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.sFlow_port.counter_poller.interval = 60
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.xmlns:ns0 = "http://new.webservice.namespace"
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.xmlns:http =
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.xmlns:mime =
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.xmlns:soap =
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.xmlns:soapenc =
GetsFlowPortConfig_Output.xmlns:wsdl =
and Later Releases
576
Configuring sFlow
Clearing sFlow Statistics
Clearing sFlow Statistics

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
sflow
Example:
Step 4
clear_sflow_stats
Clears sFlow statistics.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# clearsFlowStatistics
clear_sflow_stats
Step 5
clearsFlowStatistics review
Example:
review
Step 6
clearsFlowStatistics commit
Example:
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to clear sFlow statistics:
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# clearsFlowStatistics clear_sflow_stats
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# clearsFlowStatistics review
Later Releases
577
Configuring sFlow
Verifying sFlow
Commands in queue:
clearsFlowStatistics clear_sflow_stats
Switch(config-controller-SFlow)# clearsFlowStatistics commit
ClearsFlowStatistics Commit Success!!!

Verifying sFlow
Use the following commands to verify the sFlow status on the controller.
showsFlowStatistics sFlow_stats_req
This command displays the sFlow statistics on the NID. The following is a sample output from the
command:
showsFlowStatistics review
Commands in queue:
showsFlowStatistics commit
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.sFlow_stats.samplers.interface_[0].interface_id
= 1
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.sFlow_stats.samplers.interface_[0].tx_flow_samples
= 0
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.sFlow_stats.samplers.interface_[0].counter_samples
= 42
= 2
= 0
= 0
= 3
= 1
= 0
= 4
= 0
= 0
= 5
= 0
= 0
and Later Releases
578
Configuring sFlow
Verifying sFlow
= 6
= 0
= 0
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.sFlow_stats.receiver.statistics[0].tx_successes
= 0
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.sFlow_stats.receiver.statistics[0].tx_errors
= 43
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.sFlow_stats.receiver.statistics[0].flow_samples
= 1
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.sFlow_stats.receiver.statistics[0].counter_samples
= 42
ShowsFlowStatistics Commit Success!!!
Decoding of Request message was successful urn:#showsFlowStatistics
Decoded record:
ShowsFlowStatistics_Input.sFlow_stats_req = '0'
Encoded record:
= 1
= 0
= 42
= 2
= 0
= 0
= 3
= 1
= 0
= 4
= 0
= 0
= 5
= 0
= 0
= 6
= 0
Later Releases
579
Configuring sFlow
= 0
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.sFlow_stats.receiver.statistics[0].tx_successes
= 0
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.sFlow_stats.receiver.statistics[0].tx_errors
= 43
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.sFlow_stats.receiver.statistics[0].flow_samples
= 1
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.sFlow_stats.receiver.statistics[0].counter_samples
= 42
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.xmlns:ns0 =
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.xmlns:http =
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.xmlns:mime =
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.xmlns:soap =
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.xmlns:soapenc =
ShowsFlowStatistics_Output.xmlns:wsdl =
Related Documents
Related Topic
Document Title

MIBs
MIB
MIBs Link
and Later Releases
580
Configuring sFlow
Description
Link

Later Releases
581
Configuring sFlow
and Later Releases
582
CHAPTER
29
Configuring UDLD
This document describes the Unidirectional Link Detection (UDLD) feature and configuration steps to
implement UDLD.
Prerequisites for Configuring UDLD, page 583
Restrictions for Configuring UDLD, page 583
Information About UDLD, page 583
How to Provision UDLD, page 584
Verifying UDLD, page 595
Prerequisites for Configuring UDLD

To identify and disable the unidirectional links, devices at both ends must support UDLD.
UDLD Hello packet timers must be same for both the devices.
Restrictions for Configuring UDLD

Access Control Lists (ACLs) cannot be used to block the UDLD traffic.
UDLD on ME 1200 NID cannot interoperate with other devices. UDLD can be enabled only between
ME 1200 NIDs.
Information About UDLD

UDLD is a Layer 2 protocol that enables devices connected through Ethernet cables to monitor the physical
configuration and detect presence of a unidirectional link. A unidirectional link occurs when traffic sent by a
local device is received by its neighbor but traffic coming from the neighboring device is not received by the
Later Releases
583
Configuring UDLD
How to Provision UDLD
local device. When a unidirectional link is detected, the affected port is disabled and user is alerted. This can
help prevent spanning tree topology loops.
UDLD supports two operation modes:
NormalIn this mode, UDLD detects a unidirectional link due to misconnected fibers on a fiber-optic
link that is not detected by Layer 1 mechanisms.
Note
If port connections are correct and traffic is one way, UDLD does not detect the
unidirectional link. In this case, no action is taken and link is considered undetermined.
AggressiveIn this mode, unidirectional link due to one-way traffic on fiber-optic and twisted pair
links, and misconnected ports on fiber-optic links can be detected. Specifically, if one end of the link
cannot send or receive traffic, or one of the ports is down and the other is up, the unidirectional link can
be detected. Using the loss of hello packets as indication to detect bi-directional link that cannot be
re-established, UDLD disables the affected port.
In addition, UDLD can detect the identities of neighbors by caching the information contained in UDLD hello
packet.
By default, UDLD is disabled on ME 1200 NID. The normal or aggressive mode can be
enabled globally on all ports or
enabled or modified on the individual ports
How to Provision UDLD

Enabling UDLD Mode Globally
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
UDLDPortType
Enters the UDLD mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# UDLDPortType
and Later Releases
584
Configuring UDLD
Enabling UDLD Mode Globally
Step 4
Command or Action
Purpose
udldGlobalConfig {mode {normal | aggressive} |

message-interval}
Enters UDLD global configuration mode.

Sub-command options:
modeSpecifies UDLD configuration mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)#
setGlobalUDLDConfig udldGlobalConfig mode normal
enable
setGlobalUDLDConfig udldGlobalConfig
message-interval 10
normalEnables UDLD in normal mode

on all fiber-optic ports.
aggressiveEnables UDLD in aggressive
mode on all fiber-optic ports.
message-intervalSpecifies time interval
between UDLD probe messages on ports (7-90
seconds).
Step 5
setGlobalUDLDConfig review
Example:
Step 6
setGlobalUDLDConfig commit
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# exit
The example shows how to enable UDLD globally in normal mode:
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# setGlobalUDLDConfig udldGlobalConfig mode normal
enable
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# setGlobalUDLDConfig udldGlobalConfig
message-interval 10
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# setGlobalUDLDConfig review
Commands in queue:
setGlobalUDLDConfig udldGlobalConfig mode normal enable
setGlobalUDLDConfig udldGlobalConfig message-interval 10
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# setGlobalUDLDConfig commit
Later Releases
585
Configuring UDLD
Disabling UDLD Mode Globally
SetGlobalUDLDConfig Commit Success!!!

This enables UDLD on all ports of ME 1200 NID with a time interval of 10 seconds.
Disabling UDLD Mode Globally

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
UDLDPortType
Example:
Step 4
udldGlobalConfig {mode {normal | aggressive} |

message-interval}
Example:
Switch((config-controller)UDLDPortType)#
setGlobalUDLDConfig udldGlobalConfig mode normal
disable

normalEnables UDLD in normal mode on
all fiber-optic ports.
mode on all fiber-optic ports.
message-intervalSpecifies time interval between
UDLD probe messages on ports. The valid range is
Step 5
Example:
Switch((config-controller)UDLDPortType)#
Step 6
Example:
Switch(config-controller)UDLDPortType)#
and Later Releases
586
Configuring UDLD
Enabling UDLD Mode on a Port
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
Switch((config-controller)UDLDPortType)# exit
The example shows how to disable UDLD globally in normal mode:
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# setGlobalUDLDConfig udldGlobalConfig mode normal
disable
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# setGlobalUDLDConfig review
Commands in queue:
setGlobalUDLDConfig udldGlobalConfig mode normal disable
Switch((config-controller)UDLDPortType)# setGlobalUDLDConfig commit
SetGlobalUDLDConfig Commit Success!!!

Switch((config-controller)UDLDPortType)# exit
This disables UDLD on all ports of ME 1200 NID.

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
UDLDPortType
Example:
Step 4
udldInterfaceConfig {mode {enable | aggressive} |

message-interval seconds | port port number}

Later Releases
587
Configuring UDLD
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
enableEnables UDLD in normal mode on

selected interface.
setIntfUDLDConfig udldInterfaceConfig mode
aggressive enable
setIntfUDLDConfig udldInterfaceConfig
message-interval 20
setIntfUDLDConfig udldInterfaceConfig port 3

mode on selected interface.
UDLD probe messages on ports.
secondsTime interval in seconds. Valid
range is from 7 to 90 seconds.
portSpecifies targeted interface.
port numberSpecifies number of the selected
port.
Step 5
setIntfUDLDConfig review
Example:
Step 6
setIntfUDLDConfig commit
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to enable UDLD on a specific port in an aggressive mode:
aggressive enable
message-interval 20

setIntfUDLDConfig udldInterfaceConfig
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# setIntfUDLDConfig
udldInterfaceConfig mode aggressive enable
and Later Releases
588
Configuring UDLD
Disabling UDLD Mode on a Port
udldInterfaceConfig message-interval 20
udldInterfaceConfig port 3
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# setIntfUDLDConfig commit
SetIntfUDLDConfig Commit Success!!!

This enables UDLD in aggressive mode only on port 3 of ME 1200 NID with a time interval of 20 seconds.

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
UDLDPortType
Example:
Step 4
udldInterfaceConfig {mode {enable | aggressive} |

message-interval seconds | port port number}
Enters UDLD port specific configuration mode.

Example:
aggressive disable
enableEnables UDLD in normal mode on

selected interface.
aggressiveEnables UDLD in aggressive mode
on selected interface.
UDLD probe messages on ports.
secondsTime interval in seconds. Valid range
is from 7 to 90 seconds.
portSpecifies targeted interface.
Later Releases
589
Configuring UDLD
Command or Action
Purpose
port numberSpecifies number of the selected
port.
Step 5
Example:
Step 6
Example:
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to disable UDLD on a specific port in an aggressive mode:
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# setIntfUDLDConfig udldInterfaceConfig port 3
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# setIntfUDLDConfig udldInterfaceConfig mode
aggressive disable
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# setIntfUDLDConfig review
Commands in queue:
setIntfUDLDConfig udldInterfaceConfig mode aggressive disable
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# setIntfUDLDConfig commit
SetIntfUDLDConfig Commit Success!!!

This disables UDLD in an aggressive mode on port 3 of ME 1200 NID.
and Later Releases
590
Configuring UDLD
Getting Current Global UDLD Values
Getting Current Global UDLD Values

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
UDLDPortType
Example:
Step 4
getGlobalUDLDConfReq
Example:
getGlobalUDLDConfig getGlobalUDLDConfReq
Step 5
getGlobalUDLDConfig review
Example:
getGlobalUDLDConfig review
Step 6
getGlobalUDLDConfig commit
Example:
getGlobalUDLDConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to get current global UDLD values:
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# getGlobalUDLDConfig getGlobalUDLDConfReq
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# getGlobalUDLDConfig review
Later Releases
591
Configuring UDLD
Getting Current Port Specific UDLD Values
Commands in queue:
getGlobalUDLDConfig getGlobalUDLDConfReq
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# getGlobalUDLDConfig commit
GetGlobalUDLDConfig_Output.udldGlobalConfig.mode.t = 1
GetGlobalUDLDConfig_Output.udldGlobalConfig.mode.u.normal = false
GetGlobalUDLDConfig_Output.udldGlobalConfig.message_interval = 7
GetGlobalUDLDConfig Commit Success!!!

Decoded record:
GetGlobalUDLDConfig_Input.getGlobalUDLDConfReq = '0'
Set UDLD global to defaultsEncoding of Response message was successful
Encoded record:
GetGlobalUDLDConfig_Output.udldGlobalConfig.mode.t = 1
GetGlobalUDLDConfig_Output.udldGlobalConfig.mode.u.normal = false
GetGlobalUDLDConfig_Output.udldGlobalConfig.message_interval = 7
GetGlobalUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:ns0 =
GetGlobalUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:http =
GetGlobalUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:mime =
GetGlobalUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:soap =
GetGlobalUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:soapenc =
GetGlobalUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:wsdl =

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
and Later Releases
592
Configuring UDLD
Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
UDLDPortType
Example:
Step 4
etGlobalUDLDConfReq
Enters UDLD port specific configuration

mode.
Example:
getIntfUDLDConfig udldPhyPort 3
Step 5
Example:
getIntfUDLDConfig review
Step 6
Example:
getIntfUDLDConfig commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows how to get current port specific UDLD values when UDLD is disabled:
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# getIntfUDLDConfig udldPhyPort 3
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# getIntfUDLDConfig review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# getIntfUDLDConfig commit
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.udldInterfaceConfig.mode.t = 1
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.udldInterfaceConfig.mode.u.enable = false
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.udldInterfaceConfig.message_interval = 7
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.udldInterfaceConfig.port = 3
GetIntfUDLDConfig Commit Success!!!
Later Releases
593
Configuring UDLD

Decoded record:
GetIntfUDLDConfig-Input.udldPhyPort = 3
Set UDLD intf to defaultsEncoding of Response message was successful
Encoded record:
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.udldInterfaceConfig.mode.u.enable = false
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:ns0 = "http://new.webservice.namespace"
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:http =
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:mime =
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:soap =
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:soapenc =
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:wsdl =
The example shows how to get current port specific UDLD values when UDLD is enabled:
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# getIntfUDLDConfig udldPhyPort 3
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# getIntfUDLDConfig review
Commands in queue:
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# getIntfUDLDConfig commit
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.udldInterfaceConfig.mode.u.enable = true
GetIntfUDLDConfig Commit Success!!!

Decoded record:
GetIntfUDLDConfig-Input.udldPhyPort = 3
Set UDLD intf to defaultsEncoding of Response message was successful
Encoded record:
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.udldInterfaceConfig.mode.u.enable = true
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:ns0 = "http://new.webservice.namespace"
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:http =
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:mime =
and Later Releases
594
Configuring UDLD
Verifying UDLD
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:soap =
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:soapenc =
GetIntfUDLDConfig_Output.xmlns:wsdl =
Verifying UDLD
Use the following command to verify the UDLD status on the controller.
showUDLDStatusReq
This command displays the UDLD configuration status on the NID. The following is a sample output
from the command:
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# showUDLDStatus showUDLDStatusReq
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# showUDLDStatus review
Commands in queue:
showUDLDStatus showUDLDStatusReq
Switch(config-controller-UDLDPortType)# showUDLDStatus commit
ShowUDLDStatus_Output.showUDLDStatusResp.udldStatusList[0].port = 1
ShowUDLDStatus_Output.showUDLDStatusResp.udldStatusList[0].mode =
'Disable'
ShowUDLDStatus_Output.showUDLDStatusResp.udldStatusList[0].messageInterval
= 7
ShowUDLDStatus_Output.showUDLDStatusResp.udldStatusList[0].adminState
= false
ShowUDLDStatus_Output.showUDLDStatusResp.udldStatusList[0].localDeviceId
= 'B8-38-61-68-7B-BC'
ShowUDLDStatus_Output.showUDLDStatusResp.udldStatusList[0].localDeviceName
= ''
ShowUDLDStatus_Output.showUDLDStatusResp.udldStatusList[0].bidirState
= 'Indeterminant'
ShowUDLDStatus_Output.showUDLDStatusResp.udldStatusList[0].nbrPortID
= ''
ShowUDLDStatus_Output.showUDLDStatusResp.udldStatusList[0].nbrDeviceID
= ''
ShowUDLDStatus_Output.showUDLDStatusResp.udldStatusList[0].nbrDeviceName
= ''
ShowUDLDStatus_Output.showUDLDStatusResp.udldStatusList[0].nbrLinkState
= ''
'Disable'
= 7
= false
= 'B8-38-61-68-7B-BC'
= ''
Later Releases
595
Configuring UDLD
Verifying UDLD
= 'Indeterminant'
= ''
= ''
= ''
= ''
'Normal'
= 10
= true
= 'B8-38-61-68-7B-BC'
= ''
= 'Indeterminant'
= ''
= ''
= ''
= ''
'Normal'
= 10
= true
= 'B8-38-61-68-7B-BC'
= ''
= 'Indeterminant'
= ''
= ''
= ''
= ''
'Normal'
= 10
= true
and Later Releases
596
Configuring UDLD
= 'B8-38-61-68-7B-BC'
= ''
= 'Indeterminant'
= ''
= ''
= ''
= ''
'Disable'
= 7
= false
= 'B8-38-61-68-7B-BC'
= ''
= 'Indeterminant'
= ''
= ''
= ''
= ''
Related Documents
Related Topic
Document Title

Later Releases
597
Configuring UDLD
MIBs
MIB
MIBs Link
Description
Link

and Later Releases
598
CHAPTER
30
Configuring Flex Links

This document describes the Flex Link feature and configuration steps to implement Flex Links. They also
describe how to configure the MAC address table move update feature.
Note
Flex Links does not currently support stacking, duo switches structure, or VLAN separation.
Prerequisites for Configuring Flex Links, page 599
Restrictions for Configuring Flex Links, page 599
Information about Flex Links, page 600
MAC Address Table Move Update, page 600
How to Configure Flex Links, page 601
Prerequisites for Configuring Flex Links

Disable STP before configuring Flex Links. If STP is disabled on the switch, make sure that there are
no Layer 2 loops in the topology.
Flex Links is supported on the Serval CEServices application.
Default Configuration
Default Flex Links configuration is when there is no configuration for Flex Links pairs or for the MAC address
move update transmit feature.
Restrictions for Configuring Flex Links

Only one Flex Links backup link can be configured for any active link, and it must be a different interface
from the active interface.
Later Releases
599

Information about Flex Links
The backup link does not have to be the same type as the active link. However, they should be configured
with similar characteristics so that there are no loops or changes in operation if the standby link becomes
active.
An active link cannot belong to another Flex Links pair.
The Flex Links pair cannot belong to the same port channel. However, a Flex Links pair can be a port
channel and a physical interface, or two port channels or physical interfaces.
The port channel interface should be active when included in the Flex Links pair, for it to be configured
properly.
Information about Flex Links

Flex Links configuration provides link-level redundancy in the absence of Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
Flex Links consists of a pair of interfaces (ports or port channels) with one interface configured as the primary
interface (forwarding status) and the other as the backup interface (standby status). When a failure occurs on
the primary interface, the backup interface moves to forwarding status and starts to forward traffic.
Flex Links works by detecting link down on a primary interface and then bringing up the backup interface
that has been defined as backup. It is most commonly implemented at the access layer where the switch has
dual uplinks to the distribution layer.
Flex Links is designed to interact with supporting modules, such as the port module, the aggregation module,
the packet module, and the configuration module. The basic Flex Links protocol functions are as follows:
Initialize module configurations
Interact with the packet module to transmit/receive MAC address table update frames
Interact with the configuration module to read/write FL configurations
Register with the port module to receive the port up/down event
The Flex Links API layer provides direct interaction with the switch for the implementation of the active and
backup ports groups, the setup of the port status, and the MAC-address table read.
MAC Address Table Move Update

The MAC address table move update is an optional Flex Links feature. It allows the switch to provide rapid
bidirectional convergence when an active link goes down and the backup link starts forwarding traffic.
Note
MAC address table move update enables fast recovery of network connectivity but consumes CPU
resources.
and Later Releases
600

How to Configure Flex Links
How to Configure Flex Links

Configuring Flexlink Ports
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Purpose

mode.
Example:
Step 2 controller nid 1/NID_ID

configuration mode.
Example:
Step 3 FlexlinksPortType
Enters FlexlinksPortType
mode to provision Flex
Links.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# FlexlinksPortType
Step 4 flexlinkPortConfiguration|flexlinksConfiguration{activePort|backupPort|flexlinkEnabled}
Example:
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinkPortType)# flexlinkPortConfiguration
flexlinksConfiguration activePort activePortId 4
flexlinkPortConfiguration flexlinksConfiguration backupPort backupPortId 6
flexlinkPortConfiguration flexlinksConfiguration flexlinkEnabled enable
activePort Enter
the Port number of
interface to be
configured .
backupPort Enter
the backup interface
port number. It can
be a physical port
number or
LLAG/LACP group
ID.
flexlinkEnabled
Enter enable or
disable to configure
Flexlink port
number.
Step 5 flexlinkPortConfiguration review

Example:
Displays the Flexlink

configuration commands
in the queue.
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPotType)# flexlinkPortConfiguration review
Later Releases
601

Provisioning Flex Link Ports
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 6 flexlinkPortConfiguration commit
Sends the Flexlink port

configuration to the NID.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPotType)# flexlinkPortConfiguration commit
Step 7 exit
Exits the config controller

mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-FlexLinksPortType)# exit
Provisioning Flex Link Ports

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2

mode.
Example:
Step 3
FlexlinksPortType
Enters the FlexlinksPortType mode

to provision Flex Links.
Example:
Step 4
getFlexlinksConfiguration
Gets the activeport configuration
getFlexlinkConfigRequest{llagGroupIdllagGroup-Id|phyPortIdphyPort-Id} using getcommand.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPotType)#
getFlexlinksConfiguration getFlexlinkConfigRequest port phyPortId
4
getFlexlinksConfiguration getFlexlinkConfigRequest llagGroupId 2
Step 5
getFlexlinksConfiguration review
Displays the activeport configuration

using getcommand.
Example:
and Later Releases
602

Viewing Flex Link Configuration at Port Level on the NID
Step 6
Command or Action
Purpose
getFlexlinksConfiguration commit
Sends the activeport configuration to

the NID.
Example:
Step 7
Exits the config controller mode.
exit
Example:
Viewing Flex Link Configuration at Port Level on the NID

Before You Begin
Perform the steps to provision Flex Links on the controller .
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
FlexlinksPortType
Enters FlexlinksPortType mode to provision Flex

Links.
Example:
Step 4
getFlexlinkConfigRequestportllagGroupId phyPortId
Example:
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPortType)#
getFlexlinksConfiguration getFlexlinkConfigRequest port
llagGroupId 2
getFlexlinksConfiguration getFlexlinkConfigRequest port
phyPortId 4
Retrieves the Flex Links configuration at port.

llagGroupId llagGroup-IdDisplays the
targeted active LLAG Group Id.
reviewDisplays the targeted active
physical port.
Later Releases
603

Viewing Flexlink Active Port Configuration
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
Displays the Flex Links configuration.
Example:
Commands in queue:
getFlexlinksConfiguration flexlinksPhysicalPort
4
Step 6
Sends the Flex Links configuration to the NID.
Example:
Step 7
Exist the controller config mode.
exit
Example:
The example retrieves the Flex Links configuration for port 4 on the NID:
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPortType)# getFlexlinksConfigRequestportphyPortId 4
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPortType)# getFlexlinksConfiguration review
Commands in queue:
getFlexlinksConfigRequestportphyPortId 4
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPortType)# getFlexlinksConfiguration commit
GetFlexlinksConfiguration_Output.getFlexlinksConfiguration.portNumber = 4
GetFlexlinksConfiguration_Output.getFlexlinksConfiguration.flexlinksEnable = false
GetFlexlinksConfiguration_Output.getFlexlinksConfiguration.key = 4
GetFlexlinksConfiguration_Output.getFlexlinksConfiguration.role.t = 4
GetFlexlinksConfiguration_Output.getFlexlinksConfiguration.role.u.active = true
GetFlexlinksConfiguration_Output.getFlexlinksConfiguration.portPriority = 32768
GetFlexlinksConfiguration_Output.getFlexlinksConfiguration.timeout.t = 4
getFlexlinksConfiguration_Output.getFlexlinksConfiguration.timeout.u.fast = true
GetFlexlinksConfiguration Commit Success!!!
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPortType)# exit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
and Later Releases
604

Step 2
Command or Action
Purpose

mode.
Example:
Step 3
FlexlinksPortType
Enters FlexlinksPortType mode to

provision Flex Links.
Example:
Step 4
showFlexlinksConfigdisplayFlexlinksConfigport{llagGroupID|phyPortId}
port Displays the targeted

active port.
Example:
llagGroupID Displays the

active llagGroupID number.
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPortType)# showFlexlinksConfig
displayFlexlinksConfig port phyPortId 4
phyPortId Displays the active

physical port number.
Step 5
showFlexlinksConfig review
Displays the ports for Flexlink

configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPotType)# showFlexlinksConfig
review
Step 6
showFlexlinksConfig commit
Sends the Flexlink configuration to the

NID.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPotType)# showFlexlinksConfig
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
The example shows the flexlink configuration in active ports.
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPortType)# showFlexlinksConfig displayFlexlinksConfig
port phyPortId 4
(config-controller-FlexlinksPortType)# showFlexlinksConfig commit
ShowFlexlinksConfig_Output.displayFlexlinksConfigResp[0].backupPort = 'GigabitEthernet 1/6'
ShowFlexlinksConfig_Output.displayFlexlinksConfigResp[0].activePort = 'GigabitEthernet 1/4'
ShowFlexlinksConfig_Output.displayFlexlinksConfigResp[0].backupState = 'Active Up/Backup
Standby'
ShowFlexlinksConfig_Output.displayFlexlinksConfigResp[0].macUpdateEnabled = 'enabled'
(config-controller-FlexlinksPortType)# showFlexlinksConfig commit
ShowFlexlinksConfig_Output.displayFlexlinksConfigResp[0].backupPort = 'GigabitEthernet 1/6'
ShowFlexlinksConfig_Output.displayFlexlinksConfigResp[0].activePort = 'GigabitEthernet 1/4'
Later Releases
605

Enabling macMoveupdate on Active Port
ShowFlexlinksConfig_Output.displayFlexlinksConfigResp[0].backupState = 'Active Up/Backup

Standby'
ShowFlexlinksConfig_Output.displayFlexlinksConfigResp[0].macUpdateEnabled = 'enabled'
ShowFlexlinksConfig Commit Success!!!(FlexlinksPortType)#
Commit Success!!!(config-controller-FlexlinksPortType)#
Enabling macMoveupdate on Active Port

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
FlexlinksPortType
Enters the FlexlinksPortType mode to provision Flex

Links.
Example:
Step 4
macMoveUpdatePortConfig macMoveUpdateConfig {
Displays the macMoveUpdateConfig mode.
User can enable macMoveUpdate, only after
llagGroupId llagGroup-Id | mmuEnabled { enable|disable } Note
flex link is configured.
| portNumber portNumber }
llagGroupId Configures llag as an active
port in flex link. The range is from 1-4
Example:
macMoveUpdatePortConfig macMoveUpdateConfig
macMoveUpdatePortConfig macMoveUpdateConfig llagGroup
id 2
macMoveUpdatePortConfig macMoveUpdateConfig portNumber
4
macMoveUpdatePortConfig macMoveUpdateConfig mmuEnabled
enable
Step 5
macMoveUpdatePortConfig review
portNumber Configures port number in flex

link. The range is from 1-124
mmuEnabledUpdates the MAC Move
Transmitr in flex link to either enale o disable.
Displays the macMoveUpdatePortConfig commands.
Example:
macMoveUpdatePortConfig review
Step 6
macMoveUpdatePortConfig commit
Sends the macMoveUpdatePortConfig commands to

the NID.
Example:
macMoveUpdatePortConfig commit
and Later Releases
606

Viewing macMoveUpdate Active Port Configuration
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal

mode.
Example:
Step 2

configuration mode.
Example:
Step 3
Enters FlexlinksPortType mode

to provision Flex Links.
FlexlinksPortType
Example:
Step 4
getMACMoveUpdateConfiggetFlexlinkConfigRequestport{llagGroupId|phyPortId}
port Displays the

targeted active port.
Example:
llagGroupID Displays
the active llagGroupID
number.
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPortType)# getMACMoveUpdateConfig
getFlexlinkConfigRequest port phyPortId 4
phyPortId Displays
the active physical port
number.
Step 5
getMACMoveUpdateConfig review
Displays the ports for Flexlink

configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPotType)# getMACMoveUpdateConfig review
Step 6
getMACMoveUpdateConfig commit
Sends the Flexlink

configuration to the NID.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPotType)# getMACMoveUpdateConfig review
Later Releases
607

Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Exits the Flex Links

provisioning mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)FlexLinksPortType)# exit
The example shows the flexlink configuration in active ports.
Switch(config-controller-FlexlinksPortType)# getMACMoveUpdateConfig getFlexlinkConfigRequest
port phyPortId 4
(config-controller-FlexlinksPortType)# getMACMoveUpdateConfig review
Commands in queue: 1
getMACMoveUpdateConfig getFlexlinkConfigRequest port phyPortId 4
(config-controller-FlexlinksPortType)# getMACMoveUpdateConfig commit
GetMACMoveUpdateConfig_Output.macMoveUpdateConfig._choice1.t = 1
GetMACMoveUpdateConfig_Output.macMoveUpdateConfig._choice1.u.portNumber = 4
GetMACMoveUpdateConfig_Output.macMoveUpdateConfig.mmuEnabled = true
GetMACMoveUpdateConfig Commit Success!!!(config-controller-FlexlinksPortType)#
and Later Releases
608
CHAPTER
31
Configuring Y.1564
This document describes the Y.1564 test feature and configuration steps to execute Y.1564 feature.
Prerequisites for Configuring Y.1564 , page 609
Information About Y.1564, page 609
Prerequisites for Configuring Y.1564

You must disable:
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) transmit and receive on source port.
Loop protection on destination port or Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) on destination and source
port.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
Loop should not be configured.
Information About Y.1564

ITU-T Y.1564 (Or sometimes called Y.156sam or EtherSAM - Ethernet Service Activation Methodology) is
a QoS and network performance ITU-T Ethernet-based service test methodology. This testing procedure tests
service turn-up, installation and troubleshooting of Ethernet-based services.
Y.1564 allows simultaneous testing of multiple Ethernet services and measures. It also validates the different
QoS mechanisms provisioned in the network to prioritize different service types - allowing faster deployment,
easier service and network troubleshooting.
Y.1564 allows simultaneous testing of multiple Ethernet services and measures. It also validates the different
QoS mechanisms provisioned in the network to prioritize different service types - allowing faster deployment,
easier service and network troubleshooting.
Later Releases
609
Configuring Y.1564
Configuring New Y.1564 Profile

DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Example:
Step 2 controller nid1/NID_ID
Example:
Step 3 ciscoY1564
Enters ciscoY1564 configuration mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# ciscoY1564
Step 4 setY1564Profile y1564ProfileProfile

name|description|acceptable-fdv
acceptable-gdv|acceptable-flr acceptable-flr|acceptable-ftd
acceptable-ftd | cir-test {dm-interval dm-interval |duration
duration | step-count step-count | start { enable | disable }
} | dst-oam- aware { enable | disable } | dwell-time
dwell-time | eir-test { enable | disable } | meg-level
meg-level duration | performance-test { enable | disable }
| traffic-policing-test { dm-interval | duration } | }
traffic-type { customer-simulated | oam } | emix |
user-defined-frame-size }
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)#
setY1564Profile y1564Profile profileName
setY1564Profile y1564Profile description
setY1564Profile y1564Profile acceptable-fdv 0-10000
setY1564Profile y1564Profile acceptable-flr 0-1000
setY1564Profile y1564Profile acceptable-ftd 0-10000
setY1564Profile y1564Profile cir-test start enable
setY1564Profile y1564Profile cir-test dm-interval
100-10000
setY1564Profile y1564Profile cir-test duration <cr>
setY1564Profile y1564Profile cir-test step-count
1-1000
setY1564Profile y1564Profile dst-oam-aware enable
profileName Enter the name of the profile for Y1564

.
description Enter a brief description about the profile
.
acceptable-fdv Enter frame delay variation in
milliseconds to configure Y1564. Acceptable limit is
0-10000. The default value is 0, which disables the test.
acceptable-flr Enter frame loss ratio per mile to
configure Y1564. Acceptable limit is 0-1000. The default
value is 0 and 1000 disables the test.
acceptable-ftd Enter frame transfer delay in
milliseconds to configure Y1564. Acceptable limit is
0-10000.Acceptable limit is 0-10000. The default value
is 0, which disables the test.
cir-test Enter frame delay variation in milliseconds to
configure Y1564. Acceptable limit is 0-10000.
dm-interval Enter the interval of between sending
delay measurement frame. Acceptable limit is
100-10000.
duration Enter the duration of one step.
step-count Enter the number of steps to configure
CIR. Acceptable limit is 1-1000
startEnter enable or disable to configure CIR test.
and Later Releases
610
Configuring Y.1564
Command or Action
Purpose
setY1564Profile y1564Profile dwell-time 100-10000

setY1564Profile y1564Profile eir-test enable
setY1564Profile y1564Profile meg-level 0-7
setY1564Profile y1564Profile performance-test
enable
setY1564Profile y1564Profile traffic-policing-test
dm-interval 100-10000
duration <cr>
duration start enable
setY1564Profile y1564Profile traffic-type
setY1564Profile y1564Profile traffic-type
customer-simulated <cr>
setY1564Profile y1564Profile traffic-type oam <cr>
setY1564Profile y1564Profile emix
setY1564Profile y1564Profile e emix U
setY1564Profile y1564Profile
user-defined-frame-size <cr>
dst-oam-aware Enter enable or disable to configure

remote end Y.1731 OAM aware.
dwell-time Enter the time frame of execution, pauses
in milliseconds after each trial before reading counters,
and status from hardware. Acceptable limit is 100-10000.
Default value is 500.
eir-test Enter EIR configuration test and optionally set
its parameters to configure Y1564. Parameters are
dm-interval, duration and start.
meg-level Enter the profile MEG level to configure
Y1564 . Acceptable limit is 0-7.
performance-test Enter the performance test
parameters.
dm-interval Enter the time interval in
milliseconds between sending delay measurement
frame. Acceptable limit is 100-10000.
duration Enter the duration of performance test.
startEnter enable or disable to start the
performance test.
traffic-policing-test Enter the traffic policing test
parameters..
dm-interval Enter the time interval in
milliseconds between sending delay measurement
frame. Acceptable limit is 100-10000.
duration Enter the duration of traffic policing
test.
startEnter enable or disable to start the traffic
policing test.
traffic-type Enter the type of traffic generated at the
near end.
customer-simulated Enter the frames that
simulate real customer traffic as background traffic.
oam Enter the duration of traffic policing test.
emix select the frame size(EMIX letter-encoded) that
the enabled tests will use. Encoding is as follows: a: 64,
b: 128, c: 256, d: 512, e: 1024,f: 1280, g: 1518, h: MTU,
u: user-defined.
Later Releases
611
Configuring Y.1564
Getting the Profile Configuration using Profile Name
Command or Action
Purpose
user-defined-frame-size Enter the frame size if emix
is set to 'U'.
Step 5 review
Reviews the ciscoY1564 profile configuration parameters.
Example:
setY1564Profile review
Step 6 commit
Sends the ciscoY1564 profile parameters to the NID.
Example:
setY1564Profile commit
Step 7 exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# exit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ciscoY1564
Example:
Step 4
getY1564ProfilegetY1564ProfileReq
Retrieves the Profile configuration.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# getY1564Profile
getY1564ProfileReq
and Later Releases
612
Configuring Y.1564
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
getY1564Profilereview
Displays the Y.1564 profile configuration.
Example:
review
Step 6
getY1564Profilecommit
Sends the Y.1564 profile configuration

information to the NID.
Example:
commit
Step 7
Exiits the config controller mode.
exit
Example:
The following example shows the Profile Configuration using the Profile Name:
Switch(config-controller)# getY1564Profile commit
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.profileName = 'cisco123456'
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.description = 'oamunaware'
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.acceptable_fdv = 0
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.acceptable_ftd = 0
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.acceptable_flr = 0
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.dst_oam_aware = false
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.dwell_time = 500
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.emix = '1024'
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.meg_level = 7
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.traffic_type.t = 1
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.traffic_type.u.oam = '0'
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.user_defined_frame_size = 2000
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.cir_test.start = true
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.cir_test.duration = 60
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.cir_test.dm_interval = 500
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.cir_test.step_count = 4
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.eir_test.start = true
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.eir_test.duration = 60
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.eir_test.dm_interval = 500
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.performance_test.start = true
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.performance_test.duration = 10
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.performance_test.dm_interval = 100
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.traffic_policing_test.start = true
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.traffic_policing_test.duration =
10
GetY1564Profile_Output.y1564Profile.y1564Profile_ELEM_0.traffic_policing_test.dm_interval
= 100
GetY1564Profile Commit Success
Later Releases
613
Configuring Y.1564
Viewing Profile Names

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ciscoY1564
Example:
Step 4
showY1564showY1564Req{profiles|reports}
Displays existing profiles or report information.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# showY1564
showY1564Req
Step 5
showY1564review
Displays the profile configurations.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# showY1564 review
Step 6
exit
Example:
The following example shows the configurations to display a particular Profiles using the profile name or
description:
Switch(config-controller-ciscoy1564)#showY1564 commit
ShowY1564_Output.showY1564Resp.t = 1
ShowY1564_Output.showY1564Resp.u.profile[0].profileName
ShowY1564_Output.showY1564Resp.u.profile[0].description
ShowY1564_Output.showY1564Resp.u.profile[1].profileName
ShowY1564_Output.showY1564Resp.u.profile[1].description
ShowY1564 Commit Success
=
=
=
=
'NewProfile1'
''
'cisco123456'
'oamunaware'
and Later Releases
614
Configuring Y.1564
Managing Y.1564 Profile Names

DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Purpose
Enters global
configuration mode.
Example:
Step 2 controller nid1/NID_ID
Enters the
controller
configuration mode.
Example:
Step 3 ciscoY1564
Enters ciscoY1564
configuration mode.
Example:
Step 4 y1564ProfileManagement|old-y1564ProfileManagmentReq{delete|rename{new-name|old-name}}
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# y1564ProfileManagement y1564ProfileManagmentReq
rename old-name cisco123456
rename new-name cisco
delete cisco
Step 5 review
renameSet
rename to
rename a old
profile name.
deleteSet
delete to
delete an
existing
profile.
Reviews the
ciscoY1564 profile
names.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# y1564ProfileManagement review
Step 6 commit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# y1564ProfileManagement commit
Step 7 exit
Sends the changed

or deleted
ciscoY1564 profile
names to the NID .
Exits the config
controller mode.
Example:
Later Releases
615
Configuring Y.1564
Configuring Y.1564 Test Parameters

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ciscoY1564
Example:
Step 4
setY1564TestParamsy1564TestsReq { dei|description |dscp|ece

| evc | interface | pcp | peer-mac | profile-name | report-name
| vlan vlan-id }
Example:
dei Enter the DEI number of the profile. The

valid range is 0-1.
description Enter the description about the
test.
setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq profile-name
cisco123456
setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq report-name
controllerreport123456
setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq description dstmodeno
dscp Enter the DSCP number of the profile.

The valid range is 0-63.
setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq evc 1
setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq ece 1
setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq interface 3
setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq peer-mac
00-00-00-00-00-01
setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq pcp 2
setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq vlan untagged
setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq dei 0
setY1564TestParams review
setY1564TestParams commit
evc Enter the EVC ID number of the profile.

The valid range is 1-1024.
ece Enter the ECE ID number of the profile,

on which the test needs to be executed. The valid
range is 1-1024.
interface Enter the UNI port. The valid range

is 1-125.
pcp Enter the PCP number of the profile. The
valid range is 0-7.
peer-mac Enter peer MAC address.
profile-name Enter the name of the existing
profile, that needs to be tested.
report-name Enter a unique name for the test
report.
vlan Enter the Vlan ID.
and Later Releases
616
Configuring Y.1564
Step 5
Command or Action
Purpose
review
Reviews the ciscoY1564 profile test parameters.
Example:
setY1564TestParams review
Step 6
Sends the test parameter reports to the NID.
commit
Example:
setY1564TestParams commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
when profile is configured as DST, then OAM-aware port and peer-mac address need to be specified in
setY1564TestParams.
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq profile-name
cisco123456
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq report-name
controllerreport123456
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq description dstmodeno
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq peer-mac
00-02:01:00:01:03
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq evc 1
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq ece 1
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# setY1564TestParams y1564TestsReq interface 3
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# setY1564TestParams review
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# setY1564TestParams commit
Viewing Y.1564 Test Parameters

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Later Releases
617
Configuring Y.1564
Step 3
Command or Action
Purpose
ciscoY1564
Example:
Step 4
getY1564TestParamsgetY1564TestsReq
Retrieves the parameters set for latest tet.
Example:
getY1564TestParams getY1564TestsReq
Step 5
review
Reviews the ciscoY1564 profile configuration

parameters.
Example:
getY1564TestParams review
Step 6
commit
Sends the test parameter reports to the NID.
Example:
getY1564TestParams commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Saving Y.1564 Test Report

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
ciscoY1564
Enters the ciscoY1564 configuration mode.
Example:
and Later Releases
618
Configuring Y.1564
Command or Action
Step 4
Purpose
y1564ReportManagement y1564ReportManagementReqsave|stop
SaveSet save to save a profile test

report.
Example:
StopSet stop to stop an ongoing

profile test .
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# y1564ReportManagemen
y1564ReportManagementReq save reportName controllerreport
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)# y1564ReportManagemen
y1564ReportManagementReq save tftpPath
tftp://202.153.144.25/auto/tftp-blr-users1/sharsh
Step 5
Reviews the ciscoY1564 profile test report.
review
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)#y1564ReportManagement
review
Step 6
Sends the ciscoY1564 profile test report to

the NID.
commit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-ciscoY1564)#y1564ReportManagement
commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
Deleting Y.1564 Test Report

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
Enters the ciscoY1564 configuration mode.
ciscoY1564
Example:
Step 4
y1564ReportManagement
y1564ReportManagementReq{delete|stop}
deleteSet delete to delete an existing profile

test report.
Later Releases
619
Configuring Y.1564
Command or Action
Example:
Purpose
StopSet stop to stop an ongoing profile test
.
y1564ReportManagemen y1564ReportManagementReq delete
controlerreport
Step 5
review
Reviews the ciscoY1564 profile test report.
Example:
y1564ReportManagement review
Step 6
commit
Sends the ciscoY1564 profile test report to the NID.
Example:
y1564ReportManagement commit
Step 7
exit
Example:
and Later Releases
620
CHAPTER
32
Configuring LST
This chapter describes how to configure Link State Tracking on theCisco ME 1200 NID
Prerequisites for Configuring LST , page 621
Understanding How Link State Tracking Works, page 621
Prerequisites for Configuring LST

Configure UP MEP using ProvisionMepPortType template. To know more, refer creating MEP
configuration.
Configure ccmTLV in UP MEP in LSTPortType template.
Note
While configuring UP MEP, the ports should be of same VLAN.
Understanding How Link State Tracking Works

Link-state tracking, also known as trunk failover, is a feature that binds the link state of multiple interfaces.
When LST is enabled in an instance, Local SF or received 'isDown' in CCM Interface Status TLV, will bring
down the residence port. Only valid in Up-MEP. The CCM rate must be 1 f/s or faster.
Later Releases
621
Configuring LST
Configuring mepTLV
Configuring mepTLV
DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
LSTPortType
Enters LST Port Type configuration mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller)# LSTPortType
Step 4
mepTLVConfiguration
Enters mepTLVConfiguration mode.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-LSTPortType)# mepTLVConfiguration
Step 5
ccmTLVConfigccmEnabled{enable|disable}
Enables or Disables ccmTLVConfig.
Example:
Switch# mepTLVConfiguration ccmTLVConfig ccmEnabled enable
Step 6
mepTLVConfigurationccmTLVConfigmepInstancemepInstance_id Creates Link State Tracking Configuration

at MEP instance number. The valid number
is 1 to 100.
Example:
ccmTLVConfig mepInstance 1-100
Step 7
mepTLVConfiguration review
Reviews the mepTLVConfiguration mode.
Example:
review
Step 8
mepTLVConfiguration commit
Sends the mepTLVConfiguration to the

controller.
Example:
commit
and Later Releases
622
Configuring LST
Checking ccmTLV Configuration
Step 9
Command or Action
Purpose
exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-LSTPortType)# exit
Checking ccmTLV Configuration

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal

mode.
Example:
Step 2

configuration mode.
Example:
Step 3
Enters LST Port Type

configuration mode.
LSTPortType
Example:
Step 4
LinkStateTrackingConfigurationlinkStateTrackingConfigmepInstancemepInstance_id Creates Link State Tracking

Configuration at MEP
instance number. The valid
Example:
number is 1 to 100.
Switch(config-controller-LSTPortType)# LinkStateTrackingConfiguration
linkStateTrackConfig mepInstance 1-100
Step 5
getmepTLVConfiguration review
Example:
Reviews the
mepTLVConfiguration
mode.
Switch(config-controller-LSTPortType)# getmepTLVConfiguration review
Step 6
getmepTLVConfiguration commit
Example:
Sends the
mepTLVConfiguration to the
controller.
Switch(config-controller-LSTPortType)# getmepTLVConfiguration commit
Later Releases
623
Configuring LST
Configuring LST
Configuring LST
DETAILED STEPS
Command or Action
Purpose
mode.
Example:
Step 2 controller nid 1/NID_ID

configuration mode.
Example:
Step 3 LSTPortType
Enters LST Port Type

configuration mode.
Example:
Step 4 LinkStateTrackingConfiguration
Example:
Enters
LinkStateTrackingConfiguration
mode.
Step 5 LinkStateTrackingConfigurationlinkStateTrackingConfigmepInstancemepInstance_id Creates Link State Tracking

Configuration at MEP instance
number. The valid number is 1
Example:
to 100.
linkStateTrackConfig mepInstance 1-100
Step 6 LinkStateTrackingConfigurationlinkStateTrackingConfiglstEnabled{disable|enable} Sets up LSTPortType

configuration.
Example:
linkStateTrackConfig lstEnabled enable/disable
enable- Enables the LST

configuration on the ports.
disable- Disables the LST
configuration on the ports.
Step 7 LinkStateTrackingConfiguration review

Example:
Reviews the
mode.
Switch(config-controller-LSTPortType)# LinkStateTrackingConfiguration review
Step 8 LinkStateTrackingConfiguration commit

Example:
Switch(config-controller-LSTPortType)# LinkStateTrackingConfiguration commit
and Later Releases
624
Sends the
to thecontroller.
Configuring LST
Checking LST Configuration
Command or Action
Purpose
Step 9 exit
Example:
Switch(config-controller-LSTPortType)# exit
Checking LST Configuration

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
LSTPortType
Example:
Step 4
getLSTConfiguration
Gets the link state tracking configuration

response.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-LSTPortType)# getLSTConfiguration
Step 5
getLSTConfigurationmepInstancemepInstance_id
Example:
Creates Link State Tracking Configuration at

MEP instance number. The valid number is 1
to 100.
Switch(config-controller-LSTPortType)#getLSTConfiguration
Switch(config-controller-LSTPortType)#getLSTConfiguration
mepInstance 1-100
Step 6
getLSTConfiguration review
Reviews the LSTConfiguration mode.
Example:
review
Later Releases
625
Configuring LST
Viewing LST Configuration
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
getLSTConfiguration commit
Sends the LSTConfiguration mode to the

controller.
Example:
commit

DETAILED STEPS
Step 1
Command or Action
Purpose
configure terminal
Example:
Step 2
Example:
Step 3
LSTPortType
Example:
Step 4
displayLSTConfiguration
Displays the link state tracking configuration

response.
Example:
Switch(config-controller-LSTPortType)#
Step 5
displayLSTConfigurationmepInstancemepInstance_id
Example:
Displays Link State Tracking Configuration at

MEP instance number. The valid number is 1 to
100.
displayLSTConfiguration mepInstance 1-100
Step 6
displayLSTConfiguration review
Display the LSTConfiguration mode.
Example:
displayLSTConfiguration review
and Later Releases
626
Configuring LST
Step 7
Command or Action
Purpose
displayLSTConfiguration commit
Display the LSTConfiguration mode in the

controller.
Example:
displayLSTConfiguration commit
Later Releases
627
Configuring LST
and Later Releases
628

Configuring RFC 2544 - CISCO

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Configuring RFC 2544 - CISCO

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Configuring RFC 2544 - CISCO

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cisco ME 1200 Series Carrier Ethernet Access Devices Controller

Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS 15.6(1)SN and Later Releases

Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Administering the Cisco ME 1200 NID 27

Zero Touch Provisioning 65

Configuring Synchronous Ethernet 75

Configuring the Clock Source 84

Viewing SyncE Timers 96

Configuring Ethernet Virtual Connections 101

EVC Control Entry (ECE) Configuration 104

Configuring Switch Ports 119

Verifying VLAN Translation Group 129

Configuring Spanning-Tree Protocol 139

Configuring Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) 165

Clearing LACP Statistics on the Controller 174

Provisioning Link Layer Discovery Protocol 191

Configuring SNMP 201

Configuring PTP 217

Information About PTP 217

Configuring ACLs 229

Configuring Quality of Service (QoS) 241

Configuring System QoS on the Controller 273

Configuring Ethernet OAM, Link OAM, and CFM 299

Understanding Connectivity Fault Management 315

Configuring Performance Monitoring 335

Clearing MEP Statistics on the Controller 370

Configuring EPS 375

Configuring ERPS 411

Configuring ERPS on NID-2 430

Configuring L2CP 439

Configuring MAC Security 453

Configuring NTP 471

Configuring Storm Control 479

How to Configure Storm Control 480

Configuring Syslog 489

Configuring Dedicated Debug Shell 495

Configuring SPAN 499

Configuring SPAN Source VLAN 505

Configuring SPAN Destination 506

Deleting SPAN Destination Configuration 508

Configuring RSPAN 513

Configuring RFC 2544 525

Setting RFC 2544 Reporting Parameters on NID-1 546

Configuring sFlow 567

Configuring UDLD 583

Getting Current Port Specific UDLD Values 592

Configuring Flex Links 599

Configuring Y.1564 609

Configuring LST 621

Checking LST Configuration 625

Commands and keywords and user-entered text appear in bold font.

Terminal sessions and information the system displays appear in courier

Bold Courier font

Elements in square brackets are optional.

An ellipsis (three consecutive nonbolded periods without spaces) after

A vertical line, called a pipe, indicates a choice within a set of keywords

Optional alternative keywords are grouped in brackets and separated by

Required alternative keywords are grouped in braces and separated by

Nested set of square brackets or braces indicate optional or required